RSS

Blog

Concealed Vertical Rod Exit Devices: How CVR Works and What Fails

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A concealed vertical rod exit device latches at the head and the sill of the opening, with the rods running inside the door rather than across its face.
  • The appeal is a clean door and protected rods. The cost is service access, because reaching the rods usually means taking the device apart rather than unscrewing a cover.
  • Nearly every CVR complaint is a latching complaint, and nearly every latching complaint comes back to rod adjustment or to a strike that has moved.
  • Less bottom rod, written LBR, removes the bottom rod and latch so the device only latches at the head. It is common on fire doors where floor dirt is a problem.
  • CVR preparation is normally done when the door is made. Converting an existing door to concealed rods is rarely practical, which is why surface rod conversion kits exist.
Where a CVR device sits among the four exit device configurations
ConfigurationWhere it latchesVisible on the door
RimOne latch into a strike on the frame or mullionDevice only
Surface vertical rodHead and sillDevice plus rods on the door face
Concealed vertical rodHead and sillDevice only, rods are inside the door
MortiseOne latch in a case in the door edgeDevice only

Concealed vertical rod devices look like the obvious choice right up until the first service call. They give you a clean pair of doors with nothing running up the face, and then eighteen months later the top latch stops engaging and nobody can work out how to get at the rod.

This guide explains what the device is actually doing, where it is the right answer, where it is not, and how to work through the latching problems that make up most of the service work on these openings.

Von Duprin 050575 bottom rod kit for a concealed vertical rod exit device
Rod length is set at installation and drifts as the door settles. Bottom rod kits are stocked separately, so an adjustment that has run out of thread is a parts order rather than a device replacement.

What Is a Concealed Vertical Rod Exit Device?

A concealed vertical rod exit device, usually shortened to CVR, is an exit device that latches the door at two points: a latch at the top that engages a strike in the frame head, and a latch at the bottom that engages a strike in the threshold or floor.

The two latches are driven by rods that run from the device up and down inside the door. Pushing the touchpad pulls both rods at once, retracting both latches, and the door is free.

Von Duprin 3347A/3547A-EO concealed vertical rod exit device, exit only
From the inside, a concealed vertical rod device looks like any other exit device. The difference is entirely inside the leaf, where the rods run to the top and bottom latches.

The word that does the work is concealed. On a surface vertical rod device, the same mechanism exists but the rods are visible on the face of the door, held in place by brackets. On a CVR device the rods live inside the door and nothing shows.

How Does a CVR Device Latch the Door?

Three parts have to agree for the door to latch: the latch itself, the rod that drives it, and the strike it engages. If any one of those three is out of position the door will not stay shut, and all three are adjustable.

The top latch engages a strike mounted in the frame head. The bottom latch engages a strike set into the threshold, or in some configurations drops into a floor socket.

Detex 95T top strike for concealed vertical rod exit devices
The top strike is as much a part of the latching system as the latch is. A strike that has shifted, or a frame that has settled, produces exactly the same symptom as a rod out of adjustment.

Why two latching points changes the behaviour

A rim device has one latch. If it engages, the door is shut. A CVR device has two, and the door can appear shut while only one of them is doing anything.

That is the source of most CVR confusion. Somebody pulls the door and it holds, so the device is assumed to be working, when in fact only the top latch is engaging and the bottom latch has been missing its strike for months.

CVR vs SVR vs Rim vs Mortise: Which Device Type Is on Your Door?

Identification takes about ten seconds once you know what to look at, and it has to be settled before any part is ordered because the latching components differ completely between configurations.

Identifying the configuration at the door
What you seeConfigurationWhere the parts live
No rods, a strike on the frame or on a mullionRimSingle latch in the device chassis
Rods visible on the door face, top and bottomSurface vertical rodExposed rods, latches top and bottom
No visible rods, latches at head and sillConcealed vertical rodRods inside the leaf
No rods, latch emerges from the door edgeMortiseMortise case in the door edge

Pairs of doors are the usual home for vertical rod devices, because without a mullion between the leaves there is nothing in the middle for a rim latch to engage. Our mullion guide covers the alternative approach to the same problem.

If you have established that the device is rim rather than vertical rod, our rim exit device guide is the better starting point.

Why Would You Specify Concealed Vertical Rod?

Three reasons come up repeatedly, and they are all good ones.

Appearance is the first. On a glazed entrance or a prestigious opening, rods running up and down the face of the leaf are the visual element nobody wants. Concealing them leaves a clean door.

Protection is the second. Exposed rods get knocked by trolleys, caught by luggage and bent by people pushing on them. Rods inside the door cannot be reached, so they cannot be damaged by ordinary traffic.

Security is the third. There is nothing on the surface to interfere with, which matters on doors that are accessible to the public outside staffed hours.

What Are the Drawbacks of CVR?

The drawbacks are all versions of the same thing: the parts you most need to reach are the ones you cannot see.

What concealment costs you
DrawbackWhat it means in practice
Service accessReaching a rod usually means removing the device and working inside the leaf
DiagnosisYou cannot watch the rods move, so faults are inferred rather than observed
Bottom latch environmentThe sill collects dirt, grit and water, and the bottom latch sits in it
Door preparationThe leaf has to be prepared for concealed rods, normally when it is made
RetrofitConverting an existing unprepared door to CVR is rarely practical

That last point is the one that catches specifiers. Surface rod conversion kits exist precisely because moving in the other direction, towards exposed rods, is something you can do on site.

What Does LBR Mean and When Is It Used?

LBR stands for less bottom rod. The device is supplied without the bottom rod and bottom latch, so it latches only at the head.

The reason is the environment at the sill. A bottom latch sits where mop water, grit and floor dirt accumulate, and on a busy opening it is the component that stops working first. Removing it removes the problem.

LBR is common on fire rated openings, where the device still has to latch positively, but the designers would rather put all of that responsibility on the top latch than risk a bottom latch that is fouled with dirt. Where a bottom rod is removed, the configuration has to be the one the manufacturer intends, not simply the original device with parts left off.

Identifying an LBR device

Look at the bottom of the door. If there is no latch emerging from the bottom edge and no strike in the threshold, the device is either LBR or the bottom components have been removed by someone. Those are very different situations, and the door schedule is the way to tell them apart.

What Fails on a Concealed Vertical Rod Device?

The failures are consistent across manufacturers because the mechanism is the same shape everywhere.

Symptoms and where to look first
SymptomMost likely causeCheck before ordering parts
Door will not stay shutRod out of adjustment, or a strike that has movedWatch both latches with the door slowly closing
Top latches, bottom does notBottom rod length, or debris in the sill strikeClear the strike, then check rod adjustment
Device feels stiff on the touchpadBinding rod, or a latch not returning fullyOperate with the door open and listen at both ends
Door latches only when slammedCloser is not delivering enough force at the latchLatch speed on the closer before touching the device
Rattling when closedLatch engaging, but with excess clearance at the strikeStrike position rather than the device
Rod disconnected inside the leafFixing worked loose over timeRequires opening up, but it is a fixing not a device failure
Von Duprin 109361 top vertical rod for a vertical rod exit device
Rods are ordered individually, top and bottom, and they are not interchangeable. Confirm which end you are replacing and the device series before ordering, because length is specific to both.

How Do You Adjust Vertical Rods?

Adjustment is about travel, not about tension. The rod has to retract the latch far enough to clear the strike when the touchpad is pressed, and it has to let the latch return fully when the touchpad is released.

Work with the door open first so you can see what the latches are doing without the frame in the way. Press the touchpad, confirm that both latches retract fully, then release and confirm both return fully. A latch that returns sluggishly will not engage a strike reliably.

Then close the door slowly and watch where each latch meets its strike. If a latch is arriving high, low or off to one side, the strike is the thing to move, not the rod.

Why the door closer gets blamed and sometimes deserves it

A CVR device needs a positive push at the very end of the swing to drive both latches home. If the closer has lost its latch speed, the door drifts into the frame and the latches do not engage.

That presents as a device fault and is not one. Before stripping the device, check the closer. Our guide to adjusting a commercial door closer covers the latch valve, which is the adjustment that matters here.

What Changes on a Fire Rated CVR Device?

Fire rated configurations behave differently in two ways that matter every day.

Dogging is not available. A fire exit device may not be held in the retracted position, because the door has to latch every time it closes. If a device on a fire door has a dogging keyhole, something is wrong with how the opening was specified.

Latching has to be positive. The door has to actively latch, not merely come to rest against the frame, which is why rod adjustment on a fire rated CVR device is a life safety matter rather than a convenience one.

Our commercial door fire rating guide and the NFPA 80 inspection guide cover what an inspection is looking for on these openings.

Which Parts Do You Order and What Do You Need to Know First?

Four pieces of information settle a CVR parts order, and three of them have to be read off the door rather than guessed.

What to establish before ordering CVR parts
InformationWhere you get itWhat it decides
Device seriesStamping on the chassis or under the coverEverything, parts do not cross series
Fire rated or notLabel on the door edgeDogging parts, latch configuration
Full rods or LBRPresence of a bottom latch and sill strikeWhich rods and latches exist
Door heightMeasure itRod length

For the model level breakdowns, our 9947 CVR parts guide and 9847 CVR parts guide list the components by assembly, and the exit device parts section covers the wider range.

If you are still deciding between device types rather than repairing one, our exit device and panic bar comparison and the Von Duprin series comparison cover the choice, and panic hardware on commercial doors covers where the code requires a device at all.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

If the device stamping is hidden under the cover and you would rather not pull the door apart to find it, contact us with a photograph of the device and the door, and we will narrow it down before you order.

Parallel Arm Door Closers: Mounting, Arm Types and What to Order

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A parallel arm door closer mounts on the push side of the door with the arm folded back against the face of the leaf, instead of projecting out into the opening.
  • It is a mounting position, not a different closer. The same closer body is usually capable of regular arm, top jamb and parallel arm mounting with different arms and brackets.
  • Parallel arm geometry is the least efficient of the three, so the same door normally needs a higher spring setting on parallel arm than it would on regular arm.
  • The shoe is the part that defines a parallel arm installation, and it is also where the stop functions live on cush and stop arm variants.
  • Most parallel arm complaints are the arm, the shoe or the mounting plate, not the closer body. Those are all separately stocked parts.
The three surface closer mounting positions at a glance
MountingCloser body sits onSide of the doorArm position when closed
Regular armThe doorPull sideProjects out from the door
Top jambThe framePush sideProjects out from the frame
Parallel armThe doorPush sideFolded back flat against the door

Parallel arm is the mounting most people have seen the most and named the least. It is the flat looking arm tucked up against the door face in corridors, schools and hospitals, chosen because nothing sticks out into the space where people walk.

This guide covers how parallel arm mounting differs from the alternatives, why it changes the spring size you need, what the shoe is doing, and which parts to order when something on the arm side fails.

What Is a Parallel Arm Door Closer?

A parallel arm door closer is a surface closer mounted on the push side of the door, with the closer body fixed to the door leaf and the arm running back parallel to the face of the door to a shoe mounted on the underside of the frame head.

The name describes the arm, not the closer. When the door is closed, the arm lies flat along the door rather than standing out at an angle, which is the whole point of the arrangement.

LCN 4050A-3077EDA extra duty parallel arm for a surface door closer
A parallel arm folds back against the door face when the door is closed. That low profile is the reason it is specified on corridor doors, and the reason it survives traffic that would damage a projecting arm.

Almost every common surface closer can be mounted in all three positions. What changes is the arm, the shoe and sometimes a bracket or plate, so converting a door from one mounting to another rarely means a new closer.

Parallel Arm, Regular Arm or Top Jamb: How Do the Three Mountings Differ?

The differences come down to which side of the door the closer lives on and where the load is transferred.

Regular arm puts the closer on the pull side of the door, with the arm reaching up to the soffit of the frame. It is the most mechanically efficient arrangement, and it is the one where the arm is most exposed, because it projects out from the door.

Top jamb puts the closer on the frame rather than the door, on the push side. It is used where the door leaf cannot take the closer body, for example on a narrow stile aluminium door, or where the door is a pair of glazed leaves.

Parallel arm puts the closer on the door on the push side, with the arm folded back. It gives the cleanest result in a corridor and it protects the arm, at the cost of efficiency.

LCN 1260-3077 regular arm for comparison with a parallel arm door closer
A regular arm for comparison. The difference between this and a parallel arm is not the closer it bolts to, it is the geometry of how the arm reaches the frame and how much leverage that geometry gives.

Why Does Parallel Arm Mounting Need More Spring Power?

This is the part that surprises people. A door that works perfectly on regular arm mounting can feel weak and fail to latch when the same closer is moved to parallel arm.

The reason is leverage. In parallel arm mounting the arm works at a less favourable angle through most of the swing, so less of the closer spring energy reaches the door as closing force. The closer has not changed. The geometry has.

In practical terms that means you plan for a higher spring setting on a parallel arm installation than you would on the same door with regular arm mounting, and you check that the door still latches under the conditions it actually sees.

What the mounting choice affects
FactorEffect of parallel arm mounting
Closing efficiencyLowest of the three mountings
Spring setting neededTypically higher than regular arm for the same door
Opening force felt by the userRises with the spring setting, which can conflict with accessibility limits
Arm exposure to damageLowest of the three mountings
Appearance in a corridorCleanest of the three mountings

That third row is the tension to be aware of. Accessible openings cap the force needed to open an interior hinged door, and parallel arm mounting pushes the spring setting the other way. Where both requirements bite, the answer is usually a correctly sized closer rather than a compromise, and sometimes a power operator. Our closer sizing guide covers how the sizes map to door width and weight.

When Should You Choose Parallel Arm?

Four situations point strongly at parallel arm mounting.

The door opens into a circulation route. A projecting arm in a corridor is both a snag hazard and something people walk into, so folding it flat against the door removes the problem.

The opening sees abuse. Schools, hospitals, back of house areas and anywhere trolleys pass through all shorten the life of an exposed arm. A parallel arm sits out of the way.

The appearance matters. On a visible entrance the flat profile reads as tidier than an arm standing out at an angle.

A stop is needed and there is no room for a separate overhead stop. Parallel arm shoes are available with stop functions built in, which solves two problems with one part.

What Is the Shoe and Why Does It Matter?

The shoe is the bracket that fixes to the underside of the frame head and receives the forearm of the closer arm. On a parallel arm installation it is the part that makes the mounting what it is.

LCN 1250-62PA parallel arm shoe for a surface door closer
The shoe is series specific. A parallel arm shoe for one closer series will not serve another, which is why the series has to be confirmed before an arm or shoe is ordered.

Two things follow from that. First, the shoe is a separate part, so a damaged shoe does not mean a new closer or even a new arm. Second, shoes are not universal, so the closer series has to be identified before ordering.

The shoe is also what carries the stop function on the variants that have one. The arm pushes against a built in stop inside the shoe at the end of the opening swing, so the shoe is doing structural work as well as locating the arm.

What Are Cush-N-Stop and Stop Arms?

These are parallel arm variants with a stop built into the shoe, so the door is prevented from opening past a set angle without a separate overhead stop or a floor stop.

A plain stop arm provides a hard stop. A cush arm cushions the end of the swing rather than stopping it abruptly. A spring cush arm adds a spring to absorb the energy of a door that is thrown open, which is the version specified where abuse is expected.

LCN 4050A-3077SCNS spring cush-n-stop parallel arm with 110 degree swing
A spring cush arm absorbs the shock of a door thrown hard against its stop. Arms with a built in stop are specified by the degree of swing they allow, so the angle has to match what the opening needs.
Choosing between the stop arm variants
VariantWhat it doesWhere it suits
Plain parallel armNo stop, needs a separate overhead or floor stop if one is requiredOpenings with an existing stop, or where the wall stops the door
Stop armHard stop built into the shoeWhere the swing must be limited and traffic is moderate
Cush armCushioned stopWhere a hard stop would jar the door and frame
Spring cush armCushioned stop with a spring to absorb abuseSchools, hospitals, high traffic and abusive openings

One caution. A stop built into the arm transfers the force of a door being thrown open into the closer and into its fixings. On a genuinely abusive opening a separate overhead stop alongside a plain arm is often the longer lasting arrangement.

What Is an Extra Duty Arm and When Do You Need One?

An extra duty arm is a heavier parallel arm built for openings where a standard arm will not survive. It is the answer to doors that get kicked, propped, pulled and generally mistreated.

The clue that you need one is the failure history. If the same opening has had arms replaced more than once, the fix is not another standard arm, it is a heavier one, and probably a look at whether the door has a stop at all.

Extra duty arms and stop arm variants are often specified together on the worst openings, because an abused door usually has both an arm problem and a swing control problem.

Do You Need a Mounting Plate or Bracket?

Often, yes, and it is the part most frequently left off an order.

A parallel arm installation sometimes needs a mounting plate to give the closer body something to fix to, particularly where the door construction will not take the fixings directly, or where an existing fixing pattern does not match the new closer.

Drop plates and brackets solve the related problem of frames with a narrow soffit, or doors with glazing stops in the way. These are stocked separately and are series specific like the shoe.

The practical rule when replacing a closer on an existing door is to confirm what is currently fixed to the door and frame before ordering, because the old plate may not suit the new closer and discovering that on site costs a return visit.

What Goes Wrong With Parallel Arm Installations?

Common symptoms and where the fault usually sits
SymptomLikely causeWhat to check
Door does not latchSpring setting too low for parallel arm geometrySpring power, then latch speed, then the strike
Arm bent or distortedDoor forced past its intended swingWhether the opening has any stop at all
Shoe pulling away from the frameFixings into a weak substrate, or a stop arm taking abuseFrame condition behind the shoe
Closer body loose on the doorMissing or incorrect mounting plateWhat the closer is actually fixed to
Door opens too far and hits the wallPlain arm with no stop, and no overhead stop fittedWhether a stop arm variant is the right answer
Oil visible around the closerCloser body failing, unrelated to the armThe cylinder assembly rather than the arm parts

The useful habit is to separate arm side problems from closer body problems before ordering anything. An arm, a shoe and a plate are inexpensive parts to change. Our LCN door closer parts guide breaks the assemblies down, and the guide to the four main types of commercial door closer covers where surface closers sit overall.

What Do You Need to Confirm Before Ordering an Arm?

The five things that decide a parallel arm part number
InformationWhere you get itWhat it decides
Closer seriesStamping on the closer body or under the coverArm, shoe and plate are all series specific
Mounting positionWhich side of the door, and what the arm attaches toWhether you need a parallel, regular or top jamb arm
Stop function neededWhether a separate stop exists on the openingPlain, stop, cush or spring cush arm
Degree of swingWhat the opening physically allowsStop arms are specified by swing angle
FinishExisting hardware on the doorCarried in the part number

If the closer is being replaced rather than repaired, confirm the size as well. Our LCN closer selection guide covers choosing the unit, installing a commercial door closer covers fitting it, and the door closer parts section covers the components.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

To match an arm to the closer you already have, browse LCN parts or the door closer parts section, or contact us with the series stamping and we will confirm the arm, shoe and plate together.

Von Duprin 996L Lever Trim: Functions, Variants and Parts

Quick Summary

Key points

  • The Von Duprin 996L is the lever trim that goes on the outside of an exit device. The device handles egress, the trim handles entry from the outside.
  • The suffix after 996L is the part that matters. NL, BE, DT and KC are different behaviours, not different finishes, and they are not interchangeable once the door is in service.
  • 996L is the lever version. 996K is the same family with a knob, which is why accessibility reviews sometimes turn a 996K door into a 996L door.
  • M996 is the motorized version of the same trim, and there is a stocked conversion kit rather than a requirement to start again.
  • Handing, finish, the device series and whether a cylinder is included are the four things that decide the part number.
What the common 996 suffixes do
VariantBehaviourTypical use
996LLever operates the device latch when unlockedGeneral entry from the outside
996L-NLNight latch, the key retracts the latch, the lever is a pullService and delivery doors
996L-BEBlank escutcheon, no cylinder preparationOpenings with no outside key access
996L-DTDummy trim, no latch operation at allPull only, or the inactive leaf of a pair
996L-KCKey capture, the key is held while the trim is unlockedWhere a key must not be left behind in the open state
M996Motorized trim, electrically controlledAccess control on the outside of an exit device

The 996L is one of those parts that is easy to order wrongly. The lever looks the same across the range, the escutcheon looks the same, and the difference between two part numbers can be a single letter that changes how the door behaves for everyone who uses it.

This guide sets out what each variant does, which device the trim has to match, and the four pieces of information that settle the order, so you can replace trim without changing the way the opening works.

What Is the Von Duprin 996L and What Does It Do?

The 996L is outside trim for an exit device. An exit device on its own handles one direction only: push the bar from the inside and the door opens. Trim is what gives you a controlled way back in from the outside.

It consists of an escutcheon plate, a lever and, in most functions, a cylinder that decides whether the lever is live. The trim does not latch the door itself. It reaches through to the device and operates the device latch.

Von Duprin 996L lever trim for exit devices
The 996L lever trim fits to the outside face of the door and reaches through to the exit device. The lever, the escutcheon and the cylinder are separate considerations in the same part number.

That relationship is the thing to hold on to. If the lever turns freely and the door does not open, the problem is as likely to be in the device as in the trim, and swapping the trim will not fix it.

Which Exit Devices Does the 996L Trim Fit?

Trim is matched to the device family, not just to the door. The 996 range is the trim family used with Von Duprin exit devices, and the specific device series decides which variant of the trim is correct.

Before ordering, identify the device underneath. The series stamping, the chassis shape and the device configuration all feed into the trim choice, and a trim that physically mounts is not necessarily a trim that operates the latch correctly.

What to establish about the device before choosing trim
QuestionWhy it changes the trim
Which device series is fitted?Trim is matched to the series, not to the door
Rim, vertical rod or mortise?The configuration affects how the trim reaches the latch
Is the opening fire rated?Fire devices exclude dogging and need positive latching
Is there an existing cylinder?Decides whether you order trim with or without cylinder preparation

Our Von Duprin 98 and 99 Series parts guide and the Von Duprin series guide cover how to read the device before you look at trim at all.

What Do the 996L Suffixes Mean?

The base number tells you the family and the lever. Everything after it tells you the behaviour.

This is the single most common ordering mistake on trim. A 996L and a 996L-NL look almost identical on the door and behave completely differently for the person trying to get in, so a like for like replacement has to carry the suffix across.

Reading an existing trim

The suffix is not always stamped where you can see it. If the trim is already fitted and unmarked, work it out from behaviour instead: try the lever with the door unlocked, then with it locked, and see whether the key retracts the latch or merely changes what the lever does.

Why the suffix is a safety decision, not a preference

Changing the suffix changes who can get through the door. Replacing a night latch trim with a standard lever trim turns a key controlled service entrance into a door anyone can open by hand. Replacing a standard trim with dummy trim locks out people who are supposed to have access.

Because the hardware mounts identically, neither mistake announces itself during installation. It shows up later, as a security incident or as a complaint that a door no longer works. Confirm the function before the old trim comes off the door, not after.

Von Duprin 996 trim range covering lever and knob variants
The 996 range covers the lever and knob versions and all of the function variants. Comparing them side by side is the quickest way to confirm which one matches the behaviour you have on the door.

How Does the 996L-NL Night Latch Version Behave?

On a night latch trim the lever is not a latch operator. It is a pull. The key is what retracts the device latch, and it does so only while it is turned.

That makes it the standard choice on doors where nobody should be able to walk in by turning a handle, but authorised staff need key access. Service entrances, delivery doors and back of house openings are the usual homes for it.

Von Duprin 996L-NL lever night latch trim for exit devices
On the 996L-NL the lever is a fixed pull and the key does the work. Replacing it with a standard 996L would make the door openable by hand from the outside, which is why the suffix matters more than the finish.

The failure mode people report is a night latch that stops retracting the latch. That usually points to the cylinder, the tailpiece length or the device, in that order, rather than to the trim body. Our 880 night latch trim guide covers the same function on a different trim family.

When Would You Use 996L-BE or 996L-DT?

These two look similar on paper and do different jobs.

The 996L-BE is blank escutcheon trim. There is no cylinder preparation, so there is no outside key access at all. It is used where the opening is controlled some other way, or where an outside key would create a security problem rather than solve one.

The 996L-DT is dummy trim. The lever does not operate anything. It exists to give a hand hold and to make a pair of doors look consistent, which is why it so often ends up on the inactive leaf.

Blank escutcheon against dummy trim
 996L-BE996L-DT
CylinderNone, no preparationNone
Lever operates the latchYes, when the trim is in the unlocked stateNo
Typical positionActive leaf with no key accessInactive leaf, or pull only openings
Can it be converted laterNeeds trim with cylinder preparationNeeds a functioning trim, not a conversion

What Is Key Capture Trim and Who Needs It?

Key capture trim holds the key while the trim is in the unlocked state. The key cannot be withdrawn until the trim is returned to locked, which means the person who unlocked the door cannot walk away and leave it unlocked without noticing.

Schools, shared buildings and any site where several people hold the same key are the places this earns its keep. It converts a procedural rule into a physical one.

Von Duprin 996L-KC lever key capture trim
Key capture trim will not release the key until the trim is locked again. On sites where doors get left unlocked after hours, this is the part that changes the behaviour rather than the signage.

If you already have standard 996L trim and want this behaviour, there is a stocked conversion kit rather than a requirement to buy complete new trim. That keeps the escutcheon, lever and finish you already have on the door.

What Is the M996 Motorized Trim and Can You Convert to It?

M996 is the motorized version of the same trim family. Instead of a cylinder deciding whether the lever is live, an electrical signal does, which is what lets the outside of an exit device join an access control system.

It is used where a card reader, a keypad or a scheduled unlock has to control entry while egress stays mechanical. The device still opens from the inside with a push, whatever the trim is doing.

Conversion is a stocked route. There is a kit specifically for taking 996 R, V and C function trim to M996 motorized, so an existing mechanical opening can be brought onto access control without replacing the device.

For how that fits into the wider system, see our access control hardware integration guide and the QEL conversion kit parts guide, which covers the equivalent change on the device side.

996L Lever or 996K Knob: Which Is Fitted and Which Should Be?

The same trim family exists with a knob, designated 996K. Mechanically the two do the same job. For accessibility they do not.

Hardware on an accessible route has to be operable with one hand without tight grasping or twisting of the wrist, and a knob cannot be turned without doing both. That is why a 996K on a main entrance tends to become a 996L after an accessibility review.

If the trim is being changed for that reason, the finish and the device series stay the same, so only the trim part number changes. The device, the cylinder and the strike can all stay where they are.

What Do You Need to Confirm Before Ordering 996L Trim?

Four pieces of information. Collect them at the door and the order becomes straightforward.

The four decisions behind a 996L part number
DecisionHow to establish itWhat goes wrong if you guess
Function suffixBehaviour of the existing trim, or the door scheduleThe door becomes easier or harder to enter than intended
Device seriesStamping on the device, chassis shapeTrim mounts but does not operate the latch properly
HandingWhich side the hinges are on, viewed from outsideLever points the wrong way
FinishMatch to the existing hardware on the openingVisible mismatch across a pair of doors

Cylinders are the fifth consideration, and they are usually ordered separately. Confirm whether the trim you are buying includes cylinder preparation, whether you are reusing an existing cylinder, and whether the keyway matches the rest of the site. Our mortise cylinder and rim cylinder guide covers which cylinder type belongs with which device.

What Fails on 996L Trim?

Trim failures are mechanical and predictable. The lever is the part that absorbs daily use, so it is the part that wears.

Symptoms and where the fault usually sits
SymptomMost likely causeNext check
Lever turns but the door does not openThe connection through to the device, or the device itselfOperate the device from the inside and watch the latch
Lever droops or feels looseWear inside the trim, or loose fixingsTighten the through fixings before condemning the trim
Key turns but the latch does not retractCylinder, tailpiece length or camConfirm the cylinder and tailpiece before replacing trim
Trim rattles against the door faceFixings backed out, or a worn escutcheon seatingCheck the door face for wear where the plate sits
Trim locked out and the key will not come outExpected behaviour on key capture trimReturn the trim to locked and the key releases

Start every one of these at the device rather than at the trim. The Von Duprin parts guide and the exit device parts section cover the components the trim is reaching through to.

Trim that was never right in the first place

Not every trim problem is wear. A proportion of the trim we are asked about was ordered as a visual match rather than a functional one, usually during a refurbishment where somebody matched the finish and the lever shape and did not check the suffix.

The clue is that the door has behaved the same way since the work was done. Wear comes on gradually, a wrong part is wrong from day one. If staff say the door has never worked properly since it was changed, check the function before you check for wear.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

To see the trim variants side by side, start at the 996 trim range or browse Von Duprin parts. If you are not sure which function is on the door, contact us and describe how the lever and key behave.

Electric Hinge: How Power Crosses From the Frame Into the Door

Quick Summary

Key points

  • An electric hinge, also called an energy transfer hinge, carries concealed conductors through the knuckle so power can cross from the frame into a moving door leaf.
  • It is one of three ways to get power into a door. The others are an electric power transfer fitted into the door edge and frame, and a surface mounted armored loop.
  • The decision is driven by current draw and conductor count, not by looks. A motor driven latch retraction device asks far more of the route than a monitoring switch does.
  • Door and frame preparation has to match the chosen route before anything is ordered, because a hinge route and a power transfer route need different cutouts.
  • Almost every intermittent electrified door fault is a flex failure in the transfer route or a loose connection at one end of it, not a failed lock.
The three ways power crosses the gap
RouteWhere it sitsVisible on the finished door
Electric hingeIn place of one of the door hingesNo, the conductors run inside the knuckle
Electric power transferMortised into the door edge and the frameOnly when the door is open
Armored door loopSurface mounted across the hinge sideYes, a flexible armored cable is visible

Any time an electrified lock, a latch retraction device or a monitoring switch goes on a door, somebody has to answer an awkward question: how does the wire get from a frame that never moves into a leaf that swings a few hundred times a day without breaking?

The electric hinge is one answer, and often the neatest one. This guide covers how it works, when it is the right route, how to size it, and why most problems with electrified doors turn out to live in this part of the system rather than in the lock.

What Is an Electric Hinge and What Problem Does It Solve?

An electric hinge is a door hinge with conductors built into it. Externally it looks like a normal butt hinge. Internally, a set of small wires passes through the knuckle, so the two leaves of the hinge are electrically connected as well as mechanically connected.

The problem it solves is flex. A cable stretched between a frame and a door would be bent through the same arc at the same point thousands of times, and copper that is flexed repeatedly at a single point eventually breaks. Routing the conductors through the pivot axis means they twist rather than bend sharply.

Detex EWH8-626 five knuckle energy transfer hinge used as an electric hinge
A five knuckle energy transfer hinge replaces one of the existing hinges on the opening. The conductors emerge at the back of each leaf, so nothing is visible once the hinge is fitted into its mortise.

The second thing it solves is appearance and tamper resistance. There is nothing on the surface to cut, catch or paint around, which matters on public facing entrances and on doors where a visible loop would invite interference.

How Does an Electric Hinge Actually Carry Power?

The conductors leave the hinge through a small opening at the back of each leaf. One set goes into the frame, where it joins the wiring from the power supply and the access control panel. The other set goes into the door, where it runs through a raceway drilled inside the leaf to whatever device needs it.

Inside the knuckle the wires are arranged so that opening the door twists them gently along their own axis rather than folding them. That is the whole trick, and it is why a hinge route lasts where a casually routed cable does not.

The hinge is still a hinge

It is easy to treat an electric hinge as an electrical component that happens to be hinge shaped. It is not. It still carries the weight of the door, so it has to suit the door size, weight and frequency of use exactly as a plain hinge would.

If the opening has three hinges and one is swapped for an electric version, the other two have to be in good condition. A sagging door puts a shearing load through the knuckle, and that is precisely where the conductors are.

Electric Hinge, Power Transfer or Armored Loop: Which Route Should You Use?

All three move power from frame to door. They differ in how much current they will carry, how much preparation they need and how visible they are.

Choosing between the three transfer routes
ConsiderationElectric hingePower transferArmored loop
Concealed when closedYesYesNo
Concealed when openYesNoNo
Preparation requiredHinge mortise, door racewayDoor edge and frame cutoutSurface fixings only
Typical useNew or refurbished openings with good hinge accessHigher current loads, motorised devicesRetrofits where cutting is not practical
Retrofit difficultyModerate, the raceway is the workHigher, both leaf and frame are cutLowest
Von Duprin EPT-10 electric power transfer as an alternative to an electric hinge
An electric power transfer sits in the door edge and the frame rather than in a hinge. It is the usual choice where the load is a motorised latch retraction device, because the conductor capacity is greater.

In practice the deciding question is what is at the far end. Monitoring switches and small solenoids are comfortable on a hinge. Motor driven devices usually push you towards a power transfer. Our electric power transfer guide covers that side in detail.

Detex PT-5 power transfer unit for electrified door hardware
Power transfer units are specified by conductor count as well as by fit. Confirming how many wires the door end actually needs is what prevents a second visit.

How Many Conductors Do You Need?

Count the devices in the door leaf first, then count the wires each one needs, then add spares. Counting devices and stopping there is how installers end up one pair short on the day.

What each device typically asks of the transfer route
Device in the doorWhat it needsCurrent character
Request to exit switchA switched pair back to the panelSignal only, negligible current
Latch monitoring switchA switched pair back to the panelSignal only
Electrified lock or trimA supply pair, sometimes with a monitoring pairSteady holding current
Motorised latch retractionA supply pair sized for the motorHigh inrush when the motor starts
Electrified exit device trimA supply pair plus any status pairsDepends on whether it is solenoid or motor driven

Two rules keep people out of trouble. Always specify spare conductors, because adding a monitoring function later is cheap if the wires are there and expensive if they are not. And always check the inrush, not just the holding current, on anything with a motor in it.

What Hardware on the Door Actually Needs Power?

It helps to be precise about which side of the opening each device sits on, because only the devices in the moving leaf need the transfer route at all.

Electric strikes do not. A strike lives in the frame, so it is wired directly and needs no transfer. That single fact is why a strike is often chosen over an electrified lock when retrofitting an existing door.

Electromagnetic locks usually do not either, because the magnet mounts to the frame or header and only the armature plate goes on the door. Our electromagnetic lock parts guide covers the exceptions.

What does need the route is anything electrified inside the leaf: electrified lock bodies, electrified exit device trim, latch retraction devices, request to exit switches built into the device, and latch monitoring contacts. If you are weighing a door mounted option against a frame mounted one, our electrified mortise lock and electric strike comparison sets out the trade.

What Preparation Does the Door and Frame Need?

Three pieces of preparation have to line up, and all three have to be decided before anything is ordered.

The hinge mortise has to suit the hinge. Size, backset and screw pattern all follow the hinge model, and an electric hinge is not always dimensionally identical to the plain hinge it replaces.

The frame needs a route from the hinge pocket back to the point where the field wiring arrives. On a new frame this is designed in. On an existing frame it is often the hardest part of the job.

The door needs a raceway, a drilled path from the hinge pocket to the device location inside the leaf. On a hollow metal door this is factory work rather than site work, which is why electrified hardware is so much easier to specify at order time than to retrofit.

Weatherised and exposed openings

Exterior openings add a requirement the drawings often miss. Where the route is exposed, the cable itself needs protection against weather and against physical damage.

Detex FC3W weatherized armored cable for exposed electrified door wiring
Where the run is exposed, a weatherised armored cable protects the conductors from both the elements and interference. It is ordered by length, so measure the route before specifying.

Does an Electric Hinge Work on a Fire Rated Door?

Fire rated openings can carry electrified hardware, but everything on the opening has to be compatible with the rating, and the hinge is part of the opening.

The constraints that matter are the ones that always matter on a fire door. The door has to self close and positively latch every time, and nothing fitted to the opening may prevent that. Hardware has to suit the rating of the assembly.

Practically, that means the fire rating of the assembly has to be checked against every component, the hinge included, before parts are chosen. Our commercial door fire rating guide covers how the labelling works and what it restricts.

Why Do Electric Hinges Fail, and What Does Failure Look Like?

Failures are almost always mechanical in origin even though they present electrically. The conductors are the thinnest part of the system and they live inside the part that moves.

Failure modes and what you observe
CauseWhat the user reportsWhat to check
Conductor fatigue in the knuckleDevice works intermittently, often position dependentOperate the door slowly and watch for the point it drops out
Door sagging onto the electric hingeGradual onset, worsens over monthsHinge condition across all hinges, not just the electric one
Pinched conductor in the racewayFault from the first day after installationContinuity with the door open and closed
Loose connection at the frame endFault appears after other work in the frameTerminations rather than the hinge
Undersized conductors for the loadMotor device sluggish or does not pull inVoltage at the device while it operates, not at rest

That last row deserves attention. A route that reads perfectly on a continuity test can still fail under load, because a thin conductor drops voltage once current flows. Always measure at the device while it is working.

How Do You Troubleshoot a Dead Electrified Door?

Work from the power supply towards the device, and prove each stage before moving on.

Start at the supply and confirm the output under load, not at rest. Then confirm the signal is arriving at the frame side of the transfer route. Then check continuity across the transfer with the door closed, and again with the door open, because a fatigued conductor often reads fine in one position and open in the other.

Only when the transfer route is proven should the device itself be suspected. Our commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide covers the rest of the sequence, and the access control integration guide covers how the panel side should behave.

What Should You Confirm Before Ordering?

The order checklist for a power transfer route
ItemWhy it matters
Devices in the leaf and their current drawDecides hinge against power transfer
Conductor count, including sparesAdding wires later means redoing the route
Door and frame material and existing preparationDecides whether a retrofit is realistic
Hinge size and weight ratingThe hinge still carries the door
Fire rating of the assemblyRestricts what may be fitted
Exposure to weatherDecides whether the run needs armored protection

Get those six settled and the order is simple. Skip one and the usual outcome is a second visit, because transfer routes are not something you can change your mind about once the door has been cut.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

To compare transfer options side by side, browse Detex parts and Von Duprin parts, or contact us with the device list and conductor count and we will confirm the route before you order.

ADA Door Clearance: Widths, Maneuvering Space and Hardware Rules

Quick Summary

Key points

  • ADA door clearance is not one number. It is a set of linked requirements covering clear width, floor space either side of the door, opening force, closing speed and the height and shape of the hardware.
  • The headline figure is 32 inches of clear width, measured with the door open 90 degrees, from the face of the door to the opposite stop. The door leaf itself has to be wider than that.
  • Opening force on an interior hinged door is capped at 5 pounds. That single number is what sends most facilities back to the door closer.
  • Closing speed is a minimum, not a maximum. The door has to take at least 5 seconds to travel from 90 degrees down to 12 degrees.
  • Most non compliant openings are fixed with parts rather than with a new door: a correctly sized closer, a different arm, a lever instead of a knob, or a low energy operator.
The five measurements that decide whether an opening is accessible
RequirementWhat it governsWhere it bites
Clear widthThe usable gap when the door stands open 90 degreesNarrow leaves, projecting hardware, oversized stops
Maneuvering clearanceFloor space in front of and beside the doorCorridors, vestibules, doors tight to a side wall
Opening forceEffort needed to start the door movingOversized or over tensioned door closers
Closing speedTime the door takes to swing shutSweep valve set too fast, worn closer
Hardware height and shapeWhere the handle sits and how it is grippedKnobs, thumbturns, high mounted trim

Most people meet ADA door clearance as a line on an inspection report rather than as a design decision. Somebody measures an opening, writes down a number that is short by an inch, and the building owner is left guessing whether that means a new door frame or a different part.

In practice the answer is usually a part. This guide walks through each clearance requirement in turn, explains what is actually being measured, and shows which piece of door hardware controls it, so you can work out whether the opening needs a carpenter or a box from the shelf.

What Does ADA Door Clearance Actually Mean?

ADA door clearance is shorthand for a group of requirements in the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design that together make a doorway usable by someone with limited mobility, limited reach or limited grip strength.

The requirements fall into two families. The first is about space: how wide the opening is and how much floor there is to maneuver on either side. The second is about effort: how hard the door is to pull, how fast it comes back, and whether the handle can be worked with a closed fist.

The split matters because the two families have very different remedies. Space problems are building problems. Effort problems are hardware problems, and hardware problems are the ones you can usually solve without touching the structure.

Which doors have to comply?

Accessible routes are the trigger. Doors on an accessible route into and through a building have to meet these requirements, which in most commercial buildings means the main entrance, corridor doors, restroom doors and the doors to any space the public or employees are expected to reach.

Doors that are not on an accessible route, such as a door to a space entered only for maintenance, are treated differently. Local code and the building official have the final word, so confirm the scope before you start replacing parts.

How Much Clear Width Does an Accessible Door Need?

The standard calls for a minimum of 32 inches of clear width. The measurement is taken with the door open 90 degrees, from the face of the door to the opposite stop. It is not the width of the frame and it is not the width of the leaf.

That distinction catches people out. A 36 inch leaf does not give you a 36 inch opening, because the thickness of the door and the depth of the stop both eat into the gap. A 32 inch leaf will not pass at all.

Hardware can eat into it too. Door mounted projections between 34 and 80 inches above the floor are limited to 4 inches of projection into the opening, which is why surface mounted exit device chassis and bulky pull trim get looked at closely on narrow leaves.

Doors in series

Vestibules have their own rule. Where two doors are in series, there has to be at least 48 inches between them, measured clear of the swing of any door that opens into the space. A tight vestibule with two inward swinging doors is one of the most common failures on older buildings.

What Maneuvering Clearance Is Required on Each Side of the Door?

Clear width gets a person through the gap. Maneuvering clearance gives them the floor space to position a wheelchair, reach the handle and pull the door without being pushed backwards by it.

The required space changes with the direction of approach and with which side of the door you are on. The pull side always needs more room than the push side, because the user has to retreat as the door comes towards them.

Swinging door maneuvering clearance, front approach
Side of doorSpace beyond the latchDepth of clear floor space
Pull side18 inches minimum60 inches minimum
Push side, no closer and no latchNone required48 inches minimum
Push side, with both closer and latch12 inches minimum48 inches minimum

That bottom row is the one that surprises facilities teams. Adding a door closer to a door that already has a latch changes the maneuvering clearance requirement on the push side. A closer is not a neutral addition to an opening.

Hinge side and latch side approaches have their own figures, and they are more generous in depth because the user is coming at the door from an angle. If an opening fails on approach geometry and the walls cannot move, a power operator is usually the way out.

How Much Force Can It Take to Open the Door?

Interior hinged doors are limited to 5 pounds of opening force. Sliding and folding doors carry the same 5 pound limit. The figure applies to the effort needed to get the door moving and to keep it swinging, not to the effort needed to release a latch.

Exterior doors are the exception people misquote. The ADA Standards do not set a maximum opening force for exterior hinged doors, which is why wind load and stack pressure are handled through local code and through the choice of closer rather than through a single national number.

Fire doors are the other exception. A fire rated door has to latch positively every time, which takes spring power, so the standard allows the minimum opening force permitted by the authority having jurisdiction rather than a flat 5 pounds.

LCN 4040XP surface door closer used to control ADA door clearance opening force
Opening force is a closer problem before it is a door problem. A heavy duty surface closer such as the LCN 4040XP has adjustable spring power, so the same unit can be dialled down on an interior door and wound up on an exterior one.

Why the closer is almost always the cause

A door closer works by compressing a spring as the door opens. The stronger the spring setting, the harder the pull. Facilities teams raise the spring power to make a door latch reliably, then fail the opening force test without realising the two are connected.

The honest fix is rarely to weaken the spring until the door stops latching. It is to reduce the resistance the spring is fighting: free up a binding hinge, correct a dragging sweep, fix a strike that the latch is scraping into, and only then reset the spring.

How Slowly Does the Door Have to Close?

Closing speed is specified as a minimum time, which trips people up because every other door requirement is a maximum. The door has to take at least 5 seconds to travel from 90 degrees open down to 12 degrees from the latch.

Where spring hinges are used instead of a closer, the equivalent requirement is that the door takes at least 1.5 seconds to swing from 70 degrees to the closed position.

On a conventional closer this is the sweep valve, the adjustment that governs the main part of the swing. Latch speed, the short burst at the end, is a separate valve and is not what the 5 second measurement is testing.

Which closer adjustment affects which requirement
AdjustmentPart of the swing it controlsAccessibility requirement it affects
Spring powerResistance throughout the opening swingOpening force
Sweep valveFrom roughly 90 degrees to about 15 degreesClosing speed
Latch valveThe final few degrees into the strikePositive latching, not closing speed
BackcheckCushioning near the fully open positionProtects the door and frame, no direct requirement
Delayed actionHolds the door near open before the sweep beginsHelpful where a user needs more time to clear the opening

If you are working through these valves on a specific unit, our guide to adjusting a commercial door closer walks through the order to do them in, and the closer sizing guide covers choosing the right size in the first place.

What Height Does the Door Hardware Have to Be?

Operable hardware has to sit between 34 and 48 inches above the finished floor. That band covers levers, panic bar touchpads, thumbturns and anything else a user has to work to get through the door.

Most commercial hardware lands inside the band by default, because standard lock heights put a lever at around 38 to 40 inches. The parts that drift outside it are additions: a surface bolt near the top of the door, a secondary deadbolt fitted high, or a thumbturn mounted above the main lock.

On a pair of doors, check the inactive leaf as well. Flush bolts at the head of the inactive leaf are not operable parts in the accessibility sense, but any hardware a user is expected to work to pass through the opening is.

Which Types of Door Hardware Meet the Operable Parts Rule?

The rule is written in terms of what the user must not have to do. Hardware must be operable with one hand and must not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist. Operating force is capped at 5 pounds.

That wording is what rules out the round knob. A knob cannot be turned without grasping and twisting, and no amount of adjustment changes that. It also rules out small thumbturns that need a pinch grip, and tight recessed pulls.

Common hardware against the operable parts test
Hardware typeMeets the one hand, no twisting testNotes
Lever handleYesOperable with a closed fist or a forearm
Round knobNoRequires grasping and twisting
Panic bar touchpad or crossbarYesOperates with a push anywhere along the bar
Push or pull plateYesNo latch operation involved
Small thumbturnUsually noPinch grip, check the size and shape of the turn
Key operated lockNot countedLocks used only for security are treated separately
Schlage 40-400 outside spring cage lever conversion kit for ADA door clearance hardware
Hardware on an accessible route has to work without tight grasping or twisting of the wrist, which rules out a round knob. A spring cage and lever conversion kit changes the trim and leaves the lock body in the door.

Levers that have stopped behaving

A compliant lever that has worn is a quiet failure. Once the return spring weakens the lever droops, and a drooping lever is both a snag hazard and a sign the latch is no longer being fully retracted. Spring cages and lever kits are stocked as individual parts for exactly this reason.

When Does a Power Operator Become the Only Practical Answer?

Three situations push an opening towards a powered solution. The maneuvering clearance is not there and the walls cannot move. The door is a fire door that has to latch, so the spring power cannot come down. Or the door is an exterior door fighting wind and stack pressure.

Low energy operators are the type used on accessible entrances. They open the door slowly, under limited force, and only when a person deliberately activates them by pressing a plate or waving at a sensor. They are covered by ANSI/BHMA A156.19, which sets the opening and closing timings.

Detex 104796-1 AO19 motor gearbox assembly that drives a low energy operator on an accessible door
A low energy operator takes the opening force question off the table, because the motor drives the leaf rather than the user. The motor gearbox inside it is a serviceable part, so a failed drive does not mean a new operator.

The operator is only half the decision. The activation device is a separate choice, and it has its own reach and height requirements because a user has to be able to work it from a clear floor space that does not sit in the path of the opening door.

LCN 8310-866FLA full length actuator for an accessible automatic door bollard post
Where there is no wall in the right place, a bollard puts the actuator within reach and clear of the door swing. The actuator face and the post itself are ordered as separate items.

For the whole powered opening, including sensors and control boxes, see our commercial door operators guide and the door operator parts guide.

What About Thresholds and the Bottom of the Door?

Thresholds at doorways are limited to half an inch in height. Anything above a quarter inch has to be beveled, at a slope no steeper than one in two, so a wheel can ride up rather than stop against a square edge.

The push side of the door has its own rule. The bottom 10 inches has to present a smooth surface across the full width, so a footrest can push the door open without catching. Projecting kick plate edges and applied mouldings in that zone are what fail this one.

Both of these are easy to break during a repair. A new sweep that stands proud, or a kick plate fitted with raised fixings, can put a previously compliant door outside the rule without anyone noticing.

Which Parts Do You Actually Change to Bring an Opening Into Compliance?

Working from the most common finding to the least, the fix list is short and almost all of it is parts rather than construction.

Typical finding and the part that resolves it
Finding on the reportUsual causeWhat you change
Opening force too highCloser spring wound up to force latchingCorrect the binding first, then reset spring power, or fit a correctly sized closer
Door closes too fastSweep valve open too far, or a tired closerSweep adjustment, or a cylinder assembly if the closer is leaking
Knob instead of leverOriginal hardware predates the requirementLever trim or a lever lockset in the same function
Hardware mounted too highAdded deadbolt or surface boltRelocate, or consolidate the function into the main lock
Maneuvering clearance shortWall position, cannot be changedLow energy operator and an actuator the user can reach
Threshold too tall or square edgedFloor build up over timeBeveled threshold within the half inch limit

Before ordering anything, confirm what is already on the door. The closer body, the arm and the mounting plate are separate line items, and an arm change alone sometimes solves a force problem that looks like it needs a new closer. Our door closer parts section and the guide to the four types of commercial door closer cover how those pieces fit together.

Where the opening is also fire rated, check the two requirement sets together rather than one after the other. Our commercial door fire rating guide and the ANSI and BHMA standards guide explain where the grading and labelling requirements sit alongside accessibility.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

If you have a measurement that is failing and you know the hardware on the door, start with the parts by product type index, or contact us with the model number and we will confirm the part before you order.

Falcon Door Hardware: Series, Parts and How to Identify Yours

Quick Summary

Key points

  • Falcon door hardware covers four families you will meet on a commercial opening: exit devices, cylindrical locks, mortise locks and the cylinders and trim that go with them.
  • The exit devices split into the 19 Series, the narrow stile 24 Series and the wide stile 25 Series, and the series decides almost every part number downstream.
  • Falcon service parts carry their own prefixes. Q330 numbers belong to T Series cylindrical lock parts and levers, Q500 numbers cover deadbolt cylinders.
  • Falcon cylinders and keyways are handled with their own tailpieces and keyed in lever kits, which is what makes a Falcon lock orderable with a Schlage trim part number.
  • Almost nothing on a Falcon opening has to be replaced whole. Spring cages, levers, cams, cylinders and chassis parts are all stocked individually.
The Falcon families and what each one does
FamilyWhere it is usedTypical service parts
19, 24 and 25 Series exit devicesEgress doors, including fire rated openingsChannels, end caps, dogging parts, trim
T Series cylindrical locksClassrooms, offices, general traffic doorsSpring cages, levers, latches, strikes
M Series mortise locksHeavier doors and higher security functionsCams, cylinders, trim, latch parts
Cylinders and keying partsAcross all of the aboveDeadbolt cylinders, tailpieces, keyed in lever kits

Falcon hardware tends to turn up on a job without any paperwork. Somebody inherits a building, a lever snaps or a device stops dogging, and the only clue to what is installed is a stamping on the chassis and a shape that looks familiar.

This guide is the orientation layer. It covers which Falcon families exist, how to tell them apart on the door, how the service part numbering behaves, and which of our deeper part guides to go to once you know what you are holding.

Falcon T Series key spindle assembly, a serviceable Falcon door hardware part
T Series trim is serviced at component level. The key spindle assembly is ordered on its own, so a worn spindle does not mean a new lockset.

What Is Falcon Door Hardware and Where Does It Sit?

Falcon is a commercial door hardware line covering exit devices, cylindrical locks, mortise locks and the cylinders and trim that serve them. It is specified where a building needs dependable, serviceable hardware without the weight and cost of the heaviest institutional ranges.

The practical consequence for a facilities team is that Falcon openings are repairable. The ranges were designed around replaceable sub assemblies rather than sealed units, so a failure usually resolves to one part rather than to a new lock.

That is also why identification matters more than it does on some ranges. The same lever can appear across several chassis, and the same looking exit device can be a 24 or a 25 depending on the stile it was built for.

Which Falcon Product Families Will You Find on a Commercial Door?

Four families account for nearly everything in service. Knowing which one you are looking at narrows the part search from thousands of numbers to a few dozen.

Exit devices

The 19 Series is the lighter of the three exit device ranges. The 24 Series is the heavy duty narrow stile device, built for aluminium and glass openings where there is very little stile to work with. The 25 Series is the heavy duty wide stile device used on hollow metal and wood doors.

Each of those series then carries configurations: rim, surface vertical rod, concealed vertical rod and mortise. The configuration decides which latching parts exist, so it has to be settled before any part is ordered. Our Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series parts guide works through each one.

Cylindrical locks

The T Series is the Grade 1 cylindrical lockset. It is the family you meet on classroom and office doors, and the one whose spring cage becomes a talking point once levers start to sag. The Falcon T Series parts guide covers the function codes and chassis numbers.

Falcon Q330-271 T Series spring cage kit, a common Falcon door hardware repair part
The spring cage is the part that returns the lever to horizontal. On the T Series it is a stocked kit, which is why a drooping Falcon lever is a repair rather than a lockset replacement.

Mortise locks

The M Series is the mortise family. Mortise locks carry their functions inside a single case set into the edge of the door, and the function is changed with cams and internal parts rather than by swapping the whole lock.

Cylinders, trim and keying parts

Cylinders sit across all three families. Deadbolt cylinders, keyed in lever kits and the tailpieces that connect a cylinder to a chassis are ordered separately from the locks themselves.

How Do You Tell Which Falcon Exit Device You Have?

Start with the door, not the device. The stile is the single most useful clue, because the narrow stile and wide stile ranges were built for different openings and rarely appear on the wrong one.

Reading the opening to narrow the exit device series
What you seeLikely seriesWhat to check next
Aluminium and glass door, very little frame to work with24 Series narrow stileRod configuration and the stile width
Hollow metal or wood door, generous stile25 Series wide stileWhether it is rim, vertical rod or mortise
Lighter chassis on a general purpose door19 SeriesEnd cap style and channel length
Fire rating label on the door edgeAny series, fire configurationDogging must be absent, and latching has to be positive

Next look at the rods. No rods at all means a rim device latching into a strike on the frame. Visible rods running up and down the face of the door mean surface vertical rod. No visible rods but latches top and bottom means concealed vertical rod, with the rods running inside the door.

Finally check the dogging. A hex dogging keyhole in the touchpad end tells you the device can be held in the retracted position, which in turn tells you it is not a fire rated configuration, because fire devices are not allowed to be dogged down.

What Is the Falcon T Series and How Is It Serviced?

The T Series is a cylindrical lockset, meaning the working parts sit in a chassis that passes through a bored hole in the door face, with the latch running into the edge.

Service on a cylindrical lock is mostly about three sub assemblies. The chassis carries the function. The spring cage returns the lever. The latch and strike decide whether the door actually stays shut.

The symptoms and what they point to

A lever that droops points at the spring cage. A lever that turns but does not retract the latch points at the chassis or the lever connection. A door that will not stay shut, with the lever behaving normally, points at the latch or at strike alignment rather than at the lock.

That last one is worth separating out, because a misaligned strike gets blamed on the lock more often than anything else. Our cylindrical lock parts guide covers how the pieces relate.

What Does the Falcon M Series Cover?

The M Series is the mortise range. A mortise lock case is let into a pocket cut in the edge of the door, which gives it room for more internal mechanism than a cylindrical lock has.

That extra room is why mortise locks carry the more complex functions, and why the cam becomes an ordering decision. Cams translate the turn of the cylinder into movement inside the case, and different functions take different cams.

Falcon A09894-001-00 number one cam for M Series deadbolt functions
Cams are numbered, and the number is tied to the lock function rather than to the cylinder. Falcon M Series deadbolt functions and non deadbolt functions take different cams, so the function has to be confirmed before the cam is ordered.

If you are working on the mortise case itself rather than the cylinder side, the mortise lock parts guide covers the internal components, and commercial lock function codes explains how the function designations are read.

How Do Falcon Service Part Numbers Work?

Falcon service parts do not all share one numbering scheme. They carry prefixes that group parts by the family they serve, and recognising the prefix tells you which family you are in before you read the rest of the number.

Falcon service part prefixes you will meet in the catalogue
PrefixWhat it coversExample of the kind of part
Q330T Series cylindrical lock parts and leversSpring cage kits, lever styles, trim
Q500Deadbolt cylindersFive pin and six pin cylinders in different finishes
A09894 and A09897M Series camsCams split by deadbolt and non deadbolt function
Falcon Q500-064 five pin deadbolt cylinder, a Falcon door hardware service part
Deadbolt cylinders are ordered by pin count and finish as well as by series. The suffix on a Q500 number is what separates one cylinder from the next, so copying the whole number matters.

The lesson is simple. A partial number is not enough. The suffix after the prefix usually carries the finish, the pin count or the specific variant, and two parts that differ only in the last three digits can be completely different items.

Which Falcon Parts Fail First?

Across the families the failures cluster into a short list, and most of them are wear items rather than defects.

Common Falcon failures and where to look
SymptomFamilyUsual cause
Lever sits below horizontalT SeriesSpring cage worn
Device will not dog, or will not undog24 and 25 SeriesDogging assembly or a worn hex key socket
Top or bottom latch not engagingVertical rod configurationsRod length out of adjustment, or a worn latch
Key turns but the bolt does not moveM SeriesWrong or worn cam
End cap loose or missingAll exit device seriesImpact damage, fixings backed out
Door rattles but is latchedAll familiesStrike alignment rather than the lock

The pattern is that a Falcon problem is usually a sub assembly problem. Before ordering a complete lock or device, confirm which of these the symptom actually matches.

Can You Mix Falcon Parts With Other Hardware on the Same Door?

Within the cylinder and keying world, yes, and the catalogue reflects it. There are tailpieces and keyed in lever kits made specifically so a Falcon cylinder can serve a lever or chassis from another range in the same family of brands.

That is a deliberate convenience rather than an accident, and it is why you will find parts described as a Falcon tailpiece or a keyed in lever for a Falcon cylinder sitting under a different brand name in the parts list. The cylinder dictates the keyway, the tailpiece dictates the fit.

Outside of cylinders and keying, mixing is a different matter. Chassis parts, latch assemblies, rods and dogging components are family specific, and a part from one exit device series will not serve another even where it looks similar.

How Do You Confirm a Falcon Part Before You Order It?

Four pieces of information settle almost every Falcon order. Collect them before you search.

What to record at the door
InformationWhere to find itWhy it matters
Family and seriesStamping on the chassis or device, plus door typeNarrows the part list immediately
ConfigurationRim, surface vertical rod, concealed vertical rod or mortiseDecides which latching parts exist
FunctionBehaviour of the lock, or the function code if visibleCams and chassis parts follow the function
FinishExisting hardware on the doorCarried in the part number suffix

Fire rated openings add one more step. Confirm the rating from the label on the door edge, because fire configurations exclude dogging and insist on positive latching, and those two facts rule several otherwise identical parts out.

Where to Start for Each Falcon Family

Once you know the family, go straight to the part level rather than browsing. The Falcon replacement parts section is the starting point, and the family guides go deeper.

For egress hardware, use the 19, 24 and 25 Series parts guide alongside the exit device parts section. For cylindrical locks, the T Series guide and the cylindrical lock parts section. For deadbolt cylinders and keying parts, the Q500 parts guide and the deadlock parts section.

If you have a Falcon part number already, the parts by brand index and the full products and parts index will take you to the item directly.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

If the stamping on the device is unreadable or the series is not obvious, contact us with a photograph of the chassis and the door type, and we will confirm the family before you order.

What Is a Strike Plate: Types, Lip Length and Alignment Explained

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A strike plate is the metal plate in the frame that the latch or bolt enters. It takes every impact the door makes and it is the cheapest part of the opening to get wrong.
  • The lip is the curved tab that guides the latch in. Lip length is a real dimension that has to suit the frame, and it is ordered as part of the number.
  • ANSI strikes, square corner strikes, T strikes and rabbeted strikes are different shapes for different frames, not alternatives you pick by preference.
  • Most strike complaints are alignment, not the strike. A latch that works with the door open and fails with it closed is telling you where the problem is.
  • The box behind the strike matters. A plastic box and a metal box are different parts and different levels of resistance.
The strike at a glance
PartWhat it does
FaceplateSits flush in the frame and carries the fixing screws
OpeningReceives the latch bolt or deadbolt
LipCurved tab that guides the latch over the frame edge
Box or dust boxEncloses the space behind, keeps debris out and adds resistance

A strike plate costs a fraction of what the lock costs and decides whether the lock works. It is also the part most likely to have been replaced by whatever was in the van, which is why so many doors have a strike that nearly fits.

This guide covers what the strike does, the types you will meet, how to work out which one an opening needs, and why most strike problems are not actually the strike. For the part level breakdown, see our strike plates and deadlatches parts guide.

What Is a Strike Plate and What Does It Do?

The strike plate is the metal plate fitted into the frame opposite the lock. It has an opening in it that the latch bolt or deadbolt enters when the door closes, and it is screwed into the jamb so that it sits flush with the frame face.

It does three jobs at once.

  • It guides the latch. As the door swings closed, the sloped face of the latch runs along the lip of the strike and is pushed back into the lock. When it reaches the opening, it springs out again and the door is latched.
  • It takes the load. Everything the door does, every slam, every pull against the lock, every attempt to force it, lands on the strike and its screws.
  • It protects the frame. Without a plate, the latch would be hammering wood or thin steel on every cycle.

That first job explains why the lip exists and why its length matters so much.

Schlage 10-094 flat square corner strike plate with metal box, 2-3/4 by 1-1/8 inches
Strike plates are listed by shape, by faceplate dimensions and by whether a box is included, so the part number carries all three.

What Is the Lip on a Strike Plate and Why Does Length Matter?

The lip is the curved tab that extends from the faceplate out over the edge of the frame. It is the ramp that pushes the latch back as the door closes.

Lip length is measured from the centre line of the strike to the end of the lip, and it is not a style choice. It has to be long enough that the latch meets it rather than meeting the frame or the architrave, and short enough that it does not project into the opening where people walk past it.

Get it too short and the latch catches on the frame edge instead of riding over the lip, so the door bangs rather than closing. Get it too long and the lip sticks out into the traffic, snags clothing, and gets bent by trolleys until it no longer guides anything.

This is why you will see the same strike offered in a range of lip lengths as separate part numbers. A T shaped square corner strike with a plastic box might be stocked in half a dozen lip lengths, and they are not interchangeable once the frame is built.

What Are the Different Types of Strike Plate?

Strike types and where each belongs
TypeShapeTypical frame
ANSI strikeLong rectangular faceplate to a standard patternHollow metal frames prepped to the standard
Square corner strikeRectangular faceplate with square cornersFrames machined with a square corner router or chisel
T strikeNarrower at the ends than the middleFrames where the full rectangle will not fit
Rabbeted strikeStepped to follow a rabbeted frame profileRabbeted frames, where the stop is formed in the section
Double door strikeDesigned to serve a pair rather than a single leafPairs without a mullion, where the inactive leaf carries the strike

These are not interchangeable. The frame has been prepared for one shape, and fitting a different one means either a visible gap or cutting the frame. On a rated opening, cutting the frame is not a casual decision at all.

The ANSI pattern is the one worth knowing because it is the common denominator. A frame prepped to the ANSI strike pattern will take any strike built to it, which is precisely the point of having a standard.

Schlage 10-025 ANSI strike plate, the standard pattern used on prepped hollow metal frames
An ANSI strike follows a standard faceplate pattern, so any strike built to it drops into a frame prepped for it.

Does the Box Behind the Strike Matter?

Yes, more than most people expect.

Behind the opening in the strike there is a cavity in the frame. A box, sometimes called a dust box, lines that cavity. Its obvious job is keeping mortar, insulation and debris out of the space the latch has to enter, because a latch that cannot fully extend is a latch that can be pushed back.

Its less obvious job is resistance. Strikes are stocked both with plastic boxes and with metal boxes, and that is a deliberate difference. A plastic box is fine on an interior door where nothing is going to be attacked. On an exterior door or anything protecting value, a metal box adds real resistance behind the plate rather than just keeping the hole tidy.

When you order a strike, check whether the box is included and which kind it is. The part number usually tells you.

Why Will My Door Not Latch? Strike Alignment Explained

This is the complaint behind most strike work, and the first test takes ten seconds.

Open the door and operate the latch by hand. If the latch extends and retracts freely with the door open, the lock is fine. The problem is between the latch and the strike. If it binds with the door open, the problem is in the lock or the door prep and the strike is innocent.

Assuming the lock is fine, there are three ways the alignment can be out.

Three directions of misalignment
DirectionWhat you seeUsual cause
VerticalLatch hits above or below the opening, leaving a mark on the strike faceDoor has dropped on worn hinges
HorizontalLatch reaches the strike but will not go deep enough to spring outDoor or frame has moved, or weatherseal is holding the door off
DepthLatch enters but the door rattles, or the deadbolt will not throw fullyGap between door and frame has grown

The marks tell you the direction. A strike face with a bright wear line above the opening is a door that has dropped, and the fix is at the hinges, not at the strike. Filing the strike opening bigger to accommodate a sagging door is the repair that comes back.

When Moving the Strike Is the Right Answer

Sometimes it genuinely is. Frames settle, buildings move, and a strike fitted square to a frame thirty years ago may no longer be square to the door. In that case the strike is relocated properly, with the old fixing holes filled so the new screws bite into solid material rather than spinning in enlarged holes.

What is not a repair is packing the strike out with washers, or enlarging the opening with a file until the latch finds its way in. Both work for a while and both leave an opening that is easier to force than it was.

What Is a Rabbeted Strike and When Do You Need One?

A rabbeted frame has the door stop formed as a step in the frame section rather than planted on as a separate strip. The door sits into that step when it closes.

A flat strike cannot follow that profile. Fitted into a rabbeted frame it either stands proud of the step or leaves the latch meeting a corner, and neither works. A rabbeted strike is stepped to match, so its face follows the frame and the latch meets a continuous surface.

You can identify a rabbeted frame in a second by looking at the jamb with the door open. If the stop is a separate piece of timber or steel pinned on, the frame is not rabbeted. If the stop is part of the same section, stepping back from the face, it is.

Getting this wrong is common on replacements, because a flat strike will physically screw into a rabbeted frame. It just will not latch reliably, and the symptom looks like an alignment fault rather than the wrong part.

Schlage 10-075 rabbeted strike plate, stepped to follow a rabbeted frame profile
A rabbeted strike is stepped to follow the frame. A flat strike will screw into the same frame and still fail to latch properly.

Why the Screws Matter as Much as the Plate

A strike is only as good as what is holding it in, and this is where most of the real security is won or lost on an exterior door.

Short screws reach into the frame skin and nothing else. Under a kick, the screws tear through thin material and the whole strike comes away with a section of jamb, regardless of how strong the lock was. Longer fixings that reach past the frame into the structure behind change what has to fail before the door opens.

Three things worth checking on any strike you are working on:

  • Are the existing holes still sound, or have they been enlarged by previous adjustment so the screws no longer bite.
  • Is the strike sitting flat, or has it been packed out with washers to cover an alignment problem.
  • Is the frame reinforced behind the strike, which on hollow metal usually means a strike reinforcement rather than bare skin.

None of that is expensive. All of it is invisible once the door is shut, which is why it gets skipped.

What Should You Check on a Strike During Routine Maintenance?

  1. Look for wear marks on the strike face, which show the latch is not arriving where it should.
  2. Check the lip is straight and has not been bent by trolleys or carts.
  3. Test the latch from a slow close, not a slam, because a slammed door will latch over a fault that a gentle close will not.
  4. Check the deadlatch lands on the strike face, not in the opening, on locks that have one.
  5. Check the screws are tight and that the holes have not opened up.
  6. Look into the box for debris, particularly on doors near building work.

The slow close test is the useful one. Most doors that have a developing strike problem will still latch if you let them slam, so a quick check during a walk round misses it. Close the door gently and see whether it latches on its own.

Three things get called strikes and they are not the same.

  • A strike plate is passive. It is a shaped piece of metal with no moving parts.
  • A deadlatch is part of the lock, not the frame. It is the small plunger beside the main latch that stops the latch being pushed back once the door is closed. If the deadlatch misses the strike face it is not doing its job, which is another reason strike alignment matters.
  • An electric strike replaces the passive plate with a powered one that can release the latch on a signal. That is a different product with wiring, handing and fail safe or fail secure behaviour to decide.

For the powered version, see our electric strike schematic diagram and the electric strike parts section.

What to Confirm Before Ordering a Strike Plate

  1. The frame prep, which decides the shape: ANSI, square corner, T or rabbeted.
  2. Faceplate dimensions, measured off the existing plate.
  3. Lip length, measured from the centre line to the end of the lip.
  4. Whether a box is included, and whether it should be plastic or metal.
  5. What the strike has to receive, a latch bolt, a deadbolt, or both.
  6. The finish, matched to the rest of the hardware on the opening.

Browse cylindrical lock parts and mortise lock parts for the locks these strikes serve, or the full products and parts index if you already have a part number.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For related reading, see our commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide and the commercial door hardware finish guide.

Proximity Card Readers Explained: Credentials, Mounting and Wiring

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A proximity card reader reads a credential held near it and sends the result to a controller. It does not decide anything itself and it does not lock or unlock the door.
  • Readers are chosen by mounting as much as by technology. Mullion mount, wall mount and mini mullion are different bodies doing the same job in different spaces.
  • Multi technology readers accept more than one card format, which is what makes a credential migration possible without changing every reader on day one.
  • Which card technologies a reader accepts can be changed in the field with configuration cards rather than by swapping hardware.
  • A reader with a keypad turns one factor into two, because the user has to present something and know something.
What the reader does and does not do
FunctionReaderController
Reads the credentialYesNo
Decides whether to grant accessNoYes
Releases the lockNoYes, through the lock hardware
Holds the list of who is allowed inNoYes

The reader is the part of an access control system everybody sees and the part that does the least thinking. Understanding that split explains most of what is confusing about specifying one.

This guide covers what a proximity reader actually does, how mounting and technology are separate decisions, and what to confirm before ordering. For how the reader fits into the rest of the opening, see our access control and door hardware integration guide.

How Does a Proximity Card Reader Work?

A proximity reader emits a field. When a card or fob enters that field, the credential draws enough energy from it to power itself and transmit its number back. The reader picks up that number and passes it on.

Two things follow from that and both matter in practice.

First, the credential has no battery. It is powered entirely by the reader's field, which is why a card works for years and why it stops working at a distance. Range is a property of the field, not of the card.

Second, the reader is not making a decision. It reads a number and sends it to the controller. The controller holds the list of who is permitted, checks the number against it, and decides whether to release the door. If the door does not open, the reader is usually not the thing that refused.

Schlage PR10 mini mullion proximity card reader for narrow stile and mullion mounting
A mini mullion reader is built narrow so it fits on the mullion of a storefront pair or a narrow stile frame.

Mullion, Wall or Mini: Why Mounting Decides the Part

Readers performing the same function come in different bodies, and the body is chosen by where it has to live.

Reader bodies by mounting position
MountingShapeWhere it goes
Mini mullionNarrowest bodyNarrow stile frames and mullions with very little width
Mullion mountTall and narrowThe vertical mullion between a pair of glazed doors
Wall mountWider, often single gangA wall beside the door, where there is room
Wall mount with keypadLarger again, keys plus read areaWhere a PIN is required as well as a card
Reader moduleComponent rather than finished unitBuilt into another assembly

Mullion readers exist because storefront doors leave almost nowhere to put anything. The mullion between the leaves is often the only vertical surface near the handle, and it is narrow, so the reader is built to match.

This is also why ordering goes wrong. The technology is identical across several of these, so somebody orders the wrong body and it physically will not fit the only place it can go.

Schlage MT15-485 wall mount multi technology card reader for access control
Wall mount readers are wider than mullion units and suit a jamb or wall beside the door rather than a storefront mullion.

What Is a Multi Technology Reader and Why Does It Matter?

Card technologies are not one thing. Older proximity formats, smart card formats and various proprietary schemes all exist in the same buildings, usually because the estate was built over decades.

A multi technology reader accepts more than one of those formats at the same reader. That turns an impossible migration into a manageable one.

Without it, changing credential technology means changing every reader and every card on the same weekend, because a reader that only understands the old format cannot read a new card and vice versa. With multi technology readers, you change the readers first, keep issuing old cards while both work, then switch credentials at your own pace and turn the old format off at the end.

That is why multi technology units dominate current ranges, and why the stocked line includes plain multi technology readers, keypad versions, mullion and wall bodies, and government specification variants built to federal credential requirements.

Reader Modules Versus Finished Readers

Some products in the range are described as reader modules rather than readers. A module is the reading electronics intended to be built into another assembly, rather than a finished unit with its own housing. If you are replacing something on a wall, you want the finished reader. If you are servicing an integrated product, you may want the module.

Schlage MTB11 mullion mount multi technology proximity card reader
Mullion mount readers are tall and narrow so they fit the vertical mullion of a glazed pair.

How Do You Change Which Card Technologies a Reader Accepts?

This is the part most people do not know exists, and it saves a surprising amount of trouble.

On multi technology readers, the set of card formats the reader will accept is configurable. Rather than returning the unit or editing anything in software, the change is made by presenting a configuration card to the reader.

The stocked range includes cards that enable all proximity card technologies, cards that disable all of them, and cards that turn individual technologies on or off one at a time. There are also configuration cards covering card serial number bit lengths.

Why that matters: a reader that accepts every format it can is convenient and is also reading credentials you may not want accepted. Turning off the technologies a site does not use narrows what will open the door. It also stops a reader responding to a visitor's card from an unrelated system, which is the sort of thing that generates confusing access logs rather than a real breach.

Keep the configuration cards with the site records. They are small, they look like ordinary cards, and a reader that has been reconfigured by somebody who then left is a puzzle nobody enjoys.

When Should a Reader Have a Keypad?

A card on its own is something you have. Anyone holding the card is treated as the person it belongs to, which is fine for most doors and inadequate for some.

Adding a keypad adds something you know. The user presents a credential and enters a PIN, so a lost or borrowed card is not enough on its own. Most ranges offer a keypad version of the same reader body, so the decision does not change the mounting.

Where that is usually worth it:

  • Server rooms, comms rooms and plant spaces.
  • Cash handling and stock rooms.
  • Doors that are rarely used, where a missing card may not be noticed for weeks.
  • Out of hours access on a door that is open to card only during the day.

Where it usually is not: high traffic main entrances, where a PIN at every entry creates a queue and encourages people to hold the door for each other, which defeats the whole arrangement.

What Does a Reader Need to Be Wired To?

A reader needs power and a data path back to the controller, and in most installations those run in the same multi conductor cable.

Three practical points come up on nearly every job.

  • Metal affects range. Mounting a reader directly on a metal mullion or frame changes its field. Readers intended for mullion mounting are designed with that in mind, which is another reason to use the right body rather than the one that fits.
  • Cable runs have limits. Readers are rated for a maximum distance to the controller, and exceeding it causes intermittent reads that look like a faulty reader.
  • Keep reader cable away from lock power. The lock circuit switches a relatively large current, and running it alongside the reader data pair is a reliable way to create faults that come and go.

The lock itself is a separate decision from the reader. For what releases the door once the controller says yes, see our comparison of an electrified mortise lock versus an electric strike and our electromagnetic lock parts guide.

Why Reader Covers Are Ordered Separately

On several readers the outer cover is a separate part number with its own colour, and this catches people out on a replacement.

The stocked covers come in a range that includes black, cream, warm tone brown and cool tone gray, and they are specific to the reader body and gang size. A single gang cover is not a double gang cover, and a cover for one reader family will not clip onto another.

Two situations where this matters. The first is damage: a cracked cover does not mean a new reader, it means a cover. The second is appearance: a reader replaced like for like in function can look wrong on the wall if the cover colour was chosen to match a previous decor scheme.

When ordering a reader for an existing location, confirm whether the cover is included or separate, and record the colour from the one already on the wall.

What Goes Wrong With Card Readers?

Reader symptoms and where to look
SymptomLikely causeCheck first
Reader shows no light at allPower not reaching the unitSupply at the reader terminals, then the cable run and the controller end
Reader beeps but the door never releasesReader is working, the decision or the lock is notWhether the controller logged the read, then the lock circuit
Some cards work, others do notCard technology not enabled on that readerWhich formats the reader is configured to accept
Read range has droppedMounting surface or interferenceWhether anything metal has been installed near the reader recently
Intermittent reads with no patternCable length or routingDistance to the controller, and whether lock power shares the route
Reader works, door opens, no recordMonitoring devices missing or faultyThe door position switch and the request to exit device

The second row is the one worth internalising. A reader that beeps and flashes has done its job. If the door did not open, the problem is downstream of the reader, and replacing the reader will change nothing.

The Reader Is Only Half of a Monitored Door

A reader tells the system somebody presented a valid credential. It does not tell the system whether the door actually opened, whether it closed again, or whether somebody left through it.

That is the job of two other devices. A door position switch reports whether the leaf is open or closed. A request to exit device reports that somebody on the inside operated the hardware to leave. Without those, an access control system knows who was granted access and nothing about what happened next.

Our guide to request to exit and door position switches covers both and how they are wired.

What to Confirm Before Ordering a Reader

  1. The mounting position, which decides the body: mini mullion, mullion, wall or keypad.
  2. The card technologies in use on site, and any migration planned.
  3. Whether a keypad is needed for that specific door.
  4. Any government or federal credential requirement, which is a distinct product variant.
  5. The interface and cable run back to the controller.
  6. The finish and cover, which on several readers is a separately ordered part.

Browse Schlage parts for readers, modules, covers and configuration cards, or the full products and parts index if you already have a part number.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For the rest of the electrified opening, see our electric strike schematic diagram and the electric strike parts section.

Double Cylinder Deadbolts: How They Differ, Where They Are Restricted

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A double cylinder deadbolt takes a key on both sides. A single cylinder deadbolt takes a key outside and a thumbturn inside.
  • The reason people fit them is glass. If a pane next to the door can be broken, a thumbturn can be reached through it.
  • The reason codes restrict them is egress. A door that needs a key to get out is a problem in a fire, and on most commercial exits that rules them out.
  • Schlage numbering tells you which you have. In the B series, the double cylinder versions carry a different model number from the single cylinder versions.
  • The cylinder you order depends on door thickness, so measure the door before ordering a replacement.
Single, double and classroom deadbolts
TypeOutsideInsideTypical use
Single cylinderKeyThumbturnMost doors, where free egress matters
Double cylinderKeyKeyDoors with glass beside or within them, where egress is not the issue
ClassroomKeyNo operation, or key onlyRooms where occupants should not be able to unlock the door

The double cylinder deadbolt is the most argued about piece of hardware in a commercial building. It solves one real problem and creates a different one, and which of those matters more depends entirely on the door it is going on.

This guide covers how it differs mechanically, where it is genuinely appropriate, where it is restricted, and what you need to know before ordering parts. For the components of the lock itself, see our deadbolt parts guide.

What Is a Double Cylinder Deadbolt?

A deadbolt is a bolt with no spring in it. It does not retract when the door closes against the frame, and it cannot be pushed back by pressure on the end. The only way it moves is because something turns it. That is what makes it a deadbolt rather than a latch.

What varies is what does the turning. On a single cylinder deadbolt there is a keyed cylinder on the outside and a thumbturn on the inside. On a double cylinder deadbolt there is a keyed cylinder on both sides, so the bolt cannot be operated from either face without a key.

Everything else about the lock is the same. The bolt, the strike, the backset and the door prep do not change. What changes is the inside trim and therefore the behaviour of the door from the inside.

Why Would Anybody Fit a Double Cylinder Deadbolt?

One reason dominates: adjacent glass.

If there is a glazed panel in the door or a sidelight next to it, a thumbturn on the inside is reachable. Break the glass, put an arm through, turn the thumbturn, open the door. The lock has been defeated without any attack on the lock at all.

A double cylinder deadbolt removes that route, because reaching the inside face achieves nothing without a key. That is a genuine security improvement on storefront doors, rear doors with glazed panels, and any opening where the glazing was designed before anybody thought about the lock.

Secondary reasons come up too. Doors that lead to a secured area from inside the building, where you want the door controlled in both directions. Store rooms inside a public space. Doors where the occupant should not be able to unlock the way out casually.

Schlage 22-645 deadbolt cylinder for the B562 double cylinder deadbolt, sized for 1-3/8 to 1-3/4 inch doors
Replacement deadbolt cylinders are listed against a model and a door thickness range, which is why measuring the door comes before ordering.

Where Are Double Cylinder Deadbolts Restricted?

The objection is simple and it is about getting out, not getting in.

If the only way to unlock a door from the inside is with a key, then anyone inside without the key is held in. In an ordinary day that is an inconvenience. In a fire, with smoke and no light, somebody hunting for a key at a door they need to be through is a serious problem.

That is why free egress is a principle that runs through commercial door hardware. A person should be able to leave through an exit with one motion, without a key, without special knowledge and without tools. A double cylinder deadbolt is in direct conflict with that on any door used for egress.

The practical rules vary by jurisdiction and by occupancy, and your authority having jurisdiction is the one that settles it for a given building. What is consistent is the direction of travel: the more a door is relied on as a way out, the less acceptable a key operated inside becomes.

The Compromise Nobody Should Use

A habit exists of fitting a double cylinder deadbolt and leaving a key permanently in the inside cylinder during occupied hours. It defeats the purpose in both directions. During the day the lock is a single cylinder with a key sticking out of it, and the glass attack it was fitted to prevent now works again. At night, if the key is removed and somebody is still inside, you have the egress problem in full.

If egress is required, the answer is different hardware for that opening, not a procedure that depends on somebody remembering.

What Should You Use Instead on an Exit Door?

Alternatives when a double cylinder is not allowed
OptionHow it solves the glass problemEgress from inside
Exit device with a cylinder dogging or trimNothing reachable through glass releases itOne push on the bar
Single cylinder deadbolt with laminated or security glazingAddresses the glass rather than the lockThumbturn, free
Classroom function lockNo inside unlock to reach at allLever always retracts the latch
Interlocking or secondary mechanical security after hoursRemoves the reliance on the deadbolt aloneDepends on arrangement, must be checked

Classroom function is worth understanding properly, because it answers a different question from the deadbolt. Our classroom deadbolt guide covers the function and the cylinder options, and our exit device parts section covers the panic hardware route.

Does the Grade of the Deadbolt Change the Single Versus Double Decision?

No, but it changes how much the decision is worth.

Deadbolts are graded, and the grade describes how much abuse the lock will take before it fails. Within the Schlage B range, the B600 series is the Grade 1 family and the B500 series sits below it. Both are available in single and double cylinder versions, so grade and cylinder count are two separate choices made at the same time.

The point worth making on a glazed door is that upgrading the grade does nothing about the glass. A Grade 1 deadbolt with a thumbturn inside is defeated through a broken pane exactly as fast as a Grade 2 one.

Grade protects against force applied to the lock. Cylinder count protects against somebody reaching the inside. They answer different attacks, so the right choice depends on which attack the door is actually exposed to.

The Bolt and the Strike Have to Match the Ambition

A heavy deadbolt in a light frame moves the weak point rather than removing it. If the bolt is strong and well thrown but the strike is screwed into a thin jamb with short screws, the frame fails first. On an exterior door where the deadbolt is doing real work, the strike and its fixings deserve the same attention as the lock.

What Goes Wrong With a Deadbolt?

Deadbolts have very few moving parts, so the failure list is short and most of it is alignment rather than the lock.

Deadbolt symptoms and where to look
SymptomLikely causeCheck first
Key turns but the bolt does not moveTailpiece or cam not engaging the lock caseWhether the cylinder is the right length for the door thickness
Bolt will not throw fullyStrike misaligned, or the door has droppedWhether the bolt throws freely with the door open
Bolt throws but the door still rattlesGap between door and frame has grownHinges, weatherseal and the strike position
Stiff on one side onlyOne cylinder worn, or the wrong cylinder fitted on that faceEach cylinder independently, with the door open
Key sticks or will not withdrawWorn key or worn pins in the cylinderTry a different key cut to the same code before condemning the cylinder
Bolt works, lock body loose in the doorThrough fixings slackenedThe mounting screws and whether the prep has worn oval

The pattern worth remembering is that a bolt which throws freely with the door open and binds with it closed is an alignment problem, not a lock problem. Replacing the deadbolt will not fix it. Our commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide covers the strike and frame side of the same complaint.

How Do You Tell Which One Is Fitted?

Look at the inside face. A thumbturn is a single cylinder. A keyway is a double cylinder. That is the whole test and it takes a second.

For ordering, you need more than that. In the Schlage B series, the single cylinder and double cylinder versions carry different model numbers, and the replacement cylinders are listed against those models. A cylinder listed for a B562 is not the same order line as one listed for a B662, even though both are deadbolt cylinders, because they belong to different grades within the range.

Each cylinder is also listed against a door thickness range. The same model will have one cylinder for doors from roughly one and three eighths to one and three quarters inches, and a longer one for thicker doors. Ordering without measuring is the fastest way to get a cylinder that will not reach or will not tighten.

Schlage 22-085 deadbolt cylinder for the B662 deadbolt, covering 1-3/8 to 2 inch door thickness
Different models in the same family take different cylinders, and each cylinder covers a stated door thickness range.

Can You Convert a Single Cylinder Deadbolt to a Double?

Often yes, because the change is at the inside trim rather than in the door prep. The bolt, the case and the hole through the door are usually common to both.

What you are replacing is the thumbturn with a keyed cylinder, which means a cylinder of the correct length for the door and, if the building is keyed, one that matches the existing key system. Conversion and adapter kits exist for exactly this.

Before doing it, answer the egress question for that specific door. A conversion that is mechanically straightforward can still be the wrong decision, and it is far easier to decide that before the thumbturn comes off than after an inspection.

Cylinder by thumbturn mortise deadbolt lock case, the single cylinder arrangement with a keyed outside
A cylinder by thumbturn lock case is the single cylinder arrangement. The double cylinder version replaces the thumbturn with a second keyway.

Keying a Double Cylinder Deadbolt Into the Building

Two cylinders means two cylinders to key, and on a building with an existing key system that is not a detail to leave to the installer on the day.

Both sides should normally be keyed alike to each other, so one key works from either face. Beyond that, the deadbolt has to sit correctly in the building hierarchy so the right master keys operate it. Our master key system design guide covers the levels of keying, and the Schlage key systems guide covers the keyways and cylinder formats.

What to Confirm Before Ordering

  1. Single or double, confirmed by looking at the inside face.
  2. The model number from the lock, because grades within a range take different cylinders.
  3. Door thickness, measured rather than assumed.
  4. The keyway and key system, so the new cylinder works with the existing keys.
  5. The finish, matched to the rest of the hardware on the opening.
  6. Whether the door is an exit, which may rule the double cylinder out entirely.

Browse deadbolt parts and diagrams for the exploded views, or the full products and parts index if you have a part number. Our Schlage B series deadbolt parts guide covers the range in detail, and the labelled deadbolt diagram names every component.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For related reading, see our comparison of a mortise cylinder and a rim cylinder and the thumbturn cylinder guide.

Keyed Alike Locks: What It Means and When to Use It

Quick Summary

Key points

  • Keyed alike means several locks share one key. Every lock in the group opens with the same key, and that key opens nothing else.
  • It is a flat arrangement with no hierarchy. Master keying is the opposite: a structure where higher level keys open more doors than lower ones.
  • Keyed alike is the right answer for small groups of doors used by the same people. It becomes a liability once the group grows or the people change.
  • The decision is made at the cylinder, not at the lock body, so different lock types can still share one key.
  • Interchangeable core systems let you rekey by swapping the core rather than taking the lock apart.
Keyed alike, keyed different and master keyed
ArrangementWhat it meansWhere it fits
Keyed alikeOne key opens every lock in the groupA handful of doors used by the same people
Keyed differentEvery lock has its own key, none interchangeDoors with genuinely separate users and no shared access
Master keyedEach lock has its own key, plus a higher key that opens manyBuildings where access has to be layered by role

Keyed alike is one of those phrases that gets used loosely, usually to mean "I want one key for everything". That is sometimes exactly right and sometimes the start of a problem that takes years to unpick. The difference is whether the group of doors will stay small and stable.

This guide covers what keyed alike actually is, how it differs from master keying, when it is the better answer and when it is not. For the hierarchical alternative, see our master key system design guide.

What Does Keyed Alike Mean?

Keyed alike means a set of locks has been pinned to accept the same key. Turn up with that key and every lock in the set opens. Turn up with any other key and none of them do.

Mechanically there is nothing clever about it. A pin tumbler cylinder is pinned so that one particular cut of key lifts its pins to the shear line. Pin a second cylinder the same way and it accepts the same key.

The locks need not be the same type, or even the same product. A deadbolt, a cylindrical lever lock and a padlock can all be keyed alike to each other provided they take compatible cylinders.

That last point is what people miss. Keying happens at the cylinder, not at the lock. The lock body determines the function, the cylinder determines the key.

Detex ECL-445K-7 keyed alike rim cylinder, supplied pinned to a common key
Some cylinders are supplied explicitly as keyed alike parts, pinned so that every unit in the group accepts the same key.

How Is Keyed Alike Different From Master Keying?

They sound similar and they solve different problems.

Keyed alike is flat. There is one key and there are no levels. Everybody who holds it can open everything in the group, and nobody can be given access to part of it.

Master keying is hierarchical. Each lock keeps its own change key, and a higher level key is added that operates a defined set of locks. Each cylinder is pinned so that more than one key cut will reach the shear line.

A department head's key opens their floor, a facilities key opens more, and the grand master opens the building.

Practical differences
QuestionKeyed alikeMaster keyed
Number of keys per lockOneTwo or more, by design
Can access be split by roleNoYes, that is the point
Complexity to designAlmost noneSubstantial, needs planning before pinning
Effect of losing a keyEvery lock in the group is exposedExposure is limited to that key's level
Rekeying after a lossEvery cylinder in the groupDepends which level was lost
Best sizeSmall, stable groupsBuildings and estates

They are not mutually exclusive. A master keyed building will often have small keyed alike groups inside it, so that a row of identical store cupboards share one change key while still sitting under the building's masters.

When Is Keyed Alike the Right Choice?

It works well when three things are true: the group is small, everybody who needs one door needs all of them, and that is unlikely to change.

  • A suite of rooms used by one team. Office, store, and the door between them.
  • Multiple entrances serving the same people. Front, rear and side doors of one unit.
  • Equipment and enclosures. Cabinets, gates and padlocks that the same maintenance person opens on the same round.
  • Doors with two locks. A lever lock and a deadbolt on the same leaf should almost always be keyed alike, so one key does the door.

That last one is worth calling out because it is the most common sensible use. A door with a deadbolt above the lockset is two locks, and if they take different keys then every entry and exit is a two key operation that nobody thanks you for.

When Does Keyed Alike Become a Problem?

The failure mode is always the same: the group grew, or the people changed.

Keyed alike has no way to withdraw access from part of the group. If one person should no longer have the store room, you cannot take the store room off their key. You can only take the key, which removes everything, or rekey the store room, which separates it from the group permanently.

Lost keys are the second problem. One key opens everything in the set, so losing one exposes every door at once. The remedy is rekeying every cylinder in the group, and the larger the group has quietly grown, the more expensive that morning becomes.

The third is drift. Keyed alike groups are rarely designed. They accumulate. Somebody adds one more door "while we are here", and five years later there are forty cylinders on one key and nobody is sure which doors are on it. At that point the building needs a key system rather than a habit. Our Schlage key systems guide covers what a designed system looks like.

What Happens When You Need to Add a Door Later?

This is where keyed alike groups quietly go wrong, so it is worth planning for on day one.

Adding a door to an existing keyed alike group is easy if you know the key code. A cylinder is pinned to that code, fitted, and the existing key works. It takes minutes and costs very little.

It is a different job if nobody wrote the code down. Then you are either taking an existing cylinder apart to read the pinning, or cutting a new key from an existing one and working backwards. Both are achievable and both cost more than the five seconds it would have taken to record the code when the group was created.

What to Record

The record that makes a keyed alike group manageable
RecordWhy it matters later
The key code or bittingLets you add a cylinder to the group without reverse engineering one
Every door in the groupTells you the real cost of a lost key before it happens
Keyway and pin countStops somebody ordering a cylinder that cannot take the key
Cylinder format per doorRim, mortise, key in knob or key in lever, so replacements are right first time
Who holds a keyThe only way to know what a departure actually exposes
Date each cylinder was pinnedUseful when half the group has been rekeyed and half has not

None of that needs software. A sheet of paper in the facilities file is enough, and it is the difference between a twenty minute job and a day.

Schlage 23-118 key in knob cylinder, one of the cylinder formats that can be keyed alike to a group
Key in knob cylinders are a different housing from rim and mortise cylinders, and all three can still be pinned to one key.

How Do You Rekey a Keyed Alike Group?

The honest answer is that you rekey all of it or none of it, and that is the whole argument for keeping these groups small.

Because every cylinder accepts the same key, changing that key means changing every cylinder. Leaving one behind means the old key still opens one door, which is usually the door you were worried about.

Three routes, in order of how much they cost you.

  1. Swap interchangeable cores. If the group is built on removable cores, a control key pulls each core and a pre pinned replacement goes in. Fastest by a wide margin.
  2. Repin conventional cylinders. Each cylinder comes apart and is repinned to a new code. Reliable, but it is a visit to every door.
  3. Replace cylinders entirely. Sometimes the quickest option when cylinders are worn anyway, or when the group is being redesigned rather than just rekeyed.

Whichever route, take the opportunity to write down the new code and the door list. The reason the group was painful to rekey is almost always that nobody did that last time.

Which Cylinders Can Be Keyed Alike?

Any set of cylinders that share a keyway and a compatible pinning can be keyed alike to each other. In practice that means three decisions.

What has to match
FactorWhy it matters
KeywayThe key blank has to physically enter every cylinder in the group
Pin countCylinders are offered in different pin counts and they have to agree
Cylinder formatRim, mortise, key in knob and key in lever are different housings, but can share a key
Core typeConventional, or an interchangeable core format that can be swapped as a unit

Cylinder format being different is not an obstacle. A rim cylinder on an exit device and a mortise cylinder on a lock body are built completely differently, and both can be pinned to the same key. Our comparison of a mortise cylinder and a rim cylinder explains how the two differ physically.

Schlage 23-065 six pin conventional key in lever cylinder, which can be keyed alike with other compatible cylinders
Pin count is one of the things that has to agree across a keyed alike group, so a six pin cylinder is ordered deliberately rather than by accident.

Why Interchangeable Cores Change the Maths

On a conventional cylinder, rekeying means taking the cylinder apart and repinning it, which is a locksmith job done at the door or on a bench.

An interchangeable core system changes that. The core is removed as a unit with a control key and a new core goes in. Rekeying a door becomes a thirty second swap rather than a service visit, and the old core can be repinned elsewhere at leisure.

That matters most for exactly the situation where keyed alike goes wrong. If a key is lost on a twelve door keyed alike group, conventional cylinders mean twelve repinning jobs. Interchangeable cores mean twelve core swaps, which one person can do in an afternoon. Our master key system design guide covers the core formats and how they differ.

What to Confirm Before Ordering Keyed Alike Cylinders

  1. Which doors are actually in the group, written down rather than assumed.
  2. The keyway, so one blank fits everything.
  3. Pin count, consistent across the group.
  4. Cylinder format for each opening, rim, mortise, key in knob or key in lever.
  5. Whether the building already has a key system this group has to sit inside.
  6. How many keys are needed, and who will hold a record of them.

Browse Schlage parts for cylinders and cores, or the full products and parts index if you already have part numbers.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For related reading, see the thumbturn cylinder guide and our deadbolt parts and diagrams.

How Automatic Door Openers Work: Operator Types, Activation and What Fails

Quick Summary

Key points

  • An automatic door opener is a powered operator that swings or slides the door for the user. The door still needs a closer function, because the operator has to control the door on the way back too.
  • Low energy operators are the ones you see on accessible entrances. They move the door slowly and are activated by a person pressing or waving at something.
  • The activation device is a separate decision from the operator. A push plate, a touchless wave sensor, a bollard and a wireless transmitter all do the same job in different ways.
  • Safety sensors and a door position switch stop the door hitting people. If the door behaves erratically, suspect those before the operator.
  • Almost every part of these systems is replaceable on its own, including arms, actuators, sensors and control boxes.
The four things every automatic opening needs
ElementWhat it does
OperatorThe powered unit that drives the door open and controls it closed
ActivationWhat tells the operator to go: a push plate, a wave sensor, a bollard, a credential
SafetySensors that stop or reverse the door when somebody is in the way
ControlThe box and relays that decide what happens in which order

An automatic door opener looks simple from the outside. Somebody presses a plate, the door swings, it closes again. Underneath there are four separate systems that have to agree with each other, and when one of them drifts the whole opening starts behaving strangely.

This guide covers how these systems fit together, the terminology that gets mixed up, and where the fault usually is when a powered door stops behaving. For the component level breakdown, see our door operator parts guide.

What Is an Automatic Door Opener and How Does It Work?

An automatic door opener, more properly called a door operator, is a powered unit mounted at the head of the opening that drives the door through its swing or slide. It replaces the push you would give the door yourself.

The important thing people miss is that the operator does not stop working once the door is open. It also controls the door coming back. A powered swing door still has to close at a controlled speed, latch properly, and not slam. So the operator contains or works alongside a closing mechanism, which is why the same manufacturers make both closers and operators and why the parts families overlap.

Operators are driven in different ways depending on the series. Some are electrohydraulic, some are pneumatic, and some are electromechanical. That difference decides what is inside the unit when it fails, and it decides which spares list you are working from.

Low Energy Versus Full Power

The term you will see constantly on accessible entrances is low energy. A low energy operator opens the door slowly and with limited force, and it is activated by a deliberate human action such as pressing a plate or waving at a sensor.

That is why low energy units can be used on an ordinary corridor or office door without a guard rail around them. Full power automatic doors, the sort that open as you walk at them, move faster and carry a different set of safety requirements. The products stocked for accessible entrances are explicitly described as low energy operators, supplied in single door, double door and dual egress versions.

Detex AO19-1 low energy automatic door operator for single doors, a surface mounted automatic door opener
A low energy operator for a single door. The same family covers double doors and dual egress pairs, which are ordered as different part numbers.

Single, Double or Dual Egress: Why the Door Count Changes the Part

Operators are not ordered by the door, they are ordered by the opening. Three configurations come up and they are three different products.

Operator configurations
ConfigurationThe openingWhat changes
Single doorOne leaf in the frameOne operator, one arm, one set of safety sensors
Double doorA pair that both swing the same wayTwo operators that have to be sequenced so the leaves do not collide
Dual egressA pair where the leaves swing opposite waysHanding and sequencing differ again, and the hardware is specific to it

Dual egress is the one that catches people out. The two leaves swing in opposite directions, usually in a corridor, so what looks like an ordinary pair is actually a different opening with its own part number. Confirm which of the three you have before ordering anything.

What Activates an Automatic Door Opener?

Activation is a completely separate decision from the operator, and this is where most of the product choice actually happens. The operator does not care what tells it to open, it just needs a signal.

  • Push plates. The traditional answer. A square or round plate on the wall, usually carrying a wheelchair icon, wired back to the operator.
  • Touchless actuators. The user waves a hand near the plate rather than pressing it. Stocked versions come in single gang and double gang sizes, with either a wave icon or a wheelchair icon and text.
  • Bollard posts. A free standing post in the approach path, used where there is no wall in a sensible position. Available in flush length and full length versions.
  • Wireless transmitters. Battery or mains actuators that signal the operator without a cable run, which is the practical answer in a retrofit where chasing a wall is not an option.
LCN 8310-810S touchless actuator, single gang wave icon, used to activate an automatic door opener
Touchless actuators are ordered by gang size and by the icon and text on the face, so the part number carries the artwork as well as the function.

Why Bollards Exist

A push plate needs a wall. Plenty of accessible entrances have glass on both sides, a long approach across open paving, or a route where the nearest wall is too far from the door to be useful. A bollard puts the actuator where the user actually is.

Bollards are ordered as full length or flush length, and as actuator only posts or as complete actuator and bollard packages. Wireless bollard versions remove the cable run entirely, which on an existing paved approach is often the difference between a one day job and a week of groundwork.

LCN 8310-3853WB wireless bollard actuator for an automatic door opener, 4-3/4 inch square
A wireless bollard actuator avoids trenching an approach that is already paved.

How Do the Safety Sensors Keep the Door From Hitting Somebody?

A powered door that cannot see people is a hazard, so the safety layer is not optional and it is usually where intermittent faults live.

Two kinds of sensing are involved. Approach side sensing watches the area the door swings into. Door mounted sensing rides on the leaf itself and watches the space immediately in front of it as it travels.

Those two cannot both be active all the time, because a door mounted sensor sweeps a different area as the leaf moves and would see the floor, the frame or the wall. That is the job of the door position switch. A surface mount position switch disables the approach side sensor when the door is closed, working together with the door mounted safety sensor and a relay module, so the operator knows which part of its cycle it is in.

The practical consequence: when a powered door starts stalling, reopening for no reason, or refusing to settle, check the sensors and the position switch before condemning the operator. Our guide to actuators, sensors and accessories for automatic operators covers those components individually.

What Connects the Operator to the Door?

The operator drives the door through an arm, and the arm is a wearing part in a way the operator body is not.

Push arms are ordered by length and by finish, so a 20 inch push arm exists in aluminium and in bronze as two separate part numbers. If the arm has been bent by somebody forcing the door, the replacement has to match both.

Track driven operators use a different arrangement again, with the arm running in a track rather than folding at an elbow. Sliding door operators like the SlidePro series replace the arm entirely with a belt and carrier system. Those are three different parts families, so identifying which one you are looking at is the first step in any repair.

LCN 8310-866 flush length actuator bollard post for automatic door opener activation
Bollard posts come in flush length and full length versions, and as actuator only or complete packages.

Can an Automatic Door Opener Go on a Fire Rated Door?

Yes, with conditions, and the conditions are the same ones that apply to any powered hold open arrangement.

A fire rated opening has to close and latch when the alarm sounds. An operator that holds a door open, or that simply sits in the way of the door closing under its own spring, has to release and let the door do its job. That means the operator and its hold open function need to be tied into the fire alarm, not left as a mechanical catch somebody can set and forget.

The rating on the door also constrains what can be cut into it or bolted to it. Our commercial door fire rating guide explains what each rating requires of the opening.

Which Operator Series Is on Your Door?

Identifying the series matters more than identifying the brand, because the parts lists are organised by series.

Swing door operators run across several families, including units built around an electrohydraulic mechanism, pneumatic units, and the Benchmark and Senior Swing families. Sliding operators sit in their own series. Each has its own motor, control box, arm set and accessory range, and very little crosses between them.

Start by reading the label inside the header cover. If that is gone, photograph the header end plates, the arm, and the control board, and work from the diagrams. Our commercial door operators guide covers the main models and what distinguishes them, and the Benchmark and Senior Swing parts guide covers those two families specifically.

What Goes Wrong With Automatic Door Openers?

Powered door symptoms and where to look
SymptomLikely causeCheck first
Door does not open when the plate is pressedActivation signal not reaching the operatorThe actuator itself, then its wiring or wireless pairing, before the operator
Door opens but will not close fullyClosing control, or a binding doorWhether the door closes by hand. A binding leaf is a hinge or frame problem
Door reopens for no reasonA safety sensor seeing something it should notSensor alignment, lens contamination, and whether the position switch is working
Door stops part way through its swingObstruction detection triggeringAnything in the swing path, then the door itself for drag
Pair of doors collidingSequencing lost between the two operatorsThe control and the interconnection between the leaves
Intermittent faults with no patternPower supply or a loose connectionSupply voltage under load, then every terminal in the header

For faults on the mechanical side of the same opening, our commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide covers closers, latches and strikes.

What Should You Confirm Before Ordering Operator Parts?

  1. The operator series, read from the label inside the header.
  2. The configuration, single, double or dual egress.
  3. Swing or slide, because the parts families do not overlap.
  4. The activation device, including gang size, icon and whether it is wired or wireless.
  5. Arm length and finish, for anything that connects the operator to the door.
  6. Whether the opening is fire rated, which constrains hold open.

Everything here is stocked at component level. Browse door operator parts, the wider LCN parts range, or the full products and parts index if you already have a part number.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For the rest of the powered opening, see our door closer parts section and our guide to the four main types of commercial door closer.

Hydraulic Door Closers Explained: How the Fluid Controls the Door

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A hydraulic door closer stores energy in a spring when the door opens, then releases it through oil forced past adjustable valves on the way closed.
  • The spring decides how hard the door pulls. The oil decides how fast. Those are two different problems and two different fixes.
  • The oil is why closers behave differently in winter. Cold oil is thicker, so a door that was fine in August can fail to latch in January.
  • A leaking closer cannot be adjusted back to health. Once the fluid is going, the control is going with it.
  • The body carrying the spring and the oil is sold as a cylinder assembly, and on many models it is adjustable across a range of sizes.
Spring or oil: which one is your problem
What you noticeSpring or oil
Door is too heavy to push openSpring, the closer is set too strong for the opening
Door closes too fast or too slowOil, the sweep valve is controlling that
Door slams in the last few inchesOil, the latch valve controls that final section
Door closes but will not push the latch homeSpring, there is not enough energy left to beat the latch

Almost every commercial door closer you will touch is hydraulic. The word gets used so routinely that it stops meaning anything, which is a shame, because understanding what the oil is actually doing explains most of the faults people spend hours chasing.

This guide is about the mechanism rather than the model range. For the different types of closer and the grading system, see our guide to the four main types of commercial door closer.

How Does a Hydraulic Door Closer Actually Work?

There are two energy events in every cycle and it helps to keep them separate.

Opening. When somebody pushes the door, they are compressing a spring inside the closer body. All the energy that will later close the door is put in at this moment, by the person opening it.

The closer is not powered. It has no motor and nothing stored between uses.

Closing. When the door is released, the spring pushes back. If it were allowed to act freely the door would fly shut and slam.

So the spring has to drive a piston through a chamber of oil, and the oil can only escape through small passages. Those passages have needle valves in them, and how far each valve is open decides how quickly the oil gets out of the way.

That is the whole idea. The spring provides the force. The oil provides the timing. Almost every closer complaint resolves to one or the other, and telling them apart saves a great deal of fiddling.

LCN 1261-3071 standard cylinder assembly, the hydraulic body of a commercial door closer
The cylinder assembly is the hydraulic unit itself. It holds the spring, the piston and the oil, and it is the part that is replaced when a closer is leaking.

What Do the Valves on a Hydraulic Door Closer Control?

The adjustment screws on the end of the body are not volume controls or strength controls. Each one meters the oil through a different part of the swing.

What each valve governs
ValvePart of the swing it controlsSymptom when it is wrong
SweepThe main closing travel, from wide open down to roughly the last few inchesDoor closes too fast or crawls
LatchThe final section, where the latch has to be driven homeDoor slams, or stops short of latching
BackcheckThe opening direction, cushioning a door thrown open hardDoor hits the wall, or feels like it jams part way open

Backcheck is the one people misunderstand. It is not a door stop and it is not a substitute for one. It cushions the final part of the opening swing so the door is not flung into the wall, but a door that is regularly forced past its intended limit still needs a physical stop.

For the adjustment sequence itself, see our guide to adjusting a fire door closer, which covers the same valves with the compliance constraints that apply on a rated opening.

Why Spring Size Is a Separate Decision From the Valves

Closer size refers to spring strength, and it is matched to the door, not to how the door feels on the day. A wider or heavier door needs more stored energy to close it, so it needs a stronger spring.

Many modern closer bodies are adjustable across a range rather than fixed. A cylinder assembly described as adjustable size 1 through 4 covers several door widths in one part, which is why distributors can stock one unit for a large share of openings instead of six.

What that adjustability does not do is fix a timing problem. Winding spring strength up to force a sticky door shut masks a binding leaf and makes the door harder for everybody to open. Our commercial door closer sizing guide works through sizes against door width.

LCN 1250-3071 cylinder assembly for a hydraulic door closer, holding the spring and hydraulic fluid
Cylinder assemblies are series specific. The same function in a different closer family is a different part number.

Why Does a Hydraulic Door Closer Behave Differently in Winter?

Because oil gets thicker as it gets colder. A fluid that flows easily through a needle valve at room temperature moves more reluctantly near freezing, and the door takes longer to close.

This produces a seasonal pattern that confuses people. An exterior door that behaved perfectly through summer starts failing to latch when the weather turns, and nothing on the door has changed. The valve settings are the same. The oil is simply slower.

Two practical consequences. First, set valves on an exterior closer with the season in mind, and expect to revisit the setting. Second, a door that only fails to latch on cold mornings is telling you it has very little margin, which usually means the spring is under sized for the opening or the door is dragging.

What Happens When a Hydraulic Door Closer Leaks?

It is finished. This is the single most useful thing to know about hydraulic closers.

The oil is not a lubricant that can be topped up. It is the working fluid, and the volume of it is what makes the control possible. Once a seal has failed, the closer is losing the thing that controls the door. Adjusting the valves at that point just redistributes a shrinking amount of fluid, and the setting will not hold.

Signs to look for:

  • A film of oil on the door face below the closer, or drips on the floor.
  • Oil weeping around the valve stems rather than from the body seam.
  • A valve setting that has to be reset every few weeks.
  • A door that was controlled and is now progressively getting faster.

Weeping from the valve stems alone is sometimes just over tightened or damaged valve seats. Oil from the body seam is a dead closer. Either way, the fix is a part, not an adjustment.

Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Powered: What Is the Difference?

Closing mechanisms compared
MechanismHow it controls the doorWhere you find it
HydraulicSpring plus oil metered through needle valvesThe overwhelming majority of commercial openings
PneumaticSpring plus air metered through a ventLighter duty doors, and some automatic operators
Electrohydraulic operatorPowered open, hydraulics still involved in the cycleAutomatic and accessible entrances
Spring only hingeNo metering at allLight interior doors where control is not required

Oil gives finer control than air, which is why it dominates commercial work. It also means the closer carries a fluid that can leak, which air cannot, and that is the trade. Powered openings still rely on controlled closing, so hydraulics often remain part of the picture even when the door opens itself. Our commercial door operators guide covers the powered side.

What Is a Hold Open Hydraulic Closer?

A hold open closer does everything described above and adds one function: at a chosen point in the swing, the door stays where it is put instead of closing.

Mechanically that is usually a detent in the arm or the track that catches the door at a set angle. The user swings the door past that point and it parks. Pull it back past the detent and the closer takes over again as normal.

Two things to know before specifying one. First, hold open is a property of the arm rather than the body on most surface mounted units, so the same closer can be ordered with or without it.

Second, mechanical hold open is not permitted on a fire rated opening. A rated door has to close on alarm, and a detent somebody has set does not release. Where hold open is genuinely needed there, it has to be an electrically released arrangement tied into the fire alarm.

Hold Open and the Latch Problem

A door parked at hold open for most of the day spends very little time actually closing, which hides a weakening closer. Nobody notices the door is losing power until the hold open is released during a drill and the door drifts shut without latching. Test rated doors from fully open with the hold open disengaged, not from the parked position.

How Long Should a Hydraulic Door Closer Last?

There is no single figure, because the answer depends on cycles rather than years. A closer on a store room used twice a day and one on a main corridor used two thousand times a day are not comparable, even if they are the same model fitted on the same date.

What is predictable is the order in which things go wrong.

What usually fails first on a hydraulic closer
StageWhat you seeWhat it means
EarlyFixings working loose, arm connections developing playMechanical wear, repairable with screws and an arm
MiddleValve settings drifting, needing more frequent adjustmentSeals beginning to pass, the closer is on notice
LateVisible oil on the door or floorSeal failure, the body is finished
EndDoor no longer latches from fully open at any settingSpring and hydraulic control both gone

The useful thing about that sequence is the middle stage. A closer that needs resetting every few weeks is giving you several months of warning before it starts dripping on a corridor floor. That is the moment to order the part, not after the leak.

How Do You Identify the Hydraulic Closer on Your Door?

Take the cover off. The body almost always carries a stamped or cast model number, and that number is the fastest route to the right part.

If the stamping is gone, the arm and mounting position narrow it to a family, and the valve layout on the end of the body is the next clue. Three valves in a row is a different unit from two valves plus a separate backcheck on the side.

Our surface mounted door closer guide covers the identification sequence in detail, and the door closer component guide explains what each part does.

Standard cylinder assembly for a hydraulic door closer, showing the body that holds spring and oil
Reading the model number off the body is the fastest way to get the right cylinder assembly.

What Maintenance Does a Hydraulic Door Closer Need?

Very little, and that is part of the problem. Closers are ignored until they fail.

  1. Look for oil on the door face and the floor beneath, twice a year.
  2. Check the door still latches from a fully open position without being helped.
  3. Check the fixings are tight, particularly on hollow doors where screws work loose.
  4. Check the arm is straight and that its connections are not worn oval.
  5. Check there is a working door stop, because backcheck is not one.
  6. Retest exterior doors seasonally, because the oil behaves differently in cold weather.

For faults on the rest of the opening, our commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide covers latches, strikes and exit devices. Browse door closer parts for cylinder assemblies, arms and covers, or start from the full products and parts index.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For more on the closer, see the LCN door closer parts and service guide and the full LCN parts range.

Surface Mounted Door Closers: What They Are, Where the Body Goes, and How to Identify Yours

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A surface mounted door closer is one whose body sits on the face of the door or the frame where you can see it, rather than being hidden inside either.
  • Surface mounted is a statement about where the body lives. It is not the same question as which arm the closer uses, and the two get confused constantly.
  • The model number is usually stamped on the body or printed under the cover. Finding it is the single fastest way to order the right part.
  • Drop plates and brackets exist because the frame does not always give the closer somewhere flat to sit. Two plates for the same mounting can solve two completely different frame problems.
  • A cover can be handed even when the closer body is not, which is a common and annoying ordering mistake.
Surface mounted at a glance
QuestionShort answer
Where is the bodyOn the face of the door or the face of the frame, visible and reachable
Can you service it without pulling the doorYes, which is the main reason it dominates repair work
Does it need a prep in the doorNo pocket or mortise. It needs through bolts or screw fixings only
Can you identify it without removing anythingUsually yes, from the cover and the arm shape

Most commercial closers you will ever touch are surface mounted, and most people never think about the term until they need a part. Then it matters, because the first thing a supplier needs to know is whether the unit is sitting on the door or buried in it.

This guide is about the surface mounted family specifically: what defines it, how to work out which one is on your door, and the parts that only exist because the closer is mounted on the outside. For the full taxonomy of closer types, see our guide to the four main types of commercial door closer.

What Makes a Door Closer Surface Mounted?

A surface mounted closer has its body fixed to the outside of the opening. You can see it, touch it, and unscrew it without taking the door off its hinges or opening up the frame.

That is the whole definition. It says nothing about the size, the arm, the brand or the application. It says where the hydraulic body lives.

The alternative is a concealed closer, where the body is hidden inside the door leaf, inside the frame head, or in the floor beneath the door. Those require the opening to be machined for them, usually at the factory, which is why they are mostly specified for new work and almost never retrofitted into an existing door.

The Three Parts You Can See

On any surface mounted closer there are three visible elements, and naming them correctly makes every conversation with a supplier faster:

  • The body, or cylinder assembly. The metal casting that holds the spring and the hydraulic fluid. This is the part that does the work and the part that fails expensively.
  • The arm. The linkage from the body to whichever surface the body is not mounted on. Its shape is the quickest visual clue to how the closer is mounted.
  • The cover. A shell that clips or screws over the body. Cosmetic, protective, and the thing most likely to be missing on a door that has been serviced badly.

The body carries a size. An adjustable cylinder assembly will state its range, for example a size 1 through 4 adjustable unit, which means one part covers several door widths rather than being fixed to a single spring strength.

LCN 4040XPT-3071 standard cylinder assembly, the body of a surface mounted door closer
The cylinder assembly is the closer body. On a surface mounted unit this is what sits exposed on the door or frame, usually under a cover.

Where Does the Body Sit on a Surface Mounted Closer?

Surface mounted closers go on in one of three positions, and the position decides what you are looking at when you stand in front of the door.

The three surface mounting positions
PositionBody sits onArm reaches toYou are looking at it from
Regular armThe pull side face of the doorThe frame headThe side the door opens toward you
Parallel armThe push side face of the doorA bracket on the frame soffitThe side the door swings away from you
Top jambThe frame face above the openingThe push side face of the doorEither side, body is on the frame not the door

Top jamb is the one people forget is still surface mounted. The body has moved off the door and onto the frame, but it is still bolted to the outside of the opening, still visible, and still serviceable from a ladder. Hidden inside the frame head is a different thing entirely and is not surface mounted.

The arm itself is a deeper subject than this page needs to cover. Our door closer selection guide works through regular, parallel and top jamb arms in detail, including which to pick for which opening.

How Do You Identify the Surface Mounted Closer Already on Your Door?

This is the question that actually blocks most repairs. The closer is leaking or slamming, somebody needs a part, and nobody knows what the unit is.

Work through it in this order.

Take the Cover Off First

The cover is usually held by one or two screws at the ends, sometimes by a clip. Under it, the body almost always carries a stamped or cast model number, and often a date. That number is the answer, and everything else below is for when the number has worn away.

Read the Arm Shape

If the number is gone, the arm narrows it down fast. A straight two piece arm running from the door up to the frame head is a regular arm installation. An arm that runs from the body out to a bracket on the underside of the frame head is a parallel arm. A single rigid arm running into a track rather than folding at an elbow means a track arm closer, which is a different parts family again.

What to Photograph Before You Order

Six photographs will let any supplier identify a closer without guesswork:

  1. The body with the cover removed, square on, so any stamping is readable.
  2. The full opening from the side the closer is on, far enough back to show which face it is mounted to.
  3. The arm, including where it lands on the frame or the door.
  4. Any bracket or plate between the closer and the surface it is bolted to.
  5. The adjustment valves on the end of the body.
  6. Any label on the door edge, for fire rated openings.

If the unit is coming off anyway, our walkthrough of how to install a door closer on a commercial door covers what the replacement will need in terms of fixings and prep.

What Is a Drop Plate and Why Would a Surface Mounted Closer Need One?

A drop plate is a flat metal plate that goes between the closer and the surface it is mounting to. It exists for one reason: the surface is not giving the closer what it needs.

That sounds trivial. It is the single most common reason a closer that was ordered correctly cannot actually be fitted on the day.

The useful thing to understand is that two drop plates for the same mounting position can be solving two completely different problems. Two top jamb plates from the same family make the point:

Two top jamb drop plates, two different frame problems
PlateWhat it is forThe condition it solves
LCN 4040XP-18GLocates a top jamb mounted closer flush with the top of the head frame faceA flush ceiling condition, where the closer cannot sit proud of the frame
LCN 4040XP-18TJCenters a top jamb mounted closer vertically on the head frameA head frame whose face is less than 3-1/2 inches, so there is not enough flat metal for the standard pattern

One is about the ceiling above the frame. The other is about the frame being too narrow. Ordering the wrong one gets you a plate that bolts to nothing useful.

Measure the frame face before you order, and look up at what is above the frame. Those two observations decide the plate.

LCN 4040XP-18TJ drop plate for a top jamb mounted surface door closer on a narrow head frame
A drop plate gives the closer a flat landing it would not otherwise have. This one centers a top jamb closer on a head frame narrower than 3-1/2 inches.

Why Do Surface Mounted Closers Have Covers, and Does It Matter Which One?

A concealed closer does not need a cover because nobody can see it. A surface mounted closer sits in plain view on a corridor door, so the cover does three jobs: it hides the body, it carries the finish that matches the rest of the hardware, and it keeps fingers and trolleys off the adjustment valves.

Two things about covers catch people out.

Covers come in the full finish range. The same metal cover will be listed in a long list of powder coat and plated finishes, from aluminium and dark bronze through to satin chrome and satin nickel. Ordering the right part number in the wrong finish gives you a working closer that looks wrong on the door. Our commercial door hardware finish guide explains how the finish codes map to each other.

A cover can be handed even when the body is not. This is the one that produces returns. A standard cylinder assembly is frequently non-handed, so one part serves both left and right hand doors.

The metal cover for that same closer can still be offered as a left hand or a right hand part. Non-handed body does not mean non-handed cover, and the handing has to be stated when you order.

LCN 4040XPT-72MC metal cover for a surface mounted track arm door closer
Metal covers are listed in the full finish range and can be handed left or right even when the closer body is non-handed.

Surface Mounted or Concealed: Which Belongs on Which Door?

This is a design decision on new work and almost never a real choice on an existing opening, because the door either has the pocket machined into it or it does not.

Surface mounted compared with concealed
ConsiderationSurface mountedConcealed
Visible on the openingYes, body and arm bothLittle or nothing visible
Door or frame preparationThrough bolts or screws onlyMachined pocket in the door, frame head or floor
Retrofit onto an existing doorPractical on most openingsRarely practical without replacing the door
Access for adjustmentValves reachable from a ladderOften needs the door or a cover plate removed
Access for replacementUnbolt and swapCan mean lifting the door out
Exposure to damage and tamperingHigher, it is within reachLower, it is out of reach
Where it usually winsRepair, retrofit, back of house, high traffic service doorsLobbies and entrances where appearance is the priority

Neither is better. They are answers to different questions. A facilities team maintaining a building full of existing doors will deal almost entirely with surface mounted units, because that is what is already fitted and what can be replaced without a carpenter.

Is a Surface Mounted Door Closer Handed?

The body usually is not. Many surface mounted closer bodies are explicitly non-handed, which is part of why they are stocked so widely: one unit covers both hands of door.

What is handed, or can be, is everything around the body. Covers are the obvious one. Some arms and hold open arms are non-handed and some are not, and the description on the part is the only thing that settles it. An arm described as non-handed, supplied with a long head and tube for top jamb mounting, is telling you both that it fits either hand and that it is intended for one specific mounting position.

So the practical rule is simple. Do not assume the whole assembly inherits the handing of the body. Check the handing on each part you are ordering.

LCN 4040XP-3049L non handed hold open long arm for a top jamb mounted surface door closer
This hold open long arm is non-handed but is specific to top jamb mounting, which shows how handing and mounting are two separate questions.

What Changes on a Fire Rated Door?

A surface mounted closer on a fire rated opening is doing a life safety job, not a convenience job. It has to close and latch the door every time, not merely swing it most of the way shut.

Three things follow from that. The closer has to be a listed unit suited to the rating of the opening. Hold open, where it is used at all, has to release on alarm rather than being a mechanical catch that somebody leaves set. And the spring strength cannot simply be wound down to make the door easier to open, because the door still has to overcome the latch.

That last point is where well intentioned maintenance goes wrong most often. Our guide to adjusting a fire door closer covers the compliance side, and the commercial door fire rating guide explains what the rating on the opening actually requires.

Why Do Surface Mounted Closers Dominate Retrofit Work?

Four reasons, and they all come back to the body being on the outside.

  • No machining. Fitting one means drilling and bolting, not routing a pocket into a door leaf that may be fire rated and cannot legally be cut on site.
  • The door stays hung. A concealed unit in the door often means taking the leaf off. A surface unit is replaced with the door in place.
  • Adjustment without disassembly. Sweep, latch and backcheck valves are on the end of the body, reachable with the cover off and the door hanging normally.
  • Parts are available at component level. Arms, covers, plates, screws and cylinder assemblies are all separately replaceable, so a damaged arm does not mean a new closer.

That last point is worth taking seriously on a maintenance budget. A great many closers get replaced whole when a single part had failed. Our door closer component guide walks through what each part does and which ones are worth replacing on their own.

What Fails on a Surface Mounted Door Closer?

Being exposed is the advantage and the weakness. A surface mounted closer takes knocks that a concealed one never sees.

Common surface mounted closer symptoms
SymptomLikely causeWhat to check first
Oil on the door face or the floor belowSeal failure in the bodyWhether the leak is from the body or from the valve stems. A leaking body is a replacement, not an adjustment
Door slams at the end of its travelLatch speed valve open too far, or a failing bodyLatch valve first. If adjusting it changes nothing, the body is losing control
Door will not close the last few inchesSpring weakened, or the door is bindingWhether the door closes when pushed by hand. If it binds by hand it is a hinge or frame problem, not the closer
Arm bent or pulled away from its fixingDoor forced past its intended stopWhether there is a working door stop. Without one this repeats
Fixings loose or pulling out of the doorScrews into a hollow door with no reinforcementWhether through bolts should have been used instead of screws
Cover missing or rattlingLost during earlier service workThe cover part number and the finish, both of which are ordered separately

Why Winding the Valves Further Is Rarely the Answer

When a closer stops behaving, the instinct is to reach for the valves. Sometimes that is correct. But the valves control how the spring energy is released, not how much of it there is. If the body has lost fluid or the spring has weakened, more valve adjustment just moves the problem around and can empty the body faster.

The test is whether the adjustment holds. A valve that needs resetting every few weeks is telling you the body is finished. For faults elsewhere on the opening, our commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide covers latches, strikes and exit devices on the same door.

What Should You Confirm Before Ordering Parts?

Seven details, and the first one settles most of the rest.

  1. The model number from the body, read with the cover off.
  2. The mounting position, regular arm, parallel arm or top jamb.
  3. Whether the arm is a folding arm or runs in a track, because the parts families differ.
  4. The handing of the door, for any part whose description mentions hand.
  5. The finish, matched to the rest of the hardware on the opening.
  6. Whether a plate or bracket is already fitted, and if so what it is doing.
  7. Whether the opening is fire rated, which constrains what you are allowed to fit.

With the model number and the mounting in hand, everything else follows from the diagram. Start from the door closer parts section, or the full products and parts index if you already have the part number.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For the rest of the closer, see our commercial door closer sizing guide, the LCN door closer parts and service guide, and the full LCN parts range.

Request to Exit and Door Position Switches: What They Do and How to Wire Them

Quick Summary

Key points

  • A door position switch reports one thing only: whether the door leaf is open or closed. It knows nothing about the latch, the lock or the credential.
  • A request to exit switch reports that somebody on the inside pushed the bar or the lever, so the panel can tell a legitimate exit from a break-in.
  • The two are wired to different inputs on the panel and they do different jobs. Fitting one does not cover the other.
  • Most of these switches are SPDT, which gives you a normally open and a normally closed contact from the same device. Which pair you land on decides whether a cut wire raises an alarm or hides one.
  • On exit devices the monitoring is ordered as suffix codes. RX, LX and SS each watch a different thing, and picking the wrong one is the most common ordering mistake on a monitored opening.
The two switches at a glance
SwitchSensesPanel uses it to
Door position switch (DPS)Door leaf open or closedRaise forced open and held open alarms, relock on close
Request to exit switch (RX)Push bar, touch pad or lever being operatedSuppress the forced open alarm while somebody leaves
Latch monitor (LX)Latch bolt projected or retractedProve the opening is actually secured, not just shut

Two switches turn an ordinary opening into a monitored one, and they are constantly mixed up. A technician is told the door needs monitoring, fits one switch, and the panel still throws a forced door alarm every time somebody leaves. The hardware is fine. The wrong switch was fitted, or the right switch was wired to the wrong contact.

This guide covers both devices at component level: what each one senses, how the contacts behave, which part fits which door, and what the wiring actually has to do at the panel. For how these switches sit inside a wider electrified opening, see our access control and door hardware integration guide.

What Is a Door Position Switch and What Does It Actually Monitor?

A door position switch, usually shortened to DPS, monitors whether the door is open or closed, independent of the latch state. That last part is the bit people miss. The switch watches the gap between the leaf and the frame. It does not know whether the latch bolt has thrown, whether the lock is secure, or who opened the door.

Physically it is two pieces. A switch body goes in the frame and a magnet or actuator goes in the door edge opposite it, so closing the door brings them together and changes the state of the contacts. Pull the door open and the contacts change back.

That single piece of information drives most of what an access control system does after the door opens:

  • Door forced open. The door went open with no valid credential and no exit request. Without a DPS the panel cannot detect this at all.
  • Door held open. The door has been open longer than the allowed time, so something is propping it.
  • Relock on close. Fail secure hardware can be told to drop back to locked the moment the door closes, rather than waiting out a fixed timer.
  • Interlocks and operators. Automatic operators and mantraps need to know the leaf is closed before the next thing is allowed to happen.

Why the Latch State Is a Separate Question

A closed door is not a locked door. A door can sit closed against the stop with the latch bolt held back, and a DPS will happily report closed. If you need to know that the opening is actually secured, you need latch monitoring as well, which on an exit device is a different switch entirely.

What Is a Request to Exit Switch and Why Is It Required?

A request to exit switch, written RX or REX, generates a signal to the access control panel whenever the push bar or touch pad is actuated. It is how the panel tells a person leaving the building from a person forcing the door.

Without it the system has no way to interpret an opening from the inside. Somebody pushes the bar, the door swings, the DPS reports open, and because no credential was presented the panel calls it a forced door. Every legitimate exit becomes an alarm, and within a week nobody is reading the alarms any more.

On access controlled egress doors the request to exit signal is not optional. The egress side has to stay mechanically free, so the building relies on the RX signal to keep the monitoring honest rather than restricting the exit itself.

How the Shunt Window Works

When the RX contact changes state, the panel records an egress event and suppresses the door forced alarm for a set period, typically in the range of five to ten seconds. That window is called the shunt. The door is expected to open and close again inside it.

Two things go wrong with shunt timing. Set it too short and a slow closer or a person holding the door produces nuisance alarms. Set it too long and somebody can push the bar, prop the door and walk away with the alarm suppressed. The shunt is a security setting, not just a convenience setting.

Door Position Switch vs Request to Exit: What Is the Difference?

Put plainly: the DPS watches the door, the RX watches the hardware being operated. A monitored opening normally needs both, wired to two separate panel inputs.

Door position switch compared with request to exit
QuestionDoor position switchRequest to exit switch
What it sensesDoor leaf open or closedPush bar, touch pad or lever being operated
Where it mountsDoor edge and frame, or door face and frame faceInside the exit device or lock body
What the panel does with itRaises forced open and held open alarms, triggers relockSuppresses the forced open alarm for the shunt window
Does it know the latch is thrownNoNo, unless you also fit latch monitoring
Does it know who opened the doorNoNo
What happens if you omit itNo forced entry detection at allEvery normal exit reads as a forced door

What Do the Exit Device Switch Codes RX, LX, SS and LC Mean?

On exit devices the monitoring is not a separate box on the wall. It is a switch kit inside the device, ordered as a suffix on the part number. Four codes come up constantly and they are not interchangeable.

Exit device monitoring suffixes and what each one watches
CodeFull nameWhat it monitorsTypical use
RXRequest to exitSignals the panel when the device is actuatedAny access controlled egress door
LXLatch monitorWhether the latch bolt is projected or retractedProving the opening is actually secured
SSSignal switchBar depression, as a dry contact that closes when the push bar or touch pad is depressedSimple egress signalling where latch state is not needed
LCLow currentNot a sensing function. It is the low current switch configurationMatching the switch rating to low current panel inputs

Why LX and RX Are Not the Same Thing

This is the ordering mistake that costs the most. LX reports the latch bolt. RX reports the egress event. A door can give you a clean LX signal and still produce forced door alarms all day, because the panel was never told that somebody pushed the bar.

SS sits between them. It is simpler than RX because it monitors the bar being depressed rather than the latch retracting, which is enough for a basic egress signal but tells you nothing about whether the device actually released.

Kits are also length specific. A switch kit built for a 48 inch device will not serve a 36 inch device, so the device width has to be confirmed before the kit is ordered. Browse the exit device parts section for the switch kits that match your device.

Von Duprin 050291 LX-RX-LC switch kit for a 4 foot exit device, combining latch monitoring and request to exit
A combined kit carries more than one function. This one provides latch bolt monitoring and request to exit monitoring in a single assembly sized for a 48 inch device.

Which Door Position Switch Fits Which Door?

Door position switches are not generic. The two things that decide the part number are how it mounts and what the door and frame are made of. A switch bored into a hollow metal frame is a different part from the one that surface mounts on an aluminium storefront.

Door position switch selection by mounting and door material
PartMountingDoor and frameSwitch typeRating
Schlage 679-05ConcealedUsed in electronic access control applicationsSPDT0.3 A at 30 VDC
Schlage 679-05HMConcealedHollow metal doors and framesSPDT0.3 A at 30 VDC
Schlage 679-05WDConcealedWood doors and framesCheck the current data sheetCheck the current data sheet
Schlage 7766Surface mount, magneticAluminium, wood and hollow metalSPDT0.25 A at 30 VDC
LCN 8310-805Surface mountUsed with automatic operatorsCheck the current data sheetCheck the current data sheet

Concealed switches disappear into the opening and cannot be tampered with from the occupied side, but they need a prep in both the door edge and the frame. That prep is straightforward on a new opening and a real job on an existing one. Surface mount magnetic switches need no prep at all, which is why they dominate retrofits, but they are visible and they sit where a trolley or a cart can hit them.

Schlage 679-05 concealed door position switch for electronic access control
A concealed door position switch mounts out of sight in the frame, with its actuator opposite in the door edge.

What Do SPDT, Form A, Form B and Form C Mean?

Nearly every spec sheet for these switches uses contact form language, and getting it wrong is how a monitored door ends up quietly unmonitored.

Contact forms in plain language
TermWhat it meansBehaviour
Form ASingle pole single throw, normally openOne pair of contacts. Open at rest, closed when actuated
Form BSingle pole single throw, normally closedOne pair of contacts. Closed at rest, open when actuated
Form CSingle pole double throw, also written SPDTA common terminal plus both a normally open and a normally closed contact. You choose which pair you use
Dry contactA contact that supplies no voltage of its ownIt simply makes or breaks a circuit the panel powers

Most of the door position switches on this site are SPDT, which is the same thing as Form C. The Schlage 679-05 provides normally open and normally closed contacts from the one device, and the Schlage 7766 is also SPDT. That gives you a choice at install time, and the choice matters more than it looks.

Normally Closed Is Usually the Safer Default

Wire a DPS on the normally closed contact and the circuit sits closed while the door is shut. Open the door and the circuit breaks, so the panel sees a change. Cut the wire, pull the switch off the frame, or lose a connection in the loop and the panel also sees a break. The failure looks like an alarm.

Wire the same switch normally open and a cut wire looks exactly like a door that is sitting quietly closed. Nothing is reported. On a door that matters, supervise the loop or use the normally closed contact so that a fault announces itself.

How Do You Wire a Door Position Switch?

The electrical side is simple. The complications are mechanical and they are all about the gap.

The switch is a dry contact into a monitor input on the panel or controller. Two conductors run from the switch to that input, and the panel supplies whatever small voltage it needs to sense the state.

The ratings are modest for the same reason. The Schlage 679-05 and 679-05HM are rated 0.3 amps at 30 VDC, and the 7766 is rated 0.25 amps at 30 VDC. These are signalling contacts, not switching contacts. Never run lock current through them.

What actually causes trouble on site:

  • Alignment. Magnetic switches have a working gap. Push past it and the contacts stop changing reliably, so a door that looks shut reports open. A sagging door, a worn hinge or a closer that is not pulling the leaf fully home all show up here first.
  • Which leaf it goes on. On a pair, the switch belongs on the active leaf unless both leaves need monitoring, in which case you need two switches and the panel has to treat them sensibly.
  • Getting the wires across. If the switch sits in the door rather than the frame, the conductors have to cross the hinge line, which means a power transfer or an electrified hinge. Our electric power transfer guide covers how to do that without creasing a conductor.
  • Keeping signal away from power. Run the monitoring pair separately from lock power. Shared conduit with a switching load is a reliable way to manufacture phantom door events.

How Do You Wire a Request to Exit Switch?

An RX switch is also a dry contact, but it can be used in two completely different ways, and conflating them is the root of most REX confusion.

Shunting Versus Unlocking

Shunting is the normal case. The RX contact goes to the panel's request to exit input. Somebody pushes the bar, the panel opens the shunt window, the DPS reports the door opening, and no alarm is raised. The lock itself does nothing, because an exit device already releases mechanically.

Unlocking applies where the egress side is not mechanically free, for example a fail secure electric strike on a door with a lever that is locked from the inside. Here the request to exit device, often a sensor or a button rather than a bar switch, has to actually release the lock. That is a different circuit with life safety consequences, and it is the case where a failed switch traps people rather than just producing a nuisance alarm.

Know which of the two you are building before you pick the part. For the broader comparison of what releases a door and when, see our guide to an electrified mortise lock versus an electric strike and our electromagnetic lock parts guide, since a maglock opening handles egress differently again.

Switch Kits Are Device Specific

A request to exit switch for an exit device is ordered against the device family and the device width. A Von Duprin 050251-CON request to exit switch with connector installed, for example, is listed as fitting 22, 33A, 35A, 98 and 99 style devices. Confirm both the series and the rail length before ordering, and check the Von Duprin 98/99 series parts manual if you are working on those devices.

What Do Electronic Locks Use Instead of a Separate Switch?

Standalone and networked electronic locks often carry their own monitoring rather than relying on a switch in the frame. The request to exit function is built into the lever, because turning the inside lever is itself the egress event, and the lock reports it over its own connection.

Door position is the part that still needs hardware. On Schlage NDE series locks the door position function is supplied as a DPS wiring kit containing a magnet, a switch and a wiring harness. The same part is listed for LE series mortise deadbolt locks as an external DPS kit. If the lock was ordered without it, the function is simply absent until the kit is fitted.

Schlage L483-055 door position switch DPS wiring kit with magnet, switch and harness for NDE and LE series locks
Electronic locks take door position as a kit rather than a frame mounted switch. This one covers NDE series and LE series mortise deadbolt locks.

Mortise locks can also carry signalling internally. A signal switch mortise lock reports hardware operation from inside the lock case, which keeps the monitoring hidden and removes a separate device from the frame. For the mechanical side of those lock bodies, see our Schlage L series mortise lock component guide.

How Does Door Position Monitoring Work on an Automatic Operator?

On an automatic door operator the switch is doing something different again. It is not feeding an alarm panel, it is feeding the operator's own safety logic.

The LCN 8310-805 is a surface mount door position switch that disables the approach side sensor when the door is closed. It is applied with the 8310-804-1 or 8310-804-2 door mounted safety sensor and the 8310-845 relay module, working with an electrohydraulic, pneumatic or Benchmark automatic operator. A concealed version, the 8310-805C, covers installations where a surface device is unacceptable.

The reason this exists is that a door mounted sensor sweeps a different area as the leaf swings. Leaving the approach side sensor active through the whole cycle produces false detections and a door that will not settle. The position switch tells the operator which part of the cycle it is in.

Should You Use a Magnetic or a Mechanical Door Position Switch?

Both are in service everywhere and the choice is usually decided by the opening rather than by preference.

Magnetic switches use a reed contact in the switch body and a magnet in the door. Nothing touches, so there is nothing to wear out and nothing to bind when the door is slightly out of alignment, within the working gap. They are the practical choice for high cycle doors and for retrofits, since the surface mount versions need no door prep.

Mechanical plunger switches use a physical actuator that the door depresses as it closes. They are not fooled by an external magnet, which matters where tampering is a real concern, but the plunger is a moving part in the path of the door and it wears.

Where tamper resistance is the whole point, high security balanced magnetic switches exist as a separate class, built so that holding an external magnet against the frame does not defeat them.

Schlage 7766 surface mount magnetic door position switch for aluminium, wood and hollow metal doors
Surface mount magnetic switches need no door prep, which is why they dominate retrofit work on existing openings.

What Goes Wrong With These Switches and How Do You Find It?

Almost every fault on a monitored opening reduces to one of six things. Work down this list before replacing anything.

Monitored opening troubleshooting
SymptomLikely causeWhat to check first
Forced door alarm on every normal exitNo request to exit signal reaching the panelWhether an RX switch is fitted at all, then whether its contact lands on the correct panel input
Door reports open when it is visibly closedGap exceeded, or the leaf is not pulling fully homeHinge wear, door sag, closer final force, and the alignment of switch to magnet
Door reports closed when it is openContact welded, magnet relocated, or a short in the loopMeter the contact across the door swinging, not just at rest
Intermittent events with no patternMonitoring pair sharing a route with switching lock powerWhether the signal pair is separated from the lock supply
Nothing reported at all, no alarms everWired to the normally open contact with an open circuit faultContinuity end to end, then move to the normally closed contact
Works with the door open, fails as it closesConductor pinched or creased at the hinge lineWalk the door slowly through the full swing while watching the transfer point

For faults that are mechanical rather than electrical, our commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide covers the closer, latch and strike side of the same opening.

What Should You Confirm Before Ordering?

Six details decide whether the part that arrives is the part that fits.

  1. Which function you actually need. Door position, request to exit, latch monitoring, or more than one of them.
  2. Mounting. Concealed, which needs a prep, or surface mount, which does not.
  3. Door and frame material. Hollow metal, wood and aluminium take different parts.
  4. Contact form and rating. Confirm the switch gives you the contact you intend to wire, and that the panel input sits inside the switch rating.
  5. Device series and length, for anything that goes inside an exit device.
  6. Whether the conductors cross the hinge line, which decides if you also need a power transfer.

Everything in this guide is stocked at component level. Start from the full products and parts index if you already know the part number, or work from the diagram for your device.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex and Adams Rite at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For the rest of the electrified opening, see our electric strike schematic diagram, the Von Duprin QEL conversion kit guide, and our explanation of what delayed egress is and when code requires it.

Mortise Cylinder vs Rim Cylinder: How to Tell Them Apart and Order the Right One

Mortise cylinder vs rim cylinder is one of those distinctions that looks obvious once you are holding both parts and is almost impossible to resolve from a photograph on a phone. This guide covers how each one mounts, the measuring convention that causes most wrong orders, why the cam matters more than the length, and the short list of checks that stops a cylinder going back in the box.

Quick Summary

A mortise cylinder has a threaded brass body that screws into the lock and drives the lock with a rotating cam on the back. A rim cylinder has a flat back with a long flat tailpiece and mounts with two screws from the inside face of the door. The lock body decides which one you need, not the door and not the key.

Key points

  • Start at the lock, not the cylinder. Mortise lock bodies take mortise cylinders. Rim exit devices take rim cylinders.
  • The cam is the variable that fails you. A wrong cam threads in perfectly and still will not operate the lock.
  • Nominal length is a designation, not a caliper reading. Manufacturers do not all measure from the same datum.
  • Jumbo and standard are different diameters. That is why a cylinder sometimes will not start on the thread at all.
  • Rim tailpieces get cut to length in the field. Longer is not safer, and excess can bind the lock.
  • Collars make up the difference when the cylinder would otherwise sit proud of the trim.

 

Mortise and rim cylinders side by side
FeatureMortise cylinderRim cylinder
BodyThreaded brass, screws into the lockSmooth, flat back, no thread
How it is retainedSet screw in the lock edge, seating in a grooveTwo long screws through a back plate from the inside
What drives the lockA cam that rotatesA flat tailpiece that rotates
Typical homeMortise lock bodies, storefront deadlocks, exit device trimRim exit devices, rim deadlocks, night latch trim
Length comes inGraduated sizes, commonly 1 inch to 1-1/4 inchOne body size, with the tailpiece cut to suit
Field adjustmentCollars and spacer ringsCut the tailpiece, and shorten the mounting screws
Interchangeable core availableYesYes

What Is the Difference Between a Mortise Cylinder and a Rim Cylinder?

The difference is how the cylinder attaches and how it transmits motion into the lock. Everything else follows from those two things.

A mortise cylinder threads into a tapped hole in the lock or the door. A set screw in the edge of the lock drops into a groove machined around the cylinder body and holds it from backing out. Because that groove has to line up with the screw, the cylinder has to finish at the correct rotational position, which the trade calls clocking it.

A rim cylinder does not thread into anything. It sits against the outside face of the door, and two long screws pass through the door into the back of the cylinder, usually through a mounting plate on the inside. A flat tailpiece projects back through the door and engages the device.

Both types share the same body diameter in commercial sizes, which is why they look so similar in a parts drawer and so different the moment you turn them over.

Schlage 26-102 FSIC mortise housing, a threaded mortise cylinder housing for LM and LMV series locks
A threaded mortise housing. The thread and the groove for the set screw are the two features that identify a mortise cylinder on sight.

How Do You Tell Which One You Are Holding?

Look at the back, not the face. The face of the two is nearly identical.

  1. Is there a thread on the body? Thread means mortise. A smooth body means rim.
  2. What sticks out of the back? A cam is a flat plate that rotates around the cylinder axis. A tailpiece is a long flat bar that projects straight back, a bit like a screwdriver blade.
  3. Is there a groove around the body? Mortise cylinders carry a groove for the set screw. Rim cylinders do not.
  4. Are there two screw holes in the back? That is a rim cylinder, and those screws come from the inside of the door.

The quickest field shorthand is motion. A mortise cam rotates and catches a plate that pulls back into the lock body. A rim tailpiece rotates and drives the device directly.

Which Lock Takes Which Cylinder?

Work from the device on the door. This is the step that prevents most wrong orders, because people tend to start from the cylinder they removed rather than from what it was fitted to.

Device to cylinder routing
What is on the doorCylinder typeWatch out for
Mortise lock bodyMortiseCam must match the lock maker and often the function
Storefront deadlock in an aluminum stileMortiseNarrow stile usually means a shorter cylinder and a specific cam
Rim exit deviceRimTailpiece length and orientation both matter
Exit device night latch trimRim type tailpieceSome trim is rated for rim devices only
Rim deadlock or jimmy proof lockRimTailpiece engagement can be shorter than you expect
Mortise exit deviceMortiseMortise devices usually need the mortise specific trim part number
Cylindrical locksetNeitherTakes a key in knob or key in lever cylinder, a different format
DeadboltDepends on the deadboltCommercial deadbolts vary. Check the existing part before ordering

If the device is a rim exit device, our guide to rim exit devices covers the trim functions that decide whether you need a cylinder at all. For mortise bodies, Schlage L series mortise lock component guide walks through the component categories.

Where Do You Measure a Mortise Cylinder From?

This is the question that generates the most returns, and the honest answer is uncomfortable: the convention is not uniform across manufacturers.

Published guidance variously describes measuring from the underside of the cylinder head to the back of the cylinder including the cam, from the front of the face to the back of the brass body excluding the tailpiece, and from under the head to the outside of the cam. These are not all the same datum, and they do not all give the same number on the same part.

On top of that, at least one major manufacturer states the brass body length only while others include the cam. The practical consequence is that a cylinder sold as a given nominal size may not measure that figure with calipers.

The rule that actually works. Treat the catalogue size as a designation, not a measurement. When you are matching an existing cylinder, measure the old one and order the same nominal size from the same manufacturer family. When you are crossing brands, check that maker's own stated convention before you convert a number.

 

What Are the Standard Mortise Cylinder Lengths?

Commercial stock sizes cluster tightly. The three you will meet most often are 1 inch, 1-1/8 inch and 1-1/4 inch, and 1-1/8 inch is the general purpose default on a standard door.

Mortise cylinder lengths and where each tends to appear
Nominal lengthTypical application
3/4 inchStocked by some makers for shallow applications
15/16 inchAppears on some brands and as a calculated requirement on thin trim
1 inchCommon on narrow stile aluminum storefront
1-1/8 inchThe general purpose size on storefront and exit devices
1-1/4 inchMortise lock cases and thicker doors. Less common on storefront than people assume
Longer than 1-1/4 inchSpecific housings and interchangeable core bodies. Rarely a stock item

 

What If You Do Not Have the Old Cylinder?

Without the original part you are working backwards from the opening. The inputs are the door thickness, how far the trim or escutcheon stands off the door face, and how thick the collars are on each side. One approach used in the trade adds the collar thicknesses to the door thickness, subtracts the trim standoff, and halves the result to get a per side length.

Treat that as a starting point rather than a published standard, because it assumes a symmetrical opening and it depends on knowing the lock. A cylinder that lands slightly short simply will not reach. A cylinder that lands long gets corrected with collars, which is the next section.

 

Why Will a Cylinder Sometimes Not Thread In at All?

Because it is the wrong diameter, not the wrong length. The standard commercial mortise body is roughly 1-5/32 inches across, and jumbo cylinders run about 1-1/2 inches. A jumbo will not start in a standard prep and a standard will spin loosely in a jumbo one.

People reliably diagnose this as a cross threaded cylinder and keep forcing it. Check the diameter before you blame the thread. For reference, the thread specification on some major commercial lines is published as a 1.150 inch diameter at 32 threads per inch.

What Are Collars and Spacer Rings For?

A collar is a ring that sits between the cylinder head and the door or trim. It does two jobs. It takes up the gap so the cylinder finishes flush instead of standing proud, and on the outside of an opening a hardened collar also resists wrenching attacks.

Collars are the standard correction when the nearest stock cylinder length is slightly too long for the opening. They are also the part most often forgotten on the order, which is how a technically correct cylinder still ends up looking wrong on the door.

  • Trim or decorative ring. Cosmetic, closes the gap around the cylinder face.
  • Spacer collar. Structural, adjusts how far the cylinder sits into the lock.
  • Security collar. Hardened, fitted to the outside to resist attack on the cylinder.
  • Blocking ring. Supplied by some makers as a specified part, with dimensions called out at order.

Common collar thicknesses in the trade pair with the common cylinder lengths, so a shorter cylinder generally takes a thicker collar to finish flush. Confirm against the lock you are working on rather than ordering by habit.

What Is a Cam, and Why Will the Wrong One Stop the Lock Working?

The cam is the flat plate on the back of a mortise cylinder. When the key turns, the cam rotates and engages a part inside the lock that retracts the bolt or latch. If the cam does not sit where the lock expects it, the key still turns and nothing happens.

That failure mode is the single most misleading one in this whole subject. The cylinder threads in cleanly, the key rotates smoothly, and everything feels correct. A buyer reasonably concludes the cylinder fits. It does not operate.

 

Common mortise cam families
Cam familyWhere it is usually found
Standard or straight camThe most common pattern on commercial mortise cylinders and the default supplied with many replacement cylinders
Clover leafLock bodies that take a four lobed cam, including several interchangeable core families
Modified cloverSpecific lock series where the standard clover fouls a deadbolt
Adams Rite patternAluminum storefront deadlocks and the many locks built to that style
Schlage L patternSchlage mortise lock bodies

 

Can You Just Swap the Cam?

Usually yes. On most conventional cylinders the cam is held by screws and can be changed, which is why cylinders often ship with a second cam loose in the bag. Keep the screws, because seized or damaged cam screws are a far more common problem than a worn cam.

There are exceptions. At least one interchangeable core range has the cam assembled at the factory and not intended for field swapping, which means the cam has to be specified as a suffix on the purchase order. If you cannot find a way to remove a cam without force, stop and check whether that line is field serviceable before you damage the housing.

Space is the other constraint nobody mentions. Some lock bodies, particularly in narrow stile applications, simply do not have room for a larger cam profile regardless of what the catalogue lists as compatible.

How Long Should a Rim Cylinder Tailpiece Be?

Long enough to engage the device and no longer. Tailpieces are supplied oversized and scored so they can be shortened in the field, and cutting one to suit the door is routine work rather than a modification.

The instinct to leave it long causes problems. Some rim locks need only a small amount of engagement, and excess tailpiece can bottom out and bind the mechanism. The scored segments are a guide to where to cut, not a statement that every segment should be used.

  • Match the old part. Measure how far the original protruded past the inside face and reproduce it.
  • Cut square. A clean cut goes back through the door prep far more easily than a burred one.
  • Check the orientation. Some device trim accepts the tailpiece either vertically or horizontally, using a guide inside the chassis.
  • Shorten the mounting screws too. Rim mounting screws are usually scored for the same reason, and they are a separate operation from the tailpiece.
  • Do not over tighten the mounting screws. Pulling them down hard is a documented cause of a rim cylinder that turns stiffly.

A bent or twisted tailpiece is a symptom, not a cause. If one keeps deforming, something else is binding, the trim is not aligned to the device, or the trim is not rated for the device it is driving.

Schlage 20-079 FSIC rim housing with a flat back for mounting through the door
A rim housing. No thread and a flat back, mounted with screws from the inside face of the door rather than screwed into the lock.

What Are SFIC, FSIC and KIK Cylinders?

An interchangeable core is a cylinder whose working core can be pulled out and replaced without taking the lock apart. A separate control key retracts a retaining lug and releases the core, which is what makes rekeying a large estate practical.

 

Interchangeable core and related formats
FormatWhat it isNotes
SFICSmall format interchangeable core, the figure eight shapeUsed across many brands. Available in six pin and seven pin
FSICFull size interchangeable coreSome makers and suppliers call this LFIC. The two names mean the same thing
KIKKey in knob cylinderA cylinder format for knob and lever locks, not an interchangeable core
ConventionalFixed cylinder, rekeyed by taking it apartStill the most common format on general commercial hardware

 

Two points cause confusion at the counter. The core and the housing are ordered separately, so a mortise interchangeable core cylinder is a housing plus a core, not one part. And the words cylinder, core, plug and housing get used interchangeably when they describe different things, which is worth being precise about on a purchase order.

If you are planning a key system rather than replacing one cylinder, our master key system design guide covers levels of keying and construction keying, and the Schlage key systems guide covers keyway families and cylinder formats.

Schlage 20-057 FSIC rim core and housing supplied together as one interchangeable core assembly
A rim core and housing supplied together. Ordering the core and the housing separately is the step people miss on interchangeable core jobs.

What Goes Wrong When People Order Cylinders?

Almost every wrong order traces back to one of six things. None of them are exotic.

The six failures that send cylinders back
MistakeWhat happensHow to avoid it
Wrong camThreads in, key turns, lock does not operateIdentify the lock body first, then match the cam to it
Wrong diameterWill not start on the thread at allCheck standard against jumbo before assuming a thread fault
Wrong lengthSits proud, or does not reach the retractorMeasure the old part and stay inside one manufacturer family
Collar forgottenCorrect cylinder looks wrong on the doorOrder the collar at the same time as the cylinder
Tailpiece not addressedRim cylinder will not engage, or bindsPlan to cut it, and match the original protrusion
Keyway mismatchCylinder fits the lock but not the key systemConfirm the keyway and whether it is keyed alike or master keyed

 

Before you place the order, write down six things: the lock make and model, the cam pattern, the nominal length, the finish code, the keyway, and whether the cylinder has to work on an existing key system. That list closes almost every gap. Our commercial door hardware finish guide covers the finish codes if you are matching an existing opening.

Need the cylinder, the cam or the collar? Browse deadbolt parts and diagrams, mortise lock replacement parts and diagrams and exit device parts, or use the diagram lookup across all products and parts to confirm a component before ordering. Call 845-935-0301 if you are not sure which cam you need.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon and Detex at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm which part they need before ordering rather than after. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For related reading, see our thumbturn cylinder guide for the keyless side of the same opening, and cylindrical lock parts and diagrams for the format that takes neither a mortise nor a rim cylinder.

Electric Power Transfer Options: EPT-10, Electrified Hinges and Door Loops

The moment a lock, an exit device or a switch sits on the moving leaf instead of the frame, you need a way to carry current across the hinge line. An electric power transfer is one of three methods, and picking the wrong one is how installers end up with intermittent faults that look like a defective lock. This guide covers all three, the wire counts and current limits that decide between them, and where the prep actually goes.

Quick Summary

An electric power transfer is a hinged, armored unit mortised into the frame and the door edge that carries low voltage conductors into a moving door. The two alternatives are a through wire hinge, which needs almost no extra prep, and a surface mounted door loop, which is the cheapest and the most exposed. The choice comes down to how many conductors you need, how much current the device on the door draws, and whether the opening is labeled.

Key points

  • The number in EPT-10 is the wire count, not the gauge. Ten 24 AWG conductors carry less current than the EPT-2's two 18 AWG conductors.
  • Electric latch retraction is the deciding factor. A motorized device is easy to feed. A solenoid device with a large inrush is not.
  • The published mounting position is about 6 inches below the top hinge. Frame prep and door prep have to align.
  • Hinge width caps the door swing. Wider butt hinges reduce how far the door can open with an EPT fitted.
  • You do not need a transfer for an electric strike. The strike lives in the frame, so nothing crosses the hinge line.
  • On a labeled opening the cutouts normally have to be factory made, which is why retrofitting a transfer into a rated door is a problem.

 

The three ways to get power into a door
MethodTypical conductorsBest forMain drawback
Electric power transfer2 or 10, depending on modelPermanent installs where wires need protecting and servicing laterMost door and frame prep, highest hardware cost
Electrified hinge or pivot4 to 12, thin gaugeOpenings where prep has to stay minimalNot designed to relieve stress on the conductors
Surface mounted door loopUsually up to around a dozen thin conductorsRetrofit, tight budget, awkward routingVisible, exposed to damage and vandalism

What Is an Electric Power Transfer and When Do You Need One?

An electric power transfer is a two part armored unit. One half mortises into the frame, the other into the door edge, and a jointed arm between them carries the conductors through the swing. The joint is built so the wires flex at a controlled point instead of being bent and pinched wherever the door happens to move.

You need one whenever the electrified component sits on the leaf that moves. That is the whole test. If the powered part is in the frame, nothing has to cross the hinge line and no transfer is required.

The common Von Duprin units measure roughly 9 inches long by 1-1/4 inches by 1-5/8 inches, and the door needs to be at least 1-3/4 inches thick. The frame requires reinforcement of at least 0.060 inch to take the tapped mounting holes.

Which Devices Need Power Taken Into the Door?

This is the table that decides the specification, and it is the one most commonly skipped. Count the conductors for every function on the door, not just the lock, because the request to exit switch and the latch monitor usually get added after the frame is already set.

What needs a power transfer, and what does not
Device on the openingTransfer neededNotes
Electrified lever trimYesLow current. Conductor count is usually modest
Motorized latch retraction exit deviceYesLow inrush, feeds comfortably through standard options
Solenoid electric latch retraction exit deviceYesHigh inrush. Conductor gauge is the constraint, not the count
Electrified mortise or cylindrical lockYesCheck whether the lock also carries monitoring contacts
Delayed egress device on the leafYesManufacturer guidance favours the larger wire transfer here
Request to exit switchYesSignal only, but it still needs conductors
Latch bolt monitoring switchYesOften forgotten at specification stage
Door mounted reader or credential hardwareYesConfirm conductor count with the reader manufacturer
Electric strikeNoMounted in the frame
Frame mounted electromagnetic lockNoMagnet is on the frame, armature is passive
Door position switch in the frameNoFrame mounted switches need no transfer

One transfer serves one powered leaf. A pair of doors with electrified hardware on both leaves needs two. If you are working out which exit device option you actually have, the Von Duprin 98/99 series parts manual lists the option codes by letter, and the QEL conversion kit guide covers what a motorized conversion involves.

Schlage 672 TouchBar request to exit switch, a door mounted device that needs an electric power transfer
A touchbar request to exit switch. Door mounted switches like this are the functions most often left off the conductor count at specification stage.

EPT, Electrified Hinge or Door Loop: Which Should You Use?

All three move current across the same gap. They differ in how much prep they demand, how well they protect the conductors, and how easy they are to service when something fails years later.

Comparing the three transfer methods
FactorElectric power transferElectrified hingeDoor loop
Door prepMortise in the door edge plus a back boxStandard hinge prep, plus a wire hole through the frameSurface screws only
Frame prepMortise plus tapped holes and reinforcementHole through the hinge reinforcementSurface screws only
Conductor protectionDesigned to relieve stress on the wiresNot designed to relieve stress on the wiresArmored conduit, but fully exposed
VisibilityVisible only when the door is openEffectively invisibleVisible at all times
Supplied pre wiredYesYesNormally not
Relative hardware costHighest of the three by a wide marginMiddleLowest
Serviceability laterBest. Installs with wiring in placeHardest. Often fitted, removed for wiring, then refittedEasy, but easy to damage too
Centre hung or balanced doorNot usablePivot is the only practical routeSometimes possible

The honest summary is that the door loop wins on price and loses on everything else, the hinge wins on appearance and loses on conductor capacity, and the power transfer costs the most and causes the fewest problems over the life of the opening.

What Does the 10 in EPT-10 Actually Mean?

It is the number of conductors. Not the gauge, and not the current rating. This trips up more buyers than any other detail on the topic, because the instinct is to read a bigger number as a bigger part.

The EPT-10 carries ten 24 AWG wires. The EPT-2 carries two 18 AWG wires. Thicker conductors carry more current, so the EPT-2 is the higher capacity unit despite the smaller number in the name.

Von Duprin EPT-2 and EPT-10 compared
SpecificationEPT-2EPT-10 and EPT-10C
ConductorsTwoTen
Wire gauge18 AWG24 AWG
Published continuous ratingFigures differ between the data sheet and the installation instructions. Confirm against the document for your unitUp to 1 A at 24 VDC
Published maximum surge16 A16 A
Best suited toPower to a device that draws real currentSignal, monitoring and lower draw trim, or several functions at once

Worth knowing before you quote a figure to a client. The EPT-2 continuous rating is published differently in the Von Duprin data sheet and in the installation instructions. The EPT-10 figure of 1 A is consistent across both. If a specification turns on the EPT-2 number, cite which document you took it from.

Some specifiers deliberately order the ten wire unit even when two conductors would do, purely so there are spare conductors available when someone adds a monitoring function later. That is a reasonable call on a new opening, provided nothing on the door needs more current than thin conductors can carry.

Von Duprin EPT-10 electric power transfer with ten 24 gauge wires
The EPT-10 electric power transfer. Ten 24 gauge conductors rated up to 1 amp at 24 VDC, with a ball and socket joint that protects the wires through the swing.

Why Does Electric Latch Retraction Change the Wire Calculation?

Most electrified trim and monitoring draws very little. Latch retraction is different, because pulling the latches back takes a burst of current far above what the device needs to hold them there.

Motorized latch retraction is the easy case. A published Von Duprin figure for a motorized device is an inrush of 1.0 A for half a second, settling to 0.14 A to hold. That feeds comfortably from a standard power supply and a sensibly sized conductor.

Solenoid driven latch retraction is the hard case. Trade sources report inrush figures an order of magnitude higher, which is why these devices call for a dedicated supply or a booster module rather than being powered through an access control panel output. Panel relay contacts are frequently rated only a few amps, and panel outputs are often fused individually well below the unit's total rating.

 

Published maximum one way run lengths for a motorized latch retraction device at 24 VDC
ConductorMaximum run
18 AWG200 feet
16 AWG320 feet
14 AWG500 feet
12 AWG800 feet

 

Here is the practical conclusion. Ten 24 AWG conductors rated for 1 A are correct for trim, switches and monitoring, and categorically wrong as the only power path for a high inrush solenoid device. On that kind of opening the usual answers are a two wire transfer sized for the latch retraction power with a separate route for signal, or specifying a motorized device so the inrush problem disappears.

  • Size the whole run, not just the transfer. The transfer is a short, thin section in a longer circuit, and it has to be factored into the total.
  • Keep the run from the transfer as short as practical. Manufacturer guidance says so explicitly.
  • Do not splice a small conductor to a large one to gain capacity. Current forced through the thinner wire is a fire risk.
  • Power a high inrush device from its own supply and let the access panel trigger it rather than feed it.

Where Does an EPT Mount on the Door?

On the hinge side, approximately 6 inches below the top hinge. The published measurement runs from the bottom of the top hinge to the top of the power transfer. The same position is recommended on continuous hinge doors for consistency.

The prep in the frame and the prep in the door edge have to line up, which sounds obvious and is the most common reason a transfer binds. On metal frames the unit takes tapped mounting holes in twelve places and a one inch opening through to the wire channel.

Older buildings often have the transfer much lower, sometimes between the bottom hinges. That is a legacy of a period before these units were listed, when they had to sit below a certain height on rated frames. Facilities with cart and gurney traffic tend to dislike the low position for obvious reasons.

Check the label location before you cut. On a standard height door the recommended prep position can land close to where the fire label is applied. A shop that labels its own frames can plan around it. A contractor cutting into a door and frame that arrived already labeled cannot.

Which Hinges and Pivots Can an EPT Work With?

This is the table that stops a part being ordered and then found unusable. Wider hinges push the door further from the frame as it swings, which progressively limits how far it can open before the transfer runs out of travel.

Published swing limits by hinge or pivot type
Hinge or pivotDoor swing supported
Butt hinges up to 5 inches wide0 to 180 degrees
Offset pivots up to 3/4 inch0 to 180 degrees
Butt hinges 5-1/2 inches wide0 to 130 degrees
Butt hinges 6 inches wide0 to 110 degrees
Swing clear hinges0 to 90 degrees
Offset pivots at 1-1/2 inchNot supported
Butt hinges wider than 6 inchesNot supported
Pocket pivotsNot supported
Centre hung doors and balanced doorsNot supported

Continuous hinges work, but the hinge leaves need prepping too. Geared continuous hinge ranges are commonly supplied with standard cut outs sized for the common transfer units, and the cut out location is measured from the top of the hinge to the centreline of the opening rather than to its top edge.

On a centre pivot door there is no usable transfer position at all. The pivot itself becomes the only practical route, which means an electrified pivot rather than an EPT.

Can You Use an Electric Power Transfer on a Fire Rated Door?

Yes, when the unit carries the right listing. Common Von Duprin transfers are listed against the standards that cover fire door accessories, and some systems also need the access control listing depending on what they feed.

The complication is the prep, not the product. On a labeled opening the cutouts normally have to be made by the door and frame manufacturer under their listing. Field cutting a transfer into a door or frame that already carries a label is how a compliant opening quietly becomes a non compliant one.

That is why trade sources sometimes state flatly that power transfers cannot be retrofitted into fire rated openings. The accurate version is narrower: the device is listed, but the prep has to happen under the right conditions. For fire rated hardware in general, our commercial door fire rating guide sets out what each rating permits.

Fire rated wood doors have one extra requirement worth noting. A back box is required, and the rear knockout is the one to use rather than the bottom.

What Goes Wrong With Power Transfers?

Transfer faults are distinctive because they are movement dependent. A lock that misbehaves only at certain door positions is almost never a faulty lock.

Power transfer symptoms, causes and checks
SymptomLikely causeWhat to check
Works open, fails closed or mid swingConductor creased or pinched at one point in the arcWalk the door slowly through its full travel while watching the transfer
Intermittent operation that reads as a failing lockVoltage drop from undersized conductors over the full runMeasure at the device under load, not at the supply
Dead after installationWires pinched between the back box and the transfer assemblyConfirm the area under the elbows is clear of connectors and splices
Short to earth, often on a hinge installConductor pushed through its insulation behind a hinge leafHeat shrink on the conductors and a grommet where wires pass through metal
Wrong part delivered to siteConductor count fixed before the final hardware scheduleRecount every powered function on the leaf, including monitoring
Hinge transfer fails after a few monthsHinge leaves separated during install, breaking the wiresElectrified hinge leaves are not designed to be taken apart
Crushed wire chase in a steel frameGrout or mortar packed into the frame with no guard fittedConfirm a mortar guard was used where the frame is filled
No service access years laterConcealed wiring with no accessible junctionPlan a serviceable connection point at specification stage

Two installation habits prevent most of this. Fit the strain relief that comes with the unit, and leave the elbows roughly half an inch of free movement when pulled straight out so the joint is not loaded at rest.

Which Templates and Documents Do You Need?

Three Von Duprin documents cover the common transfers, and knowing their numbers saves a long search. The template for metal frames and the template for wood doors are separate documents, and the installation instructions carry a dimensioned template on the back page.

  1. Metal frame template, document 107293. Covers the frame and door edge prep for the standard units.
  2. Wood door template, document 109342. Use this one for wood door applications rather than adapting the metal template.
  3. Installation instructions, document 107717. Carries the swing limits, the rating table and the dimensioned template.

Before ordering, confirm four things: the conductor count against every powered function on the leaf, the current the heaviest device draws, the hinge or pivot type and the swing the door needs, and whether the opening is labeled. Get those four right and the part fits the first time.

Need the unit or a replacement? The EPT-10 electric power transfer with ten 24 gauge wires is stocked at the part level, and you can work through Von Duprin parts or the full products and parts index with the diagram lookup. Call 845-935-0301 if you are not sure which conductor count you need.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001, covering Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon and Detex at the component level. Our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can confirm a part before ordering it. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions our customers bring us.

For the wider electrified opening, see our access control and door hardware integration guide, the comparison of an electrified mortise lock versus an electric strike, and the step by step on how to install an exit device.

Electromagnetic Lock Parts: Every Component, the Egress Rules, and What to Check When One Stops Holding

An electromagnetic lock looks like the simplest device on a commercial opening. It is a coil, a steel plate and two wires. Most of the service calls it generates come from a handful of parts and settings that almost nobody writes down, so this guide names every component, explains how holding force is actually rated, sets out the egress rules the lock has to meet, and gives you a symptom to cause table for the day it stops holding.

Quick Summary

An electromagnetic lock is a coil in a steel housing that is mounted to the frame head, plus a steel armature plate bolted to the door. Energize the coil and the magnetic bond between the two holds the door shut. Cut the current and the bond disappears, which is why every direct pull maglock is fail safe by design.

Key points

  • Holding force is not about door weight. The hinges carry the weight. The rating describes the pull needed to break the magnetic bond.
  • The armature plate is meant to float slightly. Over tightening the sex bolt stops it seating flush and is the most common install fault.
  • Two release methods are recognised by the model codes. Sensor release and door hardware release. Section numbers move between code editions, so confirm with your authority having jurisdiction.
  • A maglock does not replace positive latching on a fire rated opening. The latch stays, and the lock itself has to be labeled for fire door use.
  • Slow release is usually a diode, not magnetism. Fit the suppression the manufacturer calls for and check whether the lock already has it inside.
  • Use 24 VDC on long runs. The same lock draws roughly half the current, so voltage drop hurts you far less.

 

Electromagnetic lock at a glance
QuestionShort answer
What holds the doorMagnetic bond between an energized coil and a steel armature plate
Typical single door ratingsCommonly supplied at 600 lb and 1,200 lb, with higher and lower tiers available
SupplyFiltered, regulated DC. Dual voltage units are selected on a jumper or switch inside the wiring compartment
Fail stateFail safe only. No power means no hold
Needs a latch as wellYes on any fire rated opening, and often on egress doors depending on the release method used
Most common faultMisalignment or an over tightened armature, followed by power supply problems

What Is an Electromagnetic Lock and How Does It Work?

An electromagnetic lock is an electrically operated holding device with no latch, no bolt and no keyway. Current through a coil magnetizes a stack of ferrous plates inside the lock housing. A machined steel armature plate on the door is drawn against the machined face of the housing, and the bond between the two resists anyone pulling the door open.

The behaviour that matters is what happens when the current stops. The bond collapses immediately and the door is free. That single property is why maglocks are treated as a special locking arrangement in the egress sections of the model codes rather than as ordinary door hardware.

Two families exist. A direct pull maglock resists force pulling straight off the magnet face and suits a single swinging door. A shear lock sets locating pins or tabs into recesses in the magnet face, so the load acts across the joint instead of straight off it. That mechanical interlock is what lets shear locks work on double acting doors and on sliding doors, where a header mounted direct pull magnet will not hold.

What Are the Parts of an Electromagnetic Lock?

Most published descriptions stop at "a magnet and a plate". A service tech ordering a replacement needs the rest of the stack, because the mounting hardware fails far more often than the coil does.

 

Electromagnetic lock components and what each one does
PartWhat it doesWhy it matters on a service call
Lock housing and coilStacked ferrous plates wound with copper, potted in a non ferrous fill, with a machined faceRarely the failed part. Suspect it only after power and alignment check out
Armature plateMachined steel plate on the door that the magnet bonds toMust sit flat and cover the magnet poles. Offset or partial contact loses holding force fast
Sex bolt and nutThrough bolts the armature to the doorThe adjustment that decides whether the plate can seat. See below
Rubber washerSits in the armature fastener stackAllows the plate limited movement so it can pivot flush against the magnet
Steel washer and spacersSet standoff and spread load through the doorThicker doors need the correct kit. The wrong stack leaves the plate proud or buried
Anti rotation pinsShort pins driven into the armature faceStop the plate spinning on its bolt and drifting out of alignment
Mounting bracketsL, Z, U or header plate, matched to door swing and frameBrand and model specific. Rarely interchangeable between makes
Filler plate or angle bracketCreates a flat mounting surface where the frame stop is shallowNeeded when the header stop is too narrow for direct mounting
Bond sensorReports that the magnet and armature are actually bondedThe only accessory that tells you the door is really held
Door position switchReports door closed or openOften wired in series so the lock cannot energize before the door settles
Status LEDVisual indication at the lockUseful first check, but it shows the board state, not the bond
Suppression componentDiode or metal oxide varistor across the coilChoice of part changes how fast the lock releases. Covered below

 

Why the Armature Plate Has to Float

Manufacturer instructions describe the armature as designed to pivot slightly so it can compensate for reasonable misalignment. That pivot is the whole point of the rubber washer in the fastener stack. Torque the sex bolt down hard and the plate becomes rigid, which means it can no longer self align against the magnet face.

The field symptom is a lock that reports energized but can be pulled open by hand. Technicians commonly back the armature bolt off between half a turn and a full turn so the plate can snap flat. Treat that as trade practice consistent with the published design intent rather than as a torque figure from a manual.

Replacement armature plate for a Schlage M490 electromagnetic lock
A replacement armature plate. This is the part that has to seat flat against the magnet face, and the part most often ordered after a misalignment problem.

 

What the Mounting Hardware Does, and Why It Falls Off

Maglocks are heavy, and they are held on by a small number of fasteners into a frame head. Thread locking compound ships with most units for exactly that reason, and skipping it is a known cause of units working loose over weeks rather than failing outright.

  • Use the supplied fasteners. Self tapping screws into a frame head are not an equivalent substitute.
  • Apply the thread locker that came in the box. Manufacturers specify different grades for the armature bolt and the housing screws.
  • Re check mounting hardware on a schedule. At least one manufacturer calls for a check every three months.
  • Confirm the frame is actually rigid. A flexing or poorly anchored frame defeats a high force lock no matter what the label says.
Magnetic mounting pack of fasteners for an electromagnetic lock installation
A magnetic mounting pack. The fastener stack is what decides whether the armature can pivot, and it is the part most often substituted with the wrong screws.

How Is Holding Force Rated, and Does Door Weight Matter?

Holding force is the pull required to break the magnetic bond between the housing and the armature. It is not a weight capacity, and it is not related to how heavy the door is. The hinges or pivots carry the weight. This is the single most common misunderstanding among buyers specifying a maglock for the first time.

Published ratings describe either a dynamic load or a static one. A dynamic figure reflects a sudden impact, the kind of load a shoulder or a running push applies. A static figure reflects force applied gradually until the bond lets go. Manufacturers do not always state which they are quoting, so two units with the same number on the box are not necessarily comparable.

Treat the rating as manufacturer declared. Real world performance depends on three things the label cannot describe: whether the armature covers the magnet poles completely, whether the two faces are clean and flat, and whether the frame and door are rigid enough to transfer the load.

 

Selecting holding force by application, not by door weight
ApplicationCommonly specified rangeSelection notes
Interior traffic control, wood or aluminum doorLower tier, around 500 lb to 1,000 lbThe goal is directing traffic, not resisting attack
Standard swinging commercial doorAround 1,000 lb to 1,200 lbThe most commonly supplied tier for general access control
Higher security opening, heavier gauge hollow metalUpper tier, 1,500 lb and aboveOnly useful if the frame and anchoring can transfer the load
Double acting or sliding doorShear lockA direct pull magnet on the header will not hold a slider
Pair of doorsOne lock per leaf, or a double unitEach leaf needs its own magnet and armature

Which Bracket Do You Need: L, Z, U or Header Plate?

Bracket selection follows the swing direction and the frame profile, and brackets are usually specific to the brand and model of lock. Ordering a bracket from one maker for another maker's housing is a common wasted trip.

  1. Outward opening door, deep frame stop. The magnet often mounts directly to the underside of the frame head with no bracket at all.
  2. Outward opening door, shallow frame head. An L bracket offsets the magnet from the door face so the armature still lands squarely.
  3. Inward opening door. An L bracket on the frame head carries the magnet, and a Z bracket carries the armature out to meet it.
  4. Glass or frameless door. A U bracket wraps the top rail. Clearance is frequently the problem, and a purpose made glass door bracket or a shear lock is often the better answer.
  5. Shallow or irregular header. A filler plate or angle bracket builds a flat mounting surface. At least one manufacturer sets a minimum header stop depth below which this is required.

 

Glass and herculite doors are the hard case. There is often no room for a U bracket and no option to drill the glass. Before committing to a maglock on a frameless opening, check bracket clearance against the actual top rail, and price a shear lock or a purpose built glass door lock at the same time.

How Much Power Does a Maglock Draw, and Should You Wire 12V or 24V?

Most commercial maglocks are dual voltage and run on direct current only. Voltage is selected on a jumper or a switch inside the wiring compartment, and some units sense the supply automatically. Check how the unit left the factory before you energize it, because the default is not always the voltage you are feeding it.

Current draw is modest. Published figures for common single door units sit in the low hundreds of milliamps, and the same lock draws roughly half as much at 24 VDC as it does at 12 VDC. That halving is the practical argument for 24 VDC on anything but a short run.

 

Published current draw figures from manufacturer literature
UnitAt 12 VDCAt 24 VDC
Single door, lower tierAround 250 mAAround 130 mA
Single door, standard and higher tierAround 400 mAAround 200 mA
Double unitAround 400 mA per lockAround 200 mA per lock

Two supply rules decide whether the installation behaves. The supply must be filtered and regulated, because alternating current riding on the direct current line is the usual cause of an audible hum at the lock. And the conductor has to be sized for the run, because a voltage drop that looks small on a meter shows up as a door that can be pulled open while the system reports it locked.

If you are planning the wider system, our access control and door hardware integration guide covers power supplies, voltage selection and how electrified devices share a supply. For strike wiring specifically, the electric strike schematic diagram shows the same circuit elements in a different configuration.

What Egress Rules Does an Electromagnetic Lock Have to Meet?

A maglock removes the mechanical link between the door hardware and the latch. Turning the lever or pushing the crash bar does nothing at all unless a switch inside that hardware cuts power to the magnet. That is the reason the model codes treat these locks as a special arrangement with prescriptive requirements.

Two release methods are recognised. Section numbers have been renumbered more than once, so cite the edition your jurisdiction has adopted rather than a number you remember.

The two recognised release methods for electromagnetic locks
MethodHow it releasesWhere the provision sits
Door hardware releaseA switch in the lever, panic bar or other door mounted hardware interrupts power directly when the hardware is operated2021 IBC 1010.2.11. NFPA 101 7.2.1.6.3
Sensor releaseA sensor on the egress side detects an approaching occupant and unlocks, backed by a manual release button and fire alarm interface2021 IBC 1010.2.12. NFPA 101 7.2.1.6.2

 

What Does the Sensor Release Method Require?

The sensor release provision is the more prescriptive of the two. The lock unlocks on a signal from the egress side sensor and on loss of power to that sensor. Loss of power to the lock itself also unlocks it automatically.

  • A manual unlocking device mounted 40 to 48 inches above the floor and within 5 feet of the doors, marked PUSH TO EXIT.
  • Direct interruption of power when that device is operated, independent of any other electronics, holding the door unlocked for at least 30 seconds.
  • Release on fire alarm activation and on sprinkler or fire detection activation, until the system is reset.
  • Emergency lighting on the egress side of the opening.
  • A listed locking system, which in recent editions means listing to the relevant access control standard.
Aluminum push to exit button engraved PUSH TO EXIT for electromagnetic lock egress release
A button engraved PUSH TO EXIT. The sensor release provision calls for a marked manual release that interrupts power directly, mounted within reach of the opening.

What Does the Door Hardware Release Method Require?

Door hardware release is simpler. The hardware on the door leaf has an obvious operating method usable in any lighting, works with one hand, and cuts power the moment it is operated. Loss of power unlocks the door automatically. Where panic hardware or fire exit hardware is required on that opening, operating it has to release the lock as well.

The model codes do not require a fire alarm interface or an auxiliary push button for this method, which surprises people who have only ever installed sensor release systems. Neither method is permitted in high hazard occupancies.

 

Why Is Every Electromagnetic Lock Fail Safe?

A direct pull maglock holds only while current flows. There is no mechanical state in which it can stay locked without power, so fail secure operation is not physically available. Both release provisions also require automatic unlocking on loss of power, which makes the physical property a code requirement as well.

Delayed egress is a separate arrangement with its own code section, not a maglock feature. A delayed egress door holds for a defined period after an alarm sounds and then releases. Our guide to what delayed egress is and when code requires it covers that arrangement in detail.

Can You Put an Electromagnetic Lock on a Fire Rated Door?

Sometimes, and the conditions are strict. The lock has to be labeled for use on a fire door assembly, because every component installed on a fire door needs its own listing. An unlabeled lock on a labeled opening is a deficiency on inspection.

The point that catches people out is latching. A maglock is a holding device, not a latch, and it does not satisfy the positive latching requirement on a fire rated opening. The required latch stays, and it has to actually latch. Positive latching is what stops smoke pressure pushing the door open and carrying fire into the next compartment.

Removing or defeating the latch bolt so a maglock can control the door is a serious deficiency. So is mounting a lock without the frame reinforcement called out in the frame manufacturer's listing, which can compromise the rating of the whole assembly.

If you are working through hardware on rated openings, our commercial door fire rating guide sets out what each rating allows, and the OEM versus aftermarket parts guide explains how substituting a component affects a listing.

Why Is My Maglock Not Holding or Not Releasing?

Almost every maglock fault traces back to alignment, power or suppression. Work the table in order rather than condemning the magnet, because the coil itself is one of the least likely parts to fail.

Electromagnetic lock symptoms, causes and fixes
SymptomMost likely causeWhat to do
Door can be pulled open while the system reports lockedArmature not seating flush, or voltage drop on the runCheck armature float and pole coverage first, then measure voltage at the lock under load
Armature will not sit flat against the magnetSex bolt over tightened, or wrong spacer stack for the door thicknessBack the armature bolt off slightly so the plate can pivot, and confirm the kit matches door thickness
Lock releases one to two seconds lateFlyback diode fitted across a DC coilReview the suppression against the manufacturer instruction, and check whether the lock has internal suppression already
Audible hum or buzz at the lockAlternating current on the direct current supply, or loose mounting hardwareMeter for AC on the DC line, confirm the supply is filtered and regulated, tighten all fasteners
Lock clanks or re energizes while the door is still movingRelock timer too shortExtend the relock delay, or wire a door position switch in series so the lock cannot energize until the door is closed
Lock works on the bench but not installedShared supply overloaded, or per output fusing on the panelCheck the per output rating, not just the total rating of the supply
Status LED on but no holdCollapsed voltage under load, loose connection, or a failed boardMeasure at the lock with the lock connected, not just at the supply
Lock reads bonded but door is openBond sensor or reed switch faultBond sensing hardware does contain moving contacts and can fail. Verify against the door position switch
Local monitoring station with two LED indicators for electromagnetic lock status
A local monitoring station with two LED indicators. Monitoring is how you tell a reported lock state from an actual magnetic bond.

 

Should You Fit a Diode or a Varistor Across the Coil?

Collapsing the field in a coil produces a voltage spike, and installers often fit a suppression component without checking what the lock needs. The choice changes release behaviour in a way that gets blamed on magnetism.

A flyback diode clamps at roughly one volt, so the stored energy bleeds away slowly and the magnet can keep holding the armature for a second or two after power is cut. A metal oxide varistor clamps far higher, so the energy dissipates much faster and the lock drops promptly. Diodes suit small solenoid devices such as strikes. For door magnets the varistor is generally the appropriate part.

Before adding anything, open the wiring compartment and look. Full size units frequently ship with suppression already fitted, and a second component in parallel is how a prompt lock becomes a sticky one. The common advice to degauss the armature or dimple the magnet face is not a fix, and risks damaging the machined surfaces.

When Is a Maglock the Wrong Choice?

Maglocks get specified because they are easy to fit and forgiving of door and frame condition. Those are real advantages. They also come with a code burden that an electric strike or an electrified lockset does not carry, and on some openings they are simply not the right device.

 

Maglock compared with the two common alternatives
FactorElectromagnetic lockElectric strikeElectrified lockset
What is modifiedFrame head and door faceFrame onlyDoor only, plus power transfer
Power transfer to the doorNot requiredNot requiredRequired
Fail state optionsFail safe onlyFail safe or fail secureFail safe or fail secure
Provides positive latchingNoYes, with the lock it servesYes
Does the lever or push bar release itOnly through a switch that cuts powerYes, mechanicallyYes, mechanically
Egress provisions triggeredYes, special locking arrangementNormally noNormally no
Suits fire rated openingsOnly when labeled, and latching still requiredCommonly, when listedCommonly, when listed

Choose something else when the opening needs positive latching that a magnet cannot provide, when the door is frameless glass with no bracket clearance, or when the cost of sensors, release buttons, emergency lighting and fire alarm interface outweighs the saving on hardware. Our comparison of an electrified mortise lock versus an electric strike works through the same decision from the latching side.

 

Need the part, not the theory? Browse electromagnetic lock parts for armature plates, brackets, sex bolts and sensors, or use the diagram lookup across all products and parts to identify a component before you order. Call 845-935-0301 if the part you need is not listed.

About the Author

Security Parts has supplied repair parts for commercial door hardware since 2001. We stock components at the part level for the brands locksmiths actually work on, and our diagram based lookup exists so a technician can identify a component before ordering rather than after. This guide was written by the Security Parts team from supplier documentation and the questions customers bring to us.

If you are maintaining a mixed estate, our commercial door hardware maintenance checklist covers the monthly, quarterly and annual tasks that keep electrified hardware working, and the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide covers faults across exit devices, closers, locks and strikes.

Von Duprin Mullion Guide: Types, Models, and Compatibility

Picking the wrong Von Duprin mullion creates problems that are expensive to fix. A handed model ordered without specifying handing will not work. A fire-rated mullion used in an oversized opening can fail an inspection. An aluminum mullion cannot be made keyed removable, no matter what a catalog description implies. This guide covers all of it: every mullion type in the Von Duprin 54 Series lineup, how they differ, what strikes and electric strikes are compatible with each, and which accessories and retrofit kits apply to your situation.

Quick Answer

Von Duprin mullions are vertical center posts for paired door openings. They mount between the two doors and give the exit device strike a point of engagement. The 54 Series is the current product family.

  • Fixed mullions (1654, 4954) are permanent; removable mullions (4754, 4854, 9854, 9954, 5654, 5754) swing down for clear-span access.
  • The 4854 and 9854 are electrified and handed; you must specify handing when ordering.
  • The 9854 fire rating covers openings up to 8 feet x 8 feet only.
  • Keyed removable mullions require a 1-1/4 inch mortise cylinder with a straight cam, sold separately.
  • No Von Duprin aluminum mullion can be made keyed removable.
  • The KR54-F kit converts 4754, 4854, 9854, or 9954 to keyed removable in the field.
  • Stabilizers reduce mullion deflection; especially important for aluminum models.
ModelTypeHanded?Fire Rated?Electrified?
1654Fixed steelNo3-hourNo
4954Removable steelNo3-hourNo
4754Removable electrified steelNoNoYes (monitor only)
4854Removable electrified steelYesNoYes
9854Removable electrified fire steelYes3-hour (8x8 max)Yes
9954Removable fire steelNo3-hourNo
5654Removable aluminumNoNoNo
5754Removable aluminumNoNoNo
HH9954Removable hurricane-rated steelNo3-hourNo

Need OEM Von Duprin mullion parts? Security Parts stocks the full 54 Series lineup with same-day shipping on in-stock items.

Browse Von Duprin 54 Series Mullions

 

What Is a Von Duprin Mullion and Why Does It Matter?

A Von Duprin mullion is a vertical post that mounts between two doors in a paired opening. Its main job is to give the exit device latch a strike to engage when the active leaf is pushed. Without a mullion, a pair of doors with rim exit devices has no point for the latches to lock into, which means the doors are not secured.

Mullions are not just a structural accessory. They define how the opening operates. A fixed mullion means someone must always use one specific door as the primary egress door. A removable mullion gives the option to open both leaves when full-width access is needed, such as moving furniture, loading equipment, or emergency egress. A keyed removable mullion adds a lock on that ability so unauthorized people cannot remove the post.

Getting the mullion wrong is more costly than most installers expect. A mullion installed in front of the doors instead of behind them creates a gap along each lock edge that the exit device backset was never designed to reach. Fire-rated mullions used in openings larger than their certified dimensions fail inspection. Handed electrified mullions ordered without specifying handing arrive as the wrong unit and cannot be flipped or reversed. These are real field problems documented by hardware professionals, not edge cases.

Von Duprin 54 Series Mullions product family overview
Von Duprin 54 Series Mullions. The full 54 Series lineup includes fixed, removable, electrified, keyed removable, aluminum, and fire-rated configurations.

What Are the Different Types of Von Duprin Mullions?

Von Duprin mullions fall into five operating categories. Each serves a different need in terms of access control, fire rating, and electrical integration.

 

Fixed Mullions

A fixed mullion is a permanent center post. It does not swing down and is not designed for removal during normal operation. Fixed mullions are used where full-width opening access is never needed and where the priority is a durable, secure center post with a reliable fire rating. The Von Duprin 1654 is the standard fixed steel mullion in the current lineup.

 

Removable Mullions

A removable mullion can be taken down quickly without tools. The post is held at the top by a fitting that releases with a push-button or lever, and it swings down or lifts out to create a clear-span opening. This is the most common type in commercial buildings where loading docks, receiving areas, or large meeting rooms need occasional full-width access. Models include the 4954, 9954, 5654, and 5754.

 

Keyed Removable Mullions

A keyed removable (KR) mullion adds a mortise cylinder lock to the removable function. The post cannot be swung down until someone uses a key to retract the locking mechanism. Once reinstalled in its operating position, the mullion self-locks automatically without a key. KR models are used where access to the full opening needs to be controlled, such as in storage facilities, pharmacies, and secure warehouses. Models include the KR1654, KR4954, and electrified variants.

 

Electrified Mullions

An electrified mullion carries wiring from the frame through the mullion body to the electric strike mounted at the strike prep location. The wiring passes through a connector at the top fitting and routes to the strike without exposed wiring on the door face. Electrified mullions are used in access-controlled openings where the electric strike releases on a card reader or intercom signal. Von Duprin electrified mullion models include the 4754, 4854, and 9854.

 

Aluminum Mullions

Aluminum mullions are removable mullions with an aluminum extrusion instead of a welded steel body. They are lighter and include weatherstripping edging along the meeting stile. Aluminum models are used in storefronts and light commercial applications. They do not support keyed removable cylinders or electric strikes. The 5654 and 5754 are the current aluminum models.

 

Von Duprin 54 Series Models Compared

All current Von Duprin mullions are in the 54 Series. Here is how the models compare across the key specifications that affect ordering and installation.

ModelBodyTypeHanded?Fire RatingStrike PrepElectric Strike
1654SteelFixedNo3-hourTwo 1606 strikesNo
4954SteelRemovableNo3-hourTwo 1606 strikesNo
4754SteelRemovable, electrifiedNoNoTwo 4263 monitor strikesMonitor only (not electric strike)
4854SteelRemovable, electrifiedYesNo6111 electric strike + 299 strike6111 (or blank for field prep)
9854SteelRemovable, electrified, fireYes3-hour (8x8 max)6111 electric strike + 268 or 499F6111
9954SteelRemovable, fireNo3-hour268 or 499F strikes onlyNo
5654AluminumRemovableNoNoField-selectedNo (6300 incompatible)
5754AluminumRemovableNoNoField-selectedNo (6300 incompatible)
HH9954SteelRemovable, hurricane-ratedNo3-hour268 or 499F strikes onlyNo

Ordering note on handed models: The 4854 and 9854 are both handed. When placing an order, you must specify left-hand or right-hand. Handing is determined by the side of the active leaf when viewed from the exterior. These models cannot be reversed in the field.

Von Duprin 1654 fixed steel mullion prepped for two 1606 strikes
Von Duprin 1654 fixed steel mullion, prepped for two 1606 strikes. This is the standard fixed model in the 54 Series lineup.

 

How Do Von Duprin Electrified Mullions Work?

Von Duprin electrified mullions route the electric strike wiring through the mullion body and out through a quick connector at the top fitting. The wiring then passes from the top fitting to the frame header, connecting to the access control power supply without exposed wiring on the door face or inside the mullion opening.

 

Which Von Duprin mullion models are electrified?

Three models in the 54 Series carry wiring for electric strikes or electric monitoring:

  • 4754: Not handed. Prepared for two 4263 monitor strikes and works with all Von Duprin rim panic devices. This model monitors door position only; it does not support a powered electric strike. It is the correct choice for a monitored opening that does not need electric latch retraction.
  • 4854: Handed (must specify left or right). Prepared for a 6111 electric strike and a 299 strike. Can be ordered blank for field prep when a different strike configuration is needed. The 4854 and 9854 include male and female receptacle wire assemblies for the electric strike connector.
  • 9854: Handed (must specify left or right). Prepared for a 6111 electric strike plus a 268 or 499F strike. Fire-rated version of the 4854, with the same electrical setup. Fire rating is limited to openings up to 8 feet wide by 8 feet tall (see fire rating section below).

 

Why does the 4754 not work with an electric strike?

The 4754 is prepped for 4263 monitor strikes, not electric strikes. Monitor strikes detect when the exit device latch is engaged; they do not release the latch electrically. If your access control system needs to electrically release the latch in a non-fire-rated opening, the 4854 is the correct model. For a fire-rated opening with electric latch retraction, specify the 9854.

 

Can an aluminum mullion be used with a 6300 electric strike?

No. The Von Duprin 6300 electric strike is not compatible with the 5654 or 5754 aluminum mullion models. Aluminum mullions do not support electric strike integration of any kind. If your opening requires an electric strike, you must use a steel mullion model.

 

How Does a Von Duprin Keyed Removable Mullion Work?

A keyed removable mullion is a removable mullion with a mortise cylinder lock built into the post. Under normal operation, the mullion is in place and the door pair functions as two single doors. When authorized personnel need full-width access, they insert a key, retract the locking cam, and the mullion swings down. When the mullion is put back into its operating position, it self-locks automatically. No key is required to re-engage the lock.

 

What cylinder does a Von Duprin keyed removable mullion require?

Von Duprin keyed removable mullions use a 1-1/4 inch mortise cylinder with a straight cam. The Schlage B502-191 is the referenced straight cam specification. The cylinder is not included with the mullion or the KR retrofit kit; it must be ordered separately and keyed to your master system.

Important: Using the wrong cam on the mortise cylinder will prevent the keyed removable mechanism from operating correctly. The cam must be a straight cam, not a tailpiece or rotating cam style used in other applications.

 

Can the keyed removable option be added to an existing steel mullion?

Yes. The Von Duprin KR54 retrofit kit converts an existing standard removable steel mullion to the keyed removable configuration without replacing the entire unit. The KR54 fits the 1654 and 4954 models. The KR54-F converts electrified and fire-rated models: it is the kit for the 4754, 4854, 9854, and 9954 and includes a channel for routing electric strike wiring through the converted mullion.

 

Is KR available on aluminum mullions?

No. The keyed removable option is not available on any Von Duprin aluminum mullion. This applies to the 5654, 5754, and any other aluminum model. If you need keyed removable in your opening, you must use a steel mullion model.

 

What Are the Limits of Von Duprin Aluminum Mullions?

The 5654 and 5754 aluminum mullions are removable steel-alternative options for storefront and light commercial openings. They are lighter than steel and include integrated weatherstripping edging along the meeting stile edge, which makes them suitable for exterior applications.

 

What can aluminum mullions not do?

  • No keyed removable option: No aluminum mullion can be ordered as or converted to a KR unit.
  • No electric strike integration: The 5654 and 5754 do not support electric strikes. The 6300 and other Von Duprin electric strikes are not compatible.
  • No fire rating: Aluminum mullion models do not carry a UL fire label. They cannot be used in fire-rated paired openings.
  • Greater deflection under load: Aluminum extrusions flex more than welded steel under repeated impact. Stabilizer accessories are especially recommended with aluminum models to reduce lateral movement.

 

When should you choose aluminum over steel?

Aluminum mullions are appropriate for non-fire-rated, non-electrified exterior or interior openings where a lighter-weight unit is needed, where the aesthetic of an aluminum frame matches the surrounding storefront, or where weatherstripping integration at the mullion is required. For any opening that needs fire rating, electric strike integration, or keyed removable access, specify a steel mullion model instead.

 

What Fire-Rated Von Duprin Mullion Do I Need?

Three Von Duprin mullion models carry a UL fire label: the 1654, 9854, and 9954. Each covers a different combination of features. The HH9954 also carries a 3-hour fire rating alongside its hurricane impact certification.

 

Which Von Duprin mullion is fire-rated?

ModelFire RatingOpening Size LimitElectrified?Strikes Required
16543-hour ULNo stated limitNoTwo 1606 strikes
99543-hour UL98-F and 99-F rated to 10'0"No268 or 499F only
98543-hour UL8 feet x 8 feet maximumYes6111 + 268 or 499F
HH99543-hour ULCheck local codeNo268 or 499F only

Critical for 9854 installations: The Von Duprin 9854 is UL fire-labeled up to 3 hours, but only for door openings up to 8 feet wide by 8 feet tall (2438mm x 2438mm). Using the 9854 in an opening larger than 8x8 feet voids the fire rating. If your fire-rated opening exceeds those dimensions and also needs electric strike integration, consult a certified door hardware specialist for the correct specification.

For fire-rated paired openings using a removable mullion, the pair is treated as two single doors for fire rating purposes. Astragals are not required when a listed removable mullion is used in the opening.

Von Duprin 9954 fire-rated steel mullion prepared for 268 or 499F strikes
Von Duprin 9954 fire-rated removable steel mullion, prepped for two 268 or 499F strikes only. The 9954 accepts only these two strike types. The 98-F and 99-F series exit devices are rated to a 10-foot opening width.

What Von Duprin Mullion Accessories and Retrofit Kits Are Available?

Several accessories and conversion kits extend or modify mullion function in the field. These are OEM Von Duprin parts designed specifically for the 54 Series and should not be substituted with field-fabricated alternatives.

 

Mullion Stabilizer (Part 154)

The Von Duprin 154 Stabilizer mounts at the bottom of a removable mullion and reduces lateral deflection when doors are pushed hard or slammed. Deflection is the common failure point for removable mullions, especially aluminum models. One set of stabilizers covers both doors in a pair; each set contains two pieces. Stabilizers are especially recommended for aluminum mullions (5654, 5754) and high-traffic openings.

 

MT54 Mullion Storage Kit

The MT54 Mullion Storage Kit stores a removed mullion out of the way when both leaves of the pair are in use. Without a storage kit, the removed mullion is typically set against a wall or on the floor near the opening, where it creates a trip hazard and risks damage. The MT54 secures the mullion in a designated position so it stays protected and accessible when needed.

 

Angle Plate Accessory

The Von Duprin angle plate is an installation accessory used when the top fitting of the mullion needs to be anchored to an angled or non-standard frame head. It accommodates frame conditions that the standard top fitting cannot attach to directly.

 

KR54 Retrofit Kit (for 1654 and 4954)

The KR54 Retrofit Kit converts a standard removable 1654 or 4954 steel mullion to keyed removable. The kit adds the mortise cylinder housing and locking mechanism to an existing removable mullion without replacing the entire unit.

 

KR54-F Retrofit Kit (for 4754, 4854, 9854, 9954)

The KR54-F Retrofit Kit converts electrified or fire-rated removable mullions to keyed removable. It fits the 4754, 4854, 9854, and 9954. The KR54-F includes a wiring channel to accommodate the electric strike wiring that passes through the 4854 and 9854 models. This is the correct kit for any electrified or fire-rated mullion conversion.

 

What Are the Most Common Von Duprin Mullion Installation Mistakes?

Field professionals who work with paired door hardware regularly document the same mullion errors. Understanding them before installation saves rework costs.

 

Installing the mullion in front of the doors instead of behind them

A removable mullion is designed to mount behind the active and inactive door leaves, not between them on the face of the opening. When a mullion is placed in front of the doors, each door's lock edge has a gap that the exit device backset was never designed to bridge. This also affects the strike engagement depth. The frame and hardware backset must be calculated based on the mullion's correct position behind the door leaves. Frames ordered with an oversized opening width to accommodate a misunderstood mullion position cannot be easily corrected after fabrication.

 

Ordering a handed model without specifying handing

The 4854 and 9854 are both handed. If handing is not specified at time of order, the distributor or manufacturer may ship a default hand that does not match your opening. Handing cannot be changed in the field. Determine the active leaf side from the exterior before ordering.

 

Using a 9854 in an opening larger than 8 feet by 8 feet

The 9854 fire label is limited to openings no larger than 8 feet wide by 8 feet tall. Specifying the 9854 in a taller or wider fire-rated opening produces a unit that cannot be listed for that application, even though the mullion itself will physically fit.

 

Assuming a KR option is available on aluminum mullions

The 5654 and 5754 aluminum mullions cannot be made keyed removable. Any specification that calls for a keyed removable aluminum mullion requires a model change to a steel mullion before ordering.

 

Using the wrong cylinder cam in a KR mullion

A keyed removable mullion requires a 1-1/4 inch mortise cylinder with a straight cam. Using a rotating cam or a tailpiece-style cam will prevent the lock from operating. The cylinder is field-supplied and must be specified correctly when ordering keyed removable mullions or retrofit kits.

 

Skipping the stabilizer on aluminum mullions in high-traffic openings

Aluminum mullions flex more than steel under repeated impact. Without stabilizers, the mullion can shift laterally over time, affecting strike alignment and potentially causing difficulty with the exit device latch engagement. Stabilizers are a low-cost add that prevents a high-cost alignment problem.

 

Which OEM Mullion Parts and Fittings Do You Need?

Von Duprin mullion fittings and accessory parts are specific to each model series. Using substitute parts or incompatible fittings can affect function, warranty, and fire rating.

 

Fitting sets by model

Von Duprin 050330 Fitting Set for 1654 and 4954 mullions
Von Duprin 050330 Fitting Set, used with the 1654 and 4954 mullions. Includes the top fitting, cover, mounting screws, bottom mullion plate, and expansion anchors.

Part NumberDescriptionFits Models
050330Fitting Set (top fitting, cover, screws, bottom plate, anchors)1654, 4954
050390Bottom Fitting only1654, 4754, 4854, 4954, KR1654, KR4954
KR54Keyed Removable Retrofit Kit1654, 4954
KR54-FKeyed Removable Retrofit Kit with wiring channel4754, 4854, 9854, 9954
154Stabilizer Set (2 pieces per set; covers one pair)All 54 Series removable mullions
MT54Mullion Storage KitAll 54 Series removable mullions

 

Strike compatibility by model

Mullion ModelStrike PrepCompatible Strikes
1654, 4954Two 1606 strikes1606 series
4754Two 4263 monitor strikes4263 (monitor only, no electric latch retraction)
48546111 electric strike + 299 strike6111 electric strike; also orderable blank for field prep
98546111 electric strike + 268 or 499F6111 electric strike; 268 or 499F for the second strike
9954, HH9954268 or 499F only268 or 499F strikes only; no electric strike prep
5654, 5754 (aluminum)Field-selectedNo 6300 electric strike; no electrified prep

Looking for the right fitting, strike, or retrofit kit for your Von Duprin mullion? Use the part number above to find it directly.

Shop Von Duprin 54 Series Mullion Parts

Browse OEM Von Duprin parts for the 54 Series mullion family at securityparts.com/model/54-series-mullions.

Browse OEM Von Duprin 54 Series mullion parts and find the right unit for your opening at securityparts.com.

LCN 1460 Parts: The Complete Identification and Ordering Guide

Finding the right replacement part for an LCN 1460 door closer starts with knowing exactly which component needs to go. This guide covers all 52 parts available for the 1460 series, organized by category, with verified part numbers and direct links to each part.

 

Quick Answer

The LCN 1460 is a surface-mounted commercial door closer that uses an eight-sided star spindle fitting unique to the 1260 and 1460 series. Replacement parts, including arms, cylinder assemblies, covers, screw packs, and mounting plates, are available even though complete 1460 units may no longer be manufactured. Match the part category to the symptom: arms for bent or stripped hardware, cylinder assembly for fluid leaks or loss of closing force, covers for cosmetic replacement, and screw packs or mounting plates for reinstallation and frame repairs.

 

  • 52 confirmed replacement parts are available for the LCN 1460 series.
  • The 1460 uses a unique eight-sided star spindle fitting, shared only with the 1260 series.
  • Three arm types are available: regular, hold-open, and extra-duty, each in standard and heavy-duty variants.
  • Six screw packs cover SRT, WMS, and TORX fasteners in standard and through-bolt configurations.
  • Three cover styles are offered: standard, designer series, and full cover.
  • Six mounting plates cover standard, parallel arm, and full cover configurations in standard and designer series finishes.

 

Part CategoryNumber of PartsKey Variants
Arms and tracks27Regular, heavy duty, extra duty, hold open, CUSH, spring CUSH
Cylinder assembly2Standard, with delay
Covers3Standard, designer series, full cover
Screw packs6SRT, WMS, TORX, through-bolt variants
Mounting plates6Standard, PA, FC, DS variants
Miscellaneous8Adaptor kit, CUSH shoe support, blade stop spacer, flush panel adaptor
LCN 1460 surface-mounted commercial door closer

 

What Is the LCN 1460 Door Closer?

The LCN 1460 is a surface-mounted commercial door closer designed for standard commercial doors. It mounts to the face of the door and frame using an arm that connects to a track or shoe. The closer uses hydraulic fluid to control the speed at which the door swings closed and latches.

One feature that sets the 1460 apart from other LCN series is its spindle fitting. The 1460 uses an eight-sided star fitting, which is specific to the 1260 and 1460 series. This design is not interchangeable with the round spindle used on the LCN 4040XP or the square spindle found on older series. Knowing this matters when ordering replacement arms, because an arm from a different LCN series will not fit.

The 1460 also supports tri-pack mounting, which means one unit can be installed in regular arm, parallel arm, or top jamb configuration. This flexibility makes it a practical choice for doors where the frame or door swing limits standard installation.

While complete LCN 1460 units may no longer be in active production, all 52 individual replacement parts remain available. Replacing a worn arm, a leaking cylinder, or a damaged cover is almost always less expensive than swapping out the entire closer. Browse all LCN 1460 parts on Security Parts or use the category sections below to find the exact part you need.

 

What LCN 1460 Cylinder Assembly Parts Are Available?

The cylinder assembly is the core hydraulic unit inside the door closer body. It controls closing speed, backcheck, and latching. When a 1460 leaks fluid, loses its closing force, or can no longer be adjusted, the cylinder assembly is usually the part to replace.

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
1461-3071Cylinder AssemblyStandard replacement for most 1460 series closers
1461-3071DELCylinder Assembly with DelayAdds delayed closing action; useful for accessibility compliance
1460-159Arm ScrewSecures the arm to the cylinder spindle
1460-30AMounting BracketBracket component for cylinder installation
1460-146Shaft CoverCovers the spindle shaft on the closer body

The 1461-3071DEL cylinder assembly adds a delay feature that holds the door open for a set period before the hydraulic mechanism draws it closed. This is a common requirement in accessible entryways where users need extra time to clear the doorway. If you are not sure which cylinder your closer uses, check the diagram on the LCN 1460 Diagram 1 page for a visual reference.

 

What Arms, Rods, and Shoes Are Available for the LCN 1460?

The LCN 1460 offers more arm options than most commercial door closers in its class. Arms wear at the pinion, bend under heavy impact, or develop play in the pivot that causes the door to drift. Replacing just the arm is the fastest repair for most mechanical problems with the 1460.

All arms listed here use the eight-sided star spindle fitting specific to the 1460 and 1260 series. Do not substitute arms from the 4040XP or other LCN series.

 

Standard and Heavy-Duty Regular Arms

Part NumberDescription
1460-3077Regular Arm
1460-3077HDHeavy Duty Arm
1460-3077HD/LHeavy Duty Long Arm
1460-3077/PARegular Arm with 62PA Shoe (parallel arm)
1460-3077/62ARegular Arm with 62A (extra clearance)
1460-3077HD/PAHeavy Duty Arm with 62PA
1460-3077HD/62AHeavy Duty Arm with 62A (extra clearance)
1460-3077EDAExtra Duty Arm
1460-3077EDA/GExtra Duty Arm with 62G
1460-3077SCNSSpring CUSH Arm
1460-3077CNSCUSH Arm
1460-77Arm and Forearm
1460-77HDHeavy Duty Arm and Forearm

The heavy-duty arms (HD suffix) are built for high-traffic commercial doors, such as entrances to retail stores, schools, or medical facilities. If the standard arm shows bending or fatigue cracking at the pivot, upgrade to the HD version. The extra-duty arm (EDA suffix) goes further, designed for high-abuse applications where impact loads are expected regularly.

CUSH arms include a hydraulic cushion feature that slows the arm through part of the swing range, reducing noise and mechanical stress on the door and frame. The Spring CUSH (SCNS) version adds spring-assisted closing to the cushion function.

 

Rods, Shoes, and Individual Arm Components

Part NumberDescription
1460-79Rod and Shoe
1460-79LRLong Rod and Shoe
1460-62AAuxiliary Shoe
1460-62PAParallel Arm Shoe
1460-83Arm Screw
1460-83HH Arm Screw
1460-201Fifth Screw Spacer
1260-384Stop (shared with 1260 series)
1460-3048Head and Tube Assembly
1460-3048LHead and Long Tube Assembly
1460-49Hold-Open Main Arm

On older LCN 1460 closers, the rod may need a hole drilled in the door or frame for proper alignment. If you are replacing a rod and shoe on a door where no hole exists from the original installation, the 1460-79LR long rod and shoe gives more reach to accommodate different door and frame configurations without drilling new holes.

See the LCN 1460 Diagram 2 for a visual layout of the arm assembly components.

 

What LCN 1460 Hold-Open Arms Are Available?

Hold-open arms allow the door to stay in an open position at a set angle rather than closing automatically. They are used in high-traffic service areas, storage rooms, and other locations where doors need to remain open during business hours.

Part NumberDescription
1460-3049Hold Open Arm
1460-3049LHold Open Long Arm
1460-3049/PAHold Open Arm with PA
1460-3049SCNSHold Open Spring CUSH Arm
1460-3049EDAHold Open Extra Duty Arm
1460-3049EDA/GHold Open Extra Duty Arm with 62G
1460-3049CNSHold Open CUSH Arm

The /PA suffix indicates the arm is configured for parallel arm mounting, where the closer body mounts on the push side of the door and the arm runs parallel to the door face. This is common on doors where there is not enough space on the pull side for a standard arm swing. For heavier doors or higher-abuse environments, use the EDA or SCNS hold-open variants.

 

What Cover Options Are Available for the LCN 1460?

The LCN 1460 offers three cover options. Covers protect the hydraulic body from dust and impact and affect the finished appearance of the closer. A cover replacement is the fastest cosmetic fix for a door closer with a damaged or discolored housing.

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
1460-72Standard CoverCovers the closer body only
1460-72DS1Designer Series CoverRefined profile for architectural applications
1460-72FCFull CoverCovers both the closer body and the arm; requires 1460-18FC drop plate

If you are installing the 1460-72FC full cover, you must also use the 1460-18FC drop plate. The full cover requires extra clearance between the closer body and the door face that the drop plate provides. Installing the full cover without the correct plate will result in misalignment and may prevent the cover from seating properly.

 

Which LCN 1460 Screw Pack Do I Need?

Selecting the correct screw pack depends on the door material and whether you are using standard or through-bolt mounting. Using the wrong fasteners is one of the most common causes of a closer working loose from the door face over time.

Part NumberDescriptionWhen to Use
1460-SRTSelf Reaming and Tapping ScrewsMetal hollow core doors
1460-WMSWood and Machine Screws PackSolid wood doors and wood frames
1460-TORXTORX Screw PackTORX fastener applications
1460-TBSRTThrough Bolt Self Reaming and Tapping ScrewsThrough-bolt installation on metal doors
1460-TBWMSThru Bolt Wood and Machine Screws PackThrough-bolt installation on wood doors
1460-TBTRXThrough Bolt TORX Screw PackThrough-bolt installation with TORX fasteners

Through-bolt installation (TB prefix) is required when the door is too thin for standard screw depth or when the application demands a more secure mechanical connection. The through-bolt method runs fasteners completely through the door thickness and is common in high-security and high-traffic applications.

 

What Mounting Plates Are Available for the LCN 1460?

Mounting plates position the closer body at the correct height and angle relative to the door face and frame. The plate selection depends on whether you are using a standard, parallel arm, or full cover installation.

Part NumberDescriptionConfiguration
1460-18Mounting PlateStandard installation
1460-18DSMounting Plate (Designer Series)Standard installation, designer series profile
1460-18FCDrop PlateRequired for full cover (1460-72FC) installations
1460-18PAMounting Plate (Parallel Arm)Parallel arm installation
1460-18PADSMounting Plate (Parallel Arm, Designer Series)Parallel arm, designer series profile
1460-18PAFCMounting Plate (Parallel Arm, Full Cover)Parallel arm with full cover

 

What Miscellaneous LCN 1460 Parts Are Available?

Beyond the main categories, the 1460 series includes several accessory and retrofit components that address specific installation requirements.

Part NumberDescriptionUse Case
1460-3373Adaptor KitRetrofit to accommodate non-standard hole patterns
1460-30CUSH Shoe SupportSupport bracket for CUSH arm shoe
1460-61Blade Stop SpacerPositions the stop correctly on blade stop installations
1460-419Flush Panel AdaptorAllows installation on flush panel doors

The 1460-3373 adaptor kit is particularly useful when replacing an older closer where the existing door or frame holes do not match the current 1460 mounting template. Instead of filling and redrilling, the adaptor bridges the gap and keeps the installation clean.

 

Which LCN 1460 Part Do I Need? A Quick Diagnostic Guide

Matching the symptom to the correct part category saves time and avoids ordering the wrong component.

SymptomLikely Part CategoryStarting Point
Door drifts open or does not latchCylinder assembly1461-3071
Fluid leaking from the closer bodyCylinder assembly1461-3071
Arm is bent, cracked, or has play at the pivotArms1460-3077 or HD variant
Door does not stay open when neededHold-open arms1460-3049
Cover is cracked, missing, or discoloredCovers1460-72
Closer is working loose from the door faceScrew packs or mounting plateMatch fastener type to door material
Mounting hole pattern does not align with new closerAdaptor kit1460-3373

If you are not certain which part fits your situation, the LCN 1460 model page lists all available parts with their diagram references. You can also review the complete LCN door closer parts catalog for comparison across series, or browse the full door closers catalog for additional options. Always confirm the installation template matches the 1460 series before drilling.

Browse all LCN 1460 parts on Security Parts. If you need parts for a different LCN series, see the LCN door closer parts guide or the complete door closers parts catalog.

LCN 4040XPT Parts: The Complete Identification and Ordering Guide

The LCN 4040XPT is a heavy-duty track arm door closer used on commercial doors across schools, hospitals, office buildings, and institutional facilities. When a part wears out or a component needs replacing, identifying the correct part number is critical. The track arm system on the XPT is different from the fixed shoe arm system on the standard 4040XP, and most parts do not cross over between the two models.

This guide covers every LCN 4040XPT part category: the cylinder assembly, covers, tracks, track arms, rollers, bumper assemblies, plugs, screw packs, and mounting plates. Each part number listed here links to the live product page at Security Parts, where you can confirm stock and order directly.

 

Quick Answer

LCN 4040XPT parts fall into six main categories: the cylinder assembly (part 3071), the cover (72 or 72MC), the track (3038 and variants), the track arm (3077T), the track roller (3034 or 3034H), and installation hardware including screw packs and mounting plates. The roller is sold separately from the arm and must be ordered as its own part.

  • The 4040XPT uses a rolling track system, not the fixed shoe arm of the 4040XP. Parts are not interchangeable between the two models.
  • Standard track is 3038. For hold-open, order 3038H. For a door stop built into the track, order 3038B or 3038HB.
  • The 3077T track arm is non-handed and works on left- and right-hand doors. The 3034 track roller must be ordered separately.
  • The cylinder assembly (3071) is the complete internal hydraulic unit. It is the most common major part replacement.
  • Choose your screw pack based on substrate: SRT for metal, WMS for wood, TORX for torx screws, and TB prefix for thru-bolt mounting.
  • For top jamb mounting, use the 18TJ drop plate. For narrow top rail or flush ceiling mounting, use the 18 drop plate.

 

Part CategoryPart Number(s)Key Notes
Cylinder Assembly4040XPT-3071Non-handed. Includes hydraulic mechanism.
Plastic Cover4040XPT-72Non-handed standard cover.
Metal Cover4040XPT-72MCHanded. Specify LH or RH.
Standard Track4040XPT-3038Up to 180-degree opening.
Hold-Open Track4040XPT-3038HTrack with hold-open feature.
Bumper Track4040XPT-3038BLimits opening to 110 degrees.
Hold-Open + Bumper Track4040XPT-3038HBBoth hold-open and bumper.
Track Arm4040XPT-3077TNon-handed. Roller sold separately.
Track Roller4040XPT-3034Sold separately from the arm.
Hold-Open Track Roller4040XPT-3034HEnables hold-open via roller.
Mounting Drop Plate (Top Jamb)4040XPT-18TJFor top jamb mounting applications.

Browse all LCN 4040XPT parts with live stock status at Security Parts: LCN 4040XPT. Same-day shipping available on in-stock orders.

LCN 4040XPT commercial door closer with track arm system
The LCN 4040XPT door closer uses a rolling track arm system mounted on the door frame. All parts shown are available at Security Parts.

How is the 4040XPT different from the 4040XP?

The 4040XPT and the 4040XP look similar from a distance, but the arm systems are completely different. This distinction matters because parts from one model do not fit the other.

The 4040XP uses a fixed shoe arm. The arm attaches directly to the door surface, and the shoe slides into a bracket mounted to the frame. There is no rolling track.

The 4040XPT uses a rolling track arm system. A track is mounted on the door frame header, and a roller travels along that track as the door swings open and closed. The track arm connects the closer spindle to the roller. This system provides a smoother, more controlled close cycle across the full range of motion.

The quickest way to confirm which model you have is to look at the door frame above the closer. If you see a metal track running horizontally across the frame with a roller that moves along it when the door opens, you have the 4040XPT. If there is no track and the arm connects directly via a shoe bracket, you have the 4040XP.

 

FeatureLCN 4040XPLCN 4040XPT
Arm systemFixed shoe armRolling track arm
Track on frame?NoYes
Parts interchangeable?No
Maximum opening (standard)Depends on arm type180 degrees
Cylinder assembly4040XP-30714040XPT-3071

 

What is the 4040XPT cylinder assembly and when should it be replaced?

The 4040XPT-3071 Standard Cylinder Assembly is the hydraulic heart of the closer. It contains the piston, spring, and hydraulic fluid that control the door's closing speed and latching action. The 3071 is non-handed and fits both left-hand and right-hand doors.

Replace the cylinder assembly when the closer is leaking hydraulic fluid, when the door slams regardless of valve adjustments, or when the spring tension is weak and the door no longer closes fully. Minor speed adjustments are done through the valves on the existing assembly rather than replacing the whole unit.

  • Part number: 4040XPT-3071
  • Handing: Non-handed
  • Application: Track arm closers only
  • Stock: In Stock at Security Parts

 

Which cover does the LCN 4040XPT use?

The 4040XPT has two cover options: a standard plastic cover and a metal cover upgrade. Both protect the internal mechanism from dust and impact.

 

4040XPT-72 Standard Plastic Cover

The 4040XPT-72 is the standard plastic cover that ships with most units from the factory. It is non-handed, meaning the same part works on both left-hand and right-hand doors. Order this part for any standard cover replacement.

 

4040XPT-72MC Metal Cover

The 4040XPT-72MC is a metal cover for applications where added durability is needed. It is handed, so you must specify left-hand or right-hand when ordering. Choose this option for high-traffic doors, locations where vandalism or accidental impact is a concern, or installations requiring a higher-grade finish match.

 

Cover hardware

If the cover is in good shape but the hardware needs replacing, the following small parts are available separately:

 

Which track do I need for the LCN 4040XPT?

The track is the metal rail mounted on the door frame header. It guides the roller and controls the door's swing path. There are four track variants for the 4040XPT, each suited to different functional requirements.

LCN 4040XPT Diagram 2 showing track arm and track parts
Diagram 2 covers the track, track arm, and roller parts for the LCN 4040XPT. View all parts at the Diagram 2 page.

Part NumberDescriptionHold-Open?Bumper?Max Opening
4040XPT-3038Standard TrackNoNo180 degrees
4040XPT-3038HTrack with Hold OpenYesNo180 degrees
4040XPT-3038BTrack with BumperNoYes110 degrees
4040XPT-3038HBTrack with Hold Open and BumperYesYes110 degrees

For most standard commercial door applications, the 3038 is the correct choice. The hold-open variants (3038H and 3038HB) are used when the closer needs to hold the door in an open position, such as in warehouses, loading docks, or spaces where doors are propped open frequently and need a built-in hold-open mechanism. The bumper variants (3038B and 3038HB) limit door travel and protect adjacent walls or fixtures.

 

How to identify which track is currently installed

Look at the track mounted on the door frame. A standard track is a straight rail with no visible stop mechanism at the far end. A bumper track has a physical stop built into the rail near the end of travel. A hold-open track has a detent or notch feature that catches and holds the roller when the door is pushed past a certain angle. If your door holds open at a fixed position when pushed fully open, you have a hold-open track installed.

 

Track arm and track roller: what is the difference between 3077T, 3034, and 3034H?

The track arm and the track roller are two separate parts that work together but are ordered individually. This is one of the most common ordering questions for the 4040XPT.

 

4040XPT-3077T Standard Track Arm

The 4040XPT-3077T Standard Track Arm is the arm that connects the closer spindle to the roller. It is non-handed and works on both left-hand and right-hand doors. The roller is not included with the arm and must be purchased separately as the 3034 or 3034H.

 

4040XPT-3034 Track Roller

The 4040XPT-3034 Track Roller is the wheel that travels along the track. It attaches to the end of the track arm. Order this part whenever the roller is worn, cracked, or not rolling smoothly. If you are replacing the arm, always replace the roller at the same time because a worn roller on a new arm increases wear on the new arm head.

 

4040XPT-3034H Hold-Open Track Roller

The 4040XPT-3034H Hold-Open Track Roller is a roller with a built-in hold-open function. It is used in combination with a hold-open track (3038H or 3038HB). If your door needs to hold open at a set position, this roller is needed along with the matching hold-open track.

 

4040XPT-425 Roller Lock Screw

The 4040XPT-425 Roller Lock Screw is the fastener that secures the roller to the track arm. If the roller comes loose during operation, this is the part to check and replace first before assuming the arm or roller itself is damaged.

 

What are the 78DE, 82, and 83H arm components?

Several sub-components make up the full track arm assembly. These are ordered when individual parts of the arm assembly fail rather than replacing the entire arm.

 

What is the 4040XPT-169 bumper assembly and when is it used?

The 4040XPT-169 Bumper Assembly is an optional add-on that limits the door from opening past a certain angle. When installed, it reduces the maximum opening from 180 degrees to 110 degrees. This is useful when there is a wall, fixture, or obstruction behind the door that could be damaged if the door swings fully open.

The 169 is an alternative to ordering a bumper track (3038B or 3038HB). If you already have a standard 3038 track installed and want to add a stop without replacing the track, the 169 bumper assembly can be added to the existing setup. If you are installing a new track and know you need a stop, ordering the 3038B or 3038HB from the start is more efficient.

 

What are the 4040XPT-141-1 and 141-2 plugs?

The 4040XPT-141-1 and 4040XPT-141-2 are valve plugs. They seal the hydraulic adjustment ports on the closer body when those ports are not in use. If a port plug is missing or damaged, hydraulic fluid can leak from the adjustment port, causing the closer to lose speed control or leak entirely. These small parts are worth keeping on hand as replacements during any major service.

 

Which LCN 4040XPT screw pack do I need?

The correct screw pack depends on two things: the substrate you are mounting into and the mounting method. The 4040XPT uses finish-matched screws, so the pack you order must match the closer finish as well.

LCN 4040XPT Diagram 3 showing screw packs and mounting plates
Diagram 3 covers screw packs and mounting plates for the LCN 4040XPT. View all parts at the Diagram 3 page.

Part NumberScrew TypeUse WhenPrice
4040XPT-SRTSelf-Reaming and TappingStandard hollow metal frames and steel doors$53.30
4040XPT-WMSWood and Machine ScrewWood frames or solid substrates with machine screw holes$53.30
4040XPT-TORXTorx Machine ScrewsInstallations requiring torx-drive fasteners$65.65
4040XPT-TBSRTThru-Bolt, Self-Reaming and TappingThru-bolt mounting on hollow metal frames$53.30
4040XPT-TBWMSThru-Bolt, Wood and Machine ScrewThru-bolt mounting on wood or solid substrates$53.30
4040XPT-TBTRXThru-Bolt, Torx Machine ScrewThru-bolt mounting requiring torx-drive fasteners$65.65

The TB prefix always means thru-bolt. Thru-bolt mounting passes the screw through the door frame or door from one side to the other, secured by a nut on the back side. This method is used when the substrate is not thick enough to hold a screw in place by thread engagement alone, or when the application requires extra pull-out resistance. If you are not sure which type was originally installed, check whether the mounting screws visible on the face of the closer go all the way through the door or frame to a backing nut. If they do, use a TB screw pack.

 

LCN 4040XPT mounting plates: 18 vs 18TJ

Mounting plates are used when the closer cannot be mounted directly to the door face or the soffit of the frame due to physical clearance limitations.

  • 4040XPT-18 Drop Plate - used for narrow top rail or flush ceiling mounting. This drop plate positions the closer body lower than the standard location to provide clearance when the door frame header has a narrow top rail or when there is a flush ceiling above the door that would interfere with standard mounting.
  • 4040XPT-18TJ Drop Plate (Top Jamb) - used for top jamb mounting. When the closer is mounted on the vertical face of the top jamb rather than the door face or frame soffit, this plate provides the proper offset and mounting surface. Top jamb mounting is common on out-swing doors where the door face is exposed to the exterior and a standard bracket mount is not suitable.

 

How do the valve adjustments work on the LCN 4040XPT?

The 4040XPT uses the same closer body as other 4040 series closers, so the valve system operates the same way. There are three main adjustment valves: the sweep speed valve, the latch speed valve, and the backcheck valve.

  • Sweep speed controls how quickly the door moves through the main arc of its travel from fully open down to approximately 10 to 15 degrees from closed.
  • Latch speed controls the final closing motion from approximately 10 to 15 degrees to fully closed. Adjusting this separately allows the door to snap into the latch without slamming.
  • Backcheck creates resistance when the door is opened quickly or with force. It cushions the door before it reaches the mechanical stop or bumper to protect the closer arm and door hardware from impact damage.

All three valves are accessible on the closer body. Turn the valve screw clockwise to increase resistance (slower close or stronger backcheck) and counterclockwise to reduce resistance (faster close or lighter backcheck). Small adjustments of one-quarter turn are enough in most situations. If the door continues to slam after valve adjustment, the sweep speed valve may be fully closed or the cylinder assembly may need replacement.

Need a specific LCN 4040XPT part? Browse the complete parts listing by diagram at Security Parts: LCN 4040XPT. In-stock parts ship same day. Questions? Call 845-935-0301.

 

For the complete parts listing with live stock and pricing, visit the LCN 4040XPT model page at Security Parts. You can also browse all LCN door hardware parts or explore the full commercial door closer parts catalog. For more LCN door closer guidance, see the LCN 4040XP parts guide and the LCN door closer parts guide.

 

LCN 1260 Parts Guide: Regular Arm, Hold Open Arm, Drop Plate, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 40 replacement components for the LCN 1260 and 1261 Series closer. The 1260 ships with the 1260-3077 regular arm and 1260-146 shaft cover as standard. Available parts include the 1261-3071 cylinder assembly, six regular arm variants, six hold-open arm variants, a CUSH arm family, EDA and HEDA arms, head and tube assemblies, rod and shoe components, standard cover, three mounting plate variants, and a full range of installation accessories. All 40 parts are stocked individually and available at Security Parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support.

 

What Is the LCN 1260 Series Door Closer?

LCN 1261 Series closer body for light-to-medium duty commercial door applications

The LCN 1260 Series is a light-to-medium duty, cast iron, surface-mounted door closer designed to fit the most common commercial door footprint at 3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch hole spacing. It is universal and non-handed, meaning the same closer body installs on either a right-hand or left-hand door without specifying handing at order time. It mounts in three positions: hinge pull side, top jamb push side, and parallel arm push side.

The 1260 uses a non-sized cylinder adjustable from spring sizes 1 to 5. It handles interior doors to 4 feet 6 inches wide and exterior doors to 3 feet 6 inches wide. The closer body is cast iron with a full-complement bearing, a 1-3/8-inch diameter piston, and a 5/8-inch diameter heat-treated pinion journal. The all-weather hydraulic fluid performs across a wide temperature range without seasonal adjustment. The 1260 Series carries a 20-year limited warranty and is UL and cUL listed for self-closing doors without hold-open. It meets ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 and ADA reduced opening force requirements.

The closer ships with peel-n-stick installation templates for accurate hole placement. An optional Quick Fix bracket kit (1260-18QF) is available for retrofit situations where existing mounting holes are damaged or when installing the 1260 on an opening that previously used the obsolete 1370 mounting pattern.

For a comparison of the 1260 against the 1460 and other LCN surface closer families, see the LCN 4110 Parts Guide and the LCN 4210 Parts Guide for related LCN surface closer series.

 

Why Does the LCN 1260 Series Page Show Model Number 1261?

This is the most common point of confusion when ordering LCN 1260 Series parts. The 1260 is the series number that identifies the closer body and all of its arm and accessory components. The 1261 is the cylinder model number that LCN uses to designate the cylinder assembly that ships inside the 1260 closer body.

LCN follows this convention across the entire surface-mounted line: the cylinder model number is one digit higher than the series number. The 1460 Series uses the 1461-3071 cylinder. The 4040 Series uses the 4041 cylinder. The 1260 Series uses the 1261-3071 cylinder. This is not an error on the product pages. Both numbers refer to the same closer family.

When ordering parts, use these prefixes:

  • Use 1261- as the prefix for the cylinder assembly only.
  • Use 1260- as the prefix for all arms, covers, mounting plates, accessories, and screw packs.

Numbers like "71" or "320G" stamped on the cylinder body are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers or model identifiers. They cannot be used to order replacement parts. The correct model number is on the sticker located on the cylinder body under the cover.

 

What Parts Are Available for the LCN 1260 Series?

LCN 1000 Series surface mounted door closer parts and accessories

All 40 LCN 1260 and 1261 Series replacement parts stocked at Security Parts are organized below by component category. Every part has been verified live at the time of publication.

 

LCN 1261 Cylinder Assembly

The 1261-3071 standard cylinder assembly is the complete closer body for the LCN 1260 Series. It is non-handed and non-sized, adjustable for spring sizes 1 to 5. This is the replacement when the closer cylinder body is damaged or leaking beyond adjustment. The hydraulic fluid in an LCN closer cannot be refilled in the field. A leaking 1261 cylinder requires replacement of the cylinder assembly or the full closer body, not a fluid refill.

 

LCN 1260 Arm Selection: Which Arm Do I Need?

The 1260 Series offers a wider arm selection than most facilities managers realize. All regular arms and most hold-open arms are non-handed, meaning one part number fits both right-hand and left-hand doors. The HEDA (Hold Open Extra Duty Arm) is the notable exception and is handed.

Part NumberArm NameHold OpenHandedNotes
1260-3077Regular ArmNoNon-handedStandard arm shipped with the 1260 closer. Mounts hinge side or top jamb.
1260-3077LLong ArmNoNon-handedFor deeper reveals where the standard arm does not reach.
1260-3077/PARegular Arm with PA ShoeNoNon-handedIncludes the 1260-62PA parallel arm shoe. For parallel arm (push side) mounting.
1260-3077/62ARegular Arm with 62A ShoeNoNon-handedIncludes the 1260-62A auxiliary shoe. Used when the closer must be mounted lower on the door to clear overhead hardware.
1260-3077EDA/GExtra Duty Arm with 62G ShoeNoNon-handedHeavy duty arm with thick hub shoe. For high-traffic and high-abuse applications.
1260-3077CUSHCush-N-Stop ArmNoNon-handedBuilt-in door stop in the soffit shoe. No separate overhead stop needed.
1260-3049Hold Open ArmYesNon-handedStandard hold-open arm. NOT interchangeable with 1460-3049. Order by series.
1260-3049LHold Open Long ArmYesNon-handedLong arm version for deeper reveals.
1260-3049/PAHold Open Arm with PA ShoeYesNon-handedHold-open for parallel arm push side mounting.
1260-3049EDAHold Open Extra Duty Arm (HEDA)YesHandedHeavy duty hold-open arm. Must specify right-hand or left-hand at order.
1260-3049EDA/GHold Open Extra Duty Arm with 62GYesHandedHeavy duty hold-open arm with thick hub shoe for blade stop clearance. Handed.
1260-3049CUSHHold Open Cush-N-Stop Arm (HCUSH)YesNon-handedHold-open with built-in door stop. Combines hold-open and stop in one arm.

 

What Is the Difference Between the Regular, EDA, and CUSH Arms on the LCN 1260?

The 1260-3077 regular arm is the standard non-held-open arm that ships with the 1260 closer. It mounts hinge side or top jamb and provides basic door control with no hold-open function and no built-in door stop.

The EDA (Extra Duty Arm) series uses a heavier forged steel construction for high-traffic doors. The 1260-3077EDA/G adds a thick hub shoe (62G) that provides additional clearance past a blade stop in the door frame. Use the EDA family on openings with heavy use or where the standard arm has bent or cracked under repeated impact.

The CUSH arm (Cush-N-Stop) provides a built-in door stop in the soffit shoe. When the door reaches the end of its travel, the shoe contacts the frame and stops the door without a separate overhead or wall stop. Installing a CUSH arm with a separate overhead stop is redundant and not recommended because both mechanisms compete on the same opening. When a CUSH or EDA arm is used, the 1260-30 CUSH Shoe Support is required if the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches, and the 1260-419 panel adapter is required when the head frame is flush or rabbeted.

 

Head and Tube Assemblies, Rod and Shoe, and Arm Components

Part NumberComponentFunction
1260-3048Head and Tube AssemblyStandard length head tube. Connects the main arm to the closer spindle.
1260-3048LHead and Long Tube AssemblyLong tube version for deeper reveals.
1260-77Main Arm and ForearmThe two-piece arm assembly: main arm and forearm together.
1260-79Rod and ShoeStandard length rod and shoe assembly. Rod length 8-3/8 inches.
1260-79LRLong Rod and ShoeLong rod version. Rod length 12-3/8 inches for deep reveals. Call 845-935-0301 to confirm current availability.
1260-49Hold Open Main ArmThe main arm component for hold-open arm assemblies.

 

LCN 1260 Covers: Standard Cover vs Shaft Cover

The LCN 1260 ships from the factory with a shaft cover (1260-146), not a standard plastic cover. This is an important difference from the 1460 Series, which ships with the 1460-72 slim line cover as standard.

Part NumberCover TypeNotes
1260-72Standard Plastic CoverOptional slim line cover. NOT shipped as standard with the 1260. Order separately when a full cover is needed. Finish code must match the installed hardware.
1260-146Shaft CoverShips standard with the 1260 Series. Covers the spindle and spring mechanism. The 1260-146 and 1460-146 shaft cover are the same part.

The LCN cover part number convention applies to the 1260: the series number followed by -72. The 1260 cover is 1260-72. This convention holds across all standard LCN surface-mounted series, but the physical shape is series-specific. A 1260-72 cover cannot be substituted for a 1460-72 or any other series cover even though the numbering pattern is the same.

 

When Is an LCN 1260 Drop Plate Required?

This is one of the most frequently asked questions in the professional locksmith and door hardware community about the 1260 Series. Three distinct trigger conditions apply across the three mounting plate variants.

 

1260-18: Hinge Side and Top Jamb Drop Plate

The 1260-18 mounting plate is required in two situations:

  • Hinge side (pull side) mount where the top rail is less than 2-1/2 inches measured from the stop.
  • Top jamb push side mount where the head frame is less than 1-3/4 inches or a flush ceiling condition exists.

The plate requires a minimum top rail of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or a minimum head frame of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

 

1260-18PA: Parallel Arm Push Side Drop Plate

The 1260-18PA mounting plate is required for parallel arm push side mounting where the top rail is less than 4-3/8 inches (111 mm) measured from the stop. The plate requires a minimum top rail of 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). This plate is also required for all EDA and CUSH arm installations in the parallel arm push side configuration.

 

1260-18QF: The Quick Fix Bracket Kit

The 1260-18QF mounting plate is not a drop plate in the traditional sense. It is a retrofit kit that serves two specific situations:

  • Adapting the LCN 1260 closer to the obsolete 1370 mounting hole pattern when replacing an old 1370-series closer in an existing opening.
  • Covering damaged or stripped mounting holes in a door or frame where the original fastener positions can no longer hold the closer securely.

The 1260-18QF includes retrofit mounting plates for both the closer cylinder and the shoe. It is not a standard installation accessory and is not triggered by top rail depth.

 

LCN 1260 Shoes and Installation Accessories

Several accessories are required or optional depending on frame conditions and the arm type selected. These are the most common items missed at the time of initial order, and their absence delays installation.

Part NumberComponentWhen Required
1260-62PAParallel Arm ShoeRequired for all parallel arm push side mounting. The 1260-62PA has a different hole pattern than the 62PA shoe used on 4000 Series closers. Order specifically by series.
1260-62AAuxiliary ShoeUsed when the door closer must be mounted lower on the door to clear overhead hardware such as stops, coordinators, or other accessories above the standard arm mounting height.
1260-30CUSH Shoe SupportRequired with EDA or CUSH arms when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. Provides anchorage for the fifth shoe screw.
1260-201Fifth Hole SpacerProvides the mounting point for the fifth shoe screw in CUSH and EDA arm installations.
1260-419CUSH Flush Panel AdapterRequired with CUSH and EDA arms when the head frame is flush or rabbeted. Provides a horizontal mounting surface for the shoe.
1260-384StopDoor stop accessory for the 1260 Series.
1260-61Blade Stop SpacerRequired when a 1/2-inch blade stop is present in the door frame. Lowers the parallel arm shoe to clear the blade stop during door travel.

 

LCN 1260 Arm Screws and Screw Packs

The correct arm screw depends on the arm type and mounting configuration. Using the wrong arm screw can result in the arm slipping or failing to hold the door position correctly.

Part NumberComponentNotes
1260-159Arm Screw (1/4-20)Holds the arm on the spindle. Same screw dimensions as 1460-159.
1260-83Arm ScrewStandard arm screw for regular arm configurations.
1260-83HH Arm ScrewFor hold-open arm configurations.
1260-SRTSelf-Reaming and Tapping Screw PackStandard screw pack shipped with the 1260 closer. For wood and light steel applications.
1260-TBSRTThrough Bolt with SRT Screw PackFor enhanced security or when standard mounting screws cannot hold.
1260-TORXTORX Screw PackSecurity TORX fasteners for tamper-resistant installations.
1260-TBTRXThrough Bolt TORX Screw PackThrough bolt combined with TORX fasteners for maximum tamper resistance.
1260-TBWMSThrough Bolt Wood and Machine Screw PackFor wood door and metal frame installations with through bolt security.

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 1260 Replacement Part?

Confirm the following before placing any order to avoid receiving a part that does not fit the installed closer.

Confirm Before OrderingWhy It Matters
Series is 1260 (not 1460, 4040XP, or another series)Arms and hold-open arms are NOT interchangeable between the 1260 and 1460. The 62PA shoe has a different hole pattern on the 1260 than on 4000 Series closers. Confirm the model sticker under the cover.
Arm type needed (regular, hold-open, CUSH, EDA, HEDA)Different arm types require different installation accessories (PA shoe, CUSH shoe support, panel adapter). Selecting the wrong arm type means missing required accessories.
Handing (for HEDA arm only)All 1260 arms are non-handed except the HEDA (1260-3049EDA and 1260-3049EDA/G). Specify right-hand or left-hand when ordering the HEDA.
Drop plate trigger: top rail depth for hinge or top jamb mountIf top rail is less than 2-1/2 inches on hinge side, the 1260-18 is required. If top rail is less than 4-3/8 inches on parallel arm push side, the 1260-18PA is required.
Frame reveal for CUSH or EDA armFrame reveal less than 3-1/16 inches requires the 1260-30 CUSH Shoe Support. Flush or rabbeted head frame requires the 1260-419 panel adapter.
Finish codeThe 1260-72 standard cover is finish-specific. Order the correct finish code to match the installed hardware.
Cover type (shaft cover vs standard cover)The 1260 ships with the shaft cover (1260-146), not the standard plastic cover. If a full cover is needed, order the 1260-72 separately.

View all 40 LCN 1260 parts and diagrams at Security Parts commercial door closer parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support or to confirm specifications before ordering.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 1260 Field Issues

SymptomCheck FirstPart to Inspect or Replace
Door does not close or latchIncrease spring power adjustment on the cylinder body. Check that spring size is appropriate for the door width and weight.1261-3071 cylinder if spring adjustment does not resolve
Arm bent or brokenConfirm the arm type matches the door's use level. High-traffic doors may need the EDA arm family instead of the standard regular arm.1260-3077 (regular), 1260-3077EDA/G (EDA), or appropriate variant
Cover cracked or missingNote the finish code on the existing hardware before ordering.1260-72 standard cover or 1260-146 shaft cover
Arm shoe pulling away from frameConfirm the fifth screw is installed and the CUSH shoe support is in place if the reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches.1260-30 CUSH Shoe Support; 1260-201 Fifth Hole Spacer
Closer mounting screws pulling outExisting holes may be stripped. Check whether the mounting footprint is the obsolete 1370 pattern.1260-18QF Quick Fix bracket kit
Door closing too fast or too slowAdjust the closing speed and latch speed regulation valves. Do not open valves more than three turns from shutoff. The hydraulic fluid cannot be refilled in the field.1261-3071 cylinder if fluid has leaked and speed adjustment no longer has effect

For installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer. For further adjustment help, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301.

 

LCN 1260 vs LCN 1460: What Is the Difference?

The 1260 and 1460 are both universal, non-handed LCN surface-mounted closers and are often specified on the same building. They look similar in the field, which creates ordering confusion. The differences matter for parts ordering because arms, hold-open arms, and the 62PA shoe are NOT interchangeable between the two series.

FeatureLCN 1260LCN 1460
Duty ratingLight to medium dutyMedium duty
Spring sizes1 to 51 to 6
Interior door widthTo 4 ft 6 inTo 5 ft 0 in
Exterior door widthTo 3 ft 6 inTo 4 ft 0 in
Warranty20 years30 years
Spring adjustmentStandard adjustmentPatented Green Dial visual indicator
Standard cover shippedShaft cover (1260-146) onlySlim line cover (1460-72)
Standard PA shoe shippedNot included standard1460-62PA included standard
Cylinder designation1261-30711461-3071
Hold-open arm cross-compatibleNoNo
62PA shoe cross-compatibleNo (different hole pattern)No (different hole pattern from 1260)

 

Where Is the LCN 1260 Specified and Where Does It Appear in the Field?

The LCN 1260 is one of the most widely installed light-to-medium duty commercial door closers in North America. Its ability to fit the most common commercial mounting footprint (3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch hole spacing) means it installs in a large percentage of existing commercial openings without requiring new holes. This footprint compatibility is the reason it appears across so many building types.

Common 1260 installation locations include:

  • Office building interior doors where ADA-compliant opening force is required and the door sees moderate daily traffic
  • Retail storefront interior doors where the closer must mount on a narrow top rail or on top jamb because the door is aluminum-framed glass
  • School interior corridor doors where a non-handed, quick-to-install closer simplifies building-wide replacement projects
  • Healthcare facility interior doors where the door width is within the 4 foot 6 inch interior door limit
  • Hotel room and corridor doors where the 20-year warranty and light-to-medium duty rating match the expected traffic level
  • Replacement projects where the installer is replacing an obsolete 1070-series or 1370-series closer and wants to use the existing mounting holes

The 1260 is not appropriate for high-traffic institutional applications where the door sees several hundred cycles per day and where the heavier duty rating of the 1460 or the 4000 Series is the correct specification. For guidance on selecting the right closer for a specific application, see the LCN 4110 Parts Guide or call Security Parts at 845-935-0301.

 

LCN 1260 Body Specifications and Construction Details

Understanding the internal construction of the 1260 helps maintenance staff identify when a part can be adjusted or repaired versus when the full cylinder assembly needs replacement.

  • Cylinder body: Cast iron
  • Bearing: Full-complement bearing
  • Piston diameter: 1-3/8 inches
  • Pinion journal diameter: 5/8 inch, heat-treated steel
  • Fluid: All-weather hydraulic fluid
  • Arm material: Forged steel
  • Spring sizes: Non-sized, adjustable from size 1 to 5
  • Mounting footprint: 3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch center-to-center hole spacing (matches most common commercial pattern)
  • Certifications: ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1, UL and cUL listed, ADA compliant, BAA (Buy American Act) compliant
  • Warranty: 20-year limited

The all-weather hydraulic fluid performs across a wide temperature range without seasonal closing speed adjustment. Regulation valves control general closing speed, latch speed, and backcheck. Do not open any regulation valve more than three turns from the fully closed position. The hydraulic fluid cannot be refilled in the field. A closer that has lost hydraulic fluid requires replacement of the 1261-3071 cylinder assembly.

 

How to Identify the LCN 1260 Model Number in the Field

The most common mistake technicians make when ordering 1260 Series parts is reading the casting or forging number stamped on the cylinder body surface and trying to order parts using that number. Numbers like "71" or "320G" stamped on the 1261 cylinder body are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers or model designations. They cannot be used to identify or order replacement parts.

The correct method for identifying the LCN 1260 Series in the field:

  1. Remove or open the cover on the closer body.
  2. Look for the model identification sticker on the cylinder body. The sticker shows the model number (for example, 1261) and typically includes a date code.
  3. The date code is a four-digit number. The first two digits indicate the week of manufacture. The last two digits indicate the year. For example, "2322" means the 23rd week of 2022.
  4. Confirm the series (1260) and use 1260 as the prefix for all arm, cover, and accessory part numbers. Use 1261 as the prefix when ordering the cylinder assembly.

If the sticker is worn or missing, the model can often be confirmed by the mounting footprint. The 1260 uses the standard 3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch hole pattern. If the existing holes match this pattern and the closer body is a cast iron surface-mounted closer sized for a door up to 4 feet 6 inches wide, the 1260 is the correct series.

 

LCN 1260 Arm Cross-Compatibility: What Works on Other Series

One of the most useful facts for maintenance teams managing buildings with multiple LCN closer models is that the 1260-3077 regular arm is compatible with several other LCN series. However, the hold-open arm, the 62PA parallel arm shoe, and the CUSH and EDA arms are series-specific and cannot be shared.

PartCompatible with 1260 and These Other SeriesNOT Compatible With
1260-3077 regular arm1460, 4010, 4020, 4040 series use the same 3077 regular arm design (order by series prefix)4040XP (hex spindle), 4110 (oval spindle), concealed series
1260-146 shaft coverThe 1260-146 and 1460-146 shaft cover are the same physical partAll other series
1260-62PA parallel arm shoe1260 Series only1460, 4000 Series, and all others -- the hole pattern is different on the 1260
1260-3049 hold-open arm1260 Series only1460-3049 is a different part. Not interchangeable.
1260-159 arm screwSame dimensions as 1460-159Verify before substituting on other series
1260-61 blade stop spacer1260 Series. May share dimensions with blade stop spacers from other commercial closer manufacturers. Confirm before substituting.Confirm before substituting on other LCN series

The spindle on the 1260 and 1460 is different from the spindle on the 4040XP. This means that arms from the 4040XP cannot be used on the 1260 or 1460. Confirm the installed closer series from the model sticker before ordering any arm replacement.

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware replacement components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 40 LCN 1260 and 1261 Series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and available for individual order. The 1260 and 1460 arms, hold-open arms, and 62PA shoes are not interchangeable despite the series numbers being sequential. Confirm the installed series from the model sticker under the cover before placing any order. For pre-order identification support, call 845-935-0301. Security Parts has stocked and shipped genuine OEM commercial door hardware replacement components since 2001. Every part page includes a diagram view and a parts lookup tool organized by series and model number, so technicians can confirm the correct part number before placing an order. The 1260 series is a common replacement project for anyone managing older buildings with obsolete 1070-series or 1370-series closers, and the 1260-18QF Quick Fix bracket kit was specifically designed for that retrofit scenario. Confirm the installed model and the frame conditions before ordering to avoid returns and delays on any 1260 Series parts project.

 

LCN 1260 Peel-N-Stick Templates and Installation Notes

The LCN 1260 Series ships with peel-n-stick installation templates that eliminate the need to mark and measure mounting hole positions manually. Each template sticks directly to the door or frame, shows the exact drill points for the selected mounting configuration, and peels off cleanly after installation. Template numbers vary by mounting type: template 29804 covers pull side and top jamb mounts, template 29805 covers the parallel arm push side mount, template 29808 covers the EDA mount, template 29809 covers CUSH and Spring CUSH mounts, template 29810 covers drop plate installations, template 29811 covers the Quick Fix bracket, and template 29901 covers the 62A shoe installation. These template numbers are reference information only. The templates are included in the closer package or in the relevant arm and accessory kits when ordering from Security Parts.

For fire-rated door applications, confirm the fire rating of the door assembly and the specific hold-open requirements with the authority having jurisdiction before specifying any hold-open closer or arm. See the commercial door fire rating guide for guidance on fire rating requirements for commercial door hardware.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

LCN 4110 Parts Guide: EDA Arm, Spring Cush Arm, Fusible Link, Cover, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 75 replacement components for the LCN 4110 and 4110T Smoothee series. The 4110 is a parallel arm push side closer and the EDA arm is shipped as standard. Optional arms include the CNS Cush-N-Stop, the SCNS Spring Cush-N-Stop (unique to the 4110 family), and hold-open variants for each. The 4110 also carries a full range of fusible link arm components for fire-rated door applications. Arms, covers, and drop plates are specific to the 4110 or 4110T and cannot be interchanged between the two. Confirm the model number, hand, and arm type before ordering. Call 845-935-0301 for identification support.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Smoothee Series?

LCN 4110 Smoothee Series heavy duty parallel arm door closer for institutional and commercial applications

The LCN 4110 Smoothee Series is a heavy duty, cast iron surface-mounted door closer designed exclusively for parallel arm push side installations. It is purpose-built for institutional and high-traffic commercial applications including classroom doors, auditorium doors, healthcare corridor doors, and any opening where the closer body must mount on the push side and the arm must run parallel to the door to keep the hardware as concealed as possible.

The 4110 is application-specific, which means it is engineered for one mounting position only. It cannot be converted to regular arm or top jamb mount in the field. When a 4110 is ordered, the hand of the door (right or left) must be specified at the time of order. The 4110 ships with the Extra Duty Arm (EDA) as standard, a standard plastic cover, the 4110-201 fifth hole spacer, and self-reaming and tapping screws.

 

What Is the LCN Green Dial on the 4110?

The LCN Green Dial is a patented spring power indicator built into the 4110 (and all 4000 Series) closer body. It provides a direct visual reading of the current spring power setting without requiring the cover to be removed or the cylinder to be replaced. A technician can verify and adjust the spring power setting in the field by reading the Green Dial position. When a 4110 begins closing too slowly or fails to latch, checking and increasing the Green Dial spring setting is always the correct first step. Most unnecessary cylinder replacements on 4110 installations happen because the technician did not know the spring power was adjustable on the existing cylinder.

The 4110 series uses a flat-sided oval spindle, the same spindle geometry as the 4010 and 4020 series. This matters for parts ordering: arms from the 4040XP (hex spindle) and 1460 (star spindle) do not fit the 4110. All arm replacement orders must specify the correct series designation (4110) to ensure spindle compatibility.

The LCN 4110 carries a 30-year warranty and holds the following certifications: ANSI A156.4 Grade 1, UL 10C, ADA, 100-hour salt spray (more than four times the ANSI standard for corrosion resistance), and the BAA Buy American Act requirement. The fusible link arm assemblies carry UL Listing number R1943. The 4111 cylinder meets ADA opening force requirements. The closer and its components are made in the USA.

Inside the 4110 body: a cast iron cylinder with a full complement bearing, a 1-1/2-inch diameter piston, and an 11/16-inch diameter double heat-treated pinion journal. Full rack and pinion hydraulic action drives the closing speed. The all-weather Liquid X hydraulic fluid performs without variation from -30 degrees F to +120 degrees F, so the 4110 never needs seasonal closing speed adjustment. The Peel-N-Stick installation templates simplify field installation: template 28479 covers regular arm mounts, 28481 covers CUSH and Spring CUSH mounts, 28501 covers the drop plate, and 26367 covers the fusible link arm.

 

What Are the LCN 4110 Cylinder Options?

The LCN 4110 series uses model numbers 4111 through 4116. The cylinder model number is stamped on the closer body near the packing nut. Numbers such as "71" or "320G" found elsewhere on the body are manufacturing reference numbers, not model numbers, and cannot be used to order parts.

ModelSpring SizeADARestrictions
4111Adjustable, size 1 to 5 (Green Dial)YesNone. All arm options available.
4112 to 4115Sized (fixed)Varies by sizeSized cylinders for specific door widths. Interior doors to 5 ft 0 in., exterior doors to 4 ft 0 in.
4116Size 6NoDEL (Delayed Action), SHCUSH, and HCUSH arms are NOT available with the 4116 cylinder.

Optional cylinder upgrades available on the 4110 series:

  • AVB (Advanced Variable Backcheck): Backcheck begins at approximately 45 degrees instead of the standard 75 degrees, providing earlier resistance against the door being pushed or blown open aggressively. Especially useful with the SCNS arm on high-abuse openings.
  • DEL (Delayed Action): The door holds at the maximum opening position for an adjustable delay of up to approximately one minute before the closer begins its closing sweep. Not available with the 4116 cylinder.
  • TEL (Time-Controlled Electro-Hydraulic): An electrified delayed action option. Confirm availability for specific applications.

For a full comparison of the 4110 against other 4000 Series closers, see the LCN 4000 Series parts guide. For installation and adjustment guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer and how to adjust a commercial door closer.

 

What Is the Difference Between the LCN 4110 and 4110T?

The 4110 and 4110T share the same cast iron cylinder body but use entirely different arm systems. Knowing which variant is installed determines which arm, cover, and drop plate to order.

FeatureLCN 4110LCN 4110T
Arm systemParallel arm with rod and shoeTrack arm with slide track and roller
Standard arm shipped4110-3077EDA (Extra Duty Arm)4110T-3077T (Standard Track Arm)
Arm handingEDA non-handed; CNS and SCNS handedHanded
SCNS Spring Cush armYes (4110-3077SCNS)No
Fusible link armsYes (4110-28, 4110-49FL, 4110-3049FL)No
Track rollerNot applicable4110T-3034
Standard trackNot applicable4110T-3038 (plus bumper and hold-open variants)
Metal cover4110-72MC4110T-72MC
Drop plate4110-184110T-18

Always verify the variant stamped on the closer body before ordering. The model number is located near the packing nut at the base of the pinion. Numbers such as "71" or "320G" found stamped elsewhere on the cylinder are manufacturing reference numbers and cannot be used to order parts.

 

What Is the Difference Between the LCN 4110 and 4210?

Both the 4110 and the 4210 are Smoothee series parallel arm push side closers. They share a similar application profile and look similar in the field, which causes ordering confusion. The key differences are in the security specification and fastener system.

The 4210 is the high security variant. It ships with TORX machine screws as standard rather than SRT screws, and uses a four-point metal security cover mounting rather than two-point. The 4210 is specified for correctional, vandal-prone, and institutionally secure applications where tampering resistance is a priority. The 4110 is specified for standard institutional and high-traffic commercial applications that do not require the elevated tamper resistance of the 4210.

Parts are not cross-compatible between the 4110 and 4210 series. Covers, arm screws, and drop plates are series-specific. The 4110 SCNS Spring Cush-N-Stop arm family is not available on the 4210. For a detailed comparison, see the LCN 4210 parts guide.

 

What LCN 4110 Parts Are Available?

All 75 LCN 4110 and 4110T Smoothee series replacement parts stocked at Security Parts are organized below by component category.

 

Arm Selection: Which LCN 4110 Arm Do I Need?

Arm selection is the most common parts decision on the LCN 4110 series. The 4110 offers more arm variants than most other LCN closer families, including the Spring Cush-N-Stop (SCNS) family that is unique to this series.

Part NumberArm NameHold OpenHandedKey Feature
4110-3077EDAExtra Duty Arm (standard)NoNon-handedDefault arm shipped. Templatable at 100, 140, 180 degrees.
4110-3049EDAHold Open Extra Duty Arm (HEDA)YesHandedHold open point set at installation. HEDA arms are handed.
4110-3077CNSCush-N-Stop Arm (CNS)NoHandedBuilt-in door stop in soffit shoe. No separate overhead stop needed.
4110-3049CNSHold Open Cush-N-Stop Arm (HCNS)YesHandedBuilt-in stop and hold-open function in one arm assembly.
4110-3077SCNSSpring Cush-N-Stop Arm (SCNS)NoNon-handedSpring cushion absorbs stop impact. Recommended for high-traffic and AVB applications.
4110-3049SCNSHold Open Spring Cush-N-Stop Arm (SHCNS)YesNon-handedSpring cushion plus hold-open function. Part number: 4110-3049SCNS.
4110-3077EDAGExtra Duty Arm with 62G Thick Hub ShoeNoNon-handedThick hub shoe for installations where standard shoe does not provide sufficient engagement.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Extra Duty Arm (EDA)?

The 4110-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm is the standard arm shipped with the LCN 4110 closer. It is a non-handed, heavy duty parallel arm that mounts push side only. The degree of door opening is set at installation by the template used, with options at 100 degrees, 140 degrees, and 180 degrees.

Because the EDA arm is non-handed, a single part number fits both right-hand and left-hand doors. If a door stop is also required, it must come from a separate overhead stop device rather than the arm itself. The hold-open version is the 4110-3049EDA Hold Open Extra Duty Arm, which is handed and must be specified right-hand or left-hand at order.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Cush-N-Stop (CNS) Arm?

The 4110-3077CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm is an optional handed arm with a built-in stop in the soffit shoe. When the door reaches its templated maximum opening angle, the arm contacts the stop and arrests the door without needing a separate overhead or wall stop device. This simplifies the hardware specification on openings where both a closer and a stop are needed.

The CNS arm is handed and must be specified as right-hand or left-hand. The drop plate (4110-18) is required for CNS arm installations. The CUSH shoe support (4110-30) is required when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. The fifth hole spacer (4110-201) provides the mounting point for the fifth shoe screw. Installing a CNS arm with a separate overhead stop device is redundant and not recommended since both mechanisms would compete on the same door.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Spring Cush-N-Stop (SCNS) Arm?

The Spring Cush-N-Stop (SCNS) arm is a feature of the 4110 series that competitors and parts distributors rarely explain in depth. The 4110-3077SCNS Spring Cush-N-Stop Arm provides a built-in door stop like the CNS arm, but adds a spring-loaded cushion mechanism that absorbs the impact shock when the door hits the stop.

On high-cycle doors, the repeated impact of the door reaching maximum opening transfers significant force through the arm and into the closer body and pinion. The spring cushion in the SCNS arm dissipates this force rather than transmitting it directly, reducing long-term wear on the closer, the arm pivot, and the surrounding door hardware. The SCNS arm is specifically recommended for applications using Advanced Variable Backcheck (AVB), where the closer is adjusted to resist door opening force earlier in the swing, creating conditions where the door hits the stop with greater impact.

The SCNS arm is non-handed, which is an operational advantage over the CNS arm on large institutional hardware orders. The hold-open version is the 4110-3049SCNS Hold Open Spring Cush-N-Stop Arm. The 4110-3080 Spring Cush Block assembly (which includes the spring screw 4110-58 and block 4110-80G) is the replaceable spring mechanism used in the SCNS arm system when the cushion component itself requires servicing.

 

What Are the LCN 4110 Fusible Link Arm Components?

The LCN 4110 is one of three LCN surface closer series (alongside the 4010 and 4020) that offers a complete fusible link arm system for fire-rated door applications. The fusible link arm components allow the 4110 to be installed as a hold-open closer on a fire-rated door while still meeting the requirement that the door must close automatically when exposed to elevated temperatures from a fire event.

The fusible link melts at 165 degrees F, releasing the hold-open function and allowing the closer spring to return the door to the closed and latched position. This is a code-required feature on fire-rated doors where a hold-open closer is otherwise installed.

Part NumberComponentFunction
4110-28Fusible LinkThe replaceable fusible element that melts at 165 degrees F to release the hold-open function.
4110-49FLFusible Link Main Arm and RodThe complete main arm and rod assembly incorporating the fusible link mechanism.
4110-62FLParallel Arm Fusible Link ShoeThe soffit shoe that incorporates the fusible link release mechanism for the parallel arm installation.
4110-3049FLFusible Link Arm AssemblyComplete hold-open fusible link arm. Releases hold-open when exposed to temperatures above 165 degrees F. Handed arm, specify hand at order. The fusible link (4110-28) is separately replaceable after activation.

For guidance on fire-rated door hardware requirements and compliance, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

LCN 4110T Track Arm Components

The 4110T uses a track arm system in place of the parallel rod and shoe. The track arm is handed and must be specified at order.

Part NumberComponentNotes
4110T-3077TStandard Track ArmHanded. Specify right-hand or left-hand at order.
4110T-3034Track RollerRides inside the standard track as the door opens and closes.
4110T-3034HHold Open Track RollerHolds the door open at the roller position within the track.
4110T-3038Standard TrackThe slide track mounted to the door or frame.
4110T-3038BStandard Track with BumperTrack with end bumper for controlled door stop at end of travel.
4110T-3038HStandard Track with Hold OpenTrack with hold-open feature. Used with the hold-open track roller.
4110T-3038HBStandard Track with Bumper and Hold OpenCombined bumper and hold-open track for maximum control.

 

LCN 4110 Covers: Standard vs Metal Security

The LCN 4110 series offers two cover types: a standard plastic cover and a metal security cover. The cover is finish-specific and must be specified with the correct finish code to match the installed hardware.

Part NumberCover TypeApplies ToNotes
4110-72Standard Plastic Cover4110Ships standard with the 4110 closer. Specify finish code at order.
4110-72MCMetal Security Cover4110Optional heavy gauge metal cover. Plated finish also available on arm and fasteners when ordered with metal cover.
4110T-72Standard Cover4110TSpecific to the 4110T track arm variant. Not interchangeable with 4110-72.
4110T-72MCMetal Security Cover4110TSpecific to the 4110T variant. Not interchangeable with 4110-72MC.

The cover screw for the 4110 is the 4110-31. The 4110T uses the 4110T-31 cover screw. These are not interchangeable.

 

When Is the LCN 4110-18 Drop Plate Required?

The 4110-18 Drop Plate has two trigger conditions that require it to be included in an installation.

  • The top rail is less than 5-1/8 inches measured from the stop on a push side parallel arm mount.
  • Any CNS (Cush-N-Stop) or SCNS arm installation, regardless of top rail depth.

The plate requires a minimum top rail of 2 inches measured from the stop. If the top rail is less than 2 inches, the drop plate cannot be used on that opening.

A frequently asked question from the LCN community is whether the 4110-18 and the 4110-18 CUSH drop plates are different parts. They are physically identical. The designation "CUSH" refers only to the installation template used on the door, not to any difference in the plate itself.

The 4110T uses the separate 4110T-18 drop plate, which is specific to the track arm variant and cannot be substituted for the 4110-18.

 

LCN 4110 Accessories: Cush Shoe Support, Blade Stop Spacer, and Panel Adapter

Several accessories are required or optional depending on the frame conditions at the specific installation. These are frequently missed at order time and are the most common cause of delayed installations on CNS and SCNS arm applications.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-30 Cush Shoe Support?

The 4110-30 Cush Shoe Support provides anchorage for the fifth screw used with CNS and SCNS arms when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. On a standard CNS or SCNS arm installation, the CUSH shoe is mounted to the frame with five screws. The fifth screw provides critical anchorage because the built-in stop generates significant force at the shoe connection point each time the door reaches its maximum opening angle. When the frame reveal is too narrow for a standard five-screw installation, the CUSH shoe support provides the mounting surface for that fifth screw. Without it, repeated door stops can pull the shoe away from the frame over time.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-61 Blade Stop Spacer?

The 4110-61 Blade Stop Spacer is used when a 1/2-inch blade stop is installed in the door frame. The spacer lowers the parallel arm shoe to clear the blade stop during door travel. Without the spacer, the shoe contacts the blade stop before the door reaches its full intended opening angle, limiting door travel and potentially damaging the arm.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-419 Panel Adapter?

The 4110-419 Panel Adapter is needed when the CUSH shoe must mount to a single rabbeted or flush frame that does not present a horizontal mounting surface for the shoe. The adapter provides the horizontal surface the CUSH shoe requires for a correct CNS or SCNS arm installation.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-201 Fifth Hole Spacer?

The 4110-201 Fifth Hole Spacer provides the positioning point for the fifth mounting screw at the CUSH shoe. The standard 4110 closer ships with the 4110-201 included. Order this spacer whenever specifying any CNS or SCNS arm installation where the fifth screw position must be established.

 

LCN 4110 Screw Packs: SRT, TORX, and Thru-Bolt Options

The standard LCN 4110 ships with SRT (self-reaming and tapping) screws, unlike the 4210 which ships with TORX screws as standard. The 4110 series offers the full range of screw pack options for both the 4110 and 4110T variants.

Part NumberScrew Pack TypeApplies To
4110-SRTSelf-Reaming and Tapping (standard)4110
4110-TORXTORX Machine Screw Pack4110
4110-TBSRTThru-Bolt with SRT Screw Pack4110
4110-TBTRXThru-Bolt with TORX Screw Pack4110
4110-WMSWood and Machine Screw Pack4110
4110T-SRTSelf-Reaming and Tapping4110T
4110T-TORXTORX Machine Screw Pack4110T

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 4110 Replacement Part?

Confirm each of the following before placing an order to avoid receiving a part that does not fit the installation.

Confirm Before OrderingWhy It MattersApplies To
Model variant (4110 or 4110T)Arms, covers, drop plates, and arm screws are specific to each variant and cannot be interchanged.All parts
Hand of the door (right or left)The CNS, HCNS, HEDA, fusible link arm, and 4110T track arm are all handed.Handed arms and covers
Arm type needed (EDA, CNS, SCNS)Different arm types use different templates and have different accessory requirements.All arm orders
Hold-open function requiredHold-open arm variants (HEDA, HCNS, SHCNS) are separate part numbers from non-hold-open versions.Hold-open arms
Fire-rated door (fusible link required)Hold-open arms on fire-rated doors must use fusible link components to maintain the fire rating.All hold-open arms on fire-rated doors
Finish codeCovers and arms must match the existing finish of the installed hardware.Covers and handed arms
Top rail depth (less than 5-1/8 in. triggers drop plate)Drop plate required when top rail is narrow or on all CNS/SCNS arm installations.4110-18 or 4110T-18
Frame reveal depth (less than 3-1/16 in. triggers shoe support)CUSH shoe support required when reveal is too narrow for standard five-screw shoe installation.4110-30
Blade stop in frame (1/2 in.)Blade stop spacer required when a 1/2-inch blade stop is present in the frame.4110-61

View all LCN 4110 and 4110T parts and diagrams at Security Parts commercial door closer parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support or to confirm specifications before ordering.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 4110 Field Issues

SymptomCheck FirstParts to Inspect or Replace
Door does not close or latchCheck spring power setting using the Fast Power Adjust indicator. Increase spring power before considering cylinder replacement.Cylinder; arm screw (4110-159)
Arm touches door when closedCloser body or arm is not templated correctly. Check installation template alignment.Confirm correct template was used; arm replacement if damaged
CUSH shoe pulling away from frameConfirm the fifth screw is installed and CUSH shoe support is in place where reveal is less than 3-1/16 in.4110-30 Cush Shoe Support; 4110-201 Fifth Hole Spacer
Hold-open not releasing on fire-rated doorConfirm fusible link has not been activated and damaged. If activated by heat, replace the fusible link (4110-28).4110-28 Fusible Link (replacement after activation)
Track arm binding or noisy (4110T)Inspect track roller for wear and track for debris or deformation.4110T-3034 Track Roller; 4110T-3038 Standard Track
Door slamming or closing too fastDo not open regulation valves more than 3 turns from shutoff. Check for hydraulic fluid leak.Regulation valve adjustment; closer replacement if fluid has leaked
Door opening too hard or resisting pushBackcheck valve may be over-closed. Consider AVB cylinder with SCNS arm to manage opening force.Backcheck valve adjustment; 4110-3077SCNS SCNS arm for future reinstallation

 

LCN 4110 vs LCN 4040XP: Which Parallel Arm Closer Do I Have?

Facilities managers and locksmiths sometimes encounter both the 4110 and the 4040XP mounted in parallel arm configuration on the same building, which leads to ordering confusion. The two closers look similar from across a hallway but use completely different spindle geometry and arm families.

The 4110 uses a flat-sided oval spindle and mounts push side only in parallel arm configuration. It ships with the EDA arm as standard. The 4040XP uses a six-sided hex spindle and can be mounted in regular arm, parallel arm, and top jamb configurations. An arm from the 4040XP family will not fit on a 4110 and vice versa. Confirm which model is installed by reading the model number stamped near the packing nut on the closer body before ordering any arm replacement. For a detailed guide to the 4040XP arm family, see the LCN 4040XP parts guide.

LCN 4110 Applications: Where Is This Closer Specified?

The LCN 4110 Smoothee is specified in applications where the door control must mount on the push side with a parallel arm configuration. This is the standard specification for many institutional building types because it keeps the closer body and arm concealed from the pull side of the door, reducing tampering risk and maintaining the appearance of the opening.

Common 4110 application types include:

  • Classroom doors in K-12 schools and university buildings, where the closer body must face the corridor and not the classroom interior
  • Auditorium and assembly room doors where the push side faces a public area
  • Healthcare corridor doors where infection control and cleanability favor hardware mounted on the corridor side
  • Government building interior doors where the push side faces a public or controlled area
  • Office suite entrance doors where the arm and closer body should not be visible from the reception area
  • Fire-rated corridor doors where the 4110-3049FL fusible link arm is required for code-compliant hold-open operation

The 4110 is not appropriate for regular arm or top jamb installations. Those applications require the 4010, 4020, 4030, or 4040XP series. For guidance on selecting the correct LCN closer series for an application, see the LCN door closer selection guide and the commercial door closer sizing guide.

Can the LCN 4110 Be Used With a Door Coordinator?

Yes, but a specific mounting solution is required. When the 4111 is used with a bar-style door coordinator, IVES MB mounting brackets are required. These brackets wrap around the coordinator to provide a surface for mounting the parallel arm shoe. Without the IVES MB brackets, the parallel arm shoe cannot mount correctly when a bar-style coordinator is present across the top of the door frame. Contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 to confirm the correct bracket configuration before ordering.

Can the LCN 4110 EDA Be Used With a Glynn Johnson Overhead Stop?

This is one of the most frequently asked questions from the professional locksmith and door hardware community about the 4110. Two different scenarios apply depending on which Glynn Johnson overhead stop is installed.

For the GJ901 through GJ904 series: Special Template ST-2730 is required to mount the 4110 EDA closer with these overhead stops. If a drop plate is also required on the same opening, use the 4010-18 drop plate, not the 4110-18 drop plate. The two plates are not interchangeable in this specific combination.

For the Glynn Johnson GJ100 concealed overhead stop series: No special template is required. The 4110 EDA closer drops far enough on the door that it does not conflict with the GJ100 series concealed overhead stop, and the two can be mounted together using standard 4110 installation templates.

 

LCN 4110 Maintenance: What Does This Closer Require?

Closers mounted according to LCN installation instructions require no periodic maintenance or seasonal adjustments. The all-weather hydraulic fluid in the 4110 performs consistently across the full operating temperature range without the need for spring or speed adjustments between seasons.

The one service item that is regularly needed on high-cycle 4110 installations is spring power adjustment using the Fast Power Adjust indicator on the closer body. If a 4110 begins closing too slowly or fails to latch reliably, increasing the spring power setting is the correct first step before any cylinder replacement is considered. Most unnecessary cylinder replacements on 4110 installations happen because the technician is not aware that the spring power is adjustable without removing the cover or replacing the cylinder.

If a 4110 develops a hydraulic fluid leak, the fluid cannot be refilled in the field. Attempting to refill the hydraulic fluid voids the warranty. A leaking closer requires replacement of the cylinder assembly or the full closer body depending on where the leak originates. Call 845-935-0301 for guidance before ordering any replacement part on a leaking 4110.

The CUSH shoe and arm connections on CNS and SCNS arm installations should be inspected annually on high-cycle doors. The fifth screw connection at the shoe is the most common failure point on heavy-traffic CUSH arm applications. If the shoe is showing movement or the fifth screw connection is loose, inspect the CUSH shoe support (4110-30) and fifth hole spacer (4110-201) for correct installation before replacing the arm assembly.

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 75 LCN 4110 and 4110T Smoothee series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and available for individual order. The LCN 4110 series has more arm variants than most other LCN closer families, and ordering errors on handing, arm type, and accessory requirements are common. Confirm the installed model number, hand, and arm configuration before placing any order. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support. Security Parts stocks genuine OEM LCN components, ensuring that replacement parts match the original specifications for fit, material, and code compliance. The 4110 series has one of the widest arm option ranges of any LCN surface closer, and confirming the correct arm type, handing, and accessory requirements before ordering prevents the most common return and delay scenarios.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

LCN 4210 Parts Guide: Cush Arm, EDA Arm, Drop Plate, Metal Cover, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 29 replacement components for the LCN 4210 and 4210T Smoothee high security door closer series. The most frequently replaced parts are the three arm assemblies for the 4210 (EDA Arm, Cush Arm, Hold Open Cush Arm) and the track components for the 4210T. The cylinder assembly and metal security cover are handed and must be specified at order. Before ordering any part, confirm the model variant (4210 or 4210T), the hand, the cylinder size, and the finish. Closer adjustments are not accessible with the security cover installed -- the cover must be removed first. Call 845-935-0301 to confirm specifications before placing an order.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Smoothee Series?

The LCN 4210 Smoothee Series is a heavy duty, high security surface-mounted parallel arm door closer built for correctional, institutional, vandal-prone, and high-traffic applications. It has passed 10 million cycles in independent testing and is tested and certified under ANSI Standard A156.4, Grade 1. The 4210 carries a ten-year warranty. The series includes a high-strength cast iron cylinder, a one-piece forged steel piston, a double-heat-treated pinion, all-weather hydraulic fluid, tamper-resistant regulating screws, and a high-efficiency full-complement low-friction bearing.

The LCN 4210 is a parallel arm push-side mount closer. The related 4510 is the hinge pull-side version. The 4210T is the track arm variant of the 4210, with a high security threaded track roller that cannot be removed without disconnecting the arm from the closer. All three share the same fundamental cylinder body but use different arm assemblies, covers, and accessories that are not interchangeable.

For a broader overview of LCN closer families stocked at Security Parts, see the door closers parts guide and the LCN 4000 series parts guide.

 

What Is the Difference Between the LCN 4210 and 4210T?

The 4210 and 4210T share the same cast iron cylinder body but use entirely different arm systems. Knowing which variant is installed determines which arm, cover, drop plate, and arm screw to order.

FeatureLCN 4210LCN 4210T
Arm typeParallel arm with rod and shoeSlide track with track roller
Default arm shipped4210-3077EDA (Extra Duty Arm)4210T-3077T (Standard Track Arm)
Arm handingEDA non-handed; CNS arms handedHanded
Cush Arm availableYes (4210-3077CNS)No
Hold Open Cush ArmYes (4210-3049CNS, not with 4216 cylinder)No
Track rollerNot applicable4210T-3034 (high security threaded, not removable without disconnecting arm)
Metal cover4210-72MC (handed, 4-point mount)4210T-72MC (handed, 4-point mount)
Drop plate4210-184210T-18
Track end caps sold separatelyNot applicableNo (factory-installed, not sold separately)
Tested cycles10 million10 million
WarrantyTen yearsTen years

The model number is stamped on the closer body near the packing nut at the base of the pinion. Numbers such as "71" or "320G" found elsewhere on the body are manufacturing reference numbers and cannot be used to order parts.

 

Can I Access the LCN 4210 Adjustment Valves With the Cover On?

No. This is one of the most important service facts about the 4210 series and the detail most frequently overlooked. The LCN 4210 metal security cover uses four-point mounting precisely to resist tampering, and as a result, closer adjustments are not accessible with the cover installed. The cover must be removed before any regulation valve adjustment, spring power adjustment, or closer service can be performed.

On standard LCN series closers, the snap-on cover allows quicker access. The 4210 metal security cover is a different design and must be fully removed. Confirm the cover screw is the correct replacement (4210-31 for the 4210, 4210T-31 for the 4210T) when reinstalling after service.

 

What Torx Bit Size Does the LCN 4210 Use?

The LCN 4210 uses Torx fasteners as standard, which is one of its tamper-resistant features. The bit sizes required depend on the screw being driven.

Screw TypeTorx Bit Size
#10 machine screws (standard installation)T-25
#8 machine screws or undercut #10T-20
#6 machine screwsT-10
Standard installation (T-27 noted in LCN templates)T-27

LCN does not supply Torx wrenches with the closer. These are standard sizes that any professional installer will have available. If the installation uses the thru-bolt screw pack (4210-TBTRX), confirm the correct bit size for the specific fasteners in that pack before starting.

 

What LCN 4210 Parts Are Available?

All 29 LCN 4210 and 4210T Smoothee series replacement parts stocked at Security Parts are listed below. Parts for the 4210 and 4210T are noted separately. Several parts are shared between both variants.

#Part NumberComponent NameModelHanded?
14210-3077EDAExtra Duty Arm4210Non-handed
24210-3077CNSCush Arm (CUSH-N-Stop)4210Handed
34210-3049CNSHold Open Cush Arm (HCUSH) -- not available with 4216 cylinder4210Handed
44210T-3077TStandard Track Arm4210THanded
54210T-3034Track Roller (high security threaded attachment)4210TNo
64210T-3038Standard Track4210TNo (finish required)
74210-72MCMetal Security Cover (4-point mount)4210Handed
84210T-72MCMetal Security Cover (4-point mount)4210THanded
94210-18Drop Plate -- narrow top rail or flush ceiling (TORX screws included)4210No
104210T-18Drop Plate -- narrow top rail (required when top rail less than 5-1/4 in. from stop)4210TNo
114210-30CUSH Shoe Support (anchorage for 5th screw when reveal less than 3-1/16 in.)4210No
124210-61Blade Stop Spacer (clears 1/2-in. blade stop)4210No
134210-419Flush Panel Adaptor (horizontal surface for CUSH shoe on flush/single rabbeted frame)4210No
144210-201Fifth Hole Spacer4210No
154210-159Arm Screw4210No
164210T-159Arm Screw4210TNo
174210-31Cover Screw4210No
184210T-31Cover Screw4210TNo
194210-TORXTORX Machine Screw Pack4210No
204210-TBTRXThru-Bolt Wood-Machine Screw Pack4210No
214210T-TORXThru Bolts with TORX Machine Screw Pack4210TNo
224210T-TBTRXThru Bolts with TORX Machine Screw Pack4210TNo
23-29Rebox/DocumentationRebox Kit, Flat Box, Instruction Sheet (4210 and 4210T variants)BothNo

 

Arm Selection: Which LCN 4210 Arm Do I Need?

Arm selection is the most common decision when ordering LCN 4210 parts. The 4210 offers three arm types for the standard parallel arm configuration. The 4210T uses a single track arm. The correct arm depends on whether a built-in stop, hold-open, or track configuration is required for the application.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Extra Duty Arm (EDA)?

The 4210-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm is the default arm shipped with the 4210 closer. It is non-handed, solid forged steel, with a double slab arm-to-pinion attachment for maximum strength. The EDA arm does not include a built-in stop and is designed for potentially abusive installations. Because it is non-handed, the same part fits both left-hand and right-hand doors. It is UL listed for self-closing door applications.

LCN 4210-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm, non-handed forged steel parallel arm for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

If a door stop is needed on an EDA arm installation, it must be a separate overhead stop or wall stop device, not a CUSH arm accessory. Using a separate stop device alongside a CUSH arm installation is redundant and not recommended.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Cush Arm (CUSH-N-Stop)?

The 4210-3077CNS Cush Arm is an optional handed parallel arm with a built-in stop in the soffit shoe. CUSH stands for Cush-N-Stop. When the door reaches its templated maximum opening angle, the arm contacts the stop in the shoe and arrests the door without any separate stop device.

LCN 4210-3077CNS Cush Arm, handed forged steel parallel arm with built-in stop, for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

The Cush Arm is forged solid steel with a double slab arm-to-pinion attachment. It is handed and must be specified left-hand or right-hand at order. Templated maximum openings are available at 85 degrees (A = 8-5/16 in., B = 9-5/8 in.) and 90 degrees (A = 7-11/16 in., B = 9 in.).

The drop plate (4210-18) is required for all Cush Arm installations. The CUSH shoe support (4210-30) is required when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. The fifth hole spacer (4210-201) works alongside the CUSH shoe support. Order all three at the same time to avoid installation delays.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Hold Open Cush Arm?

The 4210-3049CNS Hold Open Cush Arm provides both a built-in stop and a hold-open function in a single arm. A handle on the arm controls when the hold-open is engaged. Two important restrictions apply: the Hold Open Cush Arm is not available with the 4216 cylinder, and the Delayed Action cylinder option is also not available with the 4216. Confirm the cylinder variant before ordering this arm.

LCN 4210-3049CNS Hold Open Cush Arm, handed arm with built-in stop and hold-open, for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

 

What Is the LCN 4210T Standard Track Arm?

The 4210T-3077T Standard Track Arm is the arm used on the 4210T track variant. It is handed with a large cross-section forged steel arm. The high security feature is the threaded attachment between the arm and the track roller (4210T-3034). The roller threads into the arm for extra strength and cannot be removed without disconnecting the arm from the closer body. The roller is included when the 4210T-3077T arm is ordered separately.

 

Metal Security Cover: LCN 4210-72MC and 4210T-72MC

The metal security cover is a standard component of both the 4210 and 4210T and is one of the distinguishing features of the Smoothee series. It uses four-point mounting for extra tamper resistance compared to two-point mounting on standard LCN series covers. The cover is handed and must match the finish of the installed hardware.

LCN 4210-72MC Metal Security Cover, four-point mount, handed, for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security door closer

The 4210 uses the 4210-72MC and the 4210T uses the 4210T-72MC. These covers are different and cannot be substituted between the 4210 and 4210T. The cover is secured by the cover screw (4210-31 for the 4210, 4210T-31 for the 4210T).

An important service reminder: closer adjustments are not accessible with the cover installed. The cover must be fully removed before any regulation valve or spring adjustment. After service, reinstall the cover and confirm all four mounting points are secured with the correct cover screw.

 

Drop Plate, CUSH Shoe Support, Blade Stop Spacer, and Flush Panel Adaptor

Four accessories are required or optional depending on the frame conditions of the specific installation. These are frequently missed at order time and are among the most common causes of delayed installations.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-18 Drop Plate Required?

LCN 4210-18 Drop Plate for narrow top rail or flush ceiling installation on the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

The 4210-18 Drop Plate has two trigger conditions.

  • The top rail is less than 5-1/8 inches measured from the stop on a push-side mount.
  • Any Cush Arm or Hold Open Cush Arm installation, regardless of top rail depth.

One dimension that every competitor misses: the plate requires a minimum top rail of 2 inches measured from the stop. If the top rail is less than 2 inches, the drop plate cannot be used. The plate ships with TORX screws. The 4210-18 is physically the same plate as the 4110-18, but the 4210-18 ships with TORX screws for high security mounting, while the 4110-18 does not. Do not substitute a 4110-18 on a 4210 installation.

The 4210T uses the 4210T-18 Drop Plate, triggered when the top rail is less than 5-1/4 inches, with a 2-1/4-inch minimum top rail required.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support Required?

The 4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support is needed when a Cush or Hold Open Cush Arm is installed and the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. The five-screw connection at the CUSH shoe is critical because the built-in stop generates significant force during the door arresting action. The CUSH shoe support provides anchorage for the fifth screw when the jamb depth is too shallow for a standard installation. Without it on shallow frames, the shoe will pull away from the frame under repeated use.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-419 Flush Panel Adaptor Needed?

The 4210-419 Flush Panel Adaptor is needed when the CUSH shoe must mount to a single rabbeted or flush frame that does not provide a horizontal mounting surface for the shoe. The adaptor creates the required horizontal surface.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer Needed?

The 4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer is needed when a 1/2-inch blade stop is installed in the frame. The spacer lowers the parallel arm shoe to clear the blade stop. Without it, the shoe contacts the blade stop before the door reaches its full intended opening angle.

 

What Does AVB Mean on the LCN 4210 Cylinder?

AVB stands for Advanced Variable Backcheck. It is an optional cylinder feature ordered with the suffix CYLAVB. On a standard LCN closer, backcheck begins at approximately 75 degrees of door opening, providing resistance against the door being forced or blown open. With AVB, backcheck starts at approximately 45 degrees, providing earlier and more pronounced resistance.

AVB is available on the 4210 series cylinder. It is useful in high-wind locations, on heavy-traffic openings where doors are routinely pushed open aggressively, or in any application where resistance at a lower opening angle reduces the risk of the door striking an adjacent wall or object. Specify CYLAVB when ordering the cylinder if AVB is required.

 

Can the LCN 4210 Hydraulic Fluid Be Refilled in the Field?

No. The hydraulic fluid in an LCN closer must not be refilled in the field. If a 4210 is showing signs of hydraulic fluid leakage, the appropriate response is closer replacement, not a fluid top-off. Attempting to refill the fluid voids the warranty and is explicitly stated as not permitted in LCN service guidance.

The all-weather hydraulic fluid in the 4210 performs without variation between -30 degrees F and +120 degrees F. This eliminates the need for seasonal closing speed adjustments that affect standard hydraulic closers. If a 4210 installation requires frequent speed adjustments as seasons change, the more likely cause is a seal or valve issue, not the fluid composition.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Regulation Valve Adjustment Limit?

All LCN door closers have three regulating valves: General Speed (main closing speed), Latch Speed, and Backcheck. The 4210 follows this same three-valve design. LCN recommends not opening or adjusting the regulation valves more than 3 full turns from the shutoff position. Opening the valves beyond this limit can damage the seals and cause hydraulic fluid leaks. The regulation valve assemblies are staked to provide a physical warning when the screws approach maximum adjustment, but they do not mechanically prevent over-adjustment.

If the door does not latch after adjusting the latch speed valve, the solution is to increase spring power, not to open the latch speed valve further. Increasing the latch speed valve opening changes the closing rate but does not increase the closing force available for latching. Increasing closing force requires spring power adjustment on the Green Dial.

For step-by-step guidance on adjusting LCN door closer speed and spring settings, see the guide to adjusting a commercial door closer.

 

Does the LCN 4210 Require Periodic Maintenance?

Closers mounted according to LCN installation instructions require no periodic maintenance or seasonal adjustments. The all-weather hydraulic fluid handles the full operating temperature range without change to closing time. Monthly, quarterly, and annual visual inspections are recommended for Fire and Life Safety rated installations only. For those applications, inspection intervals should align with the applicable fire code schedule.

The practical implication for facilities maintenance staff is that a correctly installed 4210 in a standard application should not need routine service. If a 4210 on a routine installation is requiring frequent readjustment, that indicates an installation issue (incorrect spring size for the door weight, incorrect valve settings, damaged seal) rather than a normal maintenance need.

 

How Do I Read the LCN 4210 Date Code?

The LCN date code is a four-digit code found on the closer body. The first two digits indicate the week of manufacture and the last two digits indicate the year. A date code reading "2519" means the closer was manufactured in week 25 of 2019. This is useful when assessing whether a closer is within warranty, identifying when parts were last installed, or planning replacement schedules on a building's door hardware inventory.

Do not confuse the date code with manufacturing reference numbers such as "71" or "320G" that may appear stamped elsewhere on the cylinder assembly. Those numbers are internal references and cannot be used to order replacement parts.

 

Can a 4510T Track Be Converted to a 4210T Track?

Yes. The 4210T-3038 standard track and the 4510T-3038 track are physically the same track, with one difference: the 4510T includes a spacer bar that the 4210T does not use. To convert a 4510T installation to a 4210T, remove the spacer bar from the 4510T track and replace the metal cover with the handed 4210T-72MC cover in the correct finish. The 4210T and 4510T use different handed metal covers, so the cover cannot be reused from the 4510T. The 4210T-3034 track roller and the threaded arm attachment remain the same across both models.

This conversion is useful when an existing 4510T installation needs to change its mounting orientation from hinge pull-side to push-side parallel arm. The core cylinder and track can be retained; only the cover needs to change. Confirm the handing matches the new door swing before ordering the replacement cover.

 

LCN 4210 Screw Packs: TORX vs Thru-Bolt

The 4210 uses Torx machine screws as standard, not the SRT (Self Reaming and Tapping) screws used on most standard LCN closer families. Two screw pack options are available.

Part NumberNameWhen to Use
4210-TORXTORX Machine Screw PackStandard mounting without thru-bolting
4210-TBTRXThru-Bolt Wood-Machine Screw PackThru-bolt installations where additional fastening security is required

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 4210 Replacement Part?

Confirm each of the following before placing an order to avoid receiving a part that does not fit the installation.

Confirm Before OrderingApplies To
Model variant (4210 or 4210T)Arms, covers, drop plates, arm screws
Hand of the doorCylinder, metal cover, Cush Arm, HCUSH Arm, 4210T arm
Cylinder size and type (not 4216 for HCUSH or Delayed Action)Cylinder assembly; HCUSH arm compatibility
Finish codeMetal cover, cylinder
Top rail depth (trigger: less than 5-1/8 in.; minimum: 2 in. for 4210-18)Drop plate (4210-18 or 4210T-18)
Frame reveal depth (less than 3-1/16 in. triggers CUSH shoe support)4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support
Blade stop present in frame (1/2 in.)4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer
Frame type (rabbeted or flush, for CUSH shoe mounting)4210-419 Flush Panel Adaptor
AVB required (backcheck at 45 degrees instead of 75)Cylinder with CYLAVB suffix

View the full parts listing and diagrams at the LCN 4210 and 4510 Smoothee series parts page. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support or to confirm specifications before ordering.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 4210 Field Issues

SymptomCheck FirstParts to Inspect or Replace
Door does not latch on closingRemove cover, check spring power on Green Dial; do not open latch speed valve beyond 3 turns from shutoffCylinder assembly; arm screw (4210-159)
Hydraulic fluid leaking from closerDo not refill fluid in the field; assess whether closer requires replacement; check regulation valve was not over-adjustedCloser replacement if fluid is leaking
CUSH shoe pulling away from frameConfirm fifth screw was installed; check if frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 in. and CUSH shoe support is present4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support; 4210-201 Fifth Hole Spacer
Door opening angle less than expected with CUSH armConfirm template used (85 or 90 degrees); check for blade stop contact with shoe4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer
Track arm binding or noisy (4210T)Inspect track roller; confirm track is clean4210T-3034 Track Roller; 4210T-3038 Standard Track
Door slamming (closing too fast)Remove cover, adjust general speed valve no more than 3 turns from shutoff; confirm fluid is not leakingRegulation valve adjustment only; replace closer if fluid has leaked out
Cover difficult to reinstallConfirm correct handed cover for model; 4210-72MC and 4210T-72MC are different covers4210-72MC or 4210T-72MC Metal Cover

 

Where Is the LCN 4210 Typically Installed?

Understanding the typical application environments for the LCN 4210 helps clarify why specific parts and accessories matter on a service call. The 4210 and 4210T are not general-purpose commercial closers. They are specified for environments where standard commercial closer components would not hold up to the demands of the installation.

 

Correctional and Detention Facilities

The 4210 is designed specifically for correctional applications. The TORX fasteners prevent unauthorized removal of the arm and cover. The four-point metal cover mounting resists prying. The forged steel arm provides strength against deliberate abuse. In these environments, every part matters: a cover screw (4210-31) that is stripped or a CUSH shoe that has pulled away from the frame is a security gap, not just a maintenance issue.

 

Institutional and High-Traffic Openings

Schools, university buildings, hospitals, and government facilities specify the 4210 on openings with very high cycle counts and some vandalism risk. The 10-million-cycle test rating reflects this use case. In these environments, the track roller (4210T-3034) on 4210T installations is the component most likely to show wear first, followed by the arm screw (4210-159 or 4210T-159).

 

What Is the Maximum Door Weight for the LCN 4210?

The maximum recommended door weight for LCN manual closers is 225 pounds. For the 4210, cylinder sizes 1 through 6 cover interior doors up to 5 feet wide and exterior doors up to 4 feet wide (for sized cylinders). Non-sized cylinders adjust for interior doors up to 4.5 feet and exterior doors up to 3.5 feet. The size 1 (4211) cylinder meets ADA opening force requirements when set at 5 pounds. For the LCN door closer sizing guide, including which cylinder size to specify for a given door weight and width, see the LCN door closer sizing guide.

 

LCN 4210 vs LCN 4110: Key Differences

The 4210 and 4110 share a similar naming structure and several accessories use the same part body. But they serve different security levels and must not be treated as interchangeable.

  • The 4210 uses TORX fasteners as standard. The 4110 uses standard screws.
  • The 4210 metal cover uses four-point mounting. The 4110 uses two-point mounting.
  • The 4210-18 drop plate ships with TORX screws. The 4110-18 plate ships without them.
  • The 4210 cylinder is a heavier cast iron unit rated for correctional applications. The 4110 cylinder is a standard cast iron unit.
  • Arms are not interchangeable between the 4210 and 4110 series.

If an installation is marked 4110 but shows TORX fasteners and a four-point cover, verify the model number stamped near the pinion. A 4210 may have been substituted at install. Use the stamped model designation near the pinion as the authoritative source for part identification, not the original specification sheet or the cover appearance. This is especially common on retrofitted correctional openings where the original specification called for a 4110 but the installing contractor upgraded to the 4210 for the security cover. In those cases, ordering 4110 arms or a 4110 cylinder on a subsequent service call will result in parts that do not fit. Always verify at the pinion. The model number stamped on the body is the only reliable identification method for LCN high security closers. For the complete parts listing with diagram references showing which part attaches where on the closer body, use the series parts page to cross-reference visual diagrams against the stamped model number before placing any order. Diagram 1 shows the arm and cover components. Diagram 2 shows the cylinder and accessory positions. Having both open when ordering reduces the chance of ordering the wrong handed component or missing a required accessory.

 

How to Read the LCN 4210 Model Number

The model number stamped near the pinion follows a consistent pattern. The series designation (4210 or 4210T) is followed by a size digit (1 through 6) indicating the cylinder size. Common model number designations found on installed 4210 closers include:

  • 4211 or 4211T: Size 1 cylinder, adjustable from Size 1 to 5 (ADA opening force capable)
  • 4212 or 4212T: Size 2 cylinder
  • 4213 or 4213T: Size 3 cylinder
  • 4214 or 4214T: Size 4 cylinder
  • 4216 or 4216T: Size 6 cylinder (note: Hold Open Cush Arm and Delayed Action not available)

Cylinder suffixes such as DEL (Delayed Action), CYLAVB (Advanced Variable Backcheck), and handing codes (LH, RH) follow the size digit in the full model string. Always read the full model string from the closer body before ordering cylinder assemblies or confirming arm compatibility.

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 29 LCN 4210 and 4210T Smoothee series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and available for individual order. Security Parts carries genuine OEM LCN components, ensuring that replacement parts match the original specifications for fit, finish, material, and security rating.

The LCN 4210 is a high security product where correct part identification matters considerably more than on standard commercial closer series. An incorrectly handed arm or cover on a correctional or institutional opening can compromise the security intent of the installation. A CUSH arm ordered without the required accessories (drop plate, CUSH shoe support, fifth hole spacer) will arrive on site incomplete, causing delays. Confirm the model number, hand, cylinder size, cylinder type, and finish from the installed hardware before placing any order. If the model label is unreadable, the handing is unclear, or the cylinder suffix is not visible, call 845-935-0301 for identification support before ordering any LCN 4210 part.

All LCN 4210 parts verified in this guide are linked directly to their live product pages at Security Parts. For the complete parts listing with diagram references, see the LCN 4210 and 4510 Smoothee series parts and diagrams page.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Parts Guide: Solenoid, Latch, Microswitch, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 27 replacement components for the Adams Rite 7100 Series electric strike. The most frequently replaced parts are the 29-0250 solenoid (five voltage variants), the 27-0085 latch, the 27-0086 blocking arm, and the 31-0092 microswitch. Before ordering the solenoid, confirm both the voltage and the duty mode (continuous or intermittent), because AC intermittent solenoids cannot be used in fail-safe applications. The 7100 Series is field reversible between fail-safe and fail-secure. Do not lubricate the strike mechanism. All 27 parts are genuine OEM components available to order individually. Call 845-935-0301 to confirm specifications before placing an order.

 

What Is the Adams Rite 7100 Series Electric Strike?

The Adams Rite 7100 Series is a family of electric strikes designed for use with Adams Rite deadlatches and cylindrical locksets on aluminum, hollow metal, and wood door applications. The strike provides remote electrical control of the door by releasing the latch bolt without requiring anyone to operate the lockset itself. When the solenoid is energized, it moves a shuttle which releases the blocking arm, allowing the jaw to tilt out of position so the door can open.

The 7100 is UL 1034 burglary-resistant listed and UL 294 listed. It is designed for latchbolts with a projection of 1/2 inch to 5/8 inch. The bolt retaining jaw is stainless steel. The mechanism fits into aluminum jamb or door sections as shallow as 1-5/8 inches deep, which makes it suited for narrow profile aluminum storefront frames where space is limited.

The 7100 Series also fits the existing frame preparation for the discontinued Adams Rite 7000, 7500, and 7800 electric strike series. If an older installation is being serviced and the existing strike has failed, the 7100 uses the same prep and is the current replacement option.

For a broader overview of electric strike families at Security Parts, see the electric strikes parts and diagrams page. For Adams Rite exit device parts, see the Adams Rite 41 series parts guide and the Adams Rite parts guide.

 

What Is the Difference Between the Adams Rite 7100 and 7101?

The 7100 and 7101 share the same internal mechanism and the same replacement parts for the solenoid, latch, blocking arm, shuttle, springs, and monitoring components. The difference is the faceplate profile and the application.

ModelFaceplateApplicationLip Extension AvailableMonitoring Available
7100FlatAluminum jambs, hollow metal, woodYesYes
7101RadiusAluminum stiles -- inactive leaf in glass door pairsNoNo

The 7101 radius faceplate is designed to match the curved nose on the inactive leaf in a pair of narrow stile glass doors. If monitoring or a lip extension is required, the 7101 is not the correct model. Confirm the installed model number before ordering any subcover or faceplate replacement.

 

Is the Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Field Reversible?

Yes. The Adams Rite 7100 Series is field selectable between fail-safe and fail-secure operation at the time of installation. The conversion is performed by repositioning the shuttle return spring and reversing the direction of the solenoid inside the case. No additional components or specialized tools are required for the conversion itself.

 

What Is the Difference Between Fail-Safe and Fail-Secure on the Adams Rite 7100?

These two modes define what happens to the door when power is lost or the access control signal drops.

ModePower StateStrike StateDoor StateSolenoid Duty Requirement
Fail-SecurePower offLockedCannot be opened from outsideIntermittent or continuous
Fail-SafePower offUnlockedCan be pushed openContinuous duty only

 

Can an AC Intermittent Solenoid Be Used for Fail-Safe Operation?

No. This is one of the most important ordering rules for the 7100 Series and one that causes significant field problems when ignored. In a fail-safe configuration, the solenoid must remain energized continuously to keep the door locked. An AC intermittent solenoid is not rated for continuous duty and will overheat if used in this way. Fail-safe applications require a continuous duty solenoid, either DC continuous or AC continuous (with a rectifier). If the existing installation has an intermittent duty solenoid, it can only be used in fail-secure mode. To convert to fail-safe operation, the solenoid must be replaced with a continuous duty variant alongside the mechanical conversion.

 

Why Does My Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Make a Buzzing Sound?

The buzzing sound is normal and expected behavior for AC intermittent solenoid variants. Alternating current regularly reverses direction, which causes audible vibration in the solenoid coil during operation. DC continuous solenoids operate silently.

If the installed solenoid is a DC unit and the strike is producing a buzzing or clicking sound, that is not expected behavior. In that case, inspect the wiring connections and the power supply output before assuming solenoid failure. A buzzing DC solenoid may be receiving AC power from an incorrectly specified power supply.

If the installation requires silent operation, specify a DC continuous solenoid variant. The appropriate options are the 29-0250-24DCC, 29-0250-16DCC, or 29-0250-12DCC depending on the system voltage.

 

Should I Lubricate the Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike?

No. Adams Rite installation documentation for the 7100 Series explicitly states: DO NOT LUBRICATE STRIKE. This is a common maintenance mistake, particularly on installations where technicians follow the same procedure they use for mechanical locksets. The 7100 internal mechanism is designed to operate dry. Applying any lubricant to the internal shuttle, blocking arm, latch arm, or spring components will attract dust and debris over time, causing the mechanism to bind, slow down, or fail to release consistently. If a 7100 is releasing sluggishly or inconsistently, the cause is typically a worn part rather than inadequate lubrication.

 

Does the Adams Rite 7100 Replace the 7000, 7500, or 7800 Series?

Yes. The Adams Rite 7100 Series fits the existing frame preparation for the discontinued 7000, 7500, and 7800 electric strike series. If a facility is servicing an older installation where one of those discontinued series has failed and is no longer available for replacement, the 7100 uses the same frame prep and is the current successor. This is a significant practical detail for maintenance professionals managing older commercial buildings with legacy Adams Rite hardware.

When replacing a discontinued series strike with a 7100, confirm the voltage and mode required by the access control system before ordering the solenoid variant.

 

What Latch Bolt Projection Does the Adams Rite 7100 Require?

The Adams Rite 7100 is designed for use with latchbolts that have a projection between 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch. It accepts the bolt from any Adams Rite 4500 Series or 4900 Series deadlatch, and from cylindrical locksets with a latchbolt within this projection range. Latchbolts with a projection outside this range will not seat and release correctly in the strike pocket. Confirm the latchbolt projection of the installed lockset before specifying the 7100 for a new installation or before troubleshooting repeated failure-to-latch issues on an existing one.

The strike opening is 5/8 inch x 1-7/16 inch x 1/2 inch deep. The bolt retaining jaw is stainless steel.

 

Is Form C Monitoring Available on All Adams Rite 7100 Series Models?

No. The two Form C monitoring switches are available on most 7100 Series models but are not available on the 7130, 7131, or 7140. If an application requires monitoring and a 7130, 7131, or 7140 is currently installed, monitoring cannot be added to that strike body. A different model will need to be specified for the monitoring function.

The two Form C switches on a monitored 7100 Series strike serve two different functions: one switch is activated by latchbolt penetration of the strike, and the other indicates whether the strike jaw is locked or unlocked by the solenoid. Both switches provide dry contacts. All unused monitoring leads must be insulated before the strike is placed in service.

 

What Are the Monitoring Wire Colors on the Adams Rite 7100?

On the monitored version of the Adams Rite 7100, the wire color coding as specified in Adams Rite installation documentation is as follows.

Wire ColorFunction
BlackCommon
WhiteNormally Open (NO)
RedNormally Closed (NC)

The solenoid wires are not polarized. All unused monitoring leads must be insulated. This wiring information is needed when replacing the microswitch assembly or reconnecting a monitored 7100 strike after service.

 

What Adams Rite 7100 Replacement Parts Are Available?

All 27 Adams Rite 7100 Series replacement components stocked at Security Parts are listed below. Each is a genuine OEM Adams Rite component available to order individually.

#Part NumberComponent NameNotes
129-0250-24DCCSolenoid, 24 VDC ContinuousSilent; fail-safe or fail-secure
229-0250-16DCCSolenoid, 16 VDC ContinuousSilent; fail-safe or fail-secure
329-0250-16ACISolenoid, 16 VAC IntermittentBuzzes; fail-secure only
429-0250-12DCCSolenoid, 12VDC/24VACSilent; fail-safe or fail-secure
529-0250-12ACISolenoid, 12 VAC IntermittentBuzzes; fail-secure only
627-0085LatchNo specification required
727-0086Blocking ArmNo specification required
823-0356ShuttleNo specification required
928-0150-MPShuttle Return SpringNo specification required
1028-0151-MPBlock Arm Return SpringNo specification required
1123-0349Bolt Switch ActuatorNo specification required
1231-0092MicroswitchNo specification required
1322-0713Switch PlateNo specification required
1422-0657Solenoid Retainer PlateNo specification required
1526-0170PlungerNo specification required
1622-0698-MPNut PlateNo specification required
1726-0214-MPShoulder ScrewNo specification required
1829-0341-MPPhillips Hex Head Screw #2 x 5/8No specification required
1929-0342-MPPhillips Hex Head Screw #2 x 3/8No specification required
2023-03501/2-Inch Back CoverConfirm installed size before ordering
2123-03513/4-Inch Back CoverConfirm installed size before ordering
2223-04431/2-Inch Flat SubcoverFor 7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140
2323-04441/2-Inch Radius SubcoverFor 7101, 7131
2423-04453/4-Inch SubcoverFor 7160, 7170
2591-0171-01Subcover Lip Extension KitFor 7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140; 1-1/2 in. centerline to jamb edge; not available for 7101
2691-0099Cylinder KitCylinder dogging C; includes anti-rotation ring, locking nut, locking nut tool
2731-0265-01-IPDogging AssemblyNo specification required

 

Solenoid Variants: Which 29-0250 Do I Order?

The solenoid is the electrical actuator at the core of the 7100 strike. It moves the shuttle, which in turn releases the blocking arm and allows the jaw to tilt so the door can open. The Adams Rite 7100 uses the 29-0250 solenoid family. Five variants are available. The correct choice depends on three things: the system voltage, whether the current is AC or DC, and the operating mode required by the application.

 

Which Solenoid Variant Buzzes and Which Is Silent?

DC continuous solenoids operate silently. AC intermittent solenoids produce an audible buzz during operation because alternating current reverses direction repeatedly. This is normal behavior for an AC solenoid and is not a fault. If silent operation is required, specify a DC continuous variant.

Part NumberVoltageDuty ModeSoundFail ModeOrder
29-0250-24DCC24 VDCContinuousSilentFail-safe or fail-secureView Part
29-0250-16DCC16 VDCContinuousSilentFail-safe or fail-secureView Part
29-0250-16ACI16 VACIntermittentBuzzesFail-secure onlyView Part
29-0250-12DCC12 VDC / 24 VACContinuousSilentFail-safe or fail-secureView Part
29-0250-12ACI12 VACIntermittentBuzzesFail-secure onlyView Part

 

Mechanical Components: Latch, Blocking Arm, Shuttle, and Springs

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Latch Do?

The 27-0085 latch is the pivoting jaw component that seats the door lockset latchbolt when the door closes. It holds the latchbolt in the strike pocket until the solenoid releases the blocking arm. A worn or damaged latch may cause the door to fail to latch on closing or may bind during release. Inspect the latch for wear at the contact surfaces and pivot point when the door is slow to latch or the strike releases inconsistently.

 

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Blocking Arm Do?

The 27-0086 blocking arm is the component that holds the latch jaw in the locked position. When the solenoid energizes and moves the shuttle, the blocking arm tip releases from the latch arm notch and the jaw is free to tilt. The 28-0151-MP block arm return spring drives the blocking arm back to the locked position after each release cycle. A bent or worn blocking arm tip will cause the strike to release even when the solenoid is not energized.

 

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Shuttle Do?

The 23-0356 shuttle transfers solenoid motion to the blocking arm. When the solenoid energizes, the plunger moves the shuttle, which in turn releases the blocking arm tip from the latch arm notch. The 28-0150-MP shuttle return spring resets the shuttle to its original position after each activation. During a fail-secure to fail-safe field conversion, the shuttle return spring position is one of the two components that must be repositioned. Replacing the shuttle without also checking the return spring position after a mode conversion will result in incorrect operation.

 

When Should the Return Springs Be Replaced?

Inspect both the shuttle return spring (28-0150-MP) and the block arm return spring (28-0151-MP) whenever the solenoid or shuttle is replaced. A fatigued return spring may not provide enough force to reset the mechanism fully, which causes the blocking arm to partially re-engage or the shuttle to sit in an intermediate position. This creates intermittent locking failures that are difficult to diagnose without inspecting the spring condition directly. On high-cycle installations, replacing both springs at the same time as the solenoid is a standard preventive step.

 

Electrical Monitoring: Microswitch, Switch Plate, and Bolt Switch Actuator

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Microswitch Do?

The 31-0092 microswitch is triggered by the bolt switch actuator to send a status signal to the access control or alarm panel. On monitored 7100 strikes, two switches are present: one activated by latchbolt penetration of the strike, and one indicating whether the jaw is locked or unlocked. When the microswitch fails, the access control panel receives incorrect or absent status signals. Replace the microswitch when wiring and power supply have been confirmed correct but status signals are still unreliable.

 

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Bolt Switch Actuator Do?

The 23-0349 bolt switch actuator is the mechanical link that physically triggers the microswitch when the latch bolt position changes. A worn or misaligned actuator will cause intermittent or absent status signaling even when the microswitch itself is functional. Inspect the actuator alongside the microswitch whenever monitoring function is unreliable.

 

Solenoid Support: Retainer Plate, Plunger, and Nut Plate

Three components support the solenoid assembly within the strike body. Each is ordered individually and requires no specification.

  • 22-0657 Solenoid Retainer Plate: Secures the solenoid in its correct position inside the strike body. A displaced solenoid does not transfer force to the shuttle correctly, resulting in weak or absent release. Replace the retainer plate alongside the solenoid if the plate shows wear or deformation.
  • 26-0170 Plunger: The solenoid output component that directly contacts and moves the shuttle when the solenoid energizes. A worn plunger reduces force transfer to the shuttle. When a solenoid replacement does not resolve a weak release symptom, inspect the plunger before ordering additional parts.
  • 22-0698-MP Nut Plate: Provides a threaded fastening point within the strike body. A stripped nut plate will prevent correct reassembly after service.

 

Subcover Selection: Which Subcover Does the Adams Rite 7100 Use?

Subcover selection depends on the specific 7100 Series model number installed. Confirm the model number on the strike body before ordering.

Part NumberDescriptionCompatible Models
23-04431/2-Inch Flat Subcover7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140
23-04441/2-Inch Radius Subcover7101, 7131
23-04453/4-Inch Subcover7160, 7170
91-0171-01Subcover Lip Extension Kit (1-1/2 in. centerline to jamb edge)7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140 only (not 7101)

 

When Is the Lip Extension Kit Needed?

The standard lip on the 7100 is sized for a 1-3/4-inch thick door that closes flush with the jamb edge. Where the door thickness or jamb shape differs from this standard relationship, a lip extension is needed. Typical applications include center-hung doors and thick doors where the door centerline to jamb edge dimension exceeds the standard. The 91-0171-01 subcover lip extension kit provides a 1-1/2-inch dimension from the door centerline to the jamb edge. Lip extensions are not available for the 7101 or 7131 models.

 

Back Cover Selection: 1/2-Inch vs 3/4-Inch

Part NumberDescription
23-03501/2-Inch Back Cover
23-03513/4-Inch Back Cover

The back cover size corresponds to the frame pocket depth of the installed strike. Measure the existing back cover or confirm the installed model number before ordering to avoid the wrong size.

 

How to Identify the Correct Adams Rite 7100 Part Before Ordering

What to ConfirmApplies To
System voltage (12V, 16V, or 24V)29-0250 solenoid family (all 5 variants)
Current type (AC or DC) and duty mode (continuous or intermittent)29-0250 solenoid family; intermittent = fail-secure only
Operating mode (fail-safe or fail-secure)Solenoid selection; fail-safe requires continuous duty
7100 Series model number (7100, 7101, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7131, 7140, 7160, 7170)Subcover selection (23-0443, 23-0444, 23-0445)
Back cover size (1/2-inch or 3/4-inch)23-0350 and 23-0351 back covers
Whether lip extension is needed (door thickness or jamb shape)91-0171-01 subcover lip extension kit
Whether monitoring is present (7130/7131/7140 do not support monitoring)31-0092 microswitch, 23-0349 bolt switch actuator, 22-0713 switch plate

 

Troubleshooting Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Problems

SymptomCheck FirstParts to Inspect or Replace
Strike does not release when energizedConfirm voltage at solenoid terminals matches solenoid rating29-0250 solenoid, 26-0170 plunger, 23-0356 shuttle
Strike buzzes during operationConfirm solenoid is AC intermittent (expected) or DC (problem)Replace with DC continuous variant if silent operation required
Door does not re-latch after releaseInspect shuttle and blocking arm return travel28-0150-MP shuttle return spring, 28-0151-MP block arm return spring, 27-0086 blocking arm
Status monitoring signal absent or incorrectInspect wiring connections; confirm wire color coding (Black=Common, White=NO, Red=NC)31-0092 microswitch, 23-0349 bolt switch actuator, 22-0713 switch plate
Weak or sluggish releaseConfirm correct voltage; do not lubricate mechanism29-0250 solenoid, 26-0170 plunger, 22-0657 solenoid retainer plate
Strike releases without power applied (fail-secure)Inspect blocking arm tip against latch arm notch; confirm shuttle spring is in correct position27-0086 blocking arm, 28-0151-MP block arm return spring, 23-0356 shuttle
Fail-safe solenoid overheatingConfirm solenoid is continuous duty -- AC intermittent cannot run continuouslyReplace with correct continuous duty 29-0250 variant

 

How Deep Must the Frame Pocket Be for the Adams Rite 7100?

The Adams Rite 7100 mechanism fits into aluminum jamb or door sections as shallow as 1-5/8 inches deep. This compact depth is what makes the 7100 practical for narrow profile aluminum storefront frames where hollow metal or wood frame alternatives would not fit. When retrofitting an older opening or installing on an unusual frame profile, measure the available pocket depth before ordering to confirm the 7100 fits without requiring frame modification.

The full case dimensions are approximately 1 inch wide by 3-3/8 inches long by 1-5/8 inches deep. The standard package includes mounting screws, mounting clips, and adhesive shims to accommodate jamb or stile extrusion thickness greater or less than the nominal 1/8-inch. These shims allow the strike to sit flush against the frame regardless of minor extrusion thickness variation without requiring recutting the frame pocket.

 

Adams Rite 7100 Dogging Components: Cylinder Kit and Dogging Assembly

What Is the Adams Rite 91-0099 Cylinder Kit Used For?

The 91-0099 cylinder kit is used for cylinder dogging C applications. It is a service kit, not a complete cylinder. The kit includes the anti-rotation ring, locking nut, and locking nut tool. It is ordered when the cylinder dogging mounting hardware needs replacement rather than when the cylinder itself needs replacement. Confirm the dogging configuration of the installation before ordering this kit.

 

What Is the Adams Rite 31-0265-01-IP Dogging Assembly?

The 31-0265-01-IP dogging assembly is a genuine OEM replacement component for applicable dogging configurations. No specification is required at the time of order. Replace the complete dogging assembly when the dogging function is not holding correctly or when the assembly is physically damaged during service.

 

Adams Rite OEM Warranty on 7100 Series Parts

All Adams Rite 7100 Series parts stocked at Security Parts are genuine OEM components covered by Adams Rite manufacturer warranties. The warranty periods from the date of manufacture are as follows.

  • 10 years on all mechanical products.
  • 5 years on electromechanical categories including electric strikes, exit devices, deadlocks, deadlatches, trims, and power supply accessories. This covers the 29-0250 solenoid family, the 31-0092 microswitch, the 23-0349 bolt switch actuator, and all other electromechanical 7100 Series components.
  • 3 years on specific access control products including the DL100 Aperio Wireless Deadlatch and 3090-150.

Warranty coverage applies to genuine OEM parts only. Ordering genuine OEM parts from Security Parts ensures that warranty coverage is not voided by aftermarket substitution. If documentation of a specific component's warranty period is needed for a facility compliance record, confirm the part number and manufacturing date at the time of purchase.

 

Why Order Adams Rite 7100 Parts from Security Parts?

Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Every Adams Rite 7100 Series part stocked at Security Parts is a genuine OEM component. All 27 components listed in this guide are verified in stock for immediate ordering.

Ordering genuine OEM components matters more for electric strike parts than it does for many other hardware categories. An aftermarket solenoid may appear identical to the OEM part physically but differ in coil resistance, pull force, or duty cycle rating in ways that are not visible during installation. These differences only become apparent over time, typically showing up as intermittent release failures, overheating in fail-safe applications, or premature solenoid wear on high-cycle doors.

Pre-order part identification support is available at 845-935-0301. If the model number label on the installed strike body is unreadable, Security Parts can help identify the correct subcover, back cover, and solenoid variant from the installation details before an order is placed. If an older installation needs to be converted from the discontinued 7000, 7500, or 7800 series to the 7100, Security Parts can confirm compatibility before the order is placed.

For related Adams Rite hardware, see the Adams Rite 41 series parts guide and the Adams Rite parts guide. For electric strike installation guidance, see the how to install an electric strike guide.

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 27 Adams Rite 7100 Series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and verified for immediate ordering. Security Parts carries OEM Adams Rite components and will flag any compatible aftermarket alternative before an order is placed.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order part identification, voltage confirmation, model matching, or guidance on converting an existing installation from fail-secure to fail-safe before ordering parts.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

 

Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike: Key Ordering Rules Summary

Before placing any order for Adams Rite 7100 Series parts, review these rules. Each one reflects a common ordering mistake that causes the wrong part to arrive.

  • AC intermittent solenoids are rated for fail-secure mode only. Never specify an AC intermittent solenoid for a fail-safe installation.
  • Fail-safe applications require a continuous duty solenoid: 29-0250-24DCC, 29-0250-16DCC, or 29-0250-12DCC.
  • Subcover selection depends on the model number, not just the series name. A 7101 uses a different subcover (23-0444) than a 7100 (23-0443).
  • Lip extensions are not available for the 7101 or 7131 models.
  • Monitoring components (microswitch, bolt switch actuator, switch plate) are not available for 7130, 7131, or 7140 models.
  • Do not lubricate any internal component of the 7100 mechanism.
  • All unused monitoring leads must be insulated before the strike is placed in service.
  • When replacing a discontinued 7000, 7500, or 7800 series strike, the 7100 fits the existing frame preparation.

Call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support on any of the above. All 27 Adams Rite 7100 Series replacement components are stocked and available to order individually.

LCN 2310ME Parts Guide: Track Roller, Arm, Switch Assembly, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 2310ME Sentronic door closer has 18 replacement parts available at Security Parts. The most frequently replaced components are the 2310ME-3034 track roller, the 2310ME-3038 standard track, the 2310ME-3077T standard arm, and the 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly. The standard arm requires hand and finish specification at order. The track is non-handed but still requires finish specification. The ME switch assembly requires voltage specification and accepts both AC and DC input. All 18 parts are stocked individually and available to order now.

 

What Is the LCN 2310ME?

The LCN 2310ME is a Sentronic series door closer designed for fire and smoke barrier doors. It is UL and cUL listed for smoke barrier or labeled fire doors and meets ANSI/BHMA A156.15 and NFPA 101 Life Safety Code standards. The closer mounts concealed in the frame with a single lever track arm that runs concealed inside the door. This keeps all mechanical and electrical components out of sight while delivering full fire life safety function.

The 2310ME holds the door open at an adjustable position using an electrical signal. When that current is interrupted, whether by a fire alarm activation, a power failure, or a manual switch, the holding mechanism releases immediately and the door closes fully under spring power. When the hold-open function is not engaged or when current is cut, the 2310ME functions as a standard full rack-and-pinion door closer. This behavior is built in by design. Fire-rated openings must close and latch automatically on any power interruption, and the 2310ME is built to meet that requirement.

 

How Does the LCN 2310ME Hold-Open System Work?

The hold-open function is controlled by an electrical signal fed to the ME switch assembly (2310ME-3351). When the signal is active, the assembly engages the holding mechanism and the door stays open at the set position. When the signal drops, the hold-open releases instantly and the spring closes the door.

The ME switch assembly circuitry accepts either AC or DC input. Voltage must still be specified at order. The 2310ME is available with a 24V holding solenoid or a 120V holding solenoid. A transformer (2310ME-3210) can be used to reduce 120V line voltage down to 24V AC. The wiring input range for the closer covers 12V, 24V, and 120V AC/DC, which allows the 2310ME to integrate with a wide variety of fire alarm panels and detection systems.

The hold-open position is not mechanical. It is set electrically and the door closes under spring force once the signal drops. This is what makes the 2310ME suitable for fire and smoke barrier doors where consistent, code-compliant closing is required.

 

What Are the Size and Spring Options on the LCN 2310ME?

The 2310ME is available in size 3 or size 4. Cylinder assemblies are size-specific and are not adjustable between sizes. Confirm the size of the existing installation before ordering any cylinder-related parts. Closing power of the 2310ME Series may be increased up to 15%. The closer ships with minimum closing power pre-set. Closing power can be increased by turning the spring adjusting screw clockwise, with a maximum adjustment of 18 turns. The holding force is set at maximum from the factory and can be decreased and increased again, but cannot be increased beyond the original factory setting.

A normal closing time from a 90-degree open position is 5 to 7 seconds. If the door closes outside this range and the spring has not been adjusted beyond the maximum, inspect the track roller and track for wear before making further adjustments.

 

Where Is the LCN 2310ME Typically Installed?

The 2310ME is used in commercial buildings, healthcare facilities, schools, institutional settings, and any opening that requires a door to stay open during normal operations but close and latch automatically on a fire alarm activation or power failure. Its concealed-in-frame mounting makes it well suited for openings where exposed arms or hardware would create an obstruction or accessibility issue.

The 2310ME mounts concealed in the frame. The related 4310ME mounts on the hinge pull side with a single lever track arm. The 4410ME mounts on the top jamb push side with a double lever regular arm. All three are part of the Sentronic ME series but use different mounting configurations and have their own specific part numbers. Do not substitute parts between the 2310ME, 4310ME, and 4410ME without confirming compatibility with Security Parts.

For a full overview of LCN door operator and closer categories stocked at Security Parts, see the door operators parts guide and the door closers parts guide.

 

What LCN 2310ME Parts Are Available?

All 18 LCN 2310ME replacement parts are stocked individually at Security Parts. The table below lists every part by number, name, and the specification required at the time of order.

#Part NumberPart NameSpecification Required
12310ME-3077TStandard ArmFinish (F), Hand (H)
22310ME-11Finish PlateFinish (F)
32310ME-12Short Finish PlateFinish (F)
42310ME-425Roller Lock ScrewNone
52310ME-3038Standard TrackFinish (F)
62310ME-3034Track RollerNone
72310ME-3351ME Switch AssemblyVoltage (V) -- 24V or 120V
82310ME-WMSWood-Machine Screw PackFinish (F)
92310ME-TORXTorx Machine Screw PackFinish (F)
102310ME-3210TransformerNone
112310ME-3431Input JumperNone
122310ME-420Fire ShieldNone
132310ME-31Cover ScrewNone
142310ME-172Wiring CoverNone
152310ME-159Arm ScrewNone
162310ME-Rebox KitRebox Kit, Box and Instruction SheetNone
172310ME-Flat BoxFlat Box with LabelNone
182310ME-Instruction SheetInstruction SheetNone

 

Track and Arm Components

The track-arm system on the 2310ME consists of three separate parts: the track roller, the standard track, and the standard arm. Each is ordered individually and each serves a distinct mechanical function. The track and roller are non-handed. The arm is handed. Understanding these distinctions before ordering prevents receiving the wrong part.

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Track Roller Do?

The 2310ME-3034 track roller rides inside the door track as the door travels through its opening and closing cycle. It is a quiet, low-friction roller assembly. The track roller is non-handed and does not require a finish specification. It inserts directly into the standard track and is secured by the roller lock screw (2310ME-425).

The track roller shoulder dimension is 1/16 inch (2mm). This is useful for confirming a replacement roller matches the original when inspecting a worn component. When the track roller wears, the door may begin to drag, produce noise, or close inconsistently. The roller lock screw (2310ME-425) secures the roller in position. If the roller is being replaced, inspect the roller lock screw at the same time.

LCN 2310ME-3034 track roller replacement part for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

 

What Is the Standard Track on the LCN 2310ME?

The 2310ME-3038 standard track runs concealed inside the door and guides the track roller through the full door travel cycle. The standard track is non-handed. The same part number fits both left-hand and right-hand doors. Finish specification (F) is required at order.

LCN 2310ME-3038 standard track for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

The track and track roller are separate parts and each is ordered individually. If only the roller shows wear, order the 2310ME-3034 roller alone. If the track channel is damaged or bent, order the 2310ME-3038 track separately. Neither part requires replacing the full arm assembly.

Important for older installations: LCN redesigned track-style closer components in February 2016. This redesign affected the roller, track, hold-open clip, and bumper. Closers installed before February 2016 may require different or additional parts. If you are servicing an older 2310ME installation and a part does not appear to match the current catalog, contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering.

 

Is the LCN 2310ME Standard Arm Handed?

Yes. The 2310ME-3077T standard arm is handed and requires both a finish specification (F) and a hand specification (H) at order. Confirm the hand of the door before ordering. Installing the wrong hand will prevent the arm from seating correctly on the closer shaft.

LCN 2310ME-3077T standard arm, handed, for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

To identify the hand of the door, stand on the outside (the side the door swings away from when opened). If the hinges are on the right, the door is right-hand. If the hinges are on the left, the door is left-hand. The arm attaches to the closer shaft and is secured with the arm screw (2310ME-159). Both the arm and arm screw are ordered separately.

 

Electrical and Control Components

The 2310ME includes several electrical components unique to the Sentronic series. These parts control the hold-open function, the wiring interface, and the power supply. Each is ordered individually. Several require voltage to be confirmed before ordering.

 

What Is the LCN 2310ME ME Switch Assembly?

The 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly is the on/off switch that controls the hold-open function. When the switch receives an electrical signal, the holding mechanism engages and the door stays open. When the signal is removed or the current is interrupted, the holding mechanism releases and the door closes under spring power.

LCN 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly, on/off switch for the 2310ME Sentronic hold-open function

Voltage specification (V) is required at order. The 2310ME-3351 is available in 24V or 120V. The ME switch assembly circuitry accepts either AC or DC input, which allows it to integrate with most commercial fire alarm panels and detection systems. Confirm the voltage of the existing electrical system before ordering. A 24V switch assembly installed on a 120V circuit, or vice versa, will not function correctly and may damage the component.

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Transformer Do?

The 2310ME-3210 transformer reduces line voltage from 120V to 24V AC. It mounts on a plate designed for a 4-inch x 4-inch x 2-1/8-inch electrical box. No voltage or finish specification is required when ordering the transformer.

LCN 2310ME-3210 transformer, reduces 120V to 24V AC, for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

If an installation runs 120V line voltage but uses a 24V ME switch assembly, the transformer provides the voltage conversion in between. If the hold-open function fails and the ME switch assembly tests correctly, inspect the transformer before ordering additional parts. A failed transformer will prevent the switch assembly from receiving proper voltage even if the assembly itself is functional.

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Input Jumper Do?

The 2310ME-3431 input jumper manages the wiring configuration for the activation input on the closer. No specification is required at order. When rewiring an existing 2310ME installation or replacing control components, confirm whether the input jumper needs replacement alongside the ME switch assembly.

LCN 2310ME-3431 input jumper for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer wiring configuration

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Wiring Cover Do?

The 2310ME-172 wiring cover protects the electrical wiring and connections on the closer body. No specification is required at order. If the wiring cover is cracked, missing, or damaged, replace it before returning the closer to service. Exposed wiring connections on a fire life safety device create both a reliability risk and a compliance concern.

LCN 2310ME-172 wiring cover for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

 

Does the LCN 2310ME Electrical System Accept AC and DC Input?

Yes. The ME switch assembly circuitry accepts either AC or DC input. This gives the 2310ME broad compatibility with different fire alarm panel types. Most commercial fire alarm systems output 24V DC. Some older systems and transformer-fed circuits output 24V AC or 120V AC. The 2310ME handles all of these when the correct voltage variant of the switch assembly is specified at order.

The wiring input range covers 12V, 24V, and 120V AC/DC. When in doubt about the voltage in an existing installation, measure the output at the wiring terminals before ordering any replacement electrical component. Contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 if confirmation is needed before placing the order.

 

Finish and Cover Components

Which Finish Plate Does the LCN 2310ME Use?

The 2310ME has two finish plate options ordered separately. Both require a finish specification (F) at order.

Part NumberNameWhen to Order
2310ME-11Finish PlateStandard frame depth
2310ME-12Short Finish PlateShallow frame depth where the standard plate does not fit

LCN 2310ME-11 finish plate for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

Measure the frame depth before ordering. The cover screw (2310ME-31) secures the finish plate and is ordered separately. Note that the 2310ME-72 in the LCN catalog refers to both the finish plate 11 and short finish plate 12 together as a combined set. When ordering at Security Parts, order each plate individually by its specific part number.

 

What Is the LCN 2310ME Fire Shield?

The 2310ME-420 fire shield is used in fire-rated installations of the 2310ME closer. No specification is required at order. If the fire shield is damaged or missing from a fire-rated installation, replace it before returning the door to service. On fire-rated openings, missing or damaged components that are part of the rated assembly may affect code compliance.

LCN 2310ME-420 fire shield for fire-rated installations of the 2310ME Sentronic closer

 

Screw Packs and Hardware

Which Screw Pack Do I Need for the LCN 2310ME?

The 2310ME uses two different screw packs depending on the door substrate and mounting method. Both require a finish specification (F) at order.

Part NumberNameUse For
2310ME-WMSWood-Machine Screw PackWood or hollow metal doors using wood-thread fasteners alongside machine screws
2310ME-TORXTorx Machine Screw PackMetal frame installations using Torx-head machine screws

Confirm the door substrate and mounting method before ordering. Ordering the wrong screw pack will require a separate order before installation can proceed.

 

What Happens When Power Is Cut to the LCN 2310ME?

When electrical current to the 2310ME is interrupted, the hold-open mechanism releases immediately and the door closes under its own spring force. The closer then functions as a standard full rack-and-pinion door closer until power is restored and the hold-open signal is re-engaged. This fail-safe behavior is required for fire and smoke barrier door applications and is built into the 2310ME by design.

 

What Should I Do If the Door Slams Shut After Power Interruption?

If the door closes faster than the normal 5 to 7 second range, the closing speed adjustment valve may be set too fast. Use a 3/32-inch hex wrench and adjust the closing speed valve slowly. Test the door after each adjustment. Do not allow the door to slam into the frame under any spring setting. Slamming causes damage to the frame, latch hardware, and arm assembly over time.

If adjusting the closing speed valve does not correct the problem, inspect the track roller (2310ME-3034) for wear. A worn roller provides less resistance during the closing cycle and can make the door appear to close faster than expected. Replace the track roller if it shows visible wear or flat spots.

 

Can the LCN 2310ME Be Released Manually Without Cutting Power?

Yes. Pulling the door firmly when it is in the held-open position releases the hold-open mechanism and allows the door to close under spring power. This is the manual release method described in the LCN installation instructions for the 2310ME. The door should close completely after a manual release. If it does not close and latch, inspect the spring power setting and confirm the closing speed valve is not over-restricted.

The LCN ME Series does not provide a solid 180-degree hold-open position. The hold-open position is adjustable within the closer's range. If a 180-degree hold-open is required, a different product type is needed.

For guidance on door closer sizing and adjustment, see the LCN door closer sizing guide and the guide to adjusting a commercial door closer.

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 2310ME Replacement Part?

Several 2310ME parts require specification at the time of order. Using the wrong variant will result in a part that does not fit or does not function correctly. The table below summarizes what to confirm before placing each type of order.

What to ConfirmApplies To These Parts
Hand of the door (left or right)2310ME-3077T standard arm
Finish of existing hardwareStandard arm, finish plates, standard track, screw packs
Voltage of the electrical system (24V or 120V)2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly
AC or DC input type2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly (circuitry accepts both)
Closer size (3 or 4)Cylinder assemblies (size-specific, not adjustable)
Frame depth (standard or shallow)2310ME-11 vs 2310ME-12 finish plate
Door substrate (wood vs metal frame)2310ME-WMS vs 2310ME-TORX screw pack
Installation date (before or after February 2016)Track roller and standard track (redesigned Feb 2016)

 

How to Identify the Hand of a 2310ME Installation

Stand on the outside of the door (the side the door swings away from when opened). If the hinges are on the right, the door is right-hand. If the hinges are on the left, the door is left-hand. The 2310ME standard arm is handed and confirming this before ordering prevents receiving the wrong variant.

 

How to Identify the Finish of an Existing 2310ME Component

LCN closer hardware is available in standard finish codes. Common codes include 689 for aluminum, 693 for dark bronze, and 626 for satin chrome. If the finish designation is not legible on the existing hardware, match it visually and confirm with Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering.

 

What Is Included in the LCN 2310ME Rebox Kit?

The 2310ME Rebox Kit includes the box and instruction sheet for the closer. The rebox kit, flat box, and instruction sheet are each available individually and do not require any specification at order. These are ordered when original packaging and documentation need to be replaced for a reinstallation or compliance inspection.

 

LCN 2310ME Troubleshooting: Hold-Open and Closing Issues

The troubleshooting guidance below is based on verified LCN documentation. It covers the most common issues reported on Sentronic ME Series closers. For complex electrical faults, contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering parts.

 

What Causes the LCN 2310ME to Creep Shut?

If the 2310ME creeps shut or will not hold open, first verify that proper voltage is being supplied to the closer. Measure at the wiring terminals and confirm the voltage matches the specification of the installed ME switch assembly. If the voltage is correct, check the on/off switch (ME switch assembly). A faulty or worn switch assembly that is not maintaining the holding signal will cause the door to creep shut even when voltage is present.

Replace the 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly if voltage is confirmed correct and the on/off switch is not maintaining the hold-open signal. Also inspect the input jumper (2310ME-3431) and transformer (2310ME-3210) if the switch assembly tests correctly.

 

What Causes the LCN 2310ME to Pop Back Into Hold Open While Closing?

If the door pops back into the hold-open position while it is in the process of closing, the closing speed adjustment is set too fast. A fast closing speed can cause the door to rebound and re-engage the hold-open before it travels through the full closing cycle. Slow down the closing speed valve using a 3/32-inch hex wrench and retest. If the issue continues after adjusting the closing speed, contact Security Parts for further guidance.

 

What Causes the LCN 2310ME to Close Too Slowly or Fail to Latch?

If the door closes slowly or fails to latch, check the spring power adjustment first. The maximum spring increase is 18 turns clockwise from the factory setting. Closing power of the 2310ME Series may be increased up to 15%. If the spring is already at maximum and the door still fails to latch, inspect the track roller (2310ME-3034) for wear or binding inside the track. A worn roller creates resistance during the closing cycle and can prevent consistent latching on high-traffic or heavy doors.

For guidance on installing a commercial door closer and adjusting it correctly, see the how to install a commercial door closer guide.

 

Routine Maintenance and Inspection Checklist for the LCN 2310ME

Scheduled maintenance on the 2310ME reduces unplanned part replacements and keeps fire-rated openings code-compliant. The following checks should be part of every maintenance visit on an installation that uses the 2310ME.

What to Inspect During Routine 2310ME Maintenance

  • Track roller (2310ME-3034): Look for flat spots, cracking, or wear on the roller surface. A worn roller is the most common source of noise and inconsistent closing speed on this series. Check the shoulder dimension is intact and the roller moves freely inside the track.
  • Standard track (2310ME-3038): Inspect for bending, cracking, or debris inside the channel. Clean the track channel and confirm the roller moves through the full travel range without binding.
  • Arm screw and roller lock screw: Check the 2310ME-159 arm screw and 2310ME-425 roller lock screw for tightness. Loose fasteners cause play in the arm-to-shaft connection and accelerate wear on both the arm and closer shaft.
  • Wiring connections: Inspect connections at the ME switch assembly (2310ME-3351) and transformer (2310ME-3210) for loose terminals, corrosion, or damaged insulation. Loose or corroded connections are a common cause of intermittent hold-open failure.
  • Closing test: Open the door to approximately 90 degrees, release it, and confirm it closes and latches within 5 to 7 seconds. If it does not, check the spring setting and the track roller.
  • Hold-open test: Verify the door holds open when the electrical signal is active. Then interrupt the power supply or activate a fire alarm test signal and confirm the door closes fully and latches. If the door does not close and latch during this test, troubleshoot the ME switch assembly and spring power before ordering parts.
  • Wiring cover and fire shield: Confirm the 2310ME-172 wiring cover and the 2310ME-420 fire shield (on fire-rated installations) are present, intact, and properly secured.

 

LCN 2310ME vs Other LCN Sentronic Models: Which Parts Guide to Use

The 2310ME, 4310ME, and 4410ME are all part of the Sentronic ME series but have different mounting configurations and different part numbers. The 2310ME mounts concealed in the frame. The 4310ME mounts on the hinge pull side. The 4410ME mounts on the top jamb push side. Do not substitute parts between these models without confirming compatibility with Security Parts.

ModelMountingResource
LCN 2310MEConcealed in frameThis guide
LCN 9150 BenchmarkOverhead concealed operatorLCN 9150 Parts Guide
LCN Senior Swing IQSurface mounted operatorLCN Senior Swing IQ Parts Guide
LCN 9530IQ SlideProOverhead slide operatorLCN 9530IQ Parts Guide
Any LCN surface mechanical closerSurface mountedDoor Closers Parts Guide
Any LCN door operatorVariousDoor Operators Parts Guide

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts stocks replacement parts for commercial door closers, door operators, exit devices, and access hardware. All 18 LCN 2310ME parts listed in this guide are stocked and verified for immediate ordering. Security Parts serves facility managers, locksmiths, door hardware distributors, and maintenance professionals who need the correct part quickly without sourcing delays.

Call 845-935-0301 to confirm part specifications, check availability, or get guidance on a specific 2310ME installation. All 18 LCN 2310ME parts are available to order at Security Parts now.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

LCN 9150 Parts Guide: Motor, Arms, Control Box, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 21 replacement parts for the LCN 9150 Benchmark electromechanical swing door operator. The key components are the 9150-3454S motor gearbox assembly with switch, the 9150-3462SC standard control box, the 9150-77 main arm, the 9150-3077 regular arm and 9150-3077L long arm, the 9150-79 rod and shoe, the 9150-72MC metal cover, the 9150-3018 mounting bracket, the 9150-360 24v SO kit, three switch bracket sizes, three screw pack variants, and cover components. All 21 parts are confirmed in stock.

 

What Is the LCN 9150?

The LCN 9150 is a low-energy electromechanical swing door operator in the LCN Benchmark series. It is designed for top-jamb push-side mounting on paired interior commercial doors and is widely installed in healthcare facilities, government buildings, universities, and commercial offices where ADA-compliant automatic access is required.

The 9150 operates by using a motor gearbox to physically swing the door open on activation, hold it open for an adjustable period, then close it. It includes Push N Go activation, which allows non-switch activation when a pedestrian manually pushes the door to approximately 5 degrees. The operator detects the movement and takes over, carrying the door to the full open position automatically. Power Boost provides additional closing force near the latch to overcome wind load and seal resistance.

The 9150 meets ANSI/BHMA A156.19, ANSI A117.1, UL 325, and ADA requirements, and is UL listed for fire-rated applications.

 

How Does the LCN 9150 Differ from the 9130 and 9140?

All three models belong to the Benchmark series and share the same part families. The mounting configuration is what separates them:

ModelMounting SideDoor Configuration
9130Pull sideSingle door
9140Push sideSingle door
9150Push side, top jambPaired doors (independent or simultaneous pair)

The 9150 ships with two motor gearboxes and two control boxes, one for each door leaf. If you have a pair of doors with an operator across the full header, you have a 9150 installation. For the full Benchmark series parts catalog, see the LCN 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark series page.

 

What Parts Does the LCN 9150 Come With from the Factory?

The LCN 9150 ships from the factory with the following components included as standard:

  • Motor gearboxes (two, one per door leaf)
  • Control boxes (two, one per door leaf)
  • Mounting plate (operator mounting bracket)
  • Regular arms (two, one per leaf)
  • 72-inch metal cover (non-handed, extruded aluminum)
  • Wood and machine screw packs

Actuators, wall switches, motion sensors, and other activation devices are not included in the standard shipment and must be ordered separately.

 

LCN 9150 Parts by Component Category

Motor Gearbox Assembly

LCN 9150-3454S motor gearbox assembly with switch for LCN 9150 Benchmark electromechanical door operator

LCN 9150-3454S Motor Gearbox Assembly with Switch. The primary drive unit for the LCN 9150 operator. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
9150-3454SMotor Gearbox Assembly with SwitchThe drive unit that physically opens the door. Converts electrical power into arm rotation through a gear reduction system. Switch included for on/off control.

 

How Do I Know If the Motor Gearbox Has Failed?

The motor gearbox is the most costly replacement component on the 9150. Before ordering, confirm the failure is in the motor gearbox and not the control box or wiring. The control box has two LED indicator lights: one showing power to the control box itself and one showing power to the motor gearbox. If the motor gearbox LED is off while the control box LED is on, the fault is in the motor gearbox or the cable connection between the two units. If both LEDs are off, the fault is upstream in the power supply or wiring.

Motor gearbox failure symptoms include the door not moving at all when an activation signal is received, the arm moving weakly without enough force to open the door against normal resistance, or the door opening but not completing the full travel arc.

 

Control Box

LCN 9150-3462SC standard control box for LCN 9150 Benchmark door operator

LCN 9150-3462SC Standard Control Box. The microprocessor controller that manages all operator functions including Push N Go, opening time, hold-open delay, and Power Boost. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
9150-3462SCStandard Control BoxMicroprocessor controller managing opening speed, closing speed, hold-open time delay (adjustable up to approximately 30 seconds), Power Boost, and Push N Go. All potentiometers are clearly labeled. LED lights indicate power status to control box and motor gearbox.

 

What Does Push N Go Do and Why Does It Matter for Parts?

Push N Go is the feature that allows the 9150 to operate without a wall switch or sensor activation. When someone manually pushes the door open to approximately 5 degrees, the control box detects the movement through the motor gearbox's built-in sensor and takes over, carrying the door to the full open position. After the hold-open delay expires, the control box signals the motor gearbox to close the door.

When Push N Go stops working -- the door opens manually but the operator does not take over -- the fault is almost always in the control box or the connection between the control box and motor gearbox, not in the motor gearbox itself. Replacing the control box (9150-3462SC) is the correct diagnostic step before replacing the motor gearbox (9150-3454S).

 

How Do I Identify a Failed Control Box Versus a Failed Motor Gearbox?

  • Control box fault: Door does not respond to activation signals. Push N Go not working. Door opens but does not hold for the set delay. Opening or closing speed cannot be adjusted. Both LEDs off when power is confirmed at the wall outlet.
  • Motor gearbox fault: Control box LED is on but motor gearbox LED is off. Door does not move despite a valid activation signal. Arm moves but without enough force to open the door. Unusual noise from the operator housing during activation.

 

Mounting Bracket

LCN 9150-3018 mounting bracket for LCN 9150 Benchmark operator installation

LCN 9150-3018 Mounting Bracket. The standard bracket that mounts the motor gearbox to the header frame. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescription
9150-3018Mounting Bracket. Standard bracket that attaches the motor gearbox assembly to the header frame or door frame. Requires a minimum head frame of 2 inches (51mm) and minimum top rail of 2 inches (51mm). Flush ceiling installation requires a minimum of 5-1/4 inches clearance.

 

Arms

LCN 9150-77 main arm for LCN 9150 Benchmark door operator

LCN 9150-77 Main Arm. The primary connection arm between the operator spindle and the door. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse When
9150-77Main ArmPrimary arm connecting operator spindle to door. Non-handed. Use for standard push-side mounting configurations.
9150-3077Regular ArmNon-handed regular arm. Push installations where reveal does not exceed 6 inches (152mm). Ships as standard with the 9150.
9150-3077LLong ArmNon-handed long arm. Push installations where reveal is between 6 inches and 9-3/4 inches (248mm). Required when standard arm does not have enough reach for the door geometry.

 

How Do I Choose Between the Regular Arm and the Long Arm?

Measure the reveal of the installation. The reveal is the distance from the face of the door to the face of the frame on the push side. If the reveal is 6 inches or less, the 9150-3077 regular arm is correct. If the reveal is between 6 inches and 9-3/4 inches, the 9150-3077L long arm is required. Using the regular arm on a reveal that requires a long arm will result in incorrect arm geometry and poor door control. The operator will not be able to swing the door to the full open angle.

 

Rod and Shoe

LCN 9150-79 rod and shoe for LCN 9150 Benchmark door operator standard arm

LCN 9150-79 Rod and Shoe. Connects the arm to the door surface on push-side installations. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionPaired With
9150-79Rod and ShoePaired with 9150-3077 regular arm. For standard-reveal push installations.
9150-79LRLong Rod and ShoePaired with 9150-3077L long arm. For deep-reveal push installations where a longer rod is required.

 

Cover and Trim Components

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
9150-72MCMetal Cover, 72 inchNon-handed extruded aluminum cover enclosing the operator assembly. Standard length is 72 inches. Ships as standard with the 9150 operator.
9150-163Cover InsertInsert that covers the operator shaft opening in the cover. Prevents debris entry and completes the finished appearance.
9150-163-1Cover Endcap InsertsInserts that fit inside the cover endcaps at each end of the cover. Complete the sealed appearance at the cover ends.
9150-334Cover EndcapsBlack plastic endcaps that close each end of the cover assembly. Replace when cracked, missing, or damaged.

 

AC Power Cable

Part NumberDescription
9150-3498-2AAC Power Cable, 29 inch. Connects the control box to the motor gearbox. Replace when the cable is damaged, shows visible insulation wear, or when the motor gearbox LED is off and the cable and connectors have been confirmed as the fault point.

 

Secondary Output (SO) Kit

Part NumberDescription
9150-36024v SO Kit. Enables the secondary output circuit on the 9150 operator. The secondary output activates when the operator receives an open command, allowing it to trigger an accessory device such as a door hold-open relay, an electric strike, or an access control output. This is an optional accessory not included in the standard operator shipment. Order this when adding secondary output functionality to an existing 9150 installation.

 

Switch Brackets

Part NumberDescriptionLength
9150-3351-1Switch Bracket29 inch
9150-3351-2Switch Bracket41 inch
9150-3351-3Switch Bracket51 inch

The switch bracket positions the on/off switch at the end of the operator cover. The correct size depends on the door width and the length of the cover assembly. Measure the installed cover length to determine which bracket size applies.

 

Screw Packs

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
9150-MS-PUSHScrew Pack, Push ArmPush-side arm mounting configurations
9150-MS-PULLScrew Pack, Pull ArmPull-side arm mounting configurations
9150-MS-HDRScrew Pack, HeaderHeader mounting

 

Documentation and Packaging

Part NumberDescription
9150-Rebox KitRebox Kit including box and instruction sheet. Used when repackaging or documenting a field unit.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 9150 Problems

Why Is the LCN 9150 Not Opening the Door?

Check in this order before ordering parts:

  1. Confirm the on/off switch on the operator cover is set to On. This is the most common service call for an operator that appears dead.
  2. Confirm power is reaching the control box. Check the LED on the control box. If it is off, the fault is in the power supply, circuit breaker, or wiring to the unit, not in the operator itself.
  3. If the control box LED is on but the motor gearbox LED is off, check the AC power cable (9150-3498-2A) connection between the two units. If the cable is secure and the motor gearbox LED is still off, the motor gearbox (9150-3454S) needs replacement.
  4. If both LEDs are on and the door still does not open on activation, try a manual Push N Go activation. If Push N Go works but switch activation does not, the fault is in the activation device (wall switch, sensor, or actuator), not in the operator components.

 

Why Is the LCN 9150 Not Holding the Door Open?

The hold-open delay is set by the potentiometer on the control box (9150-3462SC). If the door is not holding open for the expected duration, the potentiometer setting may have drifted or the control box may have lost its settings. Adjust the hold-open time potentiometer on the control box. If adjustments have no effect, the control box needs replacement.

 

Why Is the LCN 9150 Door Closing Too Hard or Too Fast?

Opening speed and closing speed are both adjustable via potentiometers on the control box. If the door is closing too fast or with too much force, the closing speed setting may have been changed or the Power Boost setting may be too high. Adjust the closing speed and Power Boost potentiometers on the 9150-3462SC control box. If the behavior cannot be corrected through adjustment, the control box needs replacement.

 

Why Is the Arm Not Reaching the Door on the Push Side?

If the arm is not reaching the door or the geometry appears incorrect, the arm may be the wrong type for the reveal depth. Measure the reveal from the door face to the frame face on the push side. A reveal over 6 inches requires the 9150-3077L long arm and the 9150-79LR long rod and shoe. Using the standard 9150-3077 arm on a deep-reveal installation is the most common arm-related service error.

 

LCN 9150 Installation Requirements That Affect Part Selection

Before ordering any replacement arm, rod, bracket, or cover for the LCN 9150, confirm the installation dimensions. The 9150 is a paired-door operator and its parts selection depends on several measurable site conditions.

 

What Are the Head Frame and Top Rail Requirements for the LCN 9150?

The LCN 9150 requires a minimum head frame depth of 2 inches (51mm) and a minimum top rail depth of 2 inches (51mm). These minimums are required for the mounting bracket (9150-3018) to seat properly. If the head frame is narrower than 2 inches, the standard mounting configuration is not possible and an alternate bracket solution is needed. For flush ceiling installations, 5-1/4 inches of clearance above the door is required.

 

What Are the Reveal Limits for the LCN 9150 Push Arm?

Push installations must not exceed 6 inches (152mm) of reveal when using the regular arm (9150-3077). For reveals between 6 inches and 9-3/4 inches (248mm), the long arm (9150-3077L) with the long rod and shoe (9150-79LR) is required. These are not guidelines -- exceeding the reveal limit with the wrong arm results in mechanical binding, incorrect door travel, and potential damage to the operator spindle.

 

What Compliance Standards Does the LCN 9150 Meet?

The LCN 9150 meets the following standards, which are important for facilities managers ordering replacement parts on code-compliant openings:

  • ANSI/BHMA A156.19 -- Low-energy power-operated doors
  • ANSI A117.1 -- Accessibility requirements
  • Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliant
  • UL 325 listed
  • UL listed for fire-rated applications

When replacing components on a fire-rated opening, confirm that all replacement parts are the same specification as the originals. Do not substitute non-OEM components on fire-rated applications without confirming compliance with the authority having jurisdiction.

 

How to Identify Your LCN 9150 Before Ordering Parts

The date of manufacture label on the LCN 9150 is on the operator body, typically inside the cover near the control box. It shows the model number (9150 for a paired-door push-side installation), the manufacturing date, and the serial number. Confirm the model number before ordering any replacement component.

If the label is unreadable, identify the operator by the configuration:

  • A paired header with an operator on both door leaves, mounted on the push side, is a 9150 installation.
  • A single-door installation on the pull side is a 9130.
  • A single-door installation on the push side is a 9140.

Parts from the 9130 and 9140 share many part numbers with the 9150 because all three are Benchmark series operators. The motor gearbox, control box, arms, rods, and cover components are common across the three series. Always verify the part number prefix matches your specific model before ordering.

For a broader overview of LCN door operator component categories and what failure looks like in each one, see the door operators parts guide.

 

What Does Each Potentiometer Do on the LCN 9150 Control Box?

The LCN 9150-3462SC control box has five labeled potentiometers. Each one controls a separate phase of the door cycle. When the door is behaving incorrectly, knowing which potentiometer to adjust avoids unnecessary part replacement.

 

PotentiometerWhat It ControlsAdjust When
Opening SpeedSpeed at which the motor drives the door from closed to backcheck positionDoor opens too fast (impact risk) or too slowly for the intended traffic flow
Backcheck SpeedSpeed at which the door decelerates from the backcheck position to the full open positionDoor slams against the stop at full open, or decelerates too early
Hold Open Time DelayHow many seconds the door holds at the full open position before beginning to close. Adjustable up to approximately 30 seconds.Door closes before occupants can pass, or holds open too long
Closing SpeedSpeed at which the spring closes the door from full open to latch positionDoor closes too fast (slamming) or too slowly (fails to latch consistently)
Latch PositionThe point at which additional closing assistance is applied near the latch to overcome seal resistance. This is the Power Boost zone.Door consistently fails to latch in the final inch of travel

 

All five potentiometers are clearly labeled on the 9150-3462SC control box. Adjustment is made with a small flathead screwdriver through the access point on the control box face. Always make small adjustments and test the door cycle before adjusting further. If potentiometer adjustment has no effect on the symptom, the control box needs replacement.

 

What Does Each LED Mean on the LCN 9150 Control Box?

The 9150-3462SC control box has two LED indicator lights. Understanding exactly what each LED indicates prevents misdiagnosis before ordering replacement parts.

 

LEDWhen It Is OnWhen It Is Off
Power LEDPower is applied to the control board. Stays on as long as power is connected, including during hold-open and closing.Power is not reaching the control board. Fault is in power supply, circuit breaker, or wiring upstream of the control box.
Motor LEDMotor drive circuit is energized. This only happens during the opening stroke of the door cycle.Motor is not running. This is NORMAL during hold-open and closing -- the motor LED being off during closing does not indicate a fault.

 

Key diagnostic rule: If the Power LED is on but the Motor LED stays off when an open signal is sent and the door does not move, the fault is in the motor gearbox (9150-3454S) or the AC power cable (9150-3498-2A) connecting it to the control box. If the Power LED is also off, the fault is upstream of the control box in the power supply or circuit.

 

How Do I Run a Sizing Cycle After Replacing the LCN 9150 Motor Gearbox?

After replacing the motor gearbox (9150-3454S), a sizing cycle must be completed before the operator returns to normal automatic service. The sizing cycle allows the control box to learn the full travel of the door and set the open counter correctly.

During the sizing cycle, the door drives automatically to the full open position. The speed during sizing is controlled automatically by the control box and cannot be adjusted from the potentiometers. Once the door reaches the full open position, the system sets the open counter and the operator is ready for normal use.

If the sizing cycle is skipped after a motor gearbox replacement, the operator will not function correctly and may reverse or stop short of the full open position. The sizing cycle is also required any time the mounting bracket position is changed or the door travel geometry is altered.

 

What Happens to the LCN 9150 During a Power Failure?

The LCN 9150 Benchmark is designed to function as a manual door closer during a power failure. When power is lost, the motor drive circuit deactivates and the door falls back to spring-powered operation at Size 3 spring force. This allows the door to continue closing under spring power even without electricity, which is critical for fire-rated openings where the door must close and latch on a power interruption.

This behavior means a fire-rated 9150 installation will still protect the opening during a power outage. It also means that during a power outage, if the door is not closing correctly, the fault may be in the spring mechanism rather than the motor or control box. Inspect the spring and arm geometry before ordering electronic components when the symptom occurs during a power outage.

 

What Is the Minimum Door Width for the LCN 9150?

Confirm the door width before ordering parts to ensure the 9150 is the correct model for the installation.

 

ConfigurationMinimum Door Width
27-inch push operator (standard 9150)26 inches minimum per leaf
27-inch pull operator30 inches minimum per leaf
Head frame minimum2 inches (51mm)
Top rail minimum2 inches (51mm)
Flush ceiling clearance5-1/4 inches above door

 

Does the LCN 9150 Require a Certified Technician to Service?

LCN states that technicians must be AAADM (American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers) certified to work on or service automatic door operators. AAADM certification is a training and safety standard for professionals who install and service power-operated pedestrian doors.

Facilities managers and building engineers can identify failing components, read the LED indicators, and make basic potentiometer adjustments. However, full disassembly, motor gearbox replacement, and sizing cycle completion should be performed by an AAADM-certified technician to ensure proper operation on fire-rated and ADA-compliant openings. Call 845-935-0301 to discuss part identification before placing an order.

 

Complete LCN 9150 Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
9150-3454SMotor Gearbox Assembly with SwitchMotor
9150-3462SCStandard Control BoxController
9150-3018Mounting BracketMounting
9150-77Main ArmArm
9150-3077Regular Arm (non-handed)Arm
9150-3077LLong Arm (non-handed)Arm
9150-79Rod and Shoe (regular arm)Arm / Rod
9150-79LRLong Rod and Shoe (long arm)Arm / Rod
9150-72MCMetal Cover, 72 inchCover
9150-163Cover InsertCover
9150-163-1Cover Endcap InsertsCover
9150-334Cover EndcapsCover
9150-3498-2AAC Power Cable, 29 inchElectrical
9150-36024v SO KitAccessory
9150-3351-1Switch Bracket, 29 inchSwitch Bracket
9150-3351-2Switch Bracket, 41 inchSwitch Bracket
9150-3351-3Switch Bracket, 51 inchSwitch Bracket
9150-MS-PUSHScrew Pack, Push ArmScrew Pack
9150-MS-PULLScrew Pack, Pull ArmScrew Pack
9150-MS-HDRScrew Pack, HeaderScrew Pack
9150-Rebox KitRebox Kit, Box and Instruction SheetDocumentation

 

Where to Order LCN 9150 Parts

Security Parts stocks all 21 LCN 9150 replacement components. Parts ship same day when ordered before the daily cut-off. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support or to confirm a part number before placing an order.

For the broader LCN door operator parts catalog organized by operator series, see the door operators parts guide. For LCN power-assist sliding door operator parts, see the LCN 9530IQ parts guide. For the full Benchmark series parts catalog covering the 9130, 9140, and 9150, see the LCN 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark series page. For all door operator parts and accessories, see the door operators category.

 

About This Guide

Written by the Security Parts team. Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware components to facilities managers, building engineers, contractors, and service technicians since 2001. All 21 LCN 9150 parts listed in this guide are verified in stock with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification or compatibility support. For related operator parts guides, see the door operators parts guide and the LCN 9530IQ parts guide.

Adams Rite 41 Series Parts Guide: SVR, CVR, Escutcheons, and Replacement Assemblies

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 39 replacement parts in the Adams Rite 41 series. These components service Adams Rite SVR (surface vertical rod) and CVR (concealed vertical rod) exit devices used on narrow stile glass and aluminum storefront doors. The 41 series covers SVR and CVR final assemblies, rod assemblies, end cap assemblies, escutcheon operators (IP and IB types), paddle assemblies, latch assemblies, bolt guide kits, micro switch assemblies, and rivnut tool kits. All 39 parts are confirmed in stock at Security Parts.

 

What Is the Adams Rite 41 Series?

The Adams Rite 41 series is the replacement parts numbering family for Adams Rite vertical rod exit devices. Any part number beginning with "41-" belongs to this family and covers the internal mechanical assemblies, trim components, and service tools that keep SVR and CVR exit devices operating correctly.

These parts are most commonly found on narrow stile aluminum storefront doors in commercial retail, office, and educational facilities. The exit device pushes the rods to retract the top and bottom bolts simultaneously when someone presses the push bar or paddle, allowing the door to open. When the mechanism wears or a component fails, the 41 series is where the replacement parts come from.

The 41 series is distinct from the Adams Rite 91 series, which covers trim hardware (lever kits, faceplates, and strikes). If you are looking for trim or handle components, see the Adams Rite parts guide. If you need the full exit device assembly rather than individual replacement parts, see the exit devices category.

 

What Is the Difference Between SVR and CVR Parts?

Understanding this distinction before ordering is critical. Ordering a CVR part for an SVR device or vice versa results in a part that will not fit the mechanism.

 

SVR (Surface Vertical Rod)

SVR exit devices mount the vertical rods on the surface of the door, running along the outside face of the stile. The rods are visible when the door is closed and are accessible for inspection and service without disassembly of the door itself. Because SVR rods are exposed, they are more likely to need service over time. Bottom rod drag is one of the most common SVR service issues: the lower rod extends too far and scrapes the floor, scribing an arc in the threshold area. This requires rod adjustment.

 

CVR (Concealed Vertical Rod)

CVR exit devices run the rods entirely inside the door stile, concealed from view. CVR devices are almost always used on aluminum storefront narrow-stile doors where exposed rods would be impractical or unattractive. Because the rods are hidden inside the door, inspection is more difficult and service requires partial disassembly to access the rod assembly. When diagnosing a CVR problem, inspect the full opening carefully before beginning disassembly, since loose fasteners or debris in the threshold strike can cause symptoms that mimic internal rod failure.

For a full explanation of how SVR and CVR exit devices are installed, see the how to install an exit device guide.

 

Which Adams Rite Exit Device Series Uses 41-Series Parts?

The 41 series serves multiple Adams Rite exit device families. The correct final assembly part number depends on which exit device series is installed. The table below maps the primary device series to the corresponding 41-series SVR or CVR final assembly:

Exit Device SeriesType41-Series Final Assembly Part Number
3100 SeriesSVR41-0235-01 (standard) / 41-0333-01 (3100T variant)
8100 SeriesSVR41-0282-01 (standard) / 41-0333-11 (8100T variant)
8500 SeriesCVR41-0675 (complete with bolts) / 41-0224 / 41-0339 (top rod devices)
8600 SeriesCVR41-0935 (complete with bolts) / 41-0675 / 41-0339 (top rod devices)
4781 Deadlatch/PaddleCVR41-0935

Always confirm the series number from the label on the installed exit device before ordering a final assembly. The label is typically on the push bar housing or end cap.

 

Adams Rite 41 Series Parts by Component Category

SVR Final Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0282-01 SVR final assembly with rods for 8100 series surface vertical rod exit device

Adams Rite 41-0282-01 SVR Final Assembly with Rods. The primary replacement assembly for 8100 series SVR exit devices. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
41-0282-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (complete)8100 series SVR exit devices; replaces the full internal rod and bolt mechanism
41-0333-11SVR Final Assembly -- Top Rod Only8100T series SVR exit devices; replaces only the upper portion of the SVR mechanism when the lower section is intact
41-0235-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (complete)3100 series SVR exit devices
41-0333-01SVR Final Assembly -- Top Rod Only3100T series SVR exit devices

 

When Do I Need the Full SVR Final Assembly Versus the Top Rod Assembly Only?

Order the complete final assembly (41-0282-01 or 41-0235-01) when the full internal mechanism needs replacement -- when the device fails to retract both the top and bottom bolts, or when the overall mechanism is worn or damaged beyond a single component repair.

Order the top rod assembly variant (41-0333-11 or 41-0333-01) when inspection confirms the problem is isolated to the upper rod portion and the lower mechanism is operating correctly. Inspect the device fully before ordering to avoid an unnecessary full-assembly replacement.

 

CVR Final Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0675 CVR final assembly complete with bolts for 8500 and 8600 series concealed vertical rod exit devices

Adams Rite 41-0675 CVR Final Assembly Complete with Bolts. Used on 8500 and 8600 series CVR exit devices. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
41-0675CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts8500 and 8600 series CVR exit devices; complete rod and bolt replacement
41-0224CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts8500 and 8600 series CVR exit devices; alternate variant
41-0935CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts8500/8600 series CVR exit devices and 4781 two-point deadlatch paddle system
41-0339CVR Final Assembly for Top Rod DevicesCVR exit devices where only the top rod CVR mechanism requires replacement

 

Rod Assembly

Part NumberDescription
41-0337Rod Assembly. A standalone rod replacement for use when the rod itself is damaged but the rest of the mechanism is serviceable.

 

End Cap Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0902-03-IP metal end cap assembly for Adams Rite SVR exit device

Adams Rite 41-0902-03-IP Metal End Cap Assembly. The IP designation indicates an integrated pull on this end cap. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescription
41-0902-03-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (Integrated Pull)
41-0902-04-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (Integrated Pull) -- alternate variant
41-0902-05-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (Integrated Pull) -- alternate variant
41-0903-119Metal End Cap Assembly, Clear Anodized (finish 119)

 

What Does IP Mean on an Adams Rite 41 Series Part Number?

IP stands for Integrated Pull. On end cap and escutcheon assemblies, the IP designation means the pull handle is built directly into the assembly. This is the standard configuration for narrow stile glass and aluminum storefront doors where a separate pull handle is not installed. When replacing an end cap or escutcheon on a storefront door, check whether the existing hardware has an integrated pull before ordering -- an assembly without the IP designation will not include the pull.

 

Latch Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0296-02 latch assembly RHR for 3300 series Adams Rite exit device

Adams Rite 41-0296-02 Latch Assembly (RHR), for 3300 series exit devices. Latch assemblies are handed -- confirm the door hand before ordering. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionHand
41-0296-01Latch Assembly for 3300 SeriesLHR (left hand reverse)
41-0296-02Latch Assembly for 3300 SeriesRHR (right hand reverse)

Latch assemblies are handed. LHR (left hand reverse) and RHR (right hand reverse) are not interchangeable. Determine the door hand before ordering: standing on the outside of the door, facing the door, a right-hand reverse door has the hinges on the right. If uncertain, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for pre-order hand verification support.

 

Escutcheon Assemblies

What Does IB Mean on an Adams Rite 41 Series Part Number?

IB stands for Integrated Bolt. IB escutcheon assemblies are designed for doors where a deadbolt function is integrated into the exit device trim. The IB series includes separate interior and exterior components. Interior escutcheon operators mount on the inside of the door; exterior escutcheons mount on the outside. These are not interchangeable -- ordering the wrong designation results in a part that installs on the wrong side.

Adams Rite 41-0942-01-119 IB interior escutcheon operator clear anodized for Adams Rite exit device

Adams Rite 41-0942-01-119 IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Clear Anodized (finish 119). View product page.

 

IB Interior Escutcheon Operators (41-0397 and 41-0942 series):

Part NumberFinish
41-0397-01IB Interior Escutcheon Operator
41-0397-02IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 02
41-0397-06IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 06
41-0942-01-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Clear Anodized
41-0942-01-121IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, finish 121
41-0942-01-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Dark Bronze Anodized
41-0942-02-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 02, Clear Anodized
41-0942-09-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 09, Clear Anodized
41-0942-09-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 09, Dark Bronze Anodized
41-0942-10-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 10, Clear Anodized
41-0942-11-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 11, Clear Anodized
41-0942-11-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 11, Dark Bronze Anodized

 

IB Exterior Escutcheons (41-0405 and 41-0943 series):

Part NumberDescription
41-0405-00-01-IBExterior Escutcheon for 4431 series -- IB
41-0943-1-119-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Clear Anodized
41-0943-1-130-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Dark Bronze Anodized

 

Paddle Assemblies

Part NumberDescriptionFinish
41-0119-628Paddle Assembly628 -- Satin Aluminum
41-0119-313Paddle Assembly313 -- Dark Bronze
41-0119-335Paddle Assembly335 -- Black

 

What Finish Codes Are Available for Adams Rite 41 Series Paddles and Escutcheons?

Finish codes appear as a three-digit number at the end of the part number. Common codes in the 41 series:

Finish CodeDescription
119Clear Anodized
121Duranodic Bronze (medium bronze anodized)
130Dark Bronze Anodized
313Dark Bronze (non-anodized)
335Black
628Satin Aluminum

Match the existing hardware finish before ordering. If the existing part number label on the door is unreadable, match visually: satin aluminum is a brushed silver, dark bronze anodized has a warm brown tone, and black is a flat matte finish.

 

IP Escutcheon Assemblies (Integrated Pull, Non-IB)

Part NumberDescription
41-0123-02-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP -- Push to Left configuration
41-0123-04-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP -- Push to Right configuration

The push direction (left or right) refers to the direction the door pushes open from the outside. Confirm the door swing direction before ordering.

 

Bolt Guide Assembly Kit

Part NumberDescription
41-0827-02-IPBolt Guide Assembly Kit, IP. Used on 4015 series applications. Guides the bolt along the correct path inside the door stile during actuation.

 

Micro Switch Assembly

Part NumberDescription
41-0193-01Micro Switch Assembly with Wires. Used in electrified exit device applications where a signal is sent when the push bar or paddle is depressed. The assembly includes pre-attached wires for connection to the access control or alarm circuit. Replace when the switch no longer signals correctly on activation.

 

Rivnut Tool Kits

What Is the Adams Rite Rivnut Tool Kit Used For?

The Adams Rite 41-0975 rivnut tool kit is a specialized service tool for exit device installations where a rivnut anchor point in the door frame or stile has been stripped or damaged. A rivnut is a threaded insert that is pressed into the door to provide a secure mounting point for exit device screws. When an original rivnut spins or strips, the exit device cannot be securely fastened without re-establishing that anchor. The rivnut tool kit allows the technician to install a new rivnut in place of the damaged one.

Two variants are stocked: 41-0975-02 and 41-0975-04. These are specialized tool kits, not hardware parts -- they are reusable installation tools kept in the service kit rather than left in the door.

 

How to Identify Which Adams Rite 41 Series Part You Need

Follow this order before placing any 41 series parts order:

  1. Confirm the exit device series. Locate the label on the push bar housing or end cap. It will show the series number (3100, 8100, 8500, 8600). This determines which final assembly applies.
  2. Confirm SVR or CVR. Look at the door. Visible rods on the door surface indicate SVR. No visible rods (rods inside the door stile) indicate CVR.
  3. Confirm IP or IB requirement. If replacing an escutcheon or end cap, check whether the existing hardware has an integrated pull (IP) or integrated bolt (IB). These are not interchangeable.
  4. Confirm interior or exterior escutcheon. For IB escutcheons, confirm which side of the door the part mounts on before ordering.
  5. Confirm door hand for latch assemblies. LHR and RHR latch assemblies are separate parts. Determine hand before ordering.
  6. Confirm finish code. For paddles and escutcheons, match the three-digit finish code to the existing hardware.

If you cannot read the model label or finish code, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support.

 

Troubleshooting Common Adams Rite Vertical Rod Exit Device Problems

Why Is My Adams Rite SVR Bottom Rod Dragging on the Floor?

Bottom rod drag is one of the most common SVR service issues. When the lower rod extends too far, it contacts the threshold or floor and scribes an arc as the door swings. This is not a parts failure in most cases -- it is an adjustment issue. The lower rod needs to be trimmed or repositioned to the correct length for the door height. This adjustment may need to be repeated periodically as the door or frame settles. If the rod is physically bent or damaged, replace the rod assembly (41-0337) or the relevant final assembly.

 

Why Will the Device Not Dog?

Dogging holds the exit device in the unlatched position so the door can be opened without pressing the push bar. If the device will not dog, check that the hex key is being turned the correct direction (clockwise to dog, counterclockwise to release on most models). Also confirm the push bar is fully depressed and held before turning the key. A worn dogging assembly may also prevent engagement -- this is a 31-series part, not a 41-series part, and is covered separately in the exit devices parts guide.

 

Why Are the Top or Bottom Bolts Not Retracting?

When only one bolt fails to retract, the problem is usually localized to the rod or latch on that end of the door. For SVR devices, inspect the visible rod and strike for bends, corrosion, or physical damage. For CVR devices, inspect the threshold strike for debris or misalignment before assuming internal rod failure. If the full mechanism fails to retract both bolts, the final assembly may need replacement.

 

Complete Adams Rite 41 Series Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
41-0282-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (8100 series)SVR Final Assembly
41-0333-11SVR Final Assembly, Top Rod (8100T)SVR Final Assembly
41-0235-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (3100 series)SVR Final Assembly
41-0333-01SVR Final Assembly, Top Rod (3100T)SVR Final Assembly
41-0675CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts (8500/8600)CVR Final Assembly
41-0224CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts (8500/8600)CVR Final Assembly
41-0935CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts (8500/8600/4781)CVR Final Assembly
41-0339CVR Final Assembly for Top Rod DevicesCVR Final Assembly
41-0337Rod AssemblyRod Assembly
41-0902-03-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IPEnd Cap
41-0902-04-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (variant 04)End Cap
41-0902-05-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (variant 05)End Cap
41-0903-119Metal End Cap Assembly, Clear AnodizedEnd Cap
41-0296-01Latch Assembly, LHR (3300 series)Latch Assembly
41-0296-02Latch Assembly, RHR (3300 series)Latch Assembly
41-0119-628Paddle Assembly, Satin AluminumPaddle
41-0119-313Paddle Assembly, Dark BronzePaddle
41-0119-335Paddle Assembly, BlackPaddle
41-0123-02-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP, Push to LeftEscutcheon (IP)
41-0123-04-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP, Push to RightEscutcheon (IP)
41-0397-01IB Interior Escutcheon OperatorEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0397-02IB Interior Escutcheon Operator (variant 02)Escutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0397-06IB Interior Escutcheon Operator (variant 06)Escutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-01-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-01-121IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, finish 121Escutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-01-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Dark Bronze AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-02-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 02, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-09-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 09, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-09-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 09, Dark Bronze AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-10-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 10, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-11-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 11, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-11-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 11, Dark Bronze AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0405-00-01-IBExterior Escutcheon for 4431 Series, IBEscutcheon (IB Exterior)
41-0943-1-119-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Clear Anodized, IBEscutcheon (IB Exterior)
41-0943-1-130-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Dark Bronze Anodized, IBEscutcheon (IB Exterior)
41-0827-02-IPBolt Guide Assembly Kit, IPBolt Guide
41-0193-01Micro Switch Assembly with WiresElectrified Component
41-0975-02Rivnut Tool Kit AssemblyInstallation Tool
41-0975-04Rivnut Tool Kit Assembly (variant 04)Installation Tool

 

Where to Order Adams Rite 41 Series Parts

Security Parts stocks all 39 Adams Rite 41 series replacement components. Parts ship same day when ordered before the daily cut-off. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order part identification, hand determination, or finish matching support before placing an order.

For Adams Rite trim hardware (lever kits, faceplates, and strikes), see the Adams Rite parts guide. For the broader exit device parts catalog, see the exit devices parts guide. For related vertical rod exit device guidance, see the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide and the Von Duprin 22 series exit device parts guide.

 

About This Guide

Written by the Security Parts team. Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, contractors, and facilities managers since 2001. All 39 Adams Rite 41 series parts listed in this guide are verified in stock with same day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support. For related exit device parts guides, see the exit devices parts guide and the delayed egress guide.

LCN 4020T Parts Guide: Tracks, Arms, Rollers, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 33 replacement parts for the LCN 4020T track-arm surface door closer. The key components are the 3077T standard track arm (180-degree swing), four 3038-family tracks (standard, hold-open, bumper, and hold-open plus bumper), the 3034 and 3034H track rollers, the 18 drop plate for narrow head frames, and 10 screw pack variants covering all substrates and thru-bolt configurations. The 4020T cylinder is available in spring sizes 1, 3, and 4 based on door width. All 33 parts are confirmed in stock.

 

What Is the LCN 4020T?

The LCN 4020T is the track-arm (parallel arm) configuration of the LCN 4020 surface-mounted commercial door closer. Instead of connecting from the closer body to a shoe on the door frame, the 4020T uses a horizontal track mounted on the door surface. The arm extends from the closer spindle and slides inside that track to control the door arc on every cycle.

The track-arm configuration suits doors that swing toward the closer (the same side the closer body is mounted on), and it is preferred when a parallel-arm layout is needed for clearance, aesthetics, or ADA compliance. The 4020T can be ordered with an opening force of less than 5.0 lbs on a 36-inch door, making it suitable for ADA-compliant installations.

 

How Do I Know If I Have a 4020T or a Standard 4020?

Look at the door surface when the door is open. If you see a horizontal track channel mounted across the door with an arm sliding inside it, you have the 4020T. If there is only a straight arm going from the closer body to a shoe on the frame or soffit, you have the standard 4020 and need different parts.

The closer body label also identifies the model. The label is on the underside or end of the closer body and will show 4020T as the series. For a full family comparison, see the LCN 4000 series parts guide.

 

What Spring Size Does the LCN 4020T Come In?

The LCN 4020T cylinder is available in three spring sizes: 1, 3, and 4. Spring size is selected based on door width. The LCN size selection table maps door widths to recommended sizes:

Spring SizeTypical ApplicationNotes
Size 1Narrower, lighter-use doorsADA low-force option; can deliver less than 5.0 lbs opening force on 36-inch door
Size 3Medium-width commercial doorsMost common size for standard office and corridor doors
Size 4Wider or heavier doorsHigher spring tension; appropriate for wider openings or windy exterior applications

The spring size is stamped or labeled on the closer body. Confirm the size before ordering a replacement cylinder or screw pack, since some fastener packs are size-specific.

 

What Clearance Does the LCN 4020T Need Behind the Door?

The LCN 4020T requires a minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38mm) of clearance between the back of the door and the wall or any obstruction for 90-degree or 180-degree swing. If the door cannot open to that clearance, the track arm will bind or the arm will not reach its maximum rotation. Measure this before installing a new track or replacing an arm to confirm the door geometry supports the intended swing angle.

LCN also recommends ANSI/SDI-100 reinforcing for hollow metal doors at the closer and track mounting locations. This is a practical note for contractors: without proper reinforcing, hollow metal doors can pull or deform at the fastener locations under repeated closer cycling, causing misalignment over time.

 

LCN 4020T Parts by Component Category

Track Arm

LCN 4020T-3077T standard track arm 180 degree swing replacement part for LCN 4020T surface door closer

LCN 4020T-3077T Standard Track Arm, 180-Degree Swing. The primary arm component for the 4020T. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
4020T-3077TStandard Track Arm, 180-Degree SwingHanded (H) -- specify left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) when ordering. Roller not included with arm.

The arm is handed, meaning left-hand and right-hand versions are different parts. Before ordering, confirm the hand of your door: standing in the opening looking toward the outside, a right-hand door has the hinges on the right. The arm screw (4020T-159) that fastens the arm to the closer spindle should be replaced whenever the arm is replaced, since stripped arm screws are a common cause of arm looseness.

 

Tracks

LCN 4020T-3038HB standard track with bumper and hold-open for LCN 4020T parallel arm closer

LCN 4020T-3038HB Standard Track with Bumper and Hold-Open. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse When
4020T-3038Standard Track, Non-Hold-OpenDoor returns to closed automatically; no open-position stop required. Will accept hold-open clip or bumper assembly as optional additions.
4020T-3038HStandard Track with Hold-OpenHold-open clip installed; door holds at a set open position. Will accept bumper assembly.
4020T-3038BStandard Track with BumperBumper assembly installed to limit swing; no hold-open. Will accept hold-open clip.
4020T-3038HBStandard Track with Bumper and Hold-OpenBoth hold-open and bumper assembly installed.

All four track variants are non-handed, meaning the same track fits left-hand and right-hand doors. Finish must be specified when ordering (indicated by (F) in the LCN parts list).

Important: The track bumper assembly (4020T-169) is designed to assist backcheck and limit the maximum door opening swing. It does not replace an auxiliary stop. If the door is swinging hard against a wall or surface, an auxiliary wall or floor stop should also be installed.

 

Track Rollers

LCN 4020T-3034H hold-open track roller for LCN 4020T track arm closer with hold-open track

LCN 4020T-3034H Hold-Open Track Roller. Required when the installed track is a hold-open variant. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionPaired With
4020T-3034Track Roller (standard)3038 or 3038B (non-hold-open tracks)
4020T-3034HHold-Open Track Roller3038H or 3038HB (hold-open tracks); different roller profile that engages the hold-open clip
4020T-3064HHO Roller and Clip (complete hold-open assembly)When replacing both roller and hold-open clip at the same time
4020T-425Roller Locking ScrewSecures roller to arm end; replace whenever roller is replaced

The LCN 4020T roller is a quiet, low-friction assembly with a shoulder dimension of 1/16 inch (2mm). The standard (3034) and hold-open (3034H) rollers have different profiles and are not interchangeable. Using a standard roller in a hold-open track will prevent the door from latching open at the hold-open point.

 

Hold-Open Components

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
4020T-3054Hold-Open ClipMounts in track to provide hold-open function. Hold-open point is controlled by clip location within the track channel.
4020T-3064HHO Roller and ClipCombined replacement of roller and clip when both components need replacing

 

Drop Plate

Part NumberDescriptionRequired When
4020T-18Drop Plate, Narrow Top Rail or Flush CeilingHead frame is less than 3-7/8 inches (98mm) wide. The drop plate itself requires a minimum frame face of 1-3/4 inches (44mm).

 

Covers, Caps, and Hardware

LCN 4020T-72 standard cover replacement part for LCN 4020T door closer body

LCN 4020T-72 Standard Cover. Handed part -- specify finish and hand when ordering. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
4020T-72Standard CoverHanded (H), finish required (F). Standard plastic cover.
4020T-72MCMetal CoverHanded (H), finish required (F). Required for plated finishes and custom colors; more durable than plastic.
4020T-73End CapFinish required (F). Two required per closer; sold individually.
4020T-141-2PlugFinish required (F). Four required per closer; sold individually. Seals unused adjustment ports.
4020T-169Bumper AssemblyMounts in track to assist backcheck and limit maximum opening. Consists of bumper, bumper post, and mounting screw. Does not replace an auxiliary stop.
4020T-31Cover ScrewFastens cover to closer body.
4020T-159Arm ScrewFastens arm to closer spindle at pre-load position. Replace when stripped.

 

Screw Packs

The LCN 4020T ships standard with a Self-Reaming and Tapping (SRT) screw pack containing Phillips head screws. Ten screw pack variants cover all mounting substrates, thru-bolt requirements, and hold-open track configurations.

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
4020T-WMSWood-Machine ScrewsStandard track, wood or light metal substrate
4020T-SRTSelf-Reaming Tapping ScrewsStandard track, hollow metal or steel substrate
4020T-TORXTorx Machine ScrewsStandard track, Torx head for tamper resistance
4020T-TBWMSThru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsStandard track, thru-bolt mounting, wood
4020T-TBSRTThru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsStandard track, thru-bolt mounting, steel
4020T-TBTRXThru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsStandard track, thru-bolt mounting, Torx head
4020T-HWMSHO Wood-Machine ScrewsHold-open track, wood substrate
4020T-HSRTHO Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsHold-open track, steel substrate
4020T-HTBWMSHO Thru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsHold-open track, thru-bolt, wood substrate
4020T-HTBSRTHO Thru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsHold-open track, thru-bolt, steel substrate
4020T-HTORXHO Torx Machine ScrewsHold-open track, Torx head
4020T-HTBTRXHO Thru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsHold-open track, thru-bolt, Torx head

Standard LCN thru-bolts install on 1-3/4 inch (44mm) thick doors with 1/4-20 machine screws. Optional thru-bolt sizes for 1-5/8 inch (41mm) or 1-3/8 inch (35mm) door thickness must be specified when ordering.

 

Troubleshooting: Why Is My LCN 4020T Not Working Properly?

Why Is My LCN 4020T Door Not Closing?

If the door is not closing fully, check the following in order:

  • Check the closing speed valve. Turn all regulating valves clockwise until they stop, then open each valve 1-1/2 turns as a starting point. Closing speed is typically the main valve.
  • Inspect the roller and track. A worn roller that skips in the track can prevent the closer from pulling the door shut.
  • Check the spring size. If the spring is underrated for the door weight or width, the door will not close against wind pressure or door seal resistance.
  • Verify the arm is not bent. A bent 3077T arm sits the door at an angle that may cause the latch to miss the strike.

 

Why Is My LCN 4020T Arm Clicking or Squeaking?

Clicking, squeaking, or grinding as the door swings is almost always a worn track roller. The roller runs inside the track channel on every cycle and is the highest-wear component in the system. Replace the 3034 (standard) or 3034H (hold-open) roller first. If the noise continues after roller replacement, the track channel interior may be scored or grooved and the track itself should be replaced.

 

Should I Rebuild or Replace My LCN 4020T?

In most field situations, replacing individual components is the correct approach rather than replacing the full closer. A new LCN 4020T closer costs several hundred dollars. If the symptoms are a worn roller, a bent arm, or a damaged track, replacing only those parts is the practical solution.

Full closer replacement makes more sense when the closer body itself is leaking hydraulic fluid at the pinion or end cap, when the spring is broken internally, or when the closer has sustained physical damage to the housing. The hydraulic fluid in an LCN closer must not be refilled in the field; if the body is leaking, the closer needs to be replaced.

 

How Do I Install the LCN 4020T Arm and Track Roller?

The LCN 4020T installation sequence from the official instructions is as follows:

  1. Assemble the roller into the track channel before mounting the track to the door.
  2. Attach the arm to the closer spindle at the pre-load position (15 degrees from the door face). Secure with the arm screw (4020T-159).
  3. Open the door approximately 30 degrees, pull the arm over the top of the door, and connect the arm to the track roller as shown in the installation template.
  4. Adjust the closer as needed for closing speed, latch speed, and backcheck.

For step-by-step adjustment guidance, see the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide. For full installation guidance, see the how to install a commercial door closer guide.

 

How to Specify LCN 4020T Parts: Finish and Hand Requirements

Several LCN 4020T parts require finish and hand to be specified at order time. The LCN parts list marks these with (F) for finish and (H) for hand:

  • Finish (F): The cover (72, 72MC), end caps (73), and plugs (141-2) require a finish specified at order. Common LCN finishes include 689 (aluminum), 690 (dark bronze), 693 (black), and others. Match the existing closer finish when ordering replacement covers.
  • Hand (H): The arm (3077T) and covers (72, 72MC) are handed. Specify LH (left hand) or RH (right hand) to match the door. Standing in the opening and looking toward the outside: hinges on the right = right-hand door.
  • Tracks and rollers: Non-handed. The same track and roller fit both left-hand and right-hand doors.

 

LCN 4020T vs 4010T vs 4020: Which Parts Are Shared?

FeatureLCN 4020TLCN 4010TLCN 4020 (standard arm)
Mounting typeTrack arm (parallel)Track arm (parallel)Standard arm
Spring sizes1, 3, 41, 31, 3, 4
Track parts shared3038 familySame 3038 family (verify prefix)No track -- uses arm shoe
Parts interchangeableWith 4010T: verify prefix before orderingWith 4020T: verify prefix before orderingNot interchangeable with 4020T

For LCN 4010T parts, see the LCN 4010T parts guide. For the full family comparison, see the LCN 4000 series guide.

 

Complete LCN 4020T Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionCategoryHanded/Finish
4020T-3077TStandard Track Arm, 180 Degree SwingArmH, F
4020T-3038Standard Track, Non-Hold-OpenTrackF
4020T-3038HStandard Track with Hold-OpenTrackF
4020T-3038BStandard Track with BumperTrackF
4020T-3038HBStandard Track with Bumper and Hold-OpenTrackF
4020T-3034Track RollerRoller--
4020T-3034HHold-Open Track RollerRoller--
4020T-3064HHO Roller and ClipRoller / HO--
4020T-425Roller Locking ScrewRoller--
4020T-3054Hold-Open ClipHold-Open--
4020T-18Drop Plate, Narrow Top Rail or Flush CeilingDrop PlateF
4020T-72Standard CoverCoverH, F
4020T-72MCMetal CoverCoverH, F
4020T-73End Cap (2 required, sold individually)CoverF
4020T-141-2Plug (4 required, sold individually)CoverF
4020T-169Bumper AssemblyStop--
4020T-31Cover ScrewFastener--
4020T-159Arm ScrewFastener--
4020T-WMSWood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack--
4020T-SRTSelf-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack--
4020T-TORXTorx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack--
4020T-TBWMSThru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (TB)--
4020T-TBSRTThru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack (TB)--
4020T-TBTRXThru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (TB)--
4020T-HWMSHO Wood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO)--
4020T-HSRTHO Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack (HO)--
4020T-HTORXHO Torx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO)--
4020T-HTBWMSHO Thru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO/TB)--
4020T-HTBSRTHO Thru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack (HO/TB)--
4020T-HTBTRXHO Thru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO/TB)--
4020T-Rebox KitRebox Kit, Box and Instruction SheetDocumentation--
4020T-Flat BoxFlat Box with LabelDocumentation--
4020T-Instruction SheetInstruction SheetDocumentation--

 

Where to Order LCN 4020T Parts

Security Parts stocks all 33 LCN 4020T replacement components verified in stock and ready to ship. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support or to confirm a part number, finish, hand, or spring size before placing an order. For the broader LCN closer parts catalog, see the door closers parts guide. For help selecting the right LCN closer or spring size for a new opening, see the LCN commercial door closer selection guide and the commercial door closer sizing guide. For related LCN track-arm closer parts, see the LCN 4050AT parts guide and the LCN 4040XP parts guide.

 

About This Guide

Written by the Security Parts team. Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware parts to locksmiths, general contractors, facilities managers, and security integrators since 2001. All 33 LCN 4020T parts listed in this guide are verified in stock with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support. For related LCN closer guides, see the LCN 4000 series parts guide and the LCN 4840 parts guide.

What Is an Exit Alarm: How It Works, When to Use One, and How to Choose the Right Device

Quick Answer

An exit alarm is a commercial door hardware device that sounds an audible alarm the moment a door is opened, without delaying or holding the door closed. It is used on secondary egress doors, utility exits, and service doors where unauthorized or casual use needs to be monitored but where immediate free egress is still required. The door opens freely when pushed. The alarm sounds immediately and continues until the door closes or is manually reset.

Exit alarms are a different product category from panic hardware and from delayed egress devices. Understanding the difference matters before specifying or replacing hardware on a commercial door.

 

What Is an Exit Alarm

Detex EAX-2500S surface mount exit alarm for commercial secondary egress doors

Detex EAX-2500S Surface Mount Exit Alarm. Installed on secondary egress and utility doors that require alarm monitoring without a delay. View product page.

 

An exit alarm is a locking and alarm assembly mounted on a commercial door. When someone pushes the door open, two things happen simultaneously: the door opens freely and an audible alarm sounds. There is no delay before the door releases. The alarm continues until the door closes and latches, or until an authorized person resets it with a key.

The primary purpose of an exit alarm is monitoring, not restriction. The device does not prevent a person from leaving. It creates an immediate audible alert that the door has been used, which allows staff or security personnel to respond. This makes exit alarms appropriate for doors where controlling casual or unauthorized access is the goal, rather than doors where panic hardware or delayed egress is required by code.

Exit alarm devices are most commonly installed on secondary egress doors, storeroom exits, loading dock doors, utility access doors, and service entrances in commercial buildings. They allow the building to maintain a primary egress path with proper panic hardware or fire exit hardware while monitoring secondary openings that see less regular traffic.

For a broader overview of exit device types and component categories, see the exit devices parts guide.

 

How an Exit Alarm Works

The sequence of events when an exit alarm door is opened is straightforward:

  • Door contact: A person pushes the door open. The door opens freely with no resistance beyond normal door weight and closer spring.
  • Immediate alarm: The alarm sounds within one second of the door opening. There is no grace period or delay before the alarm activates on a standard exit alarm device.
  • Continuous alarm: The alarm continues for as long as the door remains open, or until a key reset is performed.
  • Automatic reset: On most models, closing the door to the latched position stops the alarm and resets the device for the next use. Some models require a key reset by authorized staff.

The latch mechanism on an exit alarm device holds the door in the closed and latched position during normal operation. When the door is opened, the latch retracts and the alarm circuit activates. The alarm is integral to the device, typically a piezoelectric buzzer or speaker built into the device housing, producing a loud audible tone that can be heard from adjacent rooms or corridors.

Some exit alarm models also include a remote alarm output, allowing the alarm signal to be sent to a building management system, security panel, or remote annunciator. The Detex RLY24 and RLY12 relay kits are available for connecting exit alarm devices to remote monitoring systems, as covered in the wiring section below.

 

Exit Alarm vs Delayed Egress: Key Differences

Exit alarms and delayed egress devices are two distinct product categories that are sometimes confused because both include an alarm function. The differences are significant for specification and code compliance.

FeatureExit AlarmDelayed Egress Device
Door opensImmediately when pushedAfter 15 or 30 seconds
Alarm activationSounds when door opensSounds when touchbar is pressed, before door opens
Delay periodNo delay15 or 30 seconds before latch releases
Primary purposeMonitoring unauthorized door useProviding staff response time before egress
Fire alarm release requiredNot required (no delay to release)Yes -- must release immediately on fire alarm
Code basisNo code-mandated delay; used at specifier discretionNFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 / IBC Section 1010.1.9.8
AHJ approval requiredNot typically required for exit alarm onlyRequired for every installation
Common applicationsSecondary exits, utility doors, service entrancesMemory care, healthcare, schools, certain high-rise doors

A delayed egress device holds the door locked for a code-permitted time period before releasing it automatically. An exit alarm releases the door immediately with no hold period. These devices are not interchangeable. If your project specifies delayed egress hardware, an exit alarm does not satisfy that requirement. For a full explanation of how delayed egress works and when it is required, see what is delayed egress.

 

Exit Alarm vs Panic Hardware: Key Differences

Panic hardware and exit alarms are also distinct products that serve different functions. They are sometimes found on different doors in the same building, and understanding which applies to which opening is important for specification and code compliance.

Panic hardware is a latch-releasing assembly that allows single-motion egress without a key and without sounding an alarm. It is required by both NFPA 101 and the IBC on egress doors serving assembly and educational occupancies with occupant loads of 50 or more, and on certain high-hazard occupancies. Standard panic hardware does not include an alarm function. It simply allows fast egress.

An exit alarm is a monitoring device. When the door opens, the alarm sounds. The exit alarm does not satisfy code requirements for panic hardware applications. You cannot substitute an exit alarm for code-required panic hardware.

In practice, a commercial building may have both: primary egress doors with panic hardware or fire exit hardware meeting code requirements, and secondary utility or service doors with exit alarm devices to monitor unauthorized use. The two product types serve different door types and different purposes within the same facility.

For a full explanation of panic hardware, exit device types, and code requirements, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide and the exit device vs panic bar comparison guide.

 

Types of Exit Alarm Devices

Detex EAX-4200SK surface mount exit alarm door prop alarm kit for propped-door monitoring on commercial secondary egress doors

Detex EAX-4200SK Surface Mount Exit Alarm Door Prop Alarm Kit. Sounds when the door opens and continues if the door is propped open beyond the set time. View product page.

 

Exit alarm devices are available in several configurations. The right type depends on the door construction, mounting requirements, and whether door prop monitoring is needed.

 

Surface Mount Exit Alarm

A surface mount exit alarm attaches to the surface of the door and frame without requiring a door cutout or internal routing. The device chassis mounts on the door face and the strike or magnetic sensor mounts on the frame. Surface mount models are the most common choice for retrofit installations on existing doors because they do not require modification to the door itself.

The Detex EAX-2500S and EAX-2500SK are surface mount exit alarm units available as standalone devices and as complete kits including all required hardware for installation.

 

Flush Mount Exit Alarm

A flush mount exit alarm is recessed into a cutout in the door, resulting in a lower-profile installation where the device housing sits flush with the door surface rather than projecting outward. Flush mount models require door preparation and are more common in new construction or door replacement projects where the door can be prepared at the factory.

The Detex EAX-2500F and EAX-2500FK are flush mount exit alarm units for doors prepared for recessed installation.

 

Door Prop Alarm

A door prop alarm adds a timed threshold to the standard alarm function. The device does not sound immediately when the door opens. Instead, it allows a brief legitimate opening window (commonly 15 or 30 seconds) before the alarm activates. If the door closes within that window, no alarm sounds. If the door remains propped open past the threshold, the alarm activates.

Door prop alarms are useful on service doors and loading dock entrances where brief legitimate openings are routine but extended propping creates a security or energy problem. The Detex EAX-4200SK and EAX-3500SK include door prop alarm functionality with timed bypass capability.

 

Timed Bypass Exit Alarm

Some exit alarm models include a timed bypass function that allows authorized users to temporarily suppress the alarm for a set period. This is useful on high-traffic service doors during specific scheduled hours. The bypass is activated by an authorized key and expires automatically after the programmed time, restoring normal alarm operation without requiring staff to manually re-arm the device.

TypeAlarm Triggers WhenMountingTypical Use
Standard exit alarmDoor opens (immediately)Surface or flushSecondary exits, utility doors, storeroom exits
Door prop alarmDoor open past timed thresholdSurfaceService entrances, loading dock doors, delivery exits
Timed bypass alarmAlarm suppressed for set period, then resumesSurfaceHigh-traffic service doors with scheduled access windows

For a complete catalog of exit alarm parts and kits organized by product line, see the exit alarm parts and diagrams page.

 

Wiring and Power Options

Detex RLY24 24VAC relay kit for remote bypass on exit alarm systems in commercial buildings

Detex RLY24 24VAC Relay Kit for remote bypass on exit alarm systems. Allows the alarm output to be connected to a remote panel or monitoring system. View product page.

Exit alarm devices are available in battery-powered and hardwired configurations. The right choice depends on the availability of power at the door location and the monitoring requirements of the facility.

 

Battery-Powered Exit Alarms

Battery-powered exit alarm devices operate independently of building power and require no wiring beyond the device itself. They are the easiest to install on existing doors where running conduit or wire to the door location is impractical. Battery life depends on usage frequency and the specific model. Battery replacement is part of the maintenance schedule for battery-powered devices.

Battery-powered exit alarms are a common choice for retrofit installations on secondary doors in existing buildings where no low-voltage wiring is present at the door.

 

Hardwired Exit Alarms

Hardwired exit alarm devices connect to a low-voltage power supply in the building. Hardwired models are more suitable for new construction or for facilities where consistent power monitoring and integration with a building management system are required. Hardwired devices eliminate the need for periodic battery replacement and allow continuous power monitoring.

 

Remote Alarm Output and Relay Kits

Many exit alarm models support a remote alarm output connection, allowing the device to send an alarm signal to a remote panel, security system, or annunciator when triggered. The Detex RLY24 (24VAC) and RLY12 (12VAC) relay kits are available for connecting exit alarm devices to remote monitoring systems. The relay kit installs between the exit alarm device and the remote panel and passes the alarm signal through when the door is opened.

Remote monitoring integration is useful in facilities where security staff monitor multiple exits from a central location and need audible or visual notification when any monitored door opens. For a broader overview of access control integration with commercial door hardware, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Required Exit Alarm Signage

Detex 102651-2 English and German exit alarm door sign for code-compliant exit alarm installations on commercial doors

Detex 102651-2 English/German Exit Alarm Door Sign. Code-compliant signage for exit alarm installations. Available in multiple languages. View product page.

 

Exit alarm doors require posted signage that alerts anyone approaching the door that opening it will trigger an alarm. The sign must be visible to a person approaching the door from the egress side before they push it open.

The specific code requirements for exit alarm signage vary by jurisdiction and the applicable code edition adopted locally. Consult the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) for the sign format and placement requirements that apply to your project.

Security Parts stocks exit alarm door signs in multiple languages to meet the requirements of facilities serving multilingual populations or operating in jurisdictions with specific language requirements:

  • English/German: Detex 102651-2
  • Chinese (Simplified): Detex 102651-3
  • Chinese (Traditional): Detex 102651-4
  • French: Detex 102651-1
  • Spanish: Detex EA-704-2
  • German: Detex EA-561G
  • French-Canadian: Detex EA-705

Signage is a required component of a compliant exit alarm installation, not an optional accessory. An exit alarm installation without the required posted sign may fail inspection even if the device itself is functioning correctly.

 

Where Exit Alarms Are Used: Building Type Applications

Exit alarms are appropriate across a wide range of commercial building types wherever secondary door monitoring is needed without the complexity of panic hardware or delayed egress devices.

Building TypeTypical Exit Alarm ApplicationNotes
Retail and commercialBack-of-house service doors, receiving exits, employee exitsPrevents unauthorized exit of stock; monitors staff exits
Schools and universitiesGym exits, cafeteria secondary doors, field access gatesMonitors unauthorized student exits on secondary doors
Healthcare facilitiesUtility corridors, secondary exit stairwells, equipment room exitsComplements delayed egress on patient wing doors
Government buildingsSecure area secondary exits, file room service doorsProvides monitoring without requiring delayed egress approval
Industrial and warehouseLoading dock pedestrian exits, yard access gates, storage exitsDoor prop alarm variant often preferred for dock doors
Office buildingsStairwell re-entry monitoring, server room exits, secondary lobby exitsUsed where access control is not warranted but monitoring is needed

For application-specific door hardware guidance, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the K-12 school door hardware guide, and the government buildings door hardware guide.

 

How to Choose the Right Exit Alarm

Selecting the right exit alarm configuration requires answers to five questions before ordering.

1. Is this a new installation or a retrofit?

New construction or door replacement allows for flush mount installation with the door prepared at the factory. Retrofit on an existing door typically requires a surface mount device to avoid door modification. Surface mount models (EAX-2500S, EAX-4200SK) work on most standard commercial doors without cutting or routing.

 

2. Is power available at the door?

If low-voltage wiring runs to the door location, a hardwired model is appropriate and eliminates battery maintenance. If no wiring is present, a battery-powered model provides a simpler retrofit installation. Confirm the power supply voltage matches the device requirements before ordering hardwired models.

 

3. Is door prop monitoring required?

If the concern is doors being held open for extended periods rather than brief openings, a door prop alarm model (EAX-4200SK, EAX-3500SK) is more appropriate than a standard exit alarm that sounds on every opening. Door prop alarms allow brief legitimate openings without triggering the alarm.

 

4. Is remote monitoring required?

If security staff need to be notified at a central location when a specific exit alarm door opens, a relay kit (RLY24 or RLY12) connects the alarm output to a remote panel or annunciator. Confirm the relay voltage matches the power supply before ordering.

 

5. What signage is required?

Confirm the required sign language and format with the AHJ before ordering. Security Parts stocks exit alarm door signs in seven language options. Order the sign as part of the installation rather than as a follow-up item to avoid an inspection issue on the first visit.

 

Exit Alarm Parts and Replacement Components

Exit alarm devices require periodic maintenance and occasional parts replacement. The most commonly replaced components are the battery (on battery-powered models), the door sign, and the latch or magnetic sensor assembly if damaged or worn.

When ordering replacement parts, identify the model number from the label on the installed device before contacting Security Parts. The model number determines which components are compatible. Security Parts stocks exit alarm parts and complete exit alarm kits across the Detex EAX series, including:

  • Complete surface mount exit alarm units (EAX-2500S, EAX-4200SK, EAX-3500SK)
  • Complete flush mount exit alarm units (EAX-2500F, EAX-3500FK)
  • Complete exit alarm kits with all installation hardware (EAX-2500SK, EAX-2500FK, EAX-4200SK, EAX-3500SK, EAX-3500FK)
  • Retrofit conversion kit for converting older EAX-2500F units (Detex 102640)
  • Relay kits for remote alarm output (RLY24 for 24VAC, RLY12 for 12VAC)
  • Exit alarm door signs in English/German, Chinese, French, Spanish, German, and French-Canadian
  • Junction box with relay (JB-R)
  • Slide-in filler kit for hardwired electric alarm installations (SIFV-EA)

For the complete exit alarm parts catalog, see the exit alarm parts and diagrams page. For troubleshooting an exit alarm that is not functioning correctly after installation, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks exit alarm devices and replacement parts across the Detex EAX product line, with same-day shipping on stocked components. For related guidance, see the exit device vs panic bar guide, the delayed egress guide, and the Detex ECL parts guide.

Exit Device vs Panic Bar: What Is the Difference and Which One Do You Need

Quick Answer

In everyday commercial door hardware practice, "exit device," "panic bar," and "panic hardware" are commonly used to refer to the same category of hardware. These are door-mounted assemblies with a horizontal push element that releases a latch when pressed, allowing fast single-motion egress. The terms originate from different codes and professional contexts, which is why buyers encounter all three in specifications, purchase orders, and field conversations.

That said, terminology matters in two specific situations: when comparing standard panic hardware to fire exit hardware on a fire-rated door assembly, and when reading code requirements that use one term but not another. This guide explains how the terms are used in practice, where the important distinctions lie, and how to confirm which device type applies to your opening.

 

Where the Terms Come From

The three terms most buyers encounter are "panic hardware," "exit device," and "panic bar." Each comes from a different context.

"Panic hardware" is the term used in NFPA 101, the Life Safety Code. NFPA 101 defines panic hardware as a latching device that allows the door to open from the egress side by applying force to a bar or panel extending at least half the door width, not requiring the use of a key, special knowledge, or effort to operate.

"Exit device" is the term used in the International Building Code (IBC). The IBC references exit devices in its egress requirements, describing devices that allow doors to be opened from the egress side without a key, special tool, or prior knowledge.

"Panic bar" is an informal industry shorthand that refers to the horizontal push bar or crossbar that is the most visible component of the device. In field use, "panic bar" is widely used to refer to the complete exit device assembly, not just the bar component. You will encounter all three terms used interchangeably in specifications, purchase orders, and product catalogs.

For most commercial door hardware decisions, the key understanding is this: whether the project documents say "panic hardware" or "exit device," they are generally describing the same product category. The applicable code for your jurisdiction and the fire rating status of the door determine the specific device requirements.

 

What Is an Exit Device

Von Duprin 98/99EO Rim Exit Device -- standard panic hardware for commercial egress doors, exit-only configuration

Von Duprin 98/99EO Rim Exit Device, Exit Only. A standard panic hardware device for non-fire-rated commercial egress doors. View product page.

 

An exit device is a complete door hardware assembly designed to allow fast, one-motion egress from a building or area. The device is mounted on the door and consists of a push element (bar, crossbar, or touch pad), an internal latch mechanism, and a chassis that transmits the push motion to the latch. When a person presses the bar, the latch retracts and the door opens. No key, prior knowledge, or special effort is required.

Exit devices are used on commercial egress doors in office buildings, schools, healthcare facilities, retail spaces, government buildings, and any other occupancy type where egress hardware is required to meet life safety codes. The device category includes rim exit devices, surface vertical rod (SVR) devices, concealed vertical rod (CVR) devices, and mortise exit devices. Each type suits different door construction and frame conditions.

For a full explanation of exit device parts and component categories, see the exit devices parts guide and the commercial exit device parts guide.

 

What Is a Panic Bar

A panic bar is a common informal name for the horizontal bar or crossbar element that extends across the door on an exit device. When someone says "panic bar," they may mean the complete exit device assembly, or they may specifically mean the push bar component that the occupant presses to open the door.

In product catalogs, the push bar is listed as a component: for example, a push bar assembly for a narrow stile exit device is a separate orderable part that replaces the bar element while keeping the existing chassis and mechanism in place. In field conversation and specifications, "panic bar" almost always refers to the complete exit device assembly.

The push element of an exit device is not always a bar. Some devices use a touchpad or push pad rather than a full crossbar. Regardless of push element style, the device functions on the same principle: one-motion egress without a key.

 

Exit Device Types by Mounting Configuration

Adams Rite 8099 push bar assembly for narrow stile doors -- horizontal panic bar component used in narrow stile exit device assemblies

Adams Rite 8099 Push Bar Assembly for narrow stile door applications. View product page.

 

Exit devices are grouped by how they mount to the door and frame and how many latch points they engage. Choosing the right type depends on the door construction, frame material, and project requirements.

 

Rim Exit Device

A rim exit device mounts on the surface of the door and engages a frame-mounted strike through a single latch point. The chassis attaches to the door face and the latch projects into the strike on the door frame. Rim devices are the most common type and suit most standard commercial steel door and frame applications. They are available in standard panic hardware and fire exit hardware configurations.

 

Surface Vertical Rod (SVR) Exit Device

An SVR exit device uses external rods that run vertically on the door surface from the device chassis to top and bottom latches. When the bar is pressed, all latch points retract simultaneously. SVR devices suit wide or heavy doors where additional latch points improve security and door stability. The external rods are visible on the door surface.

 

Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR) Exit Device

A CVR exit device uses internal rods concealed within the door itself, running from the device chassis to top and bottom latches in the door edge. CVR devices require a door prepared with internal rod pockets. They provide a cleaner appearance than SVR devices because the hardware is not visible on the door surface. CVR devices are common in high-end or aesthetic applications where surface hardware is undesirable.

 

Mortise Exit Device

A mortise exit device integrates with a mortise lock body that is recessed into the door stile. The panic bar retracts the mortise latch when pressed. Mortise exit devices are used on thicker doors and in applications where the additional trim and function options of a mortise lock body are required. They are less common than rim or vertical rod devices in standard commercial applications.

 

Device TypeLatch PointsRods VisibleTypical Application
Rim1 (frame strike)NoStandard commercial steel doors and frames
SVR3 (top, bottom, latch)Yes -- external rodsWide or heavy doors, higher security requirements
CVR3 (top, bottom, latch)No -- concealed in doorAesthetic applications, doors prepared for concealed rods
Mortise1 (mortise latch)NoThick doors, applications requiring mortise lock functions

For guidance on how to install an exit device in rim, SVR, or CVR configuration, see the exit device installation guide.

 

Panic Hardware vs Fire Exit Hardware: An Important Distinction

Von Duprin 98/99EO-F Rim Fire Exit Device -- fire exit hardware listed for installation on fire-rated door assemblies

Von Duprin 98/99EO-F Rim Fire Exit Device. Fire exit hardware listed for fire-rated door assemblies. Note the fire label on the device. View product page.

 

One area where the terminology matters more precisely is the distinction between standard panic hardware and fire exit hardware. These two device types look similar and operate on the same push-to-exit principle, but they serve different applications and carry different code and listing requirements.

 

Standard Panic Hardware

Standard panic hardware meets the egress hardware requirements of NFPA 101 and the IBC for non-fire-rated doors. It allows single-motion egress without a key and meets the grade and force requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.3. Standard panic hardware may include a dogging feature that holds the latch retracted, allowing the door to operate as a push-pull door without pressing the bar each time.

 

Fire Exit Hardware

Fire exit hardware is required on fire-rated door assemblies. A fire-rated door assembly is a door, frame, and hardware combination that has been tested and listed for a specific fire rating (such as 20-minute, 45-minute, 90-minute, or 3-hour). When a fire-rated door requires egress hardware, the hardware must be listed as fire exit hardware to maintain the door's fire rating.

Fire exit hardware carries a fire label issued by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. The device itself must not allow dogging (holding the latch open), because a fire door must be self-latching to contain fire and smoke. This is one of the most important field distinctions: a standard panic hardware device with a dogging feature should not be installed on a fire-rated door in most jurisdictions.

Visually, the device types look nearly identical. The fire label on the device and the order model suffix (typically an "F" designation, such as "EO-F" rather than "EO") are the distinguishing identifiers. If you are replacing hardware on a fire-rated door, confirm that the replacement device carries the correct fire listing.

For a full explanation of fire door ratings and hardware requirements, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Summary Comparison

FeatureStandard Panic HardwareFire Exit Hardware
Operating principlePush bar releases latchPush bar releases latch
Fire rating labelNot required (non-fire-rated doors)Required -- fire label affixed to device
Dogging featureMay be includedNot permitted -- door must be self-latching
Door applicationNon-fire-rated egress doorsFire-rated door assemblies only
Code term (NFPA 101)"Panic hardware""Fire exit hardware"
Code term (IBC)"Exit device""Fire exit hardware"
Visible identifierNo fire label on deviceFire label affixed to device body

 

When Is Panic Hardware Required by Code

Both the IBC and NFPA 101 define conditions under which panic hardware or exit devices are required on egress doors. The specific thresholds and occupancy types vary between code editions and are subject to local adoption and amendment. The following is a general summary for context, not a substitute for verifying the applicable code edition and authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) for a specific project.

Under both codes, panic hardware is generally required when an egress door serves an assembly occupancy or an educational occupancy with an occupant load of 50 or more persons. High-hazard occupancies typically require panic hardware regardless of occupant load. The applicable code for your jurisdiction determines the exact threshold and occupancy classifications.

When panic hardware is not code-required, exit devices are still often used on commercial egress doors because they provide convenient, fast egress and are well-suited for high-traffic openings. Code requirement and product choice are two separate decisions: the code determines whether panic hardware is mandatory; the opening conditions determine the best device type when hardware selection is otherwise discretionary.

 

Occupancy TypeGeneral Code TriggerDevice Type RequiredNote
Assembly (theaters, arenas, auditoriums)Occupant load 50+Panic hardware or fire exit hardwareFire-rated doors need fire exit hardware
Educational (K-12, universities)Occupant load 50+Panic hardware or fire exit hardwareVerify local amendments
High-hazard (certain industrial/storage)Typically any occupant loadPanic hardware or fire exit hardwareCheck applicable code edition
Business, retail, healthcare, governmentNot typically mandated; discretionaryExit device at specifier discretionFire-rated doors still need fire exit hardware

For a more detailed breakdown of panic hardware code requirements and installation conditions, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide. For ANSI/BHMA grading and standards that govern exit device performance requirements, see the ANSI BHMA hardware standards guide.

 

Exit Device Mounting Configurations and Strike Hardware

Adams Rite 22-0430 strike for rim exit device -- frame-mounted latch engagement component required for rim exit device installation

Adams Rite 22-0430 Strike for Rim Exit Device. The strike mounts on the door frame and receives the rim exit device latch when the door closes. View product page.

 

An exit device does not operate alone. The device mounted on the door requires a corresponding component on the door frame to complete the latch engagement. For rim devices, this is a rim strike mounted on the frame or mullion. For vertical rod devices, the top and bottom latches engage in floor and head frame strikes. Matching the correct strike to the device series and configuration is part of the parts ordering process.

Strikes are series-specific. A rim strike for one manufacturer's exit device series may not be compatible with a different series, even if the dimensions appear similar. Always verify the strike model against the device series when ordering replacement hardware.

For access control integration, exit devices can be electrified through electric latch retraction (EL) or connected to an electric strike. The choice between electrifying the device itself versus using an electric strike depends on the security requirements and the control logic of the access control system. For a full explanation of these options, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Push Element Options: Bar, Touchbar, and Push Pad

Exit devices do not all use the same style of push element. The horizontal bar is the most common and widely recognized, but buyers will also encounter touchbar and push pad configurations.

 

Crossbar or Push Bar

The traditional crossbar extends across the full width of the door or at least half the door width as required by code. The bar is the most recognizable style and is used across nearly all device types. Push bars are replaceable components: the bar can be ordered separately to replace a damaged or worn push element without replacing the full device.

 

Touchbar

A touchbar is a slimmer, low-profile push element that is activated by a lighter touch. Touchbars are used where a sleeker appearance is preferred or where the reduced protrusion into the opening is an advantage. Some exit devices are designed specifically for touchbar configurations.

 

Push Pad

A push pad is a wider, flat panel that replaces the crossbar. Push pads are used on narrow stile aluminum doors and glass storefront applications where the door stile width does not accommodate a traditional crossbar assembly. The Adams Rite 8099 series is a common example of a narrow stile exit device that uses a push bar assembly sized for aluminum door stiles.

 

How to Identify Which Device Type You Have

Before ordering any replacement parts or a replacement device, confirm the model number of the installed unit. The model number is printed on a label affixed to the device chassis, typically on the side or back of the housing where it is visible when the door is open. The frame strike or the door edge may also carry a label.

Once you have the model number, confirm:

  • Whether the device is standard panic hardware or fire exit hardware (check for the fire label)
  • The mounting configuration (rim, SVR, CVR, or mortise)
  • The push element style (crossbar, touchbar, or push pad)
  • The outside trim configuration, if any (keylock, cylinder, thumbturn, or exit only)
  • The electrification option, if applicable (EL, QEL, MEL, or standard non-electrified)

These five data points determine the exact parts needed for any repair or replacement. Security Parts stocks exit device parts across multiple series and configurations. For part identification guidance organized by component category, see the exit devices parts guide.

 

Exit Devices by Building Type

Exit device type and configuration vary by building type, door construction, and code requirements. The following table summarizes common applications.

Building TypeCommon Device ConfigurationFire Rating Consideration
Schools and universitiesRim or SVR, panic hardware or fire exit hardwareCorridor and stairwell doors often fire-rated -- fire exit hardware required
Healthcare facilitiesRim or CVR, fire exit hardware commonHigh proportion of fire-rated doors -- verify each opening
Government buildingsRim or SVR; may include electrified optionsStairwell and rated corridor doors require fire exit hardware
High-rise office buildingsRim or mortise; stairwell re-entry doors need careful specificationMost stairwell doors are fire-rated -- fire exit hardware required
Retail and commercialRim, standard panic hardware; storefront may use narrow stile devicesVaries; verify each opening against door rating
Controlled access and delayed egressDelayed egress exit control lock or electrified exit deviceFire alarm release required; see delayed egress requirements

For application-specific guidance, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the K-12 school door hardware guide, and the government buildings door hardware guide. For delayed egress exit control lock requirements, see what is delayed egress.

 

Sourcing Exit Device Parts

Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, Adams Rite, and Detex product lines. Replacement parts include push bar assemblies, latch assemblies, chassis components, outside trim kits, strike kits, glass bead kits, electrification modules, and dogging hardware.

Parts are series-specific. A Von Duprin 98/99 series push bar assembly is not interchangeable with a Falcon series push bar, even if the devices appear similar from the front. Confirm the device series and model number before ordering. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you are uncertain which parts match your installed device.

For the full Von Duprin 98/99 series parts catalog, see the Von Duprin 98/99 series exit device parts guide. For Detex exit control lock parts, see the Detex ECL parts guide. For troubleshooting a device that is not latching, binding, or operating correctly, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, Adams Rite, and Detex product lines, with same-day shipping on stocked components. For related guidance, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

What Is Delayed Egress: How It Works, When Code Requires It, and Which Hardware to Specify

Quick Answer

Delayed egress is a code-permitted door locking system that holds a door locked for a short timed period after someone pushes the exit touchbar. The device triggers a loud audible alarm when touched, then automatically releases the latch and allows free exit after 15 or 30 seconds, depending on the code and occupancy type. It is not a means of preventing egress permanently. It is a life safety compromise that gives facilities time to respond to an unauthorized or unassisted exit attempt while still guaranteeing egress within the code-permitted window.

Delayed egress is most commonly found in memory care units, dementia wards, schools, government buildings, and certain healthcare facilities. It is governed by NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 and IBC Section 1010.1.9.8. All delayed egress devices must release immediately when the fire alarm activates or when power is lost.

 

How a Delayed Egress Device Works

A delayed egress device looks similar to a standard exit device: a horizontal touchbar or push plate mounted across the door, connected to a latch mechanism that releases when pressed. The critical difference is the internal timing mechanism and alarm circuit.

Here is the sequence of events when someone pushes a delayed egress door:

  • Touchbar contact: The person presses the touchbar or push plate. The door does not open immediately.
  • Alarm activation: Within one second of touchbar contact, a built-in alarm sounds at the door. The alarm is loud enough to alert staff in an adjacent area. Some models also send a signal to a remote annunciator panel.
  • Delay period: The door remains locked during the delay period. Under NFPA 101, the maximum permitted delay is 15 seconds. Under the IBC in jurisdictions that permit an extended delay, the maximum is 30 seconds for approved occupancy types.
  • Automatic release: After the delay period expires, the latch retracts automatically and the door opens freely. The person does not need to maintain pressure on the touchbar throughout the delay. A single push is sufficient to start the timing sequence.
  • Reset: When the door returns to the closed position, the device resets automatically to the locked state, ready for the next cycle.

The device must be powered, typically by 24VDC from the building's security or access control power supply. When power is removed, the device defaults to free egress with no delay (fail-safe). When the fire alarm activates, the device receives a release signal from the fire alarm panel and immediately retracts the latch, bypassing the delay entirely.

 

NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6: Plain-Language Explanation

NFPA 101, the Life Safety Code, is the primary code governing delayed egress in the United States. Section 7.2.1.6 sets the conditions under which a delayed egress locking system is permitted.

In plain terms, the code says the following:

  • The delayed egress system is only permitted where the building is protected throughout by an approved automatic fire suppression system or an approved automatic fire detection system.
  • The maximum delay is 15 seconds from the time the touchbar is pressed until the door releases.
  • The device must sound an audible alarm at the door when the touchbar is pressed.
  • The device must release immediately when the fire alarm system activates anywhere in the building, not just in the zone where the door is located.
  • The device must release immediately when power to the device is lost.
  • The door must be provided with a readily visible posted sign that tells users the alarm will sound and the door will open after the delay period. This sign is not optional.
  • Only one such device may be installed on any egress path, meaning a person cannot be required to pass through more than one delayed egress door before reaching a public way or area of refuge.

The specific occupancy chapters of NFPA 101 also affect where delayed egress is permitted. The general rule in Section 7.2.1.6 permits delayed egress in specific occupancy types. The AHJ has authority to approve or deny the installation based on the occupancy classification and the building's fire protection systems.

 

IBC Section 1010.1.9.8: Plain-Language Explanation

The International Building Code (IBC), adopted in most US jurisdictions, addresses delayed egress in Section 1010.1.9.8. The IBC provisions are largely consistent with NFPA 101 but include one significant difference: the permitted delay can extend to 30 seconds in specific occupancy types when approved by the AHJ.

In plain terms, the IBC says the following:

  • Delayed egress is permitted only where the building is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system or an approved fire detection system.
  • The locking system must release when a signal is received from the sprinkler system, the fire detection system, or a manual fire alarm initiation device.
  • The system must release upon loss of power controlling the lock.
  • The required signage must be posted on the door at an approved location and in an approved format.
  • A 15-second delay applies by default. A 30-second delay is permitted for Group I-1 (assisted living, residential care), Group I-2 (hospitals, nursing facilities), Group I-3 (detention and correctional facilities), and Group R-1 (hotels) occupancies when specifically approved by the AHJ.
  • Only one delayed egress device may be encountered on any single egress path to the public way.

 

The 15-Second vs 30-Second Delayed Egress Rule

The distinction between a 15-second and 30-second delay is one of the most common specification questions for delayed egress projects.

Delay SettingCode AuthorityTypical ApplicationAHJ Approval Required
15 secondsNFPA 101, IBC (default)Most commercial, educational, government, and healthcare buildingsYes -- AHJ must approve delayed egress for the occupancy type
30 secondsIBC Section 1010.1.9.8 (extended)Memory care units, dementia wards, assisted living, hospitals, detention facilities, hotelsYes -- AHJ must specifically approve the 30-second delay for the occupancy group

The 30-second delay exists primarily for memory care and dementia applications, where a resident may attempt to exit but will typically stop or turn back within 30 seconds when staff responds. In these settings, a 15-second delay may not give staff adequate response time before the door releases.

The Detex ECL-230X series supports both 15-second and 30-second delay settings. Confirm with the AHJ which setting is approved for the specific occupancy before specifying or installing the device. For detailed parts information on the ECL-230X series, see the Detex ECL parts guide.

 

Delayed Egress vs Free Egress: What Is the Difference

Detex ECL-230X-TDB 3-point delayed egress exit control lock for commercial doors requiring timed egress

Detex ECL-230X-TDB 3-Point Delayed Egress Exit Control Lock. View product page.

 

Most commercial exit devices provide free egress: push the bar and the door opens immediately. Delayed egress is a specific modification to that behavior, permitted only in certain building types and only with AHJ approval.

 

FeatureFree Egress DeviceDelayed Egress Device
Door opens whenImmediately on touchbar contactAfter 15 or 30 seconds
Alarm on touchbar contactNo (dogged devices are silent)Yes -- within 1 second of contact
Fire alarm behaviorNo change (already free egress)Immediate latch release, no delay
Power failure behaviorNo changeImmediate latch release, no delay
Required posted signageStandard exit signage onlyCode-compliant delayed egress sign required
AHJ approvalNot required for standard useRequired for every installation
Occupancy restrictionMost occupancy typesSpecific occupancy types only
Per-egress-path limitNo limitMaximum one delayed egress door per egress path

For broader context on exit device types and how to select the right one for your opening, see the exit devices parts guide and the panic hardware for commercial doors guide.

 

What Happens During a Fire Alarm, Power Failure, and Reset

Fire Alarm Release

A delayed egress device must be wired to the building fire alarm panel. When the fire alarm activates anywhere in the building, the fire alarm panel sends a release signal to every delayed egress device in the system. All delayed egress doors release immediately and revert to standard push-to-exit operation with no delay and no alarm requirement. This release must happen regardless of whether a touchbar has been pressed or a delay sequence is in progress.

If the building's fire alarm panel trips during an active delay sequence, the delay is cancelled immediately and the door opens. People do not have to wait out the remaining delay during a fire event.

Confirm that the fire alarm integration wiring is completed and tested before the delayed egress system is put into service. A delayed egress device that is not connected to the fire alarm system does not meet the code requirements of NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 or IBC Section 1010.1.9.8 and cannot be legally installed on an egress path.

 

Power Failure Release

Loss of power to the delayed egress device causes the latch to release and the door to revert to free egress. This fail-safe behavior is required by both NFPA 101 and the IBC. The device cannot hold the door locked without power.

The Detex ECL-230X series operates on 24VDC and requires continuous power to maintain the delayed egress locking function. When power is removed, the device releases within milliseconds and the door operates as a standard push-to-exit device.

Some ECL installations include battery backup to maintain alarm annunciation capability during brief power interruptions. However, battery backup does not change the fail-safe locking behavior: the door must release on power loss, even if the battery is powering auxiliary functions.

 

Reset After a Delay Cycle

After a completed delay cycle (when someone pushes the bar and the door opens after the delay), the device resets automatically when the door returns to the closed and latched position. No manual action is required to reset the device to the delayed egress state. The device is ready for the next cycle as soon as the door is closed.

Some ECL models require a manual reset by staff using an authorized key or credential if the device has been triggered. Confirm the reset behavior of the specific model when specifying or installing the device, since this affects how staff workflows are designed around the door.

 

Where Delayed Egress Is Used: Building Types and Applications

Detex ECL-230X-W-TDB weatherized 3-point delayed egress exit control lock for exterior doors and covered egress paths

Detex ECL-230X-W-TDB Weatherized 3-Point Delayed Egress Lock for exterior applications. View product page.

 

Building TypeTypical ApplicationCommon Delay SettingNotes
Healthcare -- Memory Care and Dementia UnitsPerimeter exit doors, unit entry/exit doors30 seconds (IBC Group I-1/I-2)Most common application; 30-second delay requires AHJ approval
Healthcare -- Hospitals and Nursing FacilitiesPsychiatric unit doors, behavioral health exits15 or 30 secondsDelay setting depends on occupancy classification and AHJ
K-12 SchoolsExterior exit doors, perimeter doors during school hours15 secondsUsed to monitor unauthorized student exits; alarms alert staff
Universities and CollegesDormitory perimeter doors, controlled campus exits15 secondsCommonly installed with access control integration for after-hours monitoring
Government BuildingsControlled area exits, file room perimeter doors15 secondsUsed to monitor exits from restricted areas without fully restricting egress
High-Rise BuildingsStairwell re-entry doors, controlled floor exits15 secondsMust meet NFPA 101 high-rise provisions; fire alarm integration is critical
Retail and CommercialLoss prevention exits, back-of-house egress doors15 secondsAHJ approval required; typically used on secondary egress paths only
Detention and Correctional FacilitiesControlled egress from detention areas15 or 30 seconds (IBC Group I-3)Special IBC provisions apply for this occupancy type

For application-specific guidance on commercial door hardware requirements, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the K-12 school door hardware guide, the universities door hardware guide, the government buildings guide, and the high-rise buildings guide.

 

Delayed Egress Signage: What the Code Requires

Detex ECL-230X-TB 2-point delayed egress exit control lock for interior commercial door applications

Detex ECL-230X-TB 2-Point Delayed Egress Exit Control Lock for interior applications. View product page.

 

Both NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 and IBC Section 1010.1.9.8 require that a compliant sign be posted on every delayed egress door. The sign is not optional and is not satisfied by standard exit signage.

The required sign must communicate the following to anyone approaching the door:

  • Pushing the bar will activate an alarm
  • The door will open after a specified number of seconds (15 or 30, as applicable)
  • The information must be clear, readable, and positioned where someone approaching the door will see it before pushing the bar

The Detex ECL-395 series provides code-compliant delayed egress door signs available in multiple languages: English, Spanish, French, French-Canadian, and German. These signs are listed by code as a requirement accompanying every delayed egress installation, not as an accessory upgrade. An installation that has a delayed egress device but lacks the required posted sign fails the code requirements of NFPA 101 and the IBC and will be flagged during any AHJ inspection.

The sign must be inspected annually to confirm it is intact, legible, and properly positioned. A torn, missing, faded, or obstructed sign is a code deficiency even if the device itself is functioning correctly.

 

2-Point vs 3-Point Delayed Egress: Which Model to Choose

The Detex ECL-230X series is available in two primary locking configurations: 2-point (single latchbolt) and 3-point (top, bottom, and latchbolt). Choosing the correct configuration depends on the door type and the security and code requirements of the opening.

 

2-Point Delayed Egress (ECL-230X-TB / ECL-230X-W-TB)

Detex ECL-230X-W-TB weatherized 2-point delayed egress exit control lock for exterior commercial door applications

Detex ECL-230X-W-TB Weatherized 2-Point Delayed Egress Lock. View product page.

The 2-point model uses a single latchbolt at the device chassis, engaging one strike point on the door frame. This is the standard configuration for most interior delayed egress applications where the door and frame are in good condition and the single latch is sufficient to hold the door during the delay period. The weatherized version (ECL-230X-W-TB) is appropriate for exterior applications exposed to weather.

 

3-Point Delayed Egress (ECL-230X-TDB / ECL-230X-W-TDB)

The 3-point model adds top and bottom latching in addition to the chassis latch, providing three points of engagement against the frame. This configuration is used when additional door stability is required during the delay period, when the door gap is inconsistent due to door warping, or when the AHJ or security integrator requires multi-point engagement for higher-security delayed egress applications.

ModelLatch PointsWeatherizedTypical UseProduct Page
ECL-230X-TB2-pointNoInterior doorsView
ECL-230X-W-TB2-pointYesExterior / covered egress pathsView
ECL-230X-TDB3-pointNoInterior doors requiring multi-point engagementView
ECL-230X-W-TDB3-pointYesExterior doors requiring multi-point engagementView

For replacement parts, mechanism assemblies, strike kits, bar components, and accessory kits for all ECL-230X models, see the complete Detex ECL parts guide.

 

Annual Inspection and Testing Checklist for Delayed Egress Devices

NFPA 101 requires annual inspection and testing of life safety features including delayed egress systems. NFPA 80 also requires annual inspection of fire-rated door assemblies, which includes any delayed egress device installed on a fire-rated door. Written records of each inspection must be maintained and made available to the AHJ upon request.

For the complete commercial door hardware maintenance schedule, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Functional Operation Test

  • Push the touchbar and confirm the alarm activates within one second of contact
  • Time the delay from touchbar contact to latch release. Confirm the measured delay matches the programmed setting (15 or 30 seconds)
  • Confirm the door opens freely after the delay period without requiring a second push
  • Allow the door to close and confirm it returns to the latched and delayed egress state automatically

 

Fire Alarm Release Test

  • With the delayed egress device activated (during the delay sequence), trigger a test signal from the fire alarm panel
  • Confirm the latch releases immediately upon receiving the fire alarm signal
  • Confirm the door operates as a standard free egress device with no delay during the fire alarm signal
  • Reset the fire alarm panel and confirm the delayed egress device returns to normal operation
  • This test must be performed in coordination with the building fire alarm system contractor or the AHJ

 

Power Failure Release Test

  • Disconnect power to the delayed egress device at the power supply
  • Confirm the latch releases immediately and the door opens freely
  • Reconnect power and confirm the device returns to normal delayed egress operation when the door is closed and latched

 

Signage Inspection

  • Confirm the required delayed egress sign is present, intact, and legible
  • Confirm the sign is positioned where it is visible to anyone approaching the door from the egress side
  • Confirm the sign specifies the correct delay period (15 or 30 seconds as applicable)
  • Replace any sign that is torn, faded, obstructed, missing, or specifies the incorrect delay period

 

Physical Inspection

  • Inspect the touchbar or push plate for physical damage, wear, or looseness
  • Check all mounting fasteners for tightness
  • Inspect the strike kit and latch engagement for alignment and wear
  • Confirm the alarm speaker is unobstructed and produces audible output at the required sound level
  • Inspect all wiring connections at the device and at the power supply for corrosion or looseness
  • Document all inspection results and note any deficiencies found and corrected

 

Where to Source Delayed Egress Hardware and Replacement Parts

Security Parts stocks Detex ECL-230X delayed egress exit control locks in all four configurations (2-point standard, 2-point weatherized, 3-point standard, 3-point weatherized) and stocks 59 ECL-series replacement parts including internal mechanism assemblies, bar and paddle components, strike kits, cover and shield assemblies, outside trim, cylinder components, accessory kits, and code-required delayed egress door signs.

For the complete parts catalog organized by component category, see the Detex ECL parts guide. For general exit device parts and component identification, see the exit devices parts guide. For guidance on exit device installation, see the exit device installation guide. For troubleshooting a delayed egress device that is not functioning correctly after installation, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support when selecting replacement parts for an existing ECL installation.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks Detex ECL-230X delayed egress exit control locks in all configurations and 59 ECL-series replacement parts, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301. For related guidance, see the commercial door fire rating guide and the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

How to Install an Exit Device: Step-by-Step Guide for Rim, SVR, and CVR Configurations

Quick Answer

Installing an exit device on a commercial door requires four things done in the right order: confirm your device type and handing before touching the door, mount the chassis at the correct height (touchpad centerline between 34 and 48 inches above finished floor per ANSI A156.3), install the appropriate strike for your configuration (rim, surface vertical rod, or concealed vertical rod), and verify latch engagement and egress force before the door goes back into service.

The steps differ for each device type. Rim devices mount at one point; surface vertical rod (SVR) devices require top and bottom rod adjustment; concealed vertical rod (CVR) devices require factory-prepped door pockets. Start with this guide from the beginning so you are following the correct steps for your specific installation.

 

Before You Start: Identify Your Exit Device Configuration

The most expensive exit device installation mistake happens before the first hole is drilled: a contractor starts the wrong set of steps because they did not confirm the device type. Rim, SVR, and CVR devices share some installation principles but have completely different strikes, rods, and door prep requirements. Confirm your device type first.

Rim exit device on a commercial door showing the chassis mounted to the door face with a single latch point

A rim exit device mounts to the door face and latches at one point. See the exit devices parts guide for component identification.

 

Rim Exit Device

A rim device mounts directly to the door face and latches at one point only. The strike mounts to the door frame. When the touchpad or crossbar is pushed, the latch retracts and the door swings free. Rim devices are the most common configuration and the simplest to install. Look for a single horizontal crossbar across the door width and a surface-mounted chassis on the door face. Common series identifiers: 98, 99, F-98, F-99, 22, 33A.

 

Surface Vertical Rod (SVR) Exit Device

A surface vertical rod device latches at two points: a top latch that engages the top frame and a bottom bolt that drops into a floor strike or threshold strike. The rods run vertically on the door face. SVR devices are used on doors without a center mullion or on pairs of doors where the active leaf requires multi-point latching. Look for exposed vertical rods running from the chassis to the top and bottom of the door. Common series identifiers: 9827, 9927, 27-series.

 

Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR) Exit Device

A concealed vertical rod device also latches at top and bottom, but the rods run inside the door cavity rather than on the surface. CVR installations require the door to have factory-prepped mortise pockets for the top latch assembly and a cutout for the bottom bolt. If the door does not arrive pre-prepped, field prep is significantly more involved. Look for a device with no visible rods on the door face. Common series identifiers: 9847, 9947, 47-series.

For help identifying which exit device series is installed or which series to order for a replacement, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison and the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 

What You Need: Tools and Materials Checklist

Required Tools

  • Drill with bit set (1/4-inch and 3/8-inch bits for through-bolt applications)
  • Tape measure
  • 4-inch torpedo level or longer spirit level
  • Pencil or punch awl for marking
  • Phillips and flathead screwdrivers
  • Allen/hex key set (for dogging slot and trim screws)
  • Nut driver or adjustable wrench (for through-bolt nuts)
  • Threadlocker compound (for through-bolt applications on hollow metal doors)
  • Chisel (for CVR top latch pocket if door is not pre-prepped)
  • Center punch (for accurate pilot hole placement on metal doors)

 

Materials to Have On Hand Before Starting

  • Exit device with all included hardware (confirm nothing is missing before opening the door)
  • Manufacturer installation template for the exact series being installed
  • Correct strike for the device series (rim strike, top strike, bottom strike/floor box as applicable)
  • Through-bolt kit if the door does not include it
  • Backplate (required on thin hollow metal doors to prevent chassis deformation)
  • For SVR: additional rod length if the door is taller than standard
  • For CVR: edge prep kit if the top latch pocket is not factory-installed

 

Pre-Install Inspection Checklist

Running through this checklist before mounting prevents the two most common failed installations: wrong handing and a device that does not match the door prep. Both require sending the device back for exchange, which costs more time than checking takes.

 

Confirm the Handing

Stand inside the room facing the door from the secure side, meaning the side the door swings away from you. If the hinges are on your right, the door is right-hand (RHR or RH). If the hinges are on your left, the door is left-hand (LHR or LH). The handing of the exit device must match the door handing.

The handing designation is printed on the device carton label and on the chassis identification label inside the device. Confirm the carton label matches the door before opening packaging. Some exit device series are field-reversible by flipping the latch or lever trim; others are factory-handed and cannot be changed in the field. If the handing is wrong on a non-reversible device, do not mount it. Contact the supplier before proceeding.

 

Confirm the Door Prep

  • Door width: Confirm the chassis length fits the door width. Most exit devices are available in standard widths (typically 36-inch and 48-inch door widths). A chassis that overhangs the door edge will not mount correctly.
  • Door thickness: Through-bolt lengths and faceplate depths are door-thickness specific. Confirm the through-bolt length in the kit matches the actual door thickness before drilling.
  • For CVR devices: Confirm the top latch mortise pocket dimensions and the bottom bolt cutout match the device specification. Measure the pocket depth, width, and location against the manufacturer template before mounting the chassis.
  • For SVR devices: Confirm the rod lengths shipped with the device match the door height. Rods ship at maximum length and must be cut or adjusted down.

 

Inspect the Device Before Mounting

  • Check the touchpad or crossbar for shipping damage (bent bar, cracked end cap, missing trim screws)
  • Confirm latch projection by measuring from the latch face to the device faceplate. Standard latch projection is 5/8 inch. Confirm this matches the strike clearance on your frame.
  • Verify that all rods, end caps, trim screws, through-bolts, and the installation template are in the packaging
  • Confirm the included strike matches the device series. Strikes are series-specific and not interchangeable between device families

 

Exit Device Mounting Height Requirements

Mounting height is the most-searched specific installation question for exit devices, and the most common source of a code-noncompliant installation.

ANSI A156.3 Height Requirement

ANSI A156.3 requires the touchpad or crossbar centerline to be between 34 and 48 inches above the finished floor. This measurement is taken to the push element itself, not to the device chassis or the top of the touchbar. A device chassis mounted with its center at 38 inches may have a touchpad centerline at 36 inches, depending on the chassis design. Always measure to the push element after mounting, not to the chassis center.

The 34-to-48-inch range also satisfies ADA Section 404.2.7 for accessible door hardware. An exit device within this range does not require an additional accessible pull or lever on the push side.

 

Mounting Height Reference by Door Height

Door HeightRecommended Chassis Mounting CenterPush Element Centerline Target
7 ft (84 in)38--40 in from finished floor36--40 in (verify after mounting)
8 ft (96 in)38--42 in from finished floor36--42 in (verify after mounting)
9 ft (108 in)40--44 in from finished floor38--44 in (verify after mounting)
Any heightAdjust to keep push element within 34--48 in34--48 in (ANSI A156.3 absolute range)

For ANSI and BHMA hardware standard context, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Marking the Mounting Height on the Door

Use the manufacturer installation template for your device series. Position the template at the target height with the push element centerline mark at the intended measurement. Confirm the template is level before marking any holes. Mark all hole center points with a pencil or punch awl before drilling. On metal doors, use a center punch to prevent bit walk when drilling.

 

Metal Door vs Wood Door Installation Differences

Hollow Metal Door Installation

Through-bolt mounting is required on hollow metal (HM) doors. The hollow interior of the door does not provide enough thread engagement for wood screws or short machine screws to resist the repeated lateral force applied to the exit device during daily egress cycles. Through-bolts pass completely through the door and are secured with nuts on the interior face.

  • Use the through-bolt kit supplied with the device or ordered separately for the series
  • A backplate on the interior door face is required on thin hollow metal doors (typically 14 gauge or thinner) to prevent the through-bolt nuts from pulling through the door face under load
  • Apply threadlocker compound to through-bolt threads before tightening. Vibration from repeated door operation can loosen nuts over time without it
  • Tighten nuts to the manufacturer-specified torque (typically 60--80 in-lb). Do not over-tighten, which can deform the chassis or door face

 

Wood Door Installation

Solid core wood doors can use the machine screws provided with the exit device in most cases. However, through-bolt mounting is still recommended on high-cycle openings or any door that will see heavy commercial traffic.

  • Pilot holes should be drilled at 70--80% of the screw diameter to prevent splitting on solid wood doors
  • Minimum door thickness for adequate thread engagement is typically 1-3/4 inches. Confirm the fastener length in the kit is appropriate for the actual door thickness
  • On doors with veneer or laminate faces, over-tightening can crack or delaminate the surface. Tighten just until the chassis is firmly seated

 

Aluminum Storefront and Glass Doors

Exit devices on aluminum storefront frames require a device series specifically listed for that door and frame type. Standard exit device hardware is not designed for narrow stile aluminum extrusions. Glass doors with patch fittings require a device series compatible with the patch dimensions. Confirm the device series listing before ordering for any aluminum or glass door application.

 

How to Install a Rim Exit Device (Step by Step)

Rim installation is the most straightforward of the three device types. The device mounts to the door face with through-bolts, and the rim strike mounts to the door frame. For Von Duprin 98/99 series rim device components, see the Von Duprin 9899 series parts guide. For Falcon 19, 24, and 25 series rim devices, see the Falcon 19/24/25 series exit device parts guide.

 

Step 1: Prepare the Door and Apply the Template

Position the manufacturer installation template on the door face at the target mounting height. The template shows the hole pattern for the specific device series. Confirm the template is oriented correctly for the door handing (RHR or LHR). Use the template center marks to align the push element centerline at the intended height. Hold the template in position and mark all hole centers with a pencil. Confirm the level before marking.

 

Step 2: Drill Mounting Holes

On hollow metal doors, use a center punch at each marked location before drilling to prevent bit walk. Drill pilot holes for through-bolts using the bit diameter specified in the installation template (typically 1/4 inch for standard through-bolts). On wood doors, drill pilot holes at 70--80% of screw shank diameter. Clear all chips before proceeding.

 

Step 3: Mount the Chassis to the Door Face

Set the device chassis against the door face with all holes aligned. Insert through-bolts (or screws on wood doors) through the chassis and door. Start all fasteners before tightening any of them. Once all fasteners are started, tighten in a cross pattern to draw the chassis evenly against the door face without rocking. Apply threadlocker to through-bolt threads on metal doors before tightening the nuts.

 

Step 4: Install the Rim Strike on the Door Frame

Hold the door in the closed position and mark the strike location on the door frame by pressing the door gently against the frame and transferring the latch centerline. The rim strike must align with the latch both vertically and laterally. Fasten the strike to the frame with the provided fasteners. Most rim strikes have slotted holes for minor vertical adjustment.

 

Step 5: Set the Latch Projection and Strike Alignment

Close the door and observe how the latch enters the strike. The latch should enter cleanly and engage the strike keeper without rolling back or dragging on the strike lip. If the latch rolls back (does not engage), the strike is too far from the frame face. If the latch drags, the strike is too close or misaligned vertically. Adjust strike position as needed and re-fasten.

 

Step 6: Secure All Fasteners and Verify Operation

Fully tighten all through-bolt nuts and mounting screws. Operate the touchpad 10 times in succession and confirm the latch retracts fully and consistently each time. Confirm the door latches fully when closed without requiring any pressure on the door face. Proceed to the post-install testing checklist.

 

How to Install a Surface Vertical Rod (SVR) Exit Device (Step by Step)

SVR installation adds two additional steps to the rim process: top and bottom rod length adjustment. The rods ship at maximum length and must be shortened or adjusted to the actual door height. For Von Duprin 22-series, 33A, 35A, and 55-series SVR devices, see the Von Duprin 22/33A/35A/55 series exit device parts guide.

 

Step 1: Prepare the Door and Confirm Rod Lengths

Apply the installation template at the target mounting height and mark all chassis holes. Before drilling, hold the device against the door and extend the top rod toward the top frame and the bottom rod toward the floor. Confirm the rods reach their respective strikes with the device chassis at the target mounting position. If the door height is less than the maximum rod length, note the adjustment needed.

 

Step 2: Mount the Chassis to the Door

Follow Steps 1 through 3 from the rim installation procedure above. The chassis mounting process is identical. Confirm the chassis is level before fully tightening through-bolt nuts.

 

Step 3: Attach and Adjust the Top Rod Assembly

Connect the top rod to the chassis rod connection point. Run the rod toward the top of the door. Most SVR top rods have a threaded coupler at the strike end that allows length adjustment. Thread the coupler in or out until the top latch engages the top strike correctly when the touchpad is released. Confirm the top latch retracts fully when the touchpad is pressed.

 

Step 4: Attach and Adjust the Bottom Rod Assembly

Connect the bottom rod to the chassis and run it toward the floor. The bottom rod connects to the floor bolt, which drops into a floor strike or threshold strike. Adjust the rod length so the floor bolt drops cleanly into the floor strike and engages fully when the touchpad is released. The bottom bolt should retract fully when the touchpad is pressed. Confirm both rod connections are tight after adjustment.

 

Step 5: Install Top and Bottom Strikes

Install the top strike in the header frame at the height required to align with the top latch centerline. Install the floor strike (or threshold strike) at the floor position aligned with the bottom bolt centerline. Both strikes typically have slotted mounting holes for minor alignment adjustment.

 

Step 6: Set Rod Tension and Test Both Latch Points

Operate the touchpad and confirm both the top latch and the bottom bolt retract simultaneously and fully. Close the door and confirm both latch points engage their respective strikes cleanly. Adjust top or bottom rod length if either latch point drags, rolls back, or fails to engage fully.

 

How to Install a Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR) Exit Device (Step by Step)

Von Duprin 9947 concealed vertical rod exit device showing the chassis and internal rod configuration for commercial door installation

Von Duprin 98/9947 CVR exit device. Rods are concealed inside the door cavity. View product page. For all CVR replacement parts, see the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide.

 

CVR installation is the most complex of the three types because the rods run inside the door cavity and the door must be pre-prepped with specific pockets and cutouts. Do not attempt CVR installation on a door that has not been factory-prepped or field-prepped to the manufacturer's specifications.

 

Step 1: Confirm Door Prep (Top Latch Pocket and Bottom Bolt Cutout)

Measure the top latch mortise pocket (typically at the top of the door edge) against the manufacturer's dimension specifications. Confirm the pocket depth, width, and distance from the door top match the CVR device requirements. Measure the bottom bolt cutout at the door bottom edge and confirm it aligns with the floor strike location. If either prep dimension is incorrect, field modification is required before mounting the chassis.

 

Step 2: Mount the Chassis to the Door

Apply the installation template and mark all chassis mounting holes. Drill and mount the chassis using the same through-bolt process as rim and SVR installation. Confirm the chassis is level and fully seated before tightening.

 

Step 3: Route and Connect the Top Latch Assembly

Feed the top latch assembly up through the door cavity to the top latch pocket. Connect the top rod to the chassis drive mechanism and route it through the door interior. Seat the top latch housing in the top pocket and fasten it according to the manufacturer specification. Confirm the top latch retracts when the touchpad is pressed and extends fully when released.

 

Step 4: Route and Connect the Bottom Bolt Assembly

Feed the bottom bolt assembly down through the door cavity to the bottom cutout. Connect the bottom rod to the chassis drive and route it to the bottom bolt housing. Seat the bottom bolt housing in the bottom cutout and fasten it. Confirm the bottom bolt drops fully when the touchpad is released and retracts fully when the touchpad is pressed.

 

Step 5: Install Top and Bottom Strikes

Install the top strike in the header frame at the correct height for the top latch centerline. Install the floor strike aligned with the bottom bolt centerline. Both strikes must account for the latch projection depth of the CVR device, which may differ from the SVR projection depth on the same door configuration.

 

Step 6: Check Bolt Engagement and Adjust

Close the door and verify that both latching points engage cleanly. Cycle the touchpad 10 times and confirm both the top latch and bottom bolt retract and extend consistently. Adjust rod connections at the chassis if either bolt is not traveling the full stroke. Confirm all interior fasteners on the latch and bolt housings are tightened before final inspection.

 

Dogging the Exit Device After Installation

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft package used to dog an exit device in the unlocked position    Von Duprin 107813 cylinder dogging kit for key-operated mechanical dogging on commercial exit devices

Left: Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft. Right: Von Duprin 107813 cylinder dogging kit. Both are used for mechanical dogging on standard (non-fire-rated) openings.

 

Dogging holds the exit device latch in the fully retracted position so the door operates as a standard push-pull door without requiring touchpad pressure. It is typically engaged during business hours and released after closing. Dogging is set after installation, not before.

 

What Dogging Does

When the latch is dogged, the touchpad or crossbar is held in the depressed position mechanically. The door swings freely in both directions without any requirement to push the touchpad. This is the normal daytime operating mode for high-traffic openings that do not require controlled egress during business hours.

 

Mechanical (Hex Key) Dogging

The dogging slot is located on the face of the chassis near the touchpad connection. Insert a 3/32-inch hex (Allen) key into the dogging slot and turn it to lock the touchpad in the depressed position. The hex key is removed after dogging; the device stays dogged until the key is reinserted and turned to release.

Mechanical dogging is not permitted on fire-rated openings. A fire door must self-latch every time it closes, and mechanical dogging defeats that requirement. If a fire-rated opening needs free-swing daytime operation, electric dogging is the only compliant option.

 

Electric Dogging (QEL and MEL Options)

Electric dogging uses an internal solenoid to hold the latch retracted under access control command. When power is cut or the fire alarm triggers, the solenoid releases and the device returns to full latching function. QEL (quiet electric latch retraction) and MEL (motor-driven electric latch retraction) are the two common electric dogging options. For the difference between the two and which to specify, see the Von Duprin QEL vs MEL guide and the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Electric Strike Alignment for Exit Devices

When an exit device is paired with an electric strike for access control, the strike and the device latch must be aligned before the installation is complete. Misalignment is the most common cause of a latch that functions correctly under hand operation but fails to engage reliably under normal door operation. For electric strike replacement parts, see the electric strike parts guide.

 

Rim Device and Electric Strike Alignment

The rim strike cutout must align with the rim latch both laterally and vertically. With the door in the closed position, confirm that the latch centerline aligns with the center of the electric strike keeper opening. Most electric strikes have a small adjustment range within the frame pocket. Use this range to center the keeper on the latch before final fastening.

 

Vertical Rod Device and Electric Strike

On SVR and CVR installations, the electric strike typically electrifies only the top latch. The bottom bolt remains mechanical and always extends when the door closes. The top latch alignment process is the same as for a rim device: confirm the top latch centerline aligns with the electric strike keeper centerline before final fastening. The bottom floor strike is installed mechanically and does not require electrical connection.

 

Testing the Strike and Device Together

Before energizing the strike, confirm the latch enters the keeper cleanly under manual door operation. Then energize the strike and test the following: the touchpad releases the latch while the strike is energized (the latch must retract even though the strike is holding it); the door opens when power is cut (fail-safe) or when the touchpad is pressed while the strike is powered (fail-secure). See the how to install an electric strike guide for detailed wiring and alignment procedure.

 

Fire-Rated Door Exit Device Installation Requirements

Fire-rated openings carry additional installation rules that are not optional. A standard panic hardware installation that violates any of these requirements fails the fire door assembly certification. For the full fire door hardware context, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Fire Exit Hardware vs Panic Hardware

Exit devices on fire-rated doors must be UL listed fire exit hardware. Standard panic hardware does not carry a fire listing and cannot be substituted. The UL fire listing label appears on the device chassis and on the packaging. It identifies the specific fire door assembly types the device is tested for. Confirm the device's fire listing before installing on any fire-rated opening. For guidance on when panic hardware is required and the distinction from fire exit hardware, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide.

 

No Mechanical Dogging on Fire-Rated Openings

Mechanical dogging (hex key or thumbturn dogging) is not permitted on fire-rated openings. It prevents the device from self-latching when the door closes, which voids the fire rating of the assembly. The only compliant option for free-swing operation on a fire door is electric dogging (QEL or MEL), which releases automatically when power is cut or when a fire alarm signal is received.

 

Coordinator and Closer Requirements on Paired Fire Doors

Fire-rated pairs of doors require a door coordinator that sequences the closing of the active and inactive leaves. Without a coordinator, the active leaf may close before the inactive leaf and prevent full latching. A door closer is also required on every fire-rated exit device opening. The closer must be listed for fire-rated assemblies and set to close and latch the door fully from any open position.

 

Post-Install Testing Checklist

Run through this checklist before considering the installation complete. Every item here reflects either a code requirement or a common failure mode that is easier to catch now than after the door has been in service.

 

Functional Egress Test

  • Apply egress force to the touchpad and confirm the latch retracts. Maximum actuating force is 15 pounds for standard devices (30 pounds for fire-rated devices) per ANSI A156.3
  • Push the door open from the fully closed position and confirm it swings to full open without binding
  • Release the touchpad and allow the door to close. Confirm it latches fully without requiring additional force on the door face

 

Latch Projection and Strike Engagement Check

  • Measure the latch projection from the device faceplate face. Confirm it matches the specification (typically 5/8 inch)
  • Observe the latch entering the strike from the side if possible. The latch tip should enter the keeper cleanly without rolling back on the strike lip
  • Check for any rattle of the latch in the strike keeper. A rattle indicates insufficient keeper depth or a worn latch

 

Dogging Function Test

  • Insert the hex key and dog the device. Confirm the touchpad stays in the depressed position without the hex key
  • Operate the door as push-pull and confirm it swings freely in both directions
  • Insert the hex key and release the dogging. Confirm the latch returns to the extended position and the touchpad operates normally

 

Electric Strike Test (If Applicable)

  • Fail-safe: cut power to the strike and confirm the door opens freely
  • Fail-secure: restore power and confirm the door holds when pulled from outside
  • Exit release: with the strike powered, push the touchpad and confirm the latch retracts and the door opens
  • Confirm the strike solenoid does not buzz, click excessively, or produce heat above ambient after 60 seconds of operation

 

Fire Door Compliance Check (If Applicable)

  • Confirm no hex key or mechanical dogging block is in place
  • Open the door to 90 degrees and release it without assistance. Confirm the door closes fully and latches without any manual intervention
  • Confirm the door coordinator sequences the leaves correctly on pairs (inactive closes before active)
  • Confirm the door closer is set to pull the door to positive latch from any open position between 5 and 90 degrees

 

Common Exit Device Installation Mistakes

These are the installation errors that result in a callback, a failed inspection, or a code violation. Each one is preventable with the pre-install checklist above.

 

Installing the Wrong Handing

The device chassis is mounted upside-down or mirrored relative to the door handing. The touchpad ends up on the wrong side of the door, the latch points the wrong direction, or the trim does not align. Catch this during the pre-install handing check before any holes are drilled. If the device is not field-reversible, a factory exchange is the only resolution.

 

Measuring Mounting Height to the Chassis Instead of the Push Element

The ANSI A156.3 requirement is for the push element centerline, not the chassis center. A chassis center at 40 inches does not guarantee the touchbar centerline is at 40 inches. Measure to the touchpad or crossbar after mounting and confirm the push element is within the 34-to-48-inch range before final fastening.

 

Using Screw Mounting on a Hollow Metal Door

Short machine screws or wood screws in a hollow metal door do not have enough material engagement to resist repeated egress force. The screws pull out over time, the chassis loosens, and the device fails to function reliably. Through-bolt mounting with a backplate is required on all hollow metal door installations.

 

Using the Wrong Strike for the Device Series

Exit device strikes are series-specific. A strike from a different series may appear to fit physically but will have a different keeper depth or latch engagement geometry that causes latch rollback. Always confirm the strike part number matches the device series before ordering.

 

Skipping Rod Length Adjustment on SVR Devices

SVR rods ship at maximum length. Installing them without adjustment for the actual door height results in rods that bottom out before the chassis is fully seated, or rods that are too long and prevent the bottom bolt from dropping fully into the floor strike. Always measure and adjust rod length to the actual door height before mounting the chassis.

 

Mechanical Dogging on a Fire-Rated Opening

Applying mechanical dogging on a fire-rated exit device opening voids the fire door assembly certification and creates a life safety violation. If the opening requires free-swing daytime operation and carries a fire rating, order a device with QEL or MEL electric dogging before installation.

 

Omitting the Through-Bolt Nuts or Skipping Threadlocker

Through-bolts inserted without nuts, or nuts tightened without threadlocker on metal doors, loosen from vibration within weeks of installation. The chassis develops play, the latch alignment drifts, and the device requires reinstallation. Apply threadlocker before tightening all through-bolt nuts.

 

Troubleshooting Exit Device Installation Problems

For broader commercial door hardware troubleshooting guidance, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide.

Touchpad Is Hard to Push

The most common cause is a chassis that is not seated flat against the door face. If the chassis is bowed or misaligned, the touchpad pivot binds against the chassis frame. Check that through-bolts are tightened evenly and that the chassis face is flush against the door. Over-tightened through-bolts can deform thin door faces and cause the same symptom; back off the nuts slightly and recheck.

 

Latch Does Not Engage the Strike When the Door Closes

Vertical or lateral misalignment between the latch and the strike keeper is the most likely cause. Mark the latch position on the strike face by applying chalk or crayon to the latch tip and closing the door once. The mark on the strike shows whether the latch is hitting above, below, or to the side of the keeper opening. Adjust the strike position accordingly.

 

Door Does Not Latch After Closing (SVR or CVR)

If the top or bottom latch point is not engaging after the door closes, the rod length is typically the problem. The rod may be too short (latch does not reach the strike) or too long (the rod is buckling before the latch fully extends). Adjust the threaded coupler at the rod connection point in small increments and retest after each adjustment.

 

Exit Device Rattles or Has Play After Mounting

Through-bolt nuts that are not fully tightened, or a backplate that is missing on a thin hollow metal door, are the two most common causes. Tighten all nuts to the specified torque and confirm the backplate is installed and seated. If play persists after tightening, inspect the chassis mounting holes for elongation, which indicates the door material has been overloaded and needs reinforcement.

 

Device Is Handed Incorrectly After Mounting

If the touchpad is on the correct side but the latch projects in the wrong direction, check the manufacturer documentation for field-reversibility. Some device series allow the latch to be reversed by repositioning a single component; others require a full exchange. Contact 845-935-0301 for part exchange support before disassembling the device chassis.

 

Maintenance After Installation

For a complete annual maintenance schedule for all commercial door hardware, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Initial 30-Day Inspection

High-traffic doors should receive a 30-day check after installation. Re-check all through-bolt torque after the first month of use. On SVR devices, re-check rod length adjustment after the first month, since rod connection points can shift slightly during initial traffic cycles. Confirm latch engagement has not drifted from the initial setting.

 

Annual Inspection Points

  • Touchpad pivot wear: apply slight lateral pressure to the touchpad. Any lateral movement beyond minimal play indicates pivot bushing wear
  • Latch bolt engagement depth: confirm the latch still engages the strike keeper fully. A worn latch tip can reduce engagement depth over time
  • Rod connection points (SVR and CVR): confirm rod couplers and connection fasteners are tight and rods have not shifted from adjusted length
  • Strike alignment drift: recheck latch-to-strike alignment with the chalk test annually on high-cycle doors
  • Dogging mechanism: confirm hex key dogging engages and releases without binding
  • Egress force: retest actuating force with a pull scale and confirm it remains below 15 pounds (30 pounds on fire doors)

 

NFPA 80 Fire Door Inspection Requirements

NFPA 80 requires annual inspection and documentation for all fire-rated door assemblies, including the exit device, hinges, closer, and frame. The inspection must confirm self-latching function, correct device operation, absence of mechanical dogging, and that no components have been modified or replaced with non-listed parts. A written record of each inspection must be maintained.

 

Where to Source Exit Device Parts and Replacements

Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, and other commercial hardware lines. For parts by device type, see the exit devices parts guide and the commercial exit device parts guide. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance before ordering replacement components, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support when you need to confirm a part number against the installed device.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, and other commercial hardware lines, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301. For related installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer and commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide.

Schlage N123 Parts Guide: Keycam Assemblies, Plunger Assemblies, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The Schlage N123 is an NDE series wireless cylindrical lock. Before ordering any Schlage N123 parts, confirm three things:

  • Confirm the model is N123, not N523. Both are NDE wireless locks, but they use different part numbers. The N123 and N523 keycam and plunger assemblies are not interchangeable. The model number is printed on the back of the inside trim or in the project hardware schedule.
  • Keycam assemblies: 12 N123 keycam assemblies are stocked, each corresponding to a specific lock function. The part number encodes the function. Replacing a keycam with the wrong function code changes how the lock operates.
  • Plunger assemblies: Five plunger types are stocked: push button, push-turn button, spanner button, emergency turn button, and emergency button. The correct type matches the inside trim of the installed lock.
  • 21 Schlage N123 parts are stocked at Security Parts across keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, the RX switch upgrade kit, HSLR screwpack, and mounting screw.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

 

What the Schlage N123 Is

The Schlage N123 is part of the NDE series, Schlage's wireless cylindrical lock platform designed for access control integration in commercial and institutional buildings. NDE locks communicate wirelessly with the access control system through a credential reader built into the outside trim, eliminating the need for data wiring at each door.

The N123 is configured for applications where the door or lock geometry differs from the standard N523 configuration. While both models are NDE wireless cylindrical locks, they use different internal components. The keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, and other trim parts are specific to each model and cannot be substituted between them.

The N123 is commonly found in healthcare facilities, educational buildings, and government offices where wireless access control was installed during construction or renovation. Replacement parts are ordered when a keycam wears or fails (most often seen as difficulty retracting the latch with a key), when a plunger assembly needs replacement due to physical wear or button malfunction, or when the access control integrator adds an RX switch function to the existing installation.

The N123 is also an appropriate replacement lock when a facility is upgrading from an older Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock (non-wireless) to the NDE wireless platform on doors where the physical prep does not accommodate the standard N523. Because the NDE platform integrates directly with credential management systems, the parts that control the mechanical function of the lock, particularly the keycam and plunger, are specified at the time of installation to match the access control behavior required at each opening. Replacing any of these components requires confirming both the mechanical part number and the intended lock function before ordering.

For the companion guide covering the N523 model, see the Schlage NDE wireless lock parts guide. That guide covers N523-specific keycam assemblies, cylinder options, and tailpiece configurations, which are not applicable to the N123.

 

How to Confirm You Have an N123, Not an N523

Ordering parts for the wrong NDE model is the most common ordering error on N123 service calls. Before placing any order, confirm the model number using one of these methods:

  • Label on the inside trim: Remove the inside trim rose cover. The model number is typically printed or stamped on the back of the inside escutcheon or the lock chassis.
  • Hardware schedule: The original project hardware schedule submitted during construction specifies the exact model number for each opening. This is the most reliable source for facilities teams managing a building with a consistent hardware specification.
  • Work order documentation: If the installation was performed under a service contract, the original work order typically records the lock model and function code for each door.

If the model number is not accessible from any of these sources, call 845-935-0301. The Security Parts team can help identify the correct model based on part numbers already installed or hardware schedule details.

 

Schlage N123 Keycam Assemblies

Schlage N123-076 keycam assembly replacement part for Schlage N123 NDE wireless cylindrical lock

Schlage N123-076 Keycam Assembly. View product page and order.

 

The keycam assembly is the internal mechanical component that translates key cylinder rotation into latch retraction. The keycam part number specifies both the physical geometry and the lock function (storeroom, classroom, office, etc.). Using a keycam with the wrong function code causes the lock to operate incorrectly, so the replacement must match the installed function exactly.

Twelve N123 keycam assemblies are stocked at Security Parts, covering the complete range of standard functions available for the N123 wireless lock.

Part NumberProduct Page
N123-076 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-097 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-013 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-098 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-012 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-011 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-055 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-094 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-008 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-059 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-010 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-007 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-045 Keycam AssemblyView and order

 

Keycam replacement is the most common mechanical service call on the N123. The symptom is typically that the key will not retract the latch, or that it retracts with significantly more force than normal. This indicates that the keycam follower or the cam itself has worn past the service threshold. In high-turnover institutional environments, keycam wear is accelerated by the volume of key turns and the frequency of forced or rushed key operation by staff and students. A worn keycam that is not replaced promptly increases wear on adjacent components, including the cylinder and the latch chassis.

When replacing a keycam assembly, confirm the function code of the installed keycam before ordering. The function code determines how the lock responds to a key turn: whether the latch retracts freely, requires a credential to unlock first, or remains locked regardless of credentials. An incorrect keycam function changes the security behavior of the door.

 

Schlage N123 Plunger Assemblies

Schlage N123-087 spanner button plunger assembly replacement for Schlage N123 NDE wireless lock

Schlage N123-087 Spanner Button Plunger Assembly. View product page and order.

 

The plunger assembly controls the inside button or thumbturn mechanism of the N123. Five plunger assembly types are stocked, each corresponding to a different inside trim configuration. The correct replacement must match the existing inside button type exactly, because the plunger geometry is specific to each button style.

 

Identifying Your Plunger Type

Look at the inside trim of the installed N123. The shape and operation of the inside button identifies the correct plunger assembly:

For access control applications in healthcare, educational, and government facilities where the N123 is commonly installed, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Schlage N123-062 RX Switch Upgrade Kit

Schlage N123-062 RX switch upgrade kit for Schlage N123 NDE wireless lock request-to-exit function

Schlage N123-062 RX Switch Upgrade Kit. View product page and order.

 

The N123-062 RX switch upgrade kit adds a request-to-exit (RX) switch to the inside trim of the N123 wireless lock. When the inside lever handle is depressed, the RX switch sends a signal to the access control system indicating that a person is exiting through the door.

The RX switch upgrade is used when:

  • The original N123 installation did not include RX switch wiring and the access control system now requires exit signal monitoring
  • The security integrator is adding exit logging to previously unmonitored doors
  • The facility is upgrading its access control platform to one that uses RX switch input for door control or reporting
  • Code compliance or security policy requires that all controlled openings generate an exit event in the access control log

The N123-062 is an upgrade kit, not a standard replacement part. It adds capability that was not present in the original installation. If the lock already has an RX switch installed and it has failed, contact 845-935-0301 to confirm the correct replacement component before ordering.

 

Schlage N123 Hardware and Installation Components

Schlage N123-120 HSLR screwpack replacement for Schlage N123 NDE wireless cylindrical lock

Schlage N123-120 HSLR Screwpack. View product page and order.

 

  • N123-120 HSLR screwpack: The hardware kit containing the mounting screws for the HSLR (high security long reach) installation configuration. Replace when original screws are stripped, damaged, or missing from the installation. The HSLR configuration is used when the mounting throughbolts must reach through a thicker door or reinforcing plate.
  • N123-020 mounting screw: Individual mounting screw for the N123 lock body. Replace when a single screw is stripped or damaged and the full screwpack is not needed. Order the N123-120 screwpack when multiple screws require replacement.

Both the N123-120 screwpack and the N123-020 mounting screw are commonly needed after a lock has been removed and reinstalled multiple times during access control system upgrades or lock swaps. Thread stripping in the door chassis is one of the more common causes of loose lock installation on doors that have seen repeated hardware changes. Keeping a supply of N123-120 screwpacks on hand reduces service time when screws strip during a scheduled replacement program.

For guidance on maintenance schedules that include hardware inspection for wireless locks, see the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide. For information on ANSI/BHMA performance standards that apply to the N123 as a Grade 1 cylindrical lock, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Complete Schlage N123 Parts Reference

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
N123-076Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-097Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-013Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-098Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-012Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-011Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-055Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-094Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-008Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-059Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-010Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-007Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-045Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-087Spanner Button Plunger AssemblyPlunger
N123-086Push Button Plunger Bar AssemblyPlunger
N123-085Push-Turn Button Plunger AssemblyPlunger
N123-084ND Series Emergency Turn Button and PlungerPlunger
N123-034Emergency Button PlungerPlunger
N123-062RX Switch Upgrade KitUpgrade
N123-120HSLR ScrewpackHardware
N123-020Mounting ScrewHardware

 

Where to Source Schlage N123 Parts

Security Parts stocks all 21 Schlage N123 parts across keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, the RX switch upgrade kit, HSLR screwpack, and mounting screw. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you need help confirming the correct keycam function code or plunger type before ordering.

For the companion guide covering N523 parts, see the Schlage NDE wireless lock parts guide. For guidance on commercial door hardware maintenance schedules that cover wireless lock inspection intervals, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance on Schlage wireless lock parts, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For Schlage deadbolt parts commonly installed alongside the N123, see the Schlage B663 classroom deadbolt guide.

The N123 is widely specified in healthcare facilities, universities and colleges, and government buildings, where wireless access control is integrated with credential management systems on NDE-compatible platforms.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Schlage N123 parts catalog across all keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, the RX switch upgrade kit, HSLR screwpack, and mounting screw, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Falcon Q500 Parts Guide: Deadbolt Cylinder Replacement by Pin Count and Finish

Quick Answer

The Falcon Q500 series is a commercial deadbolt line. The only replacement parts stocked for the Q500 series are deadbolt cylinders, available in 5-pin, 6-pin, and 7-pin configurations across multiple finishes. Before ordering any Falcon Q500 parts, confirm two things:

  • Pin count: The number of pin stacks in the installed cylinder. This determines which Q500 cylinder part number applies. A 5-pin, 6-pin, and 7-pin cylinder are not interchangeable even on the same deadbolt body. The pin count is typically stamped on the existing cylinder or recorded in the hardware schedule.
  • Finish: The surface finish of the installed deadbolt. Multiple Q500 cylinder part numbers exist for the same pin count in different finishes. Ordering a cylinder in the wrong finish produces a cylinder that is functionally correct but visually mismatched.
  • 20 Falcon Q500 cylinders are stocked at Security Parts across all pin count and finish combinations.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you cannot confirm the pin count or finish from the installed unit.

 

What the Falcon Q500 Series Is

The Falcon Q500 is a commercial-grade deadbolt series used in institutional and commercial applications including government facilities, educational buildings, healthcare entries, and multi-tenant commercial properties. The Q500 deadbolt provides keyed entry from the outside with a thumbturn on the inside, offering a straightforward key-in deadbolt function for doors where access control does not require a lever or knob mechanism.

The Q500 is distinct from the Falcon Q330 series, which is a cylindrical lever lock. The Q330 uses key-in-lever cylinders designed for a lever lockset body. The Q500 uses deadbolt cylinders with a different cam and tailpiece geometry. The two cylinder series are not interchangeable. If the hardware being serviced is a lever lock with a handle, see the Q330 guide. If it is a standalone deadbolt with a thumbturn, you are on the correct page.

For broader context on Falcon hardware, parts, and product lines stocked at Security Parts, see the Falcon hardware brand page.

 

How Falcon Q500 Cylinder Replacement Works

The Falcon Q500 deadbolt is designed to allow cylinder replacement without removing the deadbolt body from the door. This is important for facilities managers and locksmiths who need to rekey or replace a cylinder due to key compromise, wear, or a change in key control requirements, without disrupting the door prep or the thumbturn assembly.

Cylinder replacement is the correct repair in these situations:

  • The cylinder plug has worn and the key no longer operates smoothly
  • Keys have been lost or compromised and the facility requires rekeying
  • The facility is transitioning to a new key control system that requires a different keyway
  • The cylinder has been physically damaged by a forced entry attempt
  • The existing cylinder finish has degraded and replacement is preferred over refinishing

The cylinder replacement process on the Q500 series does not require specialty tools in most cases. A standard flathead screwdriver is typically sufficient to release the cylinder retaining mechanism and extract the cylinder from the deadbolt body. The replacement cylinder slides in and locks with the same mechanism. The entire field replacement, once the correct part is on hand, takes under ten minutes for a trained locksmith or experienced facilities technician. The time investment is in confirming the correct part number before the service call, not in the physical replacement itself.

When ordering a replacement cylinder, confirm the pin count of the existing cylinder before placing the order. Installing a 6-pin cylinder in a deadbolt that was originally keyed to a 7-pin system, for example, will mean the existing keys no longer operate the lock. If the installation is being rekeyed intentionally, the pin count of the new cylinder must match the new key system.

For general guidance on planned replacement and maintenance schedules for commercial door hardware, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Falcon Q500 7-Pin Deadbolt Cylinders

Falcon Q500-057 deadbolt cylinder 7-pin replacement part for Falcon Q500 series commercial deadbolt

Falcon Q500-057 Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Seven-pin cylinders provide the largest key combination pool of the three Q500 configurations. They are used in higher-security applications where key control is critical and where restricted keyways or master key systems require the additional pin stack to accommodate the key cut depth range. Five 7-pin Q500 cylinders are stocked.

Part NumberPin CountProduct Page
Q500-0577-PinView and order
Q500-0147-PinView and order
Q500-0597-PinView and order
Q500-0477-PinView and order
Q500-0467-PinView and order

 

Falcon Q500 6-Pin Deadbolt Cylinders

Falcon Q500-012 deadbolt cylinder 6-pin replacement for Falcon Q500 commercial deadbolt series

Falcon Q500-012 Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Six-pin cylinders are the most widely used configuration in the Q500 series. They provide a large combination pool suitable for master key systems in most commercial and institutional settings without requiring the full security overhead of a 7-pin system. Eight 6-pin Q500 cylinders are stocked, covering the broadest range of finishes in the series.

Part NumberPin CountProduct Page
Q500-0126-PinView and order
Q500-0566-PinView and order
Q500-0106-PinView and order
Q500-0556-PinView and order
Q500-0546-PinView and order
Q500-0586-PinView and order
Q500-0226-PinView and order
Q500-0216-PinView and order

 

Falcon Q500 5-Pin Deadbolt Cylinders

Falcon Q500-072 deadbolt cylinder 5-pin replacement for Falcon Q500 series commercial deadbolt

Falcon Q500-072 Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Five-pin cylinders have a smaller key combination pool than 6-pin or 7-pin configurations. They are found in Q500 deadbolts specified for lower-security or lower-traffic applications where master key system complexity is not a requirement. Seven 5-pin Q500 cylinders are stocked.

Part NumberPin CountProduct Page
Q500-0725-PinView and order
Q500-0695-PinView and order
Q500-0675-PinView and order
Q500-0705-PinView and order
Q500-0665-PinView and order
Q500-0655-PinView and order
Q500-0645-PinView and order

 

Selecting the Right Q500 Cylinder: Pin Count and Finish

Most ordering errors on Q500 cylinder replacements come from one of two mistakes: ordering the wrong pin count because the existing cylinder was not checked, or ordering the correct pin count in the wrong finish. Both mistakes require a return and delay the repair.

 

How to Confirm Pin Count

The pin count of an installed Q500 cylinder is typically documented in the original hardware schedule submitted during construction or renovation. If the hardware schedule is not available, a locksmith can disassemble the cylinder on-site and count the pin stacks directly. The pin count is not visible from the outside of the installed deadbolt.

When the pin count cannot be confirmed from documentation and on-site disassembly is not immediately possible, a locksmith can sometimes estimate the pin count range from the key blank profile. Different keyways are licensed to specific pin count ranges, so the keyway stamped on the key blade can narrow the search to either 5-pin, 6-pin, or 7-pin cylinders depending on how the master key system was originally designed. This is an estimate method only and should not substitute for a confirmed count when the exact replacement must match an existing key system.

If the facility uses a master key system, the key control documentation will also indicate the pin count, since the master key system design is tied to the pin stack configuration. In most institutional master key systems, the pin count across all cylinders in a building section is uniform.

 

How to Confirm the Correct Finish

The finish code for the installed Q500 deadbolt is typically found on the specification sheet submitted at the time of original installation. If the spec sheet is not available, the finish can be identified visually by comparing the installed deadbolt to ANSI/BHMA finish code samples. Common finish codes used on the Q500 series include US26D (satin chrome), US10B (oil-rubbed bronze), US32D (satin stainless), US3 (polished brass), and US10 (satin bronze).

Multiple Q500 cylinders share the same pin count but differ only in finish. Ordering a cylinder with the correct pin count but an incorrect finish results in a functionally correct cylinder that does not match the installed trim. For applications where visual uniformity is required, such as healthcare corridors, educational buildings, or government facility entries, finish matching is as important as pin count matching.

The most common ordering mistake when finish is uncertain is to order a "safe" neutral finish that does not match the installed trim. On a public-facing building entry or a corridor where hardware uniformity is part of the facility standard, a mismatched cylinder finish requires a second order and a second service call. When the finish cannot be confirmed from documentation, it is better to pause the order and physically inspect the installed deadbolt before placing it, or to call the Security Parts team at 845-935-0301 for guidance on identifying the finish from the installed hardware.

For guidance on hardware standards and finish code conventions, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Complete Falcon Q500 Parts Reference

Falcon Q500-014 deadbolt cylinder 7-pin for Falcon Q500 commercial deadbolt series

Falcon Q500-014 Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Part NumberConfigurationProduct Page
Q500-057Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-014Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-059Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-047Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-046Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-012Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-056Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-010Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-055Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-054Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-058Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-022Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-021Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-072Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-069Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-067Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-070Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-066Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-065Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-064Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order

 

Where to Source Falcon Q500 Parts

The Falcon Q500 deadbolt is commonly specified in institutional and government construction projects as the primary entry deadbolt on office doors, storage rooms, and utility spaces that do not require a lever mechanism or push bar. In educational settings, Q500 deadbolts are regularly found on administrative offices, equipment rooms, and faculty-only areas where access is controlled by key rather than by credential reader. In healthcare facilities, the Q500 serves staff-only rooms and pharmaceutical storage areas where keyed entry is required for compliance and security.

Cylinder replacement frequency on Q500 deadbolts varies by application. In high-turnover institutional environments, cylinders are typically replaced or rekeyed on a scheduled maintenance cycle to address key control drift from lost or unaccounted keys. In lower-turnover government and educational settings, cylinder replacement is more commonly triggered by physical wear, key compromise, or a change in occupancy. Knowing the pin count and finish in advance shortens the repair cycle significantly, since a pre-stocked cylinder can be installed in minutes on-site rather than requiring a factory order.

Security Parts stocks all 20 Falcon Q500 deadbolt cylinders across the 5-pin, 6-pin, and 7-pin configurations. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you need help matching the pin count or finish to the installed deadbolt.

For Falcon lever lock cylinder parts, see the Falcon Q330 parts guide, which covers key-in-lever cylinders, latch bolts, spring cages, and lever trim for the Q330 cylindrical lock series. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance on Falcon hardware, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For applications in healthcare, government, and educational settings where Q500 deadbolts are commonly specified, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the government buildings hardware guide, and the universities and colleges door hardware guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and institutional maintenance teams since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Falcon Q500 cylinder catalog across all pin count and finish configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 4010T Parts Guide: Track Arms, Rollers, Tracks, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 4010T is a template arm door closer that uses a concealed slide track on the door face instead of a standard exposed arm. Before ordering any LCN 4010T parts, confirm these key points:

  • 4010T vs 4010: The 4010 is a standard arm surface closer. The 4010T uses a template arm track configuration. The two products have completely separate part catalogs. Parts are not interchangeable between them.
  • Track variant: Four track options are stocked: 3038 (standard), 3038H (hold-open), 3038B (standard with bumper), 3038HB (hold-open with bumper). Match the track to the door function before ordering.
  • Roller match: The 3034 standard roller goes with standard tracks. The 3034HO hold-open roller goes with hold-open tracks. A mismatched roller defeats the hold-open function.
  • 3064H vs 3054: The 3064H is a combined hold-open clip and roller. The 3054 is the clip only. If the roller is also worn, the 3064H replaces both in one part.
  • Double egress: Doors that swing both directions need the 3077DE track arm and the 78DE main arm and tube. Standard arms only swing one way.
  • 37 LCN 4010T parts are stocked at Security Parts across all arm, track, roller, hold-open, cover, and screw pack configurations.

Call 845-935-0301 before ordering if you need compatibility confirmation.

 

What the LCN 4010T Is

The LCN 4010T is the AutoTemplate version of the LCN 4010 Series door closer. The T suffix designates the template arm (track arm) configuration, where the closer spindle connects to a track arm that slides inside a rail mounted on the door face. This keeps the arm mechanism closer to the door plane and reduces the clearance needed at the top of the door compared to a traditional exposed parallel arm.

The 4010T is commonly used in commercial and institutional applications where a standard exposed arm would create a clearance or aesthetic problem, or where the door is subject to regular parallel arm contact. The track arm system is more mechanically protected than an exposed parallel arm because the roller travels inside the rail rather than pivoting freely in space.

The 4010T is a completely separate product from the standard arm 4010. If the closer body at your installation has a slide rail mounted to the door with a roller running inside it, you have a 4010T. If the arm pivots freely between the closer body and the door surface without a rail, you have the standard arm version. The two products have separate part numbers, and no component crosses over between them. For parts relating to the standard LCN 4010 and other 4000 Series surface closers, see the LCN 4000 Series parts guide. For the companion AutoTemplate guide covering the 4050AT closer, see the LCN 4050AT parts guide.

 

LCN 4010T Track Arms

LCN 4010T-3077T standard track arm replacement part for LCN 4010T template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3077T Standard Track Arm. View product page and order.

 

The track arm is the mechanical link between the closer spindle and the track roller. It converts the rotational output of the closer body into the linear sliding motion that controls the door arc. Two track arm configurations are stocked for the 4010T.

 

4010T-3077T: Standard Track Arm

The 4010T-3077T is the standard single-direction track arm for doors that swing in one direction only. It connects the closer spindle to the track roller at the door end. Replace when the arm tube is bent, the spindle connection is stripped and tightening does not hold, or the arm has separated from the roller during operation.

 

4010T-3077DE: Double Egress Track Arm

The 4010T-3077DE is the track arm for doors that swing in both directions. Double egress openings are common in healthcare corridor applications and in institutional settings where traffic approaches from both sides. The 3077DE must be paired with the 4010T-78DE main arm and tube and the 4010T-82 rod. Standard arm components do not work in a double egress configuration.

 

Arm Screws: 159 and 83H

Two arm screws are stocked for the 4010T and they serve different attachment points.

  • 4010T-159 arm screw: The primary screw that secures the track arm to the closer spindle at the standard attachment point. Replace when the arm is loose at the spindle and tightening does not restore a secure connection.
  • 4010T-83H H-arm screw: Used when the installation uses an H-arm bracket configuration to mount the track arm on a parallel arm bracket rather than directly onto the spindle. Confirm the installation type before ordering. Ordering the 83H for a standard spindle connection, or the 159 for an H-arm bracket, will result in a non-fitting part.

 

LCN 4010T Track Assemblies

LCN 4010T-3038 standard track replacement for LCN 4010T AutoTemplate template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3038 Standard Track. View product page and order.

 

The track is the rail mounted to the door face that guides the roller as the door swings. It is the most commonly replaced component after the roller on high-cycle installations. Four variants are stocked, each serving a different operational requirement.

 

Track Variant Selection Table

Part NumberTypeHold-OpenBumperRoller Required
4010T-3038Standard trackNoNo3034
4010T-3038HHold-open trackYesNo3034HO
4010T-3038BStandard track with bumperNoYes3034
4010T-3038HBHold-open track with bumperYesYes3034HO

The bumper variants cushion the roller at the fully open position, which reduces impact noise and mechanical stress when the door reaches its open limit. Specify a bumper track on doors that contact a wall or a door stop with enough force to produce noise. Additional track hardware:

  • 4010T-169 track bumper: A standalone bumper replacement for an existing track that has lost or damaged its original bumper cushion.
  • 4010T-73 end cap: The cap at the terminal end of the track rail that prevents the roller assembly from traveling beyond the track boundary.
  • 4010T-425 roller lock screw: Secures the roller assembly within the track after installation. Replace when the roller is moving laterally inside the track between service visits.

 

LCN 4010T Track Rollers

LCN 4010T-3034 track roller replacement part for LCN 4010T template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3034 Track Roller. View product page and order.

 

The track roller is the highest-wear component on most 4010T installations. It contacts the track rail on every cycle and degrades through friction over time. Two roller types are stocked and must match the track type installed.

  • 4010T-3034: Standard track roller. Use with the 4010T-3038 and 4010T-3038B standard tracks only.
  • 4010T-3034HO: Hold-open track roller. Use with the 4010T-3038H and 4010T-3038HB hold-open tracks only. This roller includes the engagement geometry that allows the hold-open clip to arrest the arm at the fully open position.

A standard 3034 roller installed in a hold-open track produces a door that still closes but no longer holds at the open position. On hold-open function failures, check the roller type before replacing the track or the clip. If the installed roller is a 3034 in a hold-open track, that is the complete failure cause.

 

Hold-Open Components: 3064H vs 3054

LCN 4010T-3064H hold-open clip and roller combined assembly for LCN 4010T template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3064H Hold-Open Clip and Roller. View product page and order.

 

Two hold-open components are stocked for the 4010T and they are frequently confused. Ordering the wrong one is the most common wrong-part return on 4010T hold-open repairs. The distinction is straightforward once you know what each part contains.

 

4010T-3054: Hold-Open Clip Only

The 4010T-3054 is the hold-open clip without a roller. It clips onto the existing roller to engage the hold-open notch in the 3038H or 3038HB track. Order the 3054 when the hold-open function has failed but the existing roller is still in good condition and does not need replacement. This is the lower-cost repair when the roller itself has not worn through.

 

4010T-3064H: Combined Hold-Open Clip and Roller

The 4010T-3064H replaces both the hold-open clip and the roller in a single assembly. Order the 3064H when the hold-open function has failed and the roller is also worn or damaged. On high-cycle doors where both components fail at similar rates, installing the 3064H as a single-part replacement is more efficient than sourcing the clip and roller separately. The 3064H is also the correct part if you cannot determine whether it is the clip, the roller, or both that have failed.

 

Quick Reference: 3054 vs 3064H

PartContainsOrder When
4010T-3054Hold-open clip onlyClip failed, roller is still good
4010T-3064HCombined clip and rollerBoth failed, or failure source is unclear

 

Mounting Plate and Additional Hardware

  • 4010T-18 plate: The mounting plate for the 4010T closer body. Replace when the plate is bent or when mounting holes have stripped and the closer body cannot be securely anchored.
  • 4010T-82 rod: The connecting rod used in double egress configurations between the main arm assembly and the track arm.
  • 4010T-141-2 plug: Fills unused mounting holes in the closer body to prevent debris ingress. Replace when plugs are missing from the housing.

 

Covers and Finish Hardware

  • 4010T-72MC metal cover: The heavy-duty metal closer cover for high-traffic and abuse-prone applications. Specified where the standard plastic cover would not withstand repeated contact or forced entry attempts against the closer body.
  • 4010T-72 standard cover: The standard plastic cover for normal commercial applications. Replace when cracked, broken, or no longer clips securely to the body.
  • 4010T-73 end cap: The cap at the open end of the track that retains the roller inside the track travel boundary.
  • 4010T-31 cover screw: The fastener that secures the cover to the closer body. Replace when the cover is loose and the existing screw has stripped.

 

Screw Pack Selection Guide

The 4010T uses different screw packs depending on the installation configuration (standard or hold-open) and the substrate the closer and track are mounted to. Thirteen screw pack variants are stocked. Selecting the wrong pack is the most common fastener mismatch on 4010T service calls.

Part NumberTypeConfiguration
4010T-TBTRXThru-bolt Torx machine screw packStandard, metal door
4010T-TORXTorx machine screwsStandard, metal door alternate
4010T-TBWMSThru-bolt wood/machine screw packStandard, wood door
4010T-WMSWood/machine screw packStandard, wood door alternate
4010T-TBSRTThru-bolt self-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming substrate
4010T-SRTSelf-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming alternate
4010T-HTBTRXHO thru-bolt Torx machine screw packHold-open, metal door
4010T-HTORXHO Torx machine screwsHold-open, metal door alternate
4010T-HTBWMSHO thru-bolt wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door
4010T-HWMSHO wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door alternate
4010T-HTBSRTHO thru-bolt self-reaming tapping screw packHold-open, self-reaming substrate
4010T-HSRTHO self-reaming tapping screw packHold-open, self-reaming alternate
Flat box w/ labelStandard flat boxDocumentation and reboxing

 

Complete LCN 4010T Parts Reference

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
4010T-3077TStandard track armTrack arm
4010T-3077DEDouble egress track armTrack arm
4010T-78DEMain arm and tube (double egress)Track arm
4010T-159Arm screwArm hardware
4010T-83HH-arm screwArm hardware
4010T-82Rod (double egress)Arm hardware
4010T-3038Standard trackTrack
4010T-3038HHold-open trackTrack
4010T-3038BStandard track with bumperTrack
4010T-3038HBHold-open track with bumperTrack
4010T-3034Standard track rollerRoller
4010T-3034HOHold-open track rollerRoller
4010T-3054Hold-open clip (clip only)Hold-open
4010T-3064HHold-open clip and roller (combined)Hold-open
4010T-425Roller lock screwRoller hardware
4010T-18Mounting plateMounting hardware
4010T-141-2PlugMounting hardware
4010T-72MCMetal coverCover
4010T-72Standard plastic coverCover
4010T-73Track end capCover
4010T-31Cover screwCover hardware
4010T-169Track bumperTrack hardware
4010T-TBTRXStd thru-bolt Torx machine screw packScrew pack
4010T-HTBTRXHO thru-bolt Torx machine screw packScrew pack

 

What Fails First on the LCN 4010T

Most 4010T service calls on high-cycle doors follow one of three failure patterns. Knowing which component typically fails first saves time before ordering.

  • Track roller: The most frequently replaced component on heavy-use installations. Roller wear produces a grinding or clicking sound as the door swings, and the arm may skip or catch inside the track. On high-cycle institutional doors, inspect the roller first before replacing the track or the arm.
  • Hold-open clip: On doors held open for extended periods throughout the day, the hold-open clip wears through before the roller does. The door will close on its own when it should hold open. Replace the clip (3054) or the combined clip-and-roller assembly (3064H) depending on roller condition.
  • Arm screw: The arm screw (4010T-159 or 4010T-83H depending on installation type) can loosen on doors subject to forced or rapid opening. A loose arm screw allows the arm to slip on the spindle, which produces a clicking sound at the start of the opening cycle and eventually allows the arm to separate from the spindle under load. Tighten or replace before assuming the arm tube itself has failed.

 

Where to Source LCN 4010T Parts

Security Parts stocks all 37 LCN 4010T parts across track arms, tracks, rollers, hold-open components, mounting hardware, covers, and all 13 screw pack configurations. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you are unsure which arm screw, screw pack, or hold-open component applies to your installation.

For the companion LCN 4050AT template arm guide covering the 4050AT closer body, see the LCN 4050AT parts guide. For broader LCN door closer parts coverage including the 4040XP, see the LCN 4040XP parts guide and the door closers parts guide. For help selecting the right LCN closer for a new installation, see the LCN closer selection guide and the door closer sizing guide. For installation and adjustment guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer and how to adjust a commercial door closer. For scheduled inspection and planned maintenance, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and institutional maintenance teams since 2001. Security Parts stocks the full LCN 4010T parts catalog across all arm, track, roller, hold-open, cover, and screw pack configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 4840 Parts Guide: CUSH Arms, Pneumatic Hinge, Panel Adapter, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 4840 is a pneumatic multi-door auto equalizer operator. Before ordering any LCN 4840 parts, confirm these key points:

  • Model first: The 4840, 4810, and 4820 share similar part naming but are different models. Confirm the 4840 label is on the closer body before ordering. Parts between these models are not interchangeable.
  • 3077CNS vs 3077SCNS vs 3077EDA: Three arm configurations exist. The 3077CNS uses a block-and-shoe cushion stop. The 3077SCNS uses a spring-based cushion. The 3077EDA is the extra duty arm for high-traffic applications. Choose based on what is installed and what failed.
  • Pneumatic hinge (4840-460): This hinge carries the air line through the pivot point. If the equalizer function is slow or absent and tubing pressure is confirmed, the pneumatic hinge is the component to replace.
  • Door loop kit (4840-459): Carries the flexible pneumatic line between the fixed frame and the swinging door. Replace when tubing is cracked, kinked, or function is inconsistent.
  • 25 LCN 4840 parts are stocked at Security Parts across arms, hinges, adapters, covers, spacers, and screw packs.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 4840 Is

The LCN 4840 is a pneumatic multi-door auto equalizer operator designed to simultaneously control the opening force across multiple doors from a single compressed air source. It equalizes the opening resistance on doors along an accessible route so that a person using a wheelchair or mobility aid can open the door without encountering uneven or excessive resistance.

The 4840 is the multi-door version of the LCN pneumatic auto equalizer family. The 4810 and 4820 serve single-door applications. The 4840 is specified where a single pneumatic control point must manage several doors on the same accessible corridor simultaneously.

The 4840 is not an electric automatic opener and not a door closer in the traditional sense. It is a pneumatically powered force-equalizer. Its parts catalog reflects this: the key components are arms, a pneumatic hinge, a door loop kit, a spring cush block, and the mechanical accessories that support and cover the system. For the broader LCN auto equalizer family context and related sentronic products, see the LCN Sentronic and Auto Equalizer parts guide. For general LCN automatic door operator coverage, see the commercial door operators guide.

 

LCN 4840 Arm Configurations

LCN 4840-3077CNS CUSH-N-STOP arm replacement part for LCN 4840 pneumatic auto equalizer operator

LCN 4840-3077CNS CUSH-N-STOP Arm. View product page and order.

 

Three arm configurations are stocked for the LCN 4840. The arm connects the closer body spindle to the door panel and controls the opening arc. Selecting the wrong arm type is the most common ordering error on 4840 service calls.

 

4840-3077CNS: CUSH-N-STOP Arm

The 4840-3077CNS is the standard CUSH-N-STOP arm. It uses a rigid cush shoe and spring cush block assembly to provide a controlled cushioned stop at the fully open position. The cushion absorbs the final impact of the door reaching its open limit, reducing noise and mechanical stress on the frame. Replace when the arm is bent, the spindle connection is stripped, or the cushion stop no longer functions at the full open position.

 

4840-3077SCNS: Spring CUSH-N-STOP Arm

The 4840-3077SCNS is the Spring CUSH-N-STOP arm. It uses an integrated spring mechanism within the arm assembly for cushioning at the open position, rather than the separate block-and-shoe configuration of the CNS arm. The SCNS arm is specified when the installation requires spring-loaded cushion action. Confirm which arm is installed before replacing: the CNS and SCNS are not interchangeable.

 

4840-3077EDA: Extra Duty Arm

The 4840-3077EDA is the Extra Duty Arm, reinforced for high-traffic and high-abuse applications. If a standard CNS or SCNS arm has failed prematurely on a high-cycle accessible route entry, the EDA is the correct upgrade. Installing a standard arm on an EDA application will produce the same premature failure.

 

Arm Hardware: Arm Screw and Blade Stop Spacer

  • 4840-159 arm screw: Secures the arm to the closer spindle. Replace when the arm is loose at the spindle and tightening the existing screw does not hold. A loose arm screw is responsible for a significant share of 4840 performance calls that initially appear to be arm failures.
  • 4840-61 blade stop spacer: Adjusts the door open limit. Replace when missing or when the door is making contact with an adjacent surface before the arm reaches its natural stop position.

 

LCN 4840 Pneumatic Hinge: 4840-460

LCN 4840-460 pneumatic hinge replacement part for LCN 4840 auto equalizer door operator

LCN 4840-460 Pneumatic Hinge. View product page and order.

 

The 4840-460 pneumatic hinge is a specialized hinge that carries the compressed air supply line through the door pivot point. A standard hinge cannot perform this function because the tubing cannot cross a hinge knuckle without crimping or breaking during door cycles. The pneumatic hinge has an internal air passage machined through the hinge barrel that allows air to flow continuously from the fixed frame to the moving door panel regardless of door position.

Replace the pneumatic hinge when:

  • The auto equalizer function is slow or absent and the air supply pressure at the source has been confirmed as adequate
  • The door loop kit tubing is intact and unobstructed
  • Air pressure at the door panel side of the hinge is lower than at the frame side
  • The hinge shows visible corrosion at the barrel that could be restricting the internal air passage

 

LCN 4840 Panel Adapter: 4840-419

LCN 4840-419 panel adapter for LCN 4840 auto equalizer on narrow bottom rail aluminum door

LCN 4840-419 Panel Adapter. View product page and order.

 

The 4840-419 panel adapter is required on aluminum storefront and narrow-stile glass doors where the door bottom rail does not provide sufficient mounting surface for the standard 4840 closer body. The panel adapter creates the necessary clearance and mounting geometry between the closer body and the narrow door rail.

If a 4840 was installed without the panel adapter on a narrow-rail door and the arm geometry is incorrect or the closer body is contacting the door rail, confirm whether the panel adapter was included in the original installation before replacing other components.

 

LCN 4840 Door Loop Kit: 4840-459

LCN 4840-459 door loop kit replacement for LCN 4840 pneumatic auto equalizer flexible air line

LCN 4840-459 Door Loop Kit. View product page and order.

 

The 4840-459 door loop kit carries the flexible pneumatic supply line from the fixed door frame to the swinging door panel. Because the door pivots on its hinges, a rigid tube cannot connect the two sides. The door loop provides a coiled or looped flexible tube that extends and contracts smoothly with every door cycle.

The door loop kit is a wear component. On high-cycle accessible route entries, the tubing flexes thousands of times per year. Replace when:

  • The tubing is visibly cracked, kinked, or hardened
  • The equalizer function is inconsistent despite confirmed adequate air supply pressure
  • Air leaks are audible or detectable at the door loop fitting connections
  • The loop no longer returns to its rest position freely after the door closes

 

CUSH Components: Spring Cush Block and Cush Shoe Support

The CUSH-N-STOP arm assembly depends on two components that work together to cushion the door at the open position. They are separate parts with different failure modes.

  • 4840-3080 spring cush block: The spring-loaded block inside the cush shoe that provides the primary cushioning action when the arm reaches the open limit. Replace when the cushion stop is no longer present at the fully open position, even though the arm itself is undamaged. A failed spring cush block allows the door to open to its limit without any cushioned resistance.
  • 4840-30 cush shoe support: The structural bracket that positions and supports the cush shoe in the correct engagement geometry. Replace when the support is bent or cracked, which typically occurs after repeated hard-door-open impacts on installations with high opening force or where the door is being pushed against its stop repeatedly.

When diagnosing a failed cushion stop, start with the spring cush block (4840-3080) before replacing the arm. A failed spring cush block produces the same symptom as a worn arm (no cushion at the open position), but it is a far less expensive and quicker repair. If replacing the spring cush block restores the cushion stop function, the arm itself does not need replacement. Only replace the arm if the spindle connection is stripped, the arm tube is bent, or the cush shoe support bracket is cracked beyond use.

On installations where the cush shoe support (4840-30) is bent, inspect the door frame stop at the corresponding open-position contact point. A bent support bracket almost always indicates that the door has been repeatedly pushed hard against a physical stop. If the door stop position can be adjusted, do so before installing the new bracket, or the replacement will experience the same impact damage.

 

Spacers, Stand-Off, and Mounting Hardware

  • 4840-201 fifth screw spacer: A mounting spacer used in certain 4840 installation configurations to provide clearance between the closer body and the door or frame face. Replace when the spacer is damaged or missing from the original installation.
  • 4840-182 stand-off: A stand-off bracket that positions the closer body at the correct distance from the door surface. Required in installations where the door panel geometry creates a gap between the closer mounting position and the door face.
  • 4840-124 plug: Fills unused mounting holes in the 4840 closer body. Replace when plugs are missing, which exposes the closer housing interior to dust and moisture.

 

Cover Components

  • 4840-72MC metal cover: The heavy-duty metal cover over the 4840 closer body. Specified in high-traffic and abuse-prone accessible route entries. Replace when the cover is damaged, dented, or no longer clips to the body correctly.
  • 4840-334 cover endcap: The endcap at the terminal end of the cover that closes the housing. Replace when missing or cracked.
  • 4840-163 cover insert: The insert that fills the space between the cover body and the closer mechanism. Keeps the interior free of debris.
  • 4840-31 cover screw and 4840-31L long cover screw: Fasteners that secure the cover to the closer body. The long version (31L) is used in installations with additional spacer or stand-off components that require a longer fastener reach.

 

Decals

  • 4840-155-2 activation decal: The user-facing label that indicates how the door is activated. Required on accessible route doors where visual instruction must be provided to users approaching the door.
  • 4840-155-1 caution decal: The safety decal that warns users of the door operation. Replace when faded, missing, or illegible. Accessibility compliance on ADA routes typically requires that safety decals remain legible.

 

Screw Pack Selection

Two screw pack configurations are stocked for the LCN 4840. Selecting the wrong pack for the substrate is the most common fastener mismatch on 4840 installations.

  • 4840-TBWMS: Thru-bolt with wood and machine screw pack. Used when the 4840 is mounted to a wood substrate door or when the installation requires both wood and machine screws in the same configuration. The most common screw pack for standard 4840 installations.
  • 4840-WMS: Wood and machine screw pack without thru-bolts. Used in installations where thru-bolt mounting is not required or not possible. Confirm the original installation method before ordering the replacement screw pack.

 

Complete LCN 4840 Parts Reference

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
4840-3077CNSCUSH-N-STOP armArm
4840-3077SCNSSpring CUSH-N-STOP armArm
4840-3077EDAExtra Duty armArm
4840-159Arm screwArm hardware
4840-61Blade stop spacerArm hardware
4840-460Pneumatic hingePneumatic system
4840-459Door loop kitPneumatic system
4840-419Panel adapterMounting hardware
4840-3080Spring cush blockCUSH components
4840-30Cush shoe supportCUSH components
4840-201Fifth screw spacerMounting hardware
4840-182Stand-offMounting hardware
4840-124PlugMounting hardware
4840-72MCMetal coverCover components
4840-334Cover endcapCover components
4840-163Cover insertCover components
4840-31Cover screwCover hardware
4840-31LLong cover screwCover hardware
4840-TBWMSThru-bolt wood/machine screw packScrew packs
4840-WMSWood and machine screw packScrew packs
4840-155-2Activation decalDecals
4840-155-1Caution decalDecals
4840-Rebox KitRebox kit, box and instruction sheetDocumentation
4840-Instruction SheetInstruction sheetDocumentation
4840-Flat BoxFlat box with labelDocumentation

 

Source LCN 4840 Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks all 25 LCN 4840 parts across arms, pneumatic components, mounting hardware, covers, screw packs, and decals. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

The LCN 4840 is commonly found in healthcare corridor entries, university accessible route doors, and government facility main entries where multiple doors on the same accessible path must be controlled simultaneously. A single pneumatic source on the 4840 equalizes the opening force across all connected doors, ensuring consistent compliance with ADA force requirements along the entire route. When one door in a 4840 multi-door system fails, confirm whether the failure is isolated to that door (arm, pneumatic hinge, or door loop) or system-wide (air supply, control unit) before ordering parts. A system-wide failure will not be resolved by replacing a single door component.

For the broader LCN auto equalizer and pneumatic operator catalog, see the LCN Sentronic and Auto Equalizer parts guide and the door operators parts guide. For general LCN door closer parts, see the door closers parts guide and the LCN 4040XP parts guide.

For OEM versus aftermarket guidance on LCN parts, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For accessibility and ADA-compliant door hardware in healthcare settings, see the healthcare door hardware guide. For maintenance and inspection requirements, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and accessibility compliance consultants since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN 4840 parts catalog across all arm configurations, pneumatic components, mounting hardware, covers, and screw packs, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 4050AT Parts Guide: Track Arms, Rollers, Tracks, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 4050AT is a heavy-duty door closer that uses an AutoTemplate overhead concealed parallel arm system. Before ordering any LCN 4050AT parts, confirm these four things:

  • 4050AT vs 4050A: These are completely different products. The 4050A is a surface closer. The 4050AT uses a concealed overhead parallel arm track system. Their parts are not interchangeable.
  • Track variant: Four track options exist: 3038 (standard), 3038H (hold-open), 3038B (standard with bumper), and 3038HB (hold-open with bumper). Match the track to the function the door requires.
  • Roller match: The 3034 standard roller goes with standard tracks. The 3034H hold-open roller goes with hold-open tracks. A mismatched roller will prevent hold-open function from engaging.
  • Double egress: If the door swings in both directions, you need the 3077DE track arm and 78DE main arm and tube. Standard arms only swing one way.
  • 40 LCN 4050AT parts are stocked at Security Parts across all track, arm, roller, cylinder, cover, and hardware configurations.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 4050AT Is

The LCN 4050AT is the AutoTemplate configuration of the LCN 4050 Series heavy-duty door closer. Unlike the surface-mounted 4050A, the 4050AT uses an overhead concealed parallel arm track system. The closer body mounts inside the door header or above the door frame, and the arm travels along a track rail mounted to the door face to control the swing.

The 4050AT is commonly specified on heavy institutional doors in healthcare, education, and government facilities where a surface-mounted closer would create an obstruction or aesthetic conflict. The concealed track arm keeps the closer mechanism above the door line and out of the traffic path.

The 4050AT is a separate product from the 4050A. The two share some model naming but use completely different installation configurations and part catalogs. For guidance on the LCN 4050A surface closer and other LCN 4000 series models, see the LCN 4000 series parts guide. For related LCN overhead parallel arm closers, see the LCN 1250 parts guide and the LCN 1450 parts guide.

 

LCN 4050AT Track Arms

LCN 4050AT-3077T standard track arm replacement part for LCN 4050AT overhead parallel arm door closer

LCN 4050AT-3077T Standard Track Arm. View product page and order.

 

The track arm connects the closer spindle to the track roller and converts the rotational output of the closer into the linear sliding movement that controls door swing. Two track arm configurations are stocked.

 

4050AT-3077T: Standard Track Arm

The 4050AT-3077T is the standard track arm for single-direction swing doors. It attaches at the closer spindle on one end and connects to the track roller on the other. Replace when the arm is bent, cracked, or the spindle connection has stripped and the arm cannot be secured.

 

4050AT-3077DE: Double Egress Track Arm

The 4050AT-3077DE is the track arm for doors that swing in both directions. Double egress doors are common in healthcare corridor applications where staff push through from either side. The 3077DE arm must be used with the 4050AT-78DE main arm and tube; the standard arm components are not compatible with double egress configurations.

Also needed for arm attachment:

  • 4050AT-159 arm screw: The primary screw that secures the track arm to the closer spindle.
  • 4050AT-83H set screw: The set screw that locks the arm at the correct spindle engagement depth.
  • 4050AT-82 rod: The connecting rod between the main arm and the track arm on double egress configurations.

 

LCN 4050AT Track Assemblies

LCN 4050AT-3038 standard track replacement for LCN 4050AT AutoTemplate overhead concealed door closer

LCN 4050AT-3038 Standard Track. View product page and order.

 

The track is the rail mounted to the door face that guides the track roller as the door swings. Four track variants are stocked for the 4050AT, each serving a different functional requirement.

 

Choosing the Right Track Variant

Part NumberTypeHold-OpenBumperRoller Needed
4050AT-3038Standard trackNoNo3034
4050AT-3038HHold-open trackYesNo3034H
4050AT-3038BStandard track with bumperNoYes3034
4050AT-3038HBHold-open track with bumperYesYes3034H

The bumper variants add a rubber cushion at the open-limit end of the track that absorbs impact and reduces slam noise at the fully open position. Specify a bumper track when the door contacts a wall, stop, or another surface with enough force to cause noise or damage.

Also stocked for track installations:

  • 4050AT-169 track bumper assembly: A standalone replacement bumper for existing tracks that have lost or worn through their original bumper cushion.
  • 4050AT-73 end cap: The cap at the end of the track that retains the roller assembly within the track travel range.
  • 4050AT-425 roller lock screw: Secures the roller assembly in the track after installation. Replace when the roller is moving laterally in the track between service calls.

 

LCN 4050AT Track Rollers

LCN 4050AT-3034 track roller replacement for LCN 4050AT AutoTemplate door closer parallel arm system

LCN 4050AT-3034 Track Roller. View product page and order.

 

The track roller slides in the track rail and connects the arm assembly to the sliding movement that controls door swing. Two roller configurations are stocked, and they must be matched to the correct track type.

  • 4050AT-3034: Standard track roller. Used with 4050AT-3038 and 4050AT-3038B tracks.
  • 4050AT-3034H: Hold-open track roller. Used with 4050AT-3038H and 4050AT-3038HB tracks. The 3034H includes the engagement geometry needed for the hold-open function to arrest the door at the fully open position.

Installing a standard 3034 roller in a hold-open track defeats the hold-open function. The door will still close but will not hold at the open position. Replace the roller first when hold-open function has stopped working and the track itself appears undamaged.

 

Hold-Open Clip: 4050AT-3054

The 4050AT-3054 hold-open clip works with the hold-open roller and hold-open track to arrest the arm at the fully open position. The clip is a wear component on high-cycle doors. Replace when the door no longer holds at the open position despite having the correct 3034H roller and 3038H or 3038HB track installed.

 

LCN 4050AT Cylinder Assembly

LCN 4050AT-3071 standard cylinder assembly replacement for LCN 4050AT overhead parallel arm door closer

LCN 4050AT-3071 Cylinder Assembly. View product page and order.

 

The 4050AT-3071 standard cylinder assembly is the main hydraulic mechanism of the 4050AT closer. It controls closing speed and latching speed through internal valves. Replace the cylinder assembly when:

  • The door swings freely without resistance (complete hydraulic loss)
  • Closing speed and latching speed cannot be adjusted through the valve screws
  • Hydraulic fluid is visible on or around the closer body
  • The closer makes no resistance on the closing stroke even after adjustment

If the door closes but slams or is too slow to latch, try adjusting the closing and latching speed valves before ordering the cylinder assembly. If adjustment has no effect, the seals inside the cylinder have likely failed. For guidance on adjustments, see the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide.

 

Drop Plates and Mounting Hardware

The 4050AT uses drop plates to position the closer body at the correct height relative to the door and frame geometry. Two drop plate configurations are stocked:

  • 4050AT-18: Standard drop plate for top rail mounting. Used when the closer body requires standard drop height to align with the track.
  • 4050AT-18G: Alternate drop plate for modified top rail geometry. Confirm the existing plate part number from the installed unit before ordering.

 

Shaft Extender: 4050AT-480

The 4050AT-480 shaft extender bridges the gap between the closer spindle and the track arm on installations where the standard spindle length does not reach the arm connection point. It is most commonly needed when non-standard door or frame geometry shifts the mounting position beyond the standard spindle reach. If the track arm cannot be fully seated on the spindle during installation, the shaft extender is the correct solution.

 

Covers, Plugs, and Finish Hardware

  • 4050AT-72MC: Metal cover for the closer body. The metal cover is the heavy-duty version and is specified in high-traffic or abuse-prone applications where the standard cover may not hold up.
  • 4050AT-72: Standard cover for the closer body. Replace when the cover is cracked, missing, or no longer clips to the body correctly.
  • 4050AT-141-1 plug and 4050AT-141-2 plug: Plugs that fill unused mounting holes in the closer body. Replace when plugs are missing and debris or moisture may enter the housing.
  • 4050AT-73 end cap: The cap at the terminal end of the track extrusion that retains the roller assembly within the track travel range.

 

Screw Pack Selection Guide

The 4050AT uses different screw pack types depending on whether the installation is standard or hold-open, and depending on the substrate the track and closer are mounted to. Eight screw pack variants are stocked. Selecting the correct pack prevents the most common fastener mismatch on 4050AT service calls.

Part NumberFunctionConfiguration
4050AT-TBTRXThru-bolt Torx machine screw packStandard, metal door
4050AT-TORXTorx machine screwsStandard, metal door alternate
4050AT-TBWMSThru-bolt wood/machine screw packStandard, wood door
4050AT-WMSWood/machine screw packStandard, wood door alternate
4050AT-TBSRTThru-bolt self-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming substrate
4050AT-SRTSelf-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming substrate alternate
4050AT-HTBTRXHO thru-bolt Torx machine screw packHold-open, metal door
4050AT-HTORXHO Torx machine screwsHold-open, metal door alternate
4050AT-HTBWMSHO thru-bolt wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door
4050AT-HWMSHO wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door alternate
4050AT-HTBSRTHO thru-bolt self-reaming tap screw packHold-open, self-reaming substrate
4050AT-HSRTHO self-reaming tapping screw packHold-open, self-reaming substrate alternate

 

Complete LCN 4050AT Parts Reference

Part NumberDescription
4050AT-3077TStandard track arm
4050AT-3077DEDouble egress track arm
4050AT-78DEMain arm and tube (double egress)
4050AT-3038Standard track
4050AT-3038HHold-open track
4050AT-3038BStandard track with bumper
4050AT-3038HBHold-open track with bumper
4050AT-3034Standard track roller
4050AT-3034HHold-open track roller
4050AT-3071Standard cylinder assembly
4050AT-3054Hold-open clip
4050AT-18Drop plate, standard top rail
4050AT-18GDrop plate, alternate top rail
4050AT-480Shaft extender
4050AT-169Track bumper assembly
4050AT-72MCMetal cover
4050AT-72Standard cover
4050AT-82Rod (double egress)
4050AT-73Track end cap
4050AT-TBTRXStandard thru-bolt Torx machine screw pack
4050AT-HTBTRXHold-open thru-bolt Torx machine screw pack

 

What Fails First on the LCN 4050AT

Most 4050AT service calls on high-cycle institutional doors fall into one of four failure patterns. Identifying the correct failure before ordering prevents double service calls and wrong-part returns.

 

Track Roller Wear

The track roller is the highest-wear component on most 4050AT installations. It experiences direct friction contact with the track rail on every door cycle. Roller wear is gradual on normal-cycle doors but accelerates when the door is forced manually against the closer, when the track has debris, or when the door panel is misaligned. Replace the roller when the door produces a grinding or thumping sound during the swing arc, or when the arm visibly skips in the track.

 

Track Rail Damage

The track rail can be bent or damaged by impact from door panels, carts, and equipment. A bent track causes the roller to bind mid-travel and the closer to stall before the door reaches the fully closed position. Inspect the track first when the door stops closing before latching and the closer itself is otherwise functioning.

 

Hold-Open Clip Failure

The hold-open clip is a wear component on doors that are routinely pushed to the fully open position and held there throughout the day. When the clip wears, the door no longer holds at the open position even though all other components are functional. Replace the clip before replacing the roller or track on hold-open function failures.

 

Arm Screw Loosening

The arm screw (4050AT-159) that connects the track arm to the closer spindle can loosen on high-cycle applications. A loose arm screw causes the arm to slip on the spindle, which typically produces a click or skip at the start of the opening cycle. Re-tighten or replace the arm screw before assuming the arm itself has failed.

 

Where to Source LCN 4050AT Parts

Security Parts stocks all 40 LCN 4050AT parts across arms, tracks, rollers, cylinders, plates, covers, and screw packs. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

For guidance on scheduled inspection of door closers under NFPA 80, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist and the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide.

For related LCN door closer parts, see the LCN 4040XP parts guide, the LCN 4000 series parts guide, and the door closers parts guide. For help selecting the correct LCN closer for a new installation, see the LCN closer selection guide and the door closer sizing guide.

For installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer. For adjustment after installation or replacement, see how to adjust a commercial door closer. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN 4050AT parts catalog across all arm, track, roller, cylinder, cover, and hardware configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Adams Rite Parts Guide: Trim Kits, Lever Kits, Faceplates, and Strikes

Quick Answer

This is a replacement and ordering reference for the Adams Rite 91-series trim components and 2101-series strikes stocked at Security Parts. It covers part number decoding, finish codes, model compatibility, and handedness. If you need guidance on which Adams Rite product to specify for a new installation, see the retail storefront door hardware guide.

Key ordering rules for Adams Rite parts before you open the catalog:

  • 91-0202-01 vs 91-0202-02: These are inside trim and outside trim kits. They are not interchangeable. Confirm which face of the door needs service before ordering.
  • IP in the part number: Stands for Inside Pull. Not a generic designation. It describes the pull handle configuration specific to glass storefront inside trim.
  • MV8 vs MV7 vs MW0 lever kits: MV8 is right-hand. MV7 is left-hand. MW0 is universal. Order MW0 if you cannot confirm hand orientation.
  • 2190 vs 2290 faceplate kits: 91-0266-01 fits the 2190. 91-0266-04 fits the 2290. Confirm the model number stamped on the lock body before ordering.
  • 2101-01 vs 2101-02 strikes: 2101-01 is flat-corner. 2101-02 is radius-corner. The frame cutout profile determines which is correct.
  • Finish codes: US32D (satin chrome), 10B (oil rubbed bronze), 628 (satin aluminum), 313 (dark bronze). Must match the existing hardware finish.

Security Parts stocks 55 Adams Rite parts across trim kits, cover kits, designer lever kits, faceplate kits, and strikes. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

How the Adams Rite 91-Series Part Numbers Work

The 91-XXXX numbering system is not self-explanatory. Understanding it before placing any order prevents the most common wrong-part returns in Adams Rite service.

The number after the hyphen identifies the component family. The suffix after the second hyphen identifies either the finish, the hand orientation, or the model compatibility. Here is the breakdown of every family in the current Security Parts catalog:

PrefixComponent FamilySuffix Variable
91-0202-01Inside trim hardware kit (2190)01 = inside / 02 = outside
91-0202-02Outside trim hardware kit (2190)01 = inside / 02 = outside
91-0200-XXXXOutside trim cover kitFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0201-XXXXInside trim cover kitFinish code (US32D only in stock)
91-0197-MW0-XXXXDesigner lever kit, universalFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0197-MV8-XXXXDesigner lever kit, right-handFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0197-MV7-XXXXDesigner lever kit, left-handFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0266-01-XXXXFaceplate kit for 2190Finish code (628, 313)
91-0266-04-XXXXFaceplate kit for 2290Finish code (628, 313)
2101-01-XXXXFlat strike with dust boxFinish code (630, 121)
2101-02-XXXXRadius strike with dust boxFinish code (630, 121)

 

Trim Hardware Kits: 91-0202-01 and 91-0202-02

Adams Rite 91-0202-01-IP inside trim hardware kit for 2190 deadlatch glass storefront door

Adams Rite 91-0202-01-IP Inside Trim Hardware Kit. View product page and order.

 

The 91-0202 trim hardware kits supply the complete mounting and trim hardware for the 2190 deadlatch body. Two kits are stocked and serve different sides of the door.

  • 91-0202-01-IP: Inside trim hardware kit for the 2190. Covers all hardware components for the interior (egress) face of the door. The IP designation indicates Inside Pull configuration. Order this when servicing the interior trim of the installed 2190 deadlatch.
  • 91-0202-02-IP: Outside trim hardware kit for the 2190. Covers all hardware components for the exterior (entry) face of the door. Order this when servicing the exterior trim of the installed 2190.

Ordering 91-0202-02 when 91-0202-01 is needed (or vice versa) is the most common wrong-part return for Adams Rite 2190 trim service. Confirm which face of the door requires the replacement before placing the order.

 

Outside Trim Cover Kits: 91-0200 Series

Adams Rite 91-0200-US32D-IP outside trim cover kit for 2190 aluminum storefront deadlatch

Adams Rite 91-0200-US32D-IP Outside Trim Cover Kit. View product page and order.

 

The 91-0200 outside trim cover kits supply the cover plate assembly for the exterior face of the 2190 deadlatch. The cover kit protects the trim mechanism housing and provides the finished appearance on the exterior side. Two finishes are stocked:

The corresponding inside trim cover kit is the 91-0201-US32D (satin chrome), available for the interior face.

 

Designer Lever Kits: 91-0197 Series

Adams Rite 91-0197-MW0-US32D-IP designer lever kit universal hand for 2190 storefront deadlatch

Adams Rite 91-0197-MW0-US32D-IP Designer Lever Kit (Universal). View product page and order.

 

The 91-0197 designer lever kits supply a lever-style handle for the Adams Rite 2190 trim. The lever mounts to the inside face of the door. Three hand-orientation codes are stocked, each available in two finishes, for a total of six configurations.

 

Hand Orientation: MW0, MV8, MV7

Hand orientation is determined by the hinge position when you stand on the outside (entry side) of the door and face it. If the hinges are on your right, the door is right-hand. If on your left, it is left-hand.

  • MW0: Universal hand. Fits both right-hand and left-hand doors. Order MW0 when you cannot confirm the door hand or when stocking a single part for multiple installations.
  • MV8: Right-hand only.
  • MV7: Left-hand only.

 

91-0197 Lever Kits by Finish

Part NumberHandFinish
91-0197-MW0-US32D-IPUniversalUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MW0-10B-IPUniversal10B (oil rubbed bronze)
91-0197-MV8-US32D-IPRight-handUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MV8-10B-IPRight-hand10B (oil rubbed bronze)
91-0197-MV7-US32D-IPLeft-handUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MV7-10B-IPLeft-hand10B (oil rubbed bronze)

 

Faceplate Kits: 91-0266 Series (2190 vs 2290)

Adams Rite 91-0266-01-628-IP faceplate kit for 2190 deadlatch aluminum storefront door

Adams Rite 91-0266-01-628-IP Faceplate Kit (2190). View product page and order.

 

The 91-0266 faceplate kits replace the edge plate on the Adams Rite lock body. The faceplate covers the latch bolt opening at the door edge and carries the lock body cutout geometry. Model compatibility is the critical variable: 2190 and 2290 lock bodies use different faceplate dimensions.

Check the model number stamped directly on the edge of the lock body before ordering. On an installed Adams Rite, the model number is readable with a flashlight at the door edge when the door is slightly open.

 

Adams Rite 2101 Strikes: Flat vs Radius

Adams Rite 2101-02-630 radius strike with dust box for 2190 deadlatch aluminum storefront door

Adams Rite 2101-02-630 Radius Strike with Dust Box. View product page and order.

 

The 2101 series strikes mount in the door frame and receive the Adams Rite 2190 deadlatch bolt when the door closes. All 2101 strikes include a dust box, which is a small flip-spring cover that closes over the strike pocket when the door is open and prevents debris from accumulating in the bolt engagement area.

 

2101-01: Standard Flat Strike

The flat strike has square corners on the face plate. The correct choice when the frame cutout has square corners.

  • 2101-01-630: Flat strike with dust box, finish 630 (satin stainless steel).
  • 2101-01-121: Flat strike with dust box, finish 121 (dull bronze).

 

2101-02: Radius Strike

The radius strike has rounded corners on the face plate. The correct choice when the frame cutout has radius (rounded) corners, which is common on most extruded aluminum door frames.

  • 2101-02-630: Radius strike with dust box, finish 630 (satin stainless steel).
  • 2101-02-121: Radius strike with dust box, finish 121 (dull bronze).

If you cannot confirm the frame cutout profile, the radius strike (2101-02) is the more common choice for aluminum extruded door frames. For guidance on strike compatibility with other commercial locks, see the strike plates, deadlatches, and latch bolt parts guide.

 

Finish Code Reference

Adams Rite finish codes follow standard ANSI/BHMA A156.18 designations. Ordering the wrong finish is a common mistake when service calls happen under time pressure. This table covers every finish code in the current Security Parts Adams Rite catalog:

CodeFinish NameCommon Application
US32DSatin chromeTrim kits, cover kits, lever kits
10BOil rubbed bronzeTrim kits, cover kits, lever kits
628Satin aluminumFaceplate kits (most common for aluminum frames)
313Dark bronzeFaceplate kits (dark bronze aluminum frames)
630Satin stainless steelStrikes (most common for aluminum frames)
121Dull bronzeStrikes (bronze frame applications)

 

Quick Ordering Reference: All Adams Rite Parts in Stock

Part NumberDescriptionFinish / Hand
91-0202-01-IPInside trim hardware kit (2190)Inside/egress face
91-0202-02-IPOutside trim hardware kit (2190)Outside/entry face
91-0200-US32D-IPOutside trim cover kitUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0200-10B-IPOutside trim cover kit10B (oil rubbed bronze)
91-0201-US32DInside trim cover kitUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MW0-US32D-IPDesigner lever kit, universalUS32D
91-0197-MW0-10B-IPDesigner lever kit, universal10B
91-0197-MV8-US32D-IPDesigner lever kit, right-handUS32D
91-0197-MV8-10B-IPDesigner lever kit, right-hand10B
91-0197-MV7-US32D-IPDesigner lever kit, left-handUS32D
91-0197-MV7-10B-IPDesigner lever kit, left-hand10B
91-0266-01-628-IPFaceplate kit, 2190628 (satin aluminum)
91-0266-01-313-IPFaceplate kit, 2190313 (dark bronze)
91-0266-04-628-IPFaceplate kit, 2290628 (satin aluminum)
91-0266-04-313-IPFaceplate kit, 2290313 (dark bronze)
2101-01-630Flat strike with dust box630 (satin stainless)
2101-01-121Flat strike with dust box121 (dull bronze)
2101-02-630Radius strike with dust box630 (satin stainless)
2101-02-121Radius strike with dust box121 (dull bronze)

 

How to Identify Which Adams Rite Part You Need Before Ordering

Service calls on Adams Rite installations follow a consistent pattern. The lock body is installed in the door edge, the trim hardware is on the door faces, and the strike is in the frame. When something fails, the first step is identifying which component is at fault before pulling part numbers.

 

If the Latch Does Not Spring Back Correctly

This is a trim hardware or lock body issue, not a strike issue. The trim hardware kits (91-0202-01 and 91-0202-02) contain the springs and mechanical linkages that operate the inside and outside trim. If the inside thumb turn or outside pull does not return smoothly, the trim hardware kit for that face of the door is the starting point. Confirm which face is affected and order the corresponding kit.

 

If the Door Does Not Latch When Closed

Start at the strike (2101-01 or 2101-02) before touching the lock body. A strike that has shifted position in the frame, has a damaged dust box blocking the bolt pocket, or has a worn keeper can prevent the latch bolt from seating. Remove the strike, clear the pocket, and confirm proper alignment before ordering a replacement lock body component.

 

If the Lever or Handle Is Physically Damaged

The designer lever kit (91-0197 series) or trim cover kit (91-0200 or 91-0201 series) handles the visible hardware on each face of the door. These components are replaceable without disturbing the lock body. Confirm the finish (US32D or 10B) and the door hand (MV8 right, MV7 left, MW0 universal) before ordering. When in doubt about hand orientation, order MW0.

 

If the Faceplate at the Door Edge Is Damaged

The faceplate kit (91-0266 series) covers the plate at the door edge that frames the latch bolt cutout. It is frequently damaged when a door is forced or when pry-in access is attempted on the frame. Confirm the lock body model (2190 or 2290) by reading the stamp on the existing faceplate or lock body casting before ordering. The 2190 and 2290 faceplate kits are not interchangeable.

 

The Four Questions to Answer Before Placing Any Adams Rite Parts Order

  1. Which face of the door? Inside (egress) or outside (entry) determines 91-0202-01 vs 91-0202-02 and cover kit selection.
  2. Which lock body model? 2190 or 2290 determines the faceplate kit (91-0266-01 vs 91-0266-04).
  3. What finish? US32D, 10B, 628, 313, 630, or 121 must match existing hardware.
  4. What hand (for lever kits)? Right-hand (MV8), left-hand (MV7), or universal (MW0).

If you cannot confirm any of these before ordering, call 845-935-0301. Providing the door address and installation date allows the Security Parts team to cross-reference what was typically installed and narrow down the correct part number before anything ships.

 

Source Adams Rite Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks 55 Adams Rite parts across trim hardware kits, outside and inside trim cover kits, designer lever kits, faceplate kits, and 2101 strikes. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

The most common field service scenario for Adams Rite 2190 trim parts involves a damaged or worn trim kit component on an aluminum storefront glass door that has been in service for several years. Before calling to order, have the following information ready: the model number from the lock body edge (2190 or 2290), the finish code from the existing hardware, and which face of the door needs service (inside or outside). With those three pieces of information confirmed, the correct part can be identified from this guide and shipped same day.

For complete replacement and repair guidance on commercial door hardware, see the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide. For scheduled maintenance and inspection guidance relevant to commercial door lock hardware under NFPA 80, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

For Adams Rite product selection guidance, installation context, and aluminum storefront hardware scheduling, see the retail storefront door hardware guide.

For electric strike compatibility with Adams Rite deadlatches, see the electric strikes guide and how to install an electric strike. For access control integration, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

For OEM versus aftermarket parts guidance, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For ANSI/BHMA finish and hardware standards, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Adams Rite 91-series trim catalog and 2101-series strikes with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 9530IQ Parts Guide: SlidePro Motor, Controller, Track, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 9530IQ is the current generation of the LCN SlidePro automatic sliding door operator. Ordering the right LCN 9530IQ parts requires confirming three things before opening any catalog:

  • Model number first: 9530IQ (single door, pull-side), 9540IQ (single door, push-side), 9550IQ (simultaneous pair), 9560IQ (independent pair). Motor gearbox, controller, and arm assemblies are all model-specific. Parts ordered for the wrong model will not fit.
  • IQ vs legacy 9530: The 9530IQ uses a digital controller and current-generation motor gearbox. Legacy 9530 (non-IQ) units share some mechanical parts but the 3454 motor gearbox and 3462 controller are not interchangeable.
  • Motor gearbox vs controller failure: Grinding or stalling = motor gearbox (9530IQ-3454). Powered but unresponsive = controller (9530IQ-3462). Diagnosing correctly before ordering prevents the most common wrong-part return in SlidePro service.
  • DPS cable is not a general power cable. The 9530IQ-519 DPS cable connects the door position sensor to the controller. Using a standard cable causes sensor errors and erratic door behavior.
  • 206 LCN SlidePro parts are stocked at Security Parts across the 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ families.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support on LCN 9530IQ parts before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 9530IQ SlidePro Is

The LCN 9530IQ is the Intelligent Que generation of the LCN SlidePro, an automatic sliding door operator designed for surface-mounted installation on sliding door systems at high-footfall commercial entrances. It is widely installed in healthcare facilities, hotel lobbies, grocery and retail stores, university buildings, and airport terminal corridors where bi-parting or single-panel sliding automatic doors are required for ADA accessibility and high-volume traffic flow.

The SlidePro mounts in the header above the door opening. The motor gearbox drives the arm assembly that moves the door panel. The controller processes activation signals from motion sensors, push plates, and access control systems and manages open, hold, and close timing. The track and roller system guides the door panel through its travel path.

The 9530IQ is a separate product family from the LCN Senior Swing IQ swing operators and the LCN Benchmark swing operators. Parts between the sliding and swing families are not interchangeable. For swing operator parts, see the LCN Senior Swing IQ parts guide and the LCN Benchmark Senior Swing guide. For the full LCN automatic door operator catalog, see the commercial door operators guide.

 

LCN SlidePro Model Selection: 9530IQ vs 9540IQ vs 9550IQ vs 9560IQ

The four SlidePro IQ models share the same core architecture but differ in door configuration and arm assembly type. Ordering parts for the wrong model is the leading cause of wrong-part returns on SlidePro service calls. Confirm the model number on the operator label before ordering any component.

ModelApplicationDoor ConfigArm Type
9530IQSingle door, pull-sideOperator on pull side of headerTrack arm (9530IQ-3077T)
9540IQSingle door, push-sideOperator on push side of headerRod-and-shoe (9540IQ-3077 / 9540IQ-79)
9550IQSimultaneous bi-parting pairBoth panels move together on activationTrack arm (pull) + rod-and-shoe (push) + companion cable
9560IQIndependent bi-parting pairEach panel activates independentlyTrack arm (pull) + rod-and-shoe (push)

 

LCN 9530IQ Motor Gearbox: 9530IQ-3454

LCN 9530IQ-3454 motor gearbox replacement part for LCN SlidePro automatic sliding door operator

LCN 9530IQ-3454 Motor Gearbox. View product page and order.

 

The 9530IQ-3454 motor gearbox is the primary drive unit of the LCN 9530IQ SlidePro. It converts electrical power from the controller into mechanical force that moves the door panel through the arm assembly. The motor gearbox is the highest-wear component on high-cycle SlidePro installations such as supermarket entrances and hospital main corridors.

 

When to Replace the Motor Gearbox

  • Door stalls at a consistent point during travel (partial or full stall)
  • Door moves but with significantly reduced force compared to normal operation
  • Grinding, clicking, or mechanical noise audible from the operator housing
  • Motor attempts to run but door does not move (arm connected and confirmed)

A motor gearbox that stalls intermittently under load but runs freely without load has typically exceeded its service life. On high-cycle entrances, proactive gearbox replacement during a scheduled service visit prevents unplanned downtime.

Each model uses its own motor gearbox. The 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ each have a dedicated -3454 part:

 

LCN 9530IQ Controller: 9530IQ-3462

LCN 9530IQ-3462 controller replacement for LCN SlidePro sliding door operator digital control board

LCN 9530IQ-3462 Controller. View product page and order.

 

The 9530IQ-3462 controller is the Intelligent Que digital control board that manages all SlidePro functions: activation signal processing, open/hold/close timing, door speed, and safety sensor integration. The IQ controller is what distinguishes the 9530IQ from the legacy 9530 series: it uses a digital logic board rather than the older analog control system.

 

When to Replace the Controller

  • Operator has power but does not respond to activation signals
  • LED status indicators are absent, erratic, or not matching expected states
  • Door speed and hold-open timing cannot be adjusted at the controller
  • Safety reverse function is not triggering when the door path is obstructed
  • Operator worked correctly after power reset but fails again within a short period

Each model uses its own controller unit. The 9530IQ-3462, 9540IQ-3462, 9550IQ-3462, and 9560IQ-3462 are model-specific and not interchangeable. For access control integration with the SlidePro controller, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

LCN 9530IQ Track and Roller Components

LCN 9530IQ-3034 track roller replacement for LCN SlidePro sliding door operator track system

LCN 9530IQ-3034 Track Roller. View product page and order.

 

Standard Track: 9530IQ-3038

The 9530IQ-3038 standard track is the extrusion rail that the track roller travels along as the door panel opens and closes. Track damage is common on high-traffic installations where objects impact the header area or where the door panel has jumped the track due to a failed roller. Replace the track when the extrusion is bent, when the track surface is worn into the roller contact area, or when the track ends are damaged and no longer retain the roller assembly.

 

Track Roller: 9530IQ-3034

The 9530IQ-3034 track roller is the wheel that rides in the track and connects the arm assembly to the sliding movement of the door. Roller wear is a gradual process on standard-cycle entrances but accelerates significantly when the track has debris, when the door panel is misaligned, or when the door is repeatedly forced manually against the motor. Replace the track roller when the roller bearing is seized, when there is visible flat-spotting on the roller surface, or when the door produces a rhythmic thumping noise during travel.

 

End Caps and Track End Hardware

End caps protect the ends of the track extrusion and prevent the roller assembly from traveling beyond the door travel limit. Two end cap configurations are stocked:

  • 9530IQ-334R: Right-side end cap
  • 9530IQ-334L: Left-side end cap
  • 9530IQ-163-1: End cap cover insert for RF window integration
  • 9530IQ-73: Track end cap for the track extrusion termination

 

LCN 9530IQ Arm Assembly

LCN 9530IQ-3077T standard arm replacement for LCN 9530IQ SlidePro pull-side sliding door operator

LCN 9530IQ-3077T Standard Arm. View product page and order.

 

The arm assembly connects the motor gearbox spindle to the track roller, converting the rotational output of the gearbox into the linear movement that slides the door panel. The arm type differs between the pull-side and push-side models.

 

Pull-Side Arms: 9530IQ and 9550IQ

The 9530IQ and 9550IQ pull-side operators use track arms:

  • 9530IQ-3077T: Standard track arm for 9530IQ single-door pull-side installations
  • 9530IQ-3077PLCM: Standard arm with track (arm and track combined as a single assembly)

 

Push-Side Arms: 9540IQ and 9560IQ

The 9540IQ and 9560IQ push-side operators use rod-and-shoe arm assemblies that operate from the push side of the header. These are completely different from pull-side track arms and are not interchangeable:

  • 9540IQ-3077: Standard arm for 9540IQ push-side
  • 9540IQ-3077L: Long arm for wider push-side openings
  • 9540IQ-79: Standard rod and shoe
  • 9540IQ-79LR: Long rod and shoe for extended reach
  • 9540IQ-77: Main arm body for 9540IQ push-side configuration
  • 9540IQ-3077TLS: Telescoping arm for variable-width openings
  • 9540IQ-3077LNGTLS: Telescoping long arm for wider openings

 

Cables and Wiring Components

9530IQ-519 DPS Cable

The DPS cable connects the door position sensor in the track to the controller. The position sensor tells the controller where the door is in its travel path at all times, enabling the controller to manage open and close limits, safety reversal, and hold-open behavior. On single-door 9530IQ installations, the DPS cable runs within the header. On 9550IQ and 9560IQ paired installations, it also links between the two operator units.

The DPS cable is not interchangeable with a standard power or signal cable. If the DPS cable fails and is replaced with a standard cable, the controller will not receive position data and the door will exhibit erratic behavior or fail to operate at all.

 

9550IQ-982 Companion Cable

The companion cable is the inter-operator communication cable required in every 9550IQ simultaneous bi-parting installation. Both pull-side and push-side operators must receive synchronized activation signals to open and close simultaneously. Without the companion cable, the two units cannot communicate and the doors will not open together. The companion cable is frequently overlooked when ordering replacement parts for paired 9550IQ systems.

 

9530IQ-518 Cable and Parts Bag

The 9530IQ-518 cable and parts bag includes the miscellaneous short cables, connectors, and hardware items used in the standard 9530IQ installation. This kit is typically ordered when a unit has been removed from service, partial components have been lost, or a fresh installation requires the complete cable set.

 

Mounting Hardware: Baseplates, Mounting Plates, and Brackets

  • 9530IQ-10 standard baseplate: The primary mounting plate that attaches the 9530IQ operator body to the header structure. The standard baseplate is for single-door installations.
  • 9530IQ-10-DD double door baseplate: Required for bi-parting 9550IQ/9560IQ paired installations where both operators share a common header attachment point.
  • 9530IQ-18 mounting plate: Secondary mounting component for aligning the operator within the header assembly.
  • 9530IQ-475 gearbox mounting bracket: Secures the motor gearbox to the baseplate. Replace when the bracket is bent or when the gearbox has shifted position during operation.
  • 9530IQ-575 controller mounting bracket: Positions the controller board within the operator housing.

 

Covers, End Plates, and Housing Components

  • 9530IQ-72MC standard cover: The main cover panel over the operator body. Replace when damaged or when the cover no longer clips to the housing correctly.
  • 9530IQ-72MC-DD double door cover: Extended cover for dual-operator bi-parting header assemblies.
  • 9530IQ-511 dress plate: Extrusion trim plate for aesthetic finishing of the exposed header face. Used when the installation requires a finished appearance.
  • 9530IQ-12 blank filler plate: Fills unused header sections where the full extrusion length exceeds the operator assembly width.
  • 9530IQ-11A spindle plate (2-3/4 inch): The plate at the gearbox spindle exit point. The 11A is for 2-3/4-inch spindle positions.
  • 9530IQ-11B spindle plate (3-3/4 inch): For 3-3/4-inch spindle positions.

 

Header Assemblies and Header Extrusions

The header system provides the structural housing for the entire 9530IQ operator, track, and arm assembly. Header components are ordered when the full header assembly is being installed, replaced, or extended for a wider opening:

  • 9530-3572HL header assembly: Complete header assembly for 9530 pull-side installations
  • 9530-572HL header extrusion only: The header channel extrusion for custom-length applications
  • 9530-572DD double door header: The extended header for bi-parting installations
  • 9530-3572DD double door header assembly: Complete double door header with all integrated hardware

 

Rocker Switch Assembly: 9530-3179

The 9530-3179 rocker switch assembly is the manual control switch mounted on the operator housing for direct local operation, power cycling, and mode selection. Note that the 9530 rocker switch (without the IQ suffix) is the correct part number for the 9530IQ model as well. The 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ each have their own rocker switch assembly with the model prefix.

Replace the rocker switch when the switch fails to change modes or power cycle the unit, when the switch contacts are corroded or physically damaged, or when the switch no longer returns to the neutral position after being pressed.

 

LCN 9530IQ Parts at a Glance

Part NumberComponentModels
9530IQ-3454Motor gearbox9530IQ only
9540IQ-3454Motor gearbox9540IQ only
9550IQ-3454Motor gearbox9550IQ only
9560IQ-3454Motor gearbox9560IQ only
9530IQ-3462IQ digital controller9530IQ only
9530IQ-3034Track roller9530IQ, 9550IQ
9530IQ-3038Standard track9530IQ, 9550IQ
9530IQ-3077TStandard track arm9530IQ pull-side
9530IQ-334RRight end cap9530IQ
9530IQ-334LLeft end cap9530IQ
9530IQ-519DPS cable9530IQ
9550IQ-982Companion cable9550IQ bi-parting pairs
9530-3179Rocker switch assembly9530IQ (note: no IQ suffix)
9530IQ-475Gearbox mounting bracket9530IQ
9530IQ-18Mounting plate9530IQ
9530IQ-10Standard baseplate9530IQ single door
9530IQ-10-DDDouble door baseplate9550IQ/9560IQ paired

 

Source LCN 9530IQ SlidePro Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks all 206 LCN SlidePro parts across the 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ families. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

For the complete LCN automatic door operator catalog, see the door operators parts guide and the commercial door operators guide. For LCN swing operator parts, see the LCN Senior Swing IQ guide and the LCN Benchmark Senior Swing guide. For hold-open and sentronic automatic door parts, see the LCN Sentronic guide.

For guidance on OEM versus aftermarket parts on LCN operators, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For automatic door hardware by building type, see the healthcare guide, hotels and motels guide, universities and colleges guide, government buildings guide, and warehouses and industrial guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, automatic door technicians, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN SlidePro parts catalog across all 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 1250 Parts Guide: Arms, Shoes, Screws, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 1250 is a surface-mounted overhead parallel arm door closer widely used on aluminum storefront doors, glass doors, and light commercial entries. Before ordering any LCN 1250 parts, you need to know three things:

  • 3077 vs 3049: The 3077 suffix is the standard (non-hold-open) arm. The 3049 suffix is the hold-open arm. Every arm style in the 1250 catalog comes in both versions.
  • 62A vs 62PA shoe: The 1250-62A is the standard auxiliary shoe. The 1250-62PA is the PA hold-open shoe. They are not interchangeable. Match the shoe to the arm.
  • EDA vs CUSH vs standard: EDA (Extra Duty Arm) is for high-abuse applications. CUSH is the cushioned stop version. Standard arms are for normal traffic. Confirm which is installed before ordering.
  • 29 LCN 1250 parts are stocked at Security Parts across all arm configurations, shoes, screws, covers, spacers, adapters, and cylinder assemblies.
  • The 1250-419 panel adapter is required on narrow bottom rail aluminum storefront doors. If the closer was installed on a storefront without this adapter, check whether one is missing before ordering a replacement arm.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support on LCN 1250 parts before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 1250 Series Is

The LCN 1250 is a surface-mounted, track arm (parallel arm) door closer designed for light commercial and storefront applications. Unlike surface-applied standard arm closers, the 1250 uses a parallel arm and a shoe that tracks along a rail to control door swing, which keeps the closer body parallel to the door face rather than projecting outward.

This configuration makes the 1250 well-suited for aluminum storefront doors, narrow-stile glass doors, and any application where a projecting standard arm would be a clearance or aesthetic problem. The closer mounts to the door face with the cylinder body concealed behind the arm assembly when viewed from the pull side.

The 1250 is a separate product family from the LCN 1450 and 1460 series. Parts between these families are not interchangeable. For 1450 parts, see the LCN 1450 door closer parts guide. For the broader LCN closer catalog, see the LCN commercial door closer selection guide.

 

Decoding the LCN 1250 Part Number Suffixes

The most common source of wrong-part orders on LCN 1250 replacements is misreading the arm suffix. Every 1250 arm carries a suffix that encodes three things: the arm body style, whether it holds the door open, and the shoe type. Understanding the suffix before opening the parts catalog prevents the majority of ordering errors.

SuffixMeaningWhen It Applies
3077Standard arm, non-hold-openDoor should return closed after every use
3049Hold-open armDoor should hold open at the fully open position
EDAExtra Duty Arm (reinforced)High-traffic or high-abuse applications
CUSHCushioned stopDoor requires a soft stop at the fully open position
LLong armDoor requires a longer arm for wider doors or offset hinge positions
PAParallel arm, PA shoeArm designed for use with the 1250-62PA hold-open shoe
SCNSSpring CUSH, non-stopSpring-loaded CUSH arm without hard stop

 

LCN 1250 Track Arm Assemblies

LCN 1250-3077EDA extra duty arm replacement part for LCN 1250 Series door closer

LCN 1250-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm. View product page and order.

 

Standard Arms (3077 and 3049)

The standard LCN 1250 arm assemblies cover the majority of replacement orders. All standard arms use the 1250-62A auxiliary shoe.

  • 1250-3077: Standard non-hold-open arm. The door returns closed after every use. Used on entries where free passage is not required.
  • 1250-307762A: Standard arm with the 1250-62A auxiliary shoe pre-included in the assembly. Replaces the arm and shoe together in a single order.
  • 1250-3049: Hold-open arm. The door holds at the fully open position when pushed past the hold-open point.

 

Extra Duty Arms (EDA): 1250-3077EDA and 1250-3049EDA

The EDA arms are reinforced for high-traffic and high-abuse applications. If a standard arm has failed prematurely on a high-cycle door: storefront entries, service corridors, or school exits. The EDA arm is the correct replacement. Installing a standard arm on an EDA application will result in the same premature failure.

  • 1250-3077EDA: Extra duty arm, non-hold-open. The most commonly specified EDA replacement on standard storefront entries.
  • 1250-3049EDA: Extra duty arm with hold-open function. Use this on high-traffic entries where the door must also hold at the fully open position.

LCN 1250-3049EDA hold-open extra duty arm for LCN 1250 Series overhead parallel arm door closer

LCN 1250-3049EDA Hold-Open EDA Arm. View product page and order.

 

CUSH-N-STOP Arms: 1250-3077CUSH and 1250-3049CUSH

CUSH arms include a spring-cushioned stop that reduces impact noise and door slam at the fully open position. They are specified on applications where hard door contact with a stop is creating noise or where door or frame impact damage is occurring.

  • 1250-3077CUSH: CUSH-N-STOP arm, non-hold-open. Provides the cushioned stop without holding the door open.
  • 1250-3049CUSH: CUSH arm with hold-open function. Provides both the cushioned stop and hold-open capability.

 

Long Arms: 1250-3077L and 1250-3049L

Long arms are used when the standard arm length creates poor geometry between the closer body and the door pivot, or when a wider door requires a longer arm reach. Confirm the door width and hinge position against the manufacturer's sizing chart before ordering a long arm replacement.

 

PA Arms: 1250-3077PA and 1250-3049PA

PA arms are designed for use with the 1250-62PA parallel arm hold-open shoe instead of the standard 1250-62A shoe. The PA arm and PA shoe are paired. The 1250-62PA shoe cannot be used with standard 1250 arms, and standard shoes cannot be used with PA arms.

  • 1250-3077PA: PA arm, non-hold-open. Use with the 1250-62PA shoe.
  • 1250-3049PA: PA arm with hold-open function. Use with the 1250-62PA shoe.

 

LCN 1250 Auxiliary Shoes

The auxiliary shoe is the component that slides in the track rail and connects the arm to the door frame. Shoes wear faster than arms on high-cycle installations because they experience direct friction contact with the rail on every door operation.

 

1250-62A: Standard Auxiliary Shoe

LCN 1250-62A auxiliary shoe replacement part for LCN 1250 Series parallel arm door closer

LCN 1250-62A Auxiliary Shoe. View product page and order.

 

The 1250-62A is the standard auxiliary shoe for the LCN 1250 Series. It is used with all standard, EDA, CUSH, and long arm assemblies. Replace the 1250-62A when:

  • The door makes a grinding or scraping sound at the end of the opening cycle
  • The shoe is visibly worn, cracked, or has stripped mounting threads
  • The arm assembly moves laterally in the track rather than sliding smoothly

 

1250-62PA: PA Hold-Open Shoe

The 1250-62PA is the PA series auxiliary shoe, used exclusively with the 1250-3077PA and 1250-3049PA arm assemblies. It incorporates the hold-open function into the shoe mechanism rather than into the arm. The 1250-62PA and 1250-62A are not interchangeable. If you have a PA arm installed, confirm the 62PA shoe is also PA-spec before replacing it with the standard 62A.

 

Mounting Plates, Spacers, and the Panel Adapter

Mounting Plates: 1250-18 and 1250-18PA

The 1250-18 is the standard mounting plate for the LCN 1250. The 1250-18PA is the drop plate version, used when the closer needs to be repositioned vertically to clear the door rail or to accommodate non-standard door geometry. Use the 1250-18PA when the standard mounting position creates a binding condition between the arm and the door frame.

 

1250-419 Panel Adapter

LCN 1250-419 panel adapter for narrow bottom rail aluminum storefront door closer installation

LCN 1250-419 Panel Adapter. View product page and order.

 

The 1250-419 panel adapter is required on aluminum storefront doors with narrow bottom rails where the standard closer mounting position does not provide enough clearance between the closer body and the door bottom. Without the panel adapter on these doors, the closer body contacts the bottom rail and the arm geometry is incorrect.

If a 1250 was installed on a narrow-rail storefront without the 1250-419 and the arm is binding or the closer is not functioning correctly, verify that the panel adapter was included in the original installation before replacing other components.

 

1250-201 Spacer and 1250-61 Blade Stop Spacer

  • 1250-201 spacer: A general spacer used to create clearance between the closer and the door or frame face in installations where standard mounting is too close to the surface. Replace when the spacer is damaged or missing.
  • 1250-61 blade stop spacer: A thin spacer used at the blade stop position to adjust the door open limit. Used when the door is contacting the frame or an adjacent surface before the arm reaches its natural stop position.

 

Fasteners: Screw Packs and Universal Arm Screw

Fastener failures account for a significant share of LCN 1250 field calls where the installer assumes a component has failed when the issue is simply a loose or stripped screw. Three fastener options are stocked:

  • 1250-TBTRX screw pack: TORX (6-point star drive) fastener pack for current-generation 1250 arm assemblies. The TBTRX is the standard screw pack for most post-2000 LCN 1250 installations. Use when the current screws are TORX-head.
  • 1250-TORX screw pack: An alternate TORX screw pack for 1250 installations where the specific thread profile of the TBTRX does not match the existing hardware. Confirm the thread pitch before ordering if unsure which pack applies.
  • 1250-UNIV-ARM-SCREW: The universal arm screw for attaching the 1250 arm to the closer spindle. Replace when the arm is loose at the spindle connection and tightening the existing screw does not resolve the play.

 

Cover and Finish Components

  • 1250-72 slim line cover: The decorative cover over the 1250 closer body. Replace when the cover is damaged, cracked, or missing. The slim line cover is aesthetic, but a missing cover exposes the cylinder body to debris and increases the risk of accidental damage to the hydraulic seals. Two variants of the 1250-72 are stocked to match different finish configurations.
  • 1250-146 pinion cap cover: The small cap that covers the pinion shaft on the closer body. Replace when the cap is missing or has been damaged during arm installation. Missing pinion caps allow dust and grit to enter the shaft area over time.

 

1250-3080 Spring CUSH Block and 1250-30 CUSH Shoe Support

  • 1250-3080 spring CUSH block: The spring-loaded cushioning block used in CUSH-N-STOP arm assemblies. Replace when the CUSH block no longer provides resistance at the fully open position, or when the block is fractured. A failed CUSH block turns a CUSH arm into an effectively standard arm with no cushioning at the stop position.
  • 1250-30 CUSH shoe support: The structural support bracket for the CUSH shoe. Replace when the support is bent or cracked, which typically occurs after repeated impacts on installations with high opening force.

 

1250-3071 Cylinder Assembly

The 1250-3071 cylinder assembly is the main hydraulic mechanism of the LCN 1250 closer. It controls closing speed and latching speed through internal valves and fluid pressure. The cylinder assembly is replaced when the closer has lost hydraulic function, the door no longer closes at a controlled speed, or the body is leaking fluid.

Unlike arm and shoe replacements, cylinder assembly replacement requires correctly resetting the valve adjustments for closing speed, latching speed, and back check. For guidance on adjustment after closer servicing, see the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide.

 

All LCN 1250 Parts at a Glance

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
1250-3077Standard armNon-hold-open
1250-307762AStandard arm with 62A shoeArm and shoe kit
1250-3049Standard hold-open armHold-open
1250-3077EDAExtra duty armHigh-abuse, non-hold-open
1250-3049EDAExtra duty hold-open armHigh-abuse, hold-open
1250-3077CUSHCUSH-N-STOP armCushioned stop, non-hold-open
1250-3049CUSHCUSH hold-open armCushioned stop, hold-open
1250-3077LLong armWide door, non-hold-open
1250-3049LLong hold-open armWide door, hold-open
1250-3077PAPA armPA shoe, non-hold-open
1250-3049PAPA hold-open armPA shoe, hold-open
1250-3049SCNSSpring CUSH armSpring-loaded CUSH, non-stop
1250-62AAuxiliary shoe (standard)All standard, EDA, CUSH, L arms
1250-62PAPA hold-open shoePA arm assemblies only
1250-TBTRXTORX screw packStandard fastener pack
1250-UNIV-ARM-SCREWUniversal arm screwArm-to-spindle attachment
1250-201SpacerClearance between closer and surface
1250-61Blade stop spacerOpen limit adjustment
1250-18PA18PA drop plateRepositioned mounting
1250-419Panel adapterNarrow bottom rail storefronts
1250-72Slim line coverCloser body protection and aesthetics
1250-146Pinion cap coverPinion shaft protection
1250-3080Spring CUSH blockCUSH arm cushioning element
1250-30CUSH shoe supportCUSH shoe structural bracket
1250-3071Cylinder assemblyMain hydraulic mechanism

 

Where to Source LCN 1250 Parts

Security Parts stocks all 29 LCN 1250 parts across the complete arm, shoe, fastener, cover, spacer, adapter, and cylinder catalog. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

For the broader LCN door closer parts catalog, see the door closers parts guide and the LCN 1000/2010/2030/3030 door closer parts guide. For help sizing the correct LCN closer for a new installation, see the commercial door closer sizing guide and the LCN closer selection guide.

For installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer. For adjustment after installation or replacement, see how to adjust a commercial door closer.

For OEM versus aftermarket parts guidance on LCN closers, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN 1250 parts catalog across all arm configurations, shoe types, fasteners, covers, spacers, and cylinder assemblies, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts